The Christian Writer’s Manual of Style

Document technical information

Format pdf
Size 2.5 MB
First found Jun 9, 2017

Document content analysis

not defined
no text concepts found



wikipedia, lookup

G. K. Chesterton
G. K. Chesterton

wikipedia, lookup

John F. Kennedy
John F. Kennedy

wikipedia, lookup

George Bernard Shaw
George Bernard Shaw

wikipedia, lookup

Robert E. Lee
Robert E. Lee

wikipedia, lookup

Eugene H. Peterson
Eugene H. Peterson

wikipedia, lookup

Dave Barry
Dave Barry

wikipedia, lookup

T. S. Eliot
T. S. Eliot

wikipedia, lookup

Martin Luther
Martin Luther

wikipedia, lookup




2:54 PM
Page 1
One-stop shopping. That’s what makes The Christian Writer’s Manual of Style
so useful. It’s what we recommend to students at the Christian Writers Guild
( Anyone serious about writing needs a copy.
Jerry B. Jenkins, author
During my thirty years in Christian publishing, I’ve never seen a manual of style
so relevant, so accessible, so clear, and so complete. This one stays on my desk.
Gregg Lewis, author
Style is how you do it. Class is where you arrive when you do it right. I’ve never
known a classy writer who was indifferent to style. Robert Hudson is committed to excellence . . . yours! So turn off your word processor. It doesn’t matter
what you are writing; you’ll write it better when you spend some time with
Robert Hudson. Strunk & White may be the final authority for style in general, but Robert Hudson is the last, most important word on style for the
Christian writer. So give your Christian editor a break. Play by the rules. Write
well. Pay attention to style. It’s your ticket to class.
Calvin Miller,
Professor of Preaching and Pastoral Studies,
Beeson Divinity School Sanford University,
Birmingham, Alabama
This well-written, comprehensive, and clear guide offers practical wisdom for
both new and seasoned writers who want to communicate effectively with
today’s readers. Robert Hudson and Zondervan have performed an enormous
service to the publishing community and to the reading public with this wellorganized, easy-to-use version, making this the definitive style manual for religious writers and publishing professionals. I am grateful for this essential
addition to my library.
Ann Spangler,
author of Women of the Bible
This manual is an invaluable tool—the most significant and thorough go-to
guide for Christian writers and editors.
Rick Christian, President,
Alive Communications Literary Agency
With comprehensive and easy-to-find information, The Christian Writer’s
Manual of Style is a must-have resource for all Christian authors.
Brandilyn Collins, author of Getting into Character:
Seven Secrets a Novelist Can Learn from Actors
2:54 PM
Page 2
A wonderful compendium of information and advice. All religion writers would
benefit from keeping this volume close at hand and referring to it often.
Andrew T. Le Peau,
Editorial Director, InterVarsity Press
A practical, helpful resource for beginning and advanced writers and editors and
others involved in religious writing and publishing. Walks readers through stylerelated complexities as well as basic how-tos. Wish I’d had a copy sooner.
Stephen W. Sorenson, author, editor, speaker
Those of us in publishing who have long admired Robert Hudson’s qualities as an
editor will not be surprised at the dedication to editorial excellence on display in
this volume. Kudos to the entire team that contributed to this new edition of a
splendid and helpful resource. It will certainly be at the editorial right hand of
those of us at Eerdmans.
Jon Pott, Vice President,
Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company
I think you could change the title. You could call it The Only Christian Writer’s
Reference Book You’ll Ever Need. Putting that incredible amount of detailed information in one place makes the book an invaluable resource for anybody who is
writing for the Christian market.
Dick Malone,
Vice President Product Purchasing,
Riverside Distributors
The Christian Writer’s Manual of Style is a clear, targeted, and insightful stylebook
that answers the rubber-meets-the-road questions unique to Christian writers, editors, and publishers. The A-to-Z format is easy to access and writers and editors
will find the breezy tone helpful with even the most challenging editorial decisions.
Carolyn McCready,
Vice President of Editorial,
Harvest House Publishers
The editors at Zondervan have used the previous editions of this manual for our
in-house style decisions for nearly three decades—because it meets our needs and
answers our questions. Now, this newly updated and expanded edition offers writers and editors everywhere an even more useful and accessible resource and brings
Christian writing style fully into the twenty-first century.
Scott Bolinder,
Executive Vice President and Publisher,
2:54 PM
Page 3
Writer’s Manual
OF Style
Robert Hudson
2:54 PM
Page 4
The Christian Writer’s Manual of Style
Copyright © 2004 by the Zondervan Corporation
This is a revised, updated, and expanded edition of the book published
in 1988 under the title A Christian Writer’s Manual of Style.
Requests for information should be addressed to:
Zondervan, Grand Rapids, Michigan 49530
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
The Christian writer's manual of style / Robert Hudson, general
editor. —Updated and expanded ed.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN-10: 0-310-48771-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-310-48771-5
1. Christian literature—Authorship. 2. Authorship—Style manuals. I. Hudson, Bob, 1953BR44.C48 2003
This book contains advice and information relating to the legal and technical aspects of writing, publishing,
and book production. While every effort has been made to achieve a high level of accuracy, this book is not
intended to replace legal counsel on issues of copyright, permissions, and fair use. Authors and publishers
are encouraged to consult their own attorneys regarding any specific questions and concerns.
The webpage addresses recommended or used as examples throughout this book are offered as a resource
to the reader. These websites are not intended in any way to be or imply an endorsement on the part of
Zondervan nor this book’s compilers, nor do we vouch for their content for the life of this book.
The editors would like to thank the National Association for Visually Handicapped for their kind permission
to reproduce their large-print standards and recommendations.
We would also like to thank Abingdon Press for their permission to adapt their list of US Denominations
and Associations of Churches from Frank S. Mead, Samuel S. Hill, and Craig D. Atwood’s Handbook of
Denominations in the United States (2001). Copyright © 2003 by Abingdon Press. Used by permission.
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise indicated, are taken from the Holy Bible, New International
Version®. NIV®. Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984 by International Bible Society. Used by permission of Zondervan.
All rights reserved.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means—electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or any other—except
for brief quotations in printed reviews, without the prior permission of the publisher.
Interior design by Beth Shagene
Printed in the United States of America
07 08 09 10 11 12 13 • 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
2:54 PM
Page 5
Since misunderstanding even a single word can hinder one’s
reading, . . . we have carefully annotated the meanings of
foreign words; studied the spelling, style, etymology, and
syntax of the ancients with untiring care; and taken pains to
explain those terms time has obscured—so that the pathway
before the reader might be smoothed.
2:54 PM
Page 6
2:54 PM
Page 7
The Christian Writer’s Manual of Style
2:54 PM
Page 8
2:54 PM
Page 9
Why a Christian writer’s manual of style? Or as humorist Artemus Ward
once wryly asked, “Why care for grammar as long as we are good?”
Perhaps G. K. Chesterton provided the best answer. Although referring to
spelling, his response is as true of grammar, punctuation, and usage: “If you
spell a word wrong, you have some temptation to think it wrong.”
Words have special significance in the Judeo-Christian tradition. God
spoke his creation into being and wrote his laws on stone. The Bible itself is
“the Word,” and Christ “the Word Incarnate.” Among the earliest printed
books in most Western languages was the Bible, and its words have shaped
our civilization. Words are full of history and power and spiritual import.
There is, however, a more practical answer to that question as well.
Religious writing often requires a different stylistic emphasis and raises many
questions not answered in the standard references. The references on which
this manual is based are Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, Eleventh
Edition and The Chicago Manual of Style, Fifteenth Edition.* Updated editions of both those books were published in the summer of 2003, just as The
Christian Writer’s Manual of Style was in its proof stages, which allowed us
to incorporate into this manual the many changes in spelling and style outlined in those references. This manual, however, does not pretend to replace
those definitive and exhaustive works but merely to supplement them. While
compatible with those works, The Christian Writer’s Manual of Style deviates from some rules spelled out in those works when more clarity and detail
are needed, especially in regards to usage and style in religious publications.
Caution is advised, however, in the use of that word rules—not because
rules of style and usage don’t exist (they do) or because they aren’t helpful
(they are), but because the word implies a certain inviolability. It is all too
easy, perhaps especially for religious writers and editors, to equate effective
style with a vague sense of moral correctness.
This manual is not a rule book. It can be thought of as a travel guide
to a wondrous and often baffling country called Religious Writing and
Publishing. Its entries are not that country’s legal code but helpful observations about the customs, patois, and etiquette of its inhabitants. Its goal is to
equip the user with the linguistic tools to communicate to the greatest number of people most effectively, which, after all, is the goal of writing.
*Note: In the following pages we often refer to Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary and
The Chicago Manual of Style by their common abbreviations: Webster’s and CMS respectively.
2:54 PM
Page 10
10 | Preface
Authors, editors, and proofreaders are not the final arbiters of style, as
much as we might like to think so, nor are the grammarians, professors, linguists, and lexicographers. Rather, the final authority on written English is
the reader. Our language, whether we acknowledge it or not, is an elegant
anarchy, a sort of democratic gumbo. If any spelling option, punctuation
mark, or word choice—even the “correct” ones—causes the average reader
to stumble, then it is wrong.
This manual not only offers guidelines for communicating to the average
Christian reader but also notes those instances when public taste appears to
be split. We outline several alternate systems of style—British, mid-Atlantic,
NIV, KJV, academic, popular, and even some advice regarding Jewish,
Muslim, and Chinese style—and we also suggest alternatives for specific style
points, such as when to capitalize and not capitalize the deity pronoun,
options for gender-accurate language, three-dot and three-and-four-dot
ellipses, open and close punctuation, and much more.
Our ability to deal with so much complexity seems to have been strained in
recent years. The Internet especially has prodded our language in new and often
exhilarating directions. While some critics view this new linguistic diversity,
along with a perceived erosion of traditional grammatical absolutes, as a reflection of a general moral decline, one need only consider the willow and the oak
to decide whether flexibility or rigidity are more able to withstand the storm.
This manual, therefore, does not bemoan diversity, for diversity only
enriches the writer. It allows the writer to reach the book’s ideal readers—
and in greater numbers. Since flexibility is essential for growth, one might
almost think of the entries in this book as trellises on which young plants
may drape and intertwine. When the trellis is outgrown or broken, it is best
thrown into the fire and replaced. This manual will have proved its usefulness when it has to be revised again in five or ten years.
In fact, this manual has thrown out a number of trellises since the last
edition, following the recommendations of the most recent edition of The
Chicago Manual of Style. For instance, we no longer recommend small
caps for such abbreviations as AD, BC, CE, BCE, a.m., and p.m. Another
example is that we now recommend that periods, commas, colons, and semicolons be set in the same font as the larger sentence rather than in the font
of the word to which they are attached.
Despite the changing language, one constant remains: The Christian Writer’s
Manual of Style has been compiled with an abiding respect for the literary functions of English, an acknowledgment of the organic nature of the language,
and an awareness of the special needs of people who work with words.
Whether we are writers, editors, or proofreaders, our goal is the same—
that is, in the charming words of Richard de Bury, “that the pathway before
the reader might be smoothed.”
2:54 PM
Page 11
As a shortened form of a word or phrase, an abbreviation is usually used
when the repetition of the full form would be monotonous or distracting,
although some words and phrases, such as Dr., Mr., Mrs., and etc., as well
as those used by scholars, such as i.e. and e.g., are nearly always abbreviated
by convention.
When Not to Use Periods. While periods often stand in place of the omitted
letters, they are used less often now than in the past. CMS’s most recent
guidelines are particularly useful: when the abbreviation is made up of all
capital letters (DVD, SJ, UFO), no periods should be used. When the abbreviation is made up of some or all lowercase letters (ibid., Mrs., Rev.), periods should be used.
Exceptions should be permitted in some instances, such as retaining the
periods with personal initials (C. S. Lewis, I. A. Richards). The periods
should be dropped from lowercased acronyms that have passed into common usage as nouns (jeep, laser), in company names formed from acronyms
(Amoco, Texaco), and in most technical computer and Internet-related abbreviations that use lowercase (dpi, ftp, Kbps, www). We recommend dropping
the periods in country abbreviations (UK, US, USSR), but retaining the periods is perfectly acceptable as long as consistency is maintained (U.K., U.S.,
The following list summarizes those instances when periods should not
be used and shows some common exceptions as well.
academic degrees: BA, MA, MD, PhD (Ph.D. is also acceptable)
acronyms and initialisms: AFL-CIO, AIDS, jeep, NATO, Texaco
agencies and organizations: CRC, GE, IBM, RCC, YMCA
computer- and Internet-related words: CD-ROM, dpi, RAM (see “Abbreviations:
Computer- and Internet-Related Terms”)
famous people referred to by initials only: GKC (Chesterton), JFK (Kennedy)
French forms of address: Mme, Mlle, though note that M. (Monsieur) uses a
historical eras: AD, BC, BCE, AH, BP
scholarly style for abbreviating books of the Bible (the General Style retains the
periods; see “Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related Material”)
terms of biblical scholarship: NT, Q
2:54 PM
Page 12
12 | Abbreviations
titles of books and periodicals that are commonly abbreviated: CMS, NYT, OED,
UK style: UK publishers and editors do not use periods with Dr, Ltd, Mr, Mrs,
and other abbreviations when the eliminated letters fall in the middle rather
than at the end of the word. See “British Style” for more detail.
units of measurement: ft, yd (though note that in. usually retains a period to
avoid confusion with the preposition)
Acronyms and Initialisms. An acronym is a form of abbreviation in which the
first letter or letters of a series of words are combined to create a new word
that has the force of a proper name or noun. Acronyms are pronounced as
words in themselves, such as UNICEF (United Nations International
Children’s Emergency Fund) and laser (light amplification by stimulated
emission of radiation).
Initialisms, which are similar to acronyms, are abbreviations pronounced
as a series of letters, such as BBC (British Broadcasting Company) and CIA
(Central Intelligence Agency). Most rules of abbreviation apply equally to
acronyms and initialisms. (See “Acronyms and Initialisms,” however, for
more detailed rules on their use.)
Defining Abbreviations in Text. When an abbreviation is likely to be unfamiliar to the reader, the author should define it at the place of its first reference.
Since no definitive resource exists to determine what might or might not be
familiar to most readers, common sense should guide the writer. When in
doubt, spell it out.
George Carey was one of the founders of the BMS, the Baptist Missionary
Society. [first usage; thereafter BMS need not be spelled out]
An exception is made when the abbreviation is used in a heading or a title,
in which case the abbreviation should be explained at the next occurrence in
the text itself.
Personal Initials. Personal names should be abbreviated according to the person’s own preference or in the form given in a competent authority such as
Merriam-Webster’s Biographical Dictionary (newly revised in 2003). Among
its back matter Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary contains a handy,
highly condensed biographical dictionary that can resolve many questions.
Normal word spacing (or a nonbreaking three-to-em or a three-point
space) should separate two or more personal initials preceding a second name
or surname, though initials should not be allowed to break over line endings, nor should they be allowed to separate from the surname over a line or
page. If a person’s initials are commonly used as a nickname, they should be
set without spaces or periods.
2:54 PM
Page 13
Abbreviations | 13
C. S. Lewis, not C.S. Lewis
J. R. R. Tolkien, not J.R.R. Tolkien
J. K. Rowling
P. J. Zondervan, or PJ (nickname)
In many cases well-known people are more popularly identified by the
initials of their given names than the names themselves. In casual references,
always use the form by which they are most commonly known; for instance,
T. S. Eliot rather than Thomas S. Eliot, or G. K. Chesterton rather than
Gilbert Chesterton.
In a few cases, historical or literary figures have become identified with
their initials alone, such as JFK (John F. Kennedy) or GBS (George Bernard
Shaw). In these cases, periods are not used and the letters are not spaced.
Using Rev. Most authorities discourage the use of Rev. with a last name alone
and recommend that both the word and the abbreviation be used with the
article the. Various other forms are permissible. (For more details and exceptions, see “Reverend.”)
the Rev. Billy Graham
the Rev. Mr. Graham
Mr. Graham or just Graham
but not Rev. Graham
Civil and Military Titles. Spell out a civil or military title in text when used with
a surname only. Abbreviate it if the full name is used.
Governor Wallace, but Gov. Lew Wallace
General Booth, but Gen. William Booth
Lieutenant Colonel McSally, but Lt. Col. Martha McSally
Academic Degrees. The abbreviations of academic degrees should be set in capital letters without periods: BA, MA, MD, and so on. Even though the general rule states that periods should be used with abbreviations that
incorporate lowercase letters, we recommend that such abbreviations as PhD
and MDiv be set without periods. Using periods (Ph.D. or M.Div.) may be
warranted in certain situations as long as consistency is maintained.
For a list of abbreviations of academic degrees, see CMS, 15.21. The following list shows only the abbreviations for the most common religious
bachelor of arts in theology, or ABTh
bachelor of canon law
bachelor of divinity, or BDiv
bachelor of Hebrew letters
bachelor of ministry
2:54 PM
Page 14
14 | Abbreviations
bachelor of religious education
bachelor of sacred literature
bachelor of theology, or BTh; baccalaureus theologiae
bachelor of Christian science
doctor of Christian science
bachelor of divinity; divinitatis baccalaureus
doctor of canon law; doctor canonicae legis
doctor of divinity; divinitatis doctor
doctor of Hebrew letters
doctor of ministry
doctor of religious education
doctor of sacred theology
doctor of theology, or DTh; doctor theologiae
bachelor of canon law
doctor of canon law; juris canonici doctor
master of divinity
master of ministry
master of religious education
master of theological studies
bachelor of sacred theology; sacrae theologiae baccalaureus
doctor of sacred theology
master of sacred theology
doctor of theology; theologiae doctor
master of theology
Corporations and Organizations. Like other less familiar abbreviations, the
name of a corporation or organization should be given in full on first reference, although the abbreviations Inc. and Ltd. are usually dropped. Thereafter, the acronym or abbreviated form may be used without further
Periods are not usually used in the abbreviations of such groups. For
example: GE, IBM, and AT&T. Articles are used before company abbreviations only if they are used when the name is given in full; for example, the
SPCA (the Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals), but PETA
(People for the Ethical Treatment of Animals).
States, Territories, Provinces, and Countries. Whenever possible, the names of
US states and territories, Canadian provinces, and countries should be spelled
out in text. In lists, footnotes, indexes, bibliographies, or charts, those names
are commonly abbreviated with standard abbreviations. Although twoletter postal abbreviations for states and provinces are becoming more common in text (and are slightly preferred by CMS), this manual still primarily
2:54 PM
Page 15
Abbreviations | 15
recommends them for actual mailing addresses. The following list shows
state, territory, and province abbreviations in both standard and postal style.
Note that some names are traditionally not abbreviated.
Puerto Rico
Virgin Islands
New Hampshire
New Jersey
New Mexico
New York
North Carolina
North Dakota
Rhode Island
South Carolina
South Dakota
West Virginia
Pa. or Penn.
2:54 PM
Page 16
16 | Abbreviations
British Columbia
New Brunswick
and Labrador
Nova Scotia
Prince Edward
Yukon Territory
Qué. or P.Q.
Although most country names should be spelled out in text, the following common abbreviations are often used. Note that no periods are used nor
are letter spaces placed between the letters of these abbreviations.
(the former) Soviet Union—USSR (though U.S.S.R. is also acceptable)
United Arab Emirates—UAE (though U.A.E. is also acceptable)
United Kingdom—UK (though U.K. is also acceptable)
United States—US (though U.S. is also acceptable)
Other Geographical Names. Generally such prefixes to geographical names as
Saint, Mount, Fort, Point, Port, North, South, East, and West are spelled
out, not abbreviated. Saint may be abbreviated to St. according to custom,
as in St. Paul, Minnesota, or whenever there is a good reason to do so, as
long as it is done consistently.
Saint Louis (or St. Louis)
Mount Carmel
Fort Worth
Point Barrow
Port Huron
West Memphis
Numbers and Measurements. Generally, units of measurement are not abbreviated in text unless they are used so often as to be unwieldy, and even then
they should only be abbreviated when used with a number. Periods should
not be used for abbreviations of units of measurement, except for in. (inch),
which retains the period to avoid confusion with the preposition.
In scientific writing, charts and graphs, mathematical texts, and other technical settings, units of measurement should always be abbreviated, though
again, only in combination with a number. Also note that the singular and
plural forms are the same for any abbreviation of a unit of measurement.
The designer preferred his giant twenty-one-inch monitor. [ordinary text]
but The specifications required precisely 12.5 in. by 16.25 in. [technical]
1 lb [singular]; 20 lb [plural]
2:54 PM
Page 17
Abbreviations | 17
Elements of a Book. The elements of a book may be abbreviated in references
or bibliographies as follows. Except where noted, plurals of these abbreviations are formed by adding s.
app. (apps.)
fol. (ff.)
n. (nn.)
p. (pp.)
v. (vv.)
Months and Days of the Week. As a general rule, do not abbreviate the names
of the months and the days of the week in text. Abbreviate them only in lists,
charts, or other graphic settings where space is a concern. In those cases, they
are usually abbreviated with periods, as follows: Sun., Mon., Tues., Wed.,
Thurs., Fri., and Sat. The months May, June, and July, being so short, are not
abbreviated even when the context might call for it (as in a graphic or a
chart); thus: Jan., Feb., Mar., Apr., May, June, July, Aug., Sept., Oct., Nov.,
and Dec.
Eras. Abbreviations designating historical eras, formerly set in small caps with
periods, are now most commonly set in full caps without periods: AD, BC,
BCE, BH. The small-cap style is still acceptable, however, especially when the
designer or editor wishes to convey an atmosphere of high artistic or literary
quality to the reader, though, in time, the small-cap style will probably pass
from the scene entirely.
Times of Day. Abbreviations designating times of the day, formerly set in small
caps, are now most commonly set lowercased with periods: a.m., p.m.,
though the small-cap style may still be used when a highly artistic or literary
feeling needs to be conveyed.
When to Spell Out Abbreviations. Except for initials and other words that are
commonly abbreviated in all instances, like Dr. or Mrs., spell out an abbreviation if it falls at the beginning of a sentence or is connected to another
word with a hyphen:
Dr. Johnson was the toast of London society. [the abbreviation retained]
Old Testament scholars disagree about the meaning of selah. [not “OT
scholars,” even if OT is used elsewhere in the text]
the 3-inch-long tubing, not the 3-in.-long tubing
2:54 PM
Page 18
18 | Abbreviations
Scholarly Latin Abbreviations. Latin abbreviations used in scholarly writing
should be set with periods and in roman, except for sic, which is best set in
italic to distinguish it from quoted text. When used inside quoted text, sic is
also usually set in square brackets; hence, [sic]. (Note that the brackets are
roman while the word sic is italic.) The use of scholarly abbreviations is discouraged in books intended for a popular audience, but their use can be of
benefit in technical and academic writing. The following list shows the more
common abbreviations (and a few words), their Latin form, and their
ad loc.
ca., or c.
et al.
et seq.
loc. cit. (best avoided)
NB, or n.b.
non seq.
op. cit. (best avoided)
ut sup.
v. inf.
vs., or v.
ad locum
exempli gratia
et alii (aliae, alia)
et cetera
et sequentes
id est
loco citato
nota bene
non sequitur
opere citato
quod vide
sub verbo
ut supra
vide infra
indicating the place referred to
approximately, or about
compare with
for example
and others
and so on
and the following
flourished (a person’s prime)
in the same source
that which was mentioned before, same
that is
in the place cited previously
he or she speaks
note well
does not follow
a piece of work
in the work already mentioned
here and there, throughout
referring to the text within a work
thus, literally
under the word (encyclopedia entry)
as above
look up, see
see below
namely, that is to say
2:54 PM
Page 19
Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related Material | 19
V. and Versus. The word versus should only be abbreviated as v. when it is used
in the actual name of a legal case: Roe v. Wade. The v. is also customarily
lowercased in the titles of legal cases. It was once common to set the v. in
roman while the parties in the legal case were set in italic, but this manual
recommends that the entire name of the legal case be set in italic.
With Other Punctuation. When an abbreviation that uses a period falls at the
end of a sentence, do not double the period. One period suffices. Otherwise,
any punctuation mark can be placed next to any abbreviation.
Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related Material
The names of books of the Bible, the Apocrypha, and pseudobiblical writings are generally spelled out in the text of books written for a popular audience, although they may be abbreviated in parenthetical references, especially
when such references are numerous. (Abbreviating parenthetical references
is less common in popular books published in the UK than in such books
published in the US.) In scholarly books and reference works the names of
books of the Bible may be abbreviated in both the text and in parenthetical
references as appropriate and at the discretion of the author and editor.
Two Styles. Two styles of abbreviation are offered here: a General, or Popular,
Style and a Scholarly Style. In deciding which to use, the author and editor
should keep the audience in mind. The General Style is less formal, making
it the choice for trade books in which a warmer, less academic atmosphere
is desired. Although it is unlikely that a popular book would refer to portions of the pseudepigrapha, the abbreviations for those books are offered
here for completeness’ sake. The General Style is also useful in academic and
reference works that are expected to have a wide appeal among lay readers.
Note that some shorter names are not abbreviated at all.
The Scholarly Style, by contrast, is more condensed and technical in
appearance, making it especially appropriate for books intended almost
exclusively for a scholarly readership. It is sometimes referred to as “TwoLetter Style” even though many contain more than two letters. For most reference works, it is customary to provide a list of the abbreviations used in the
book. Such a list is usually not required when the General Style is used.
Another useful system of abbreviating books of the Bible is outlined in
The SBL Handbook of Style: For Ancient Near Eastern, Biblical, and Early
Christian Studies. That system of abbreviation largely resembles the General
Style listed below but without periods. That system is highly recommended
both for books of a scholarly nature and for books intended for both scholarly and popular audiences.
2:54 PM
Page 20
20 | Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related Material
The titles of the books of the Old and New Testament in the following
list are based on the New International Version but may be adapted according to the version used (some alternatives are given below).
Title of Book
Title of Book
Old Testament
1 Samuel
or 1 Kingdoms
2 Samuel
or 2 Kingdoms
1 Kings
or 3 Kingdoms
2 Kings
or 4 Kingdoms
1 Chronicles
2 Chronicles
1 Sam.
1 Kgdms
2 Sam.
2 Kgdms
1 Kings
3 Kgdms
2 Kings
4 Kgdms
1 Chron.
2 Chron.
Ps. (Pss.)
or Qoheleth
Song of Songs
or Song of
or Canticles
New Testament
1 Corinthians
2 Corinthians
1 Thessalonians
2 Thessalonians
1 Cor.
2 Cor.
1 Thess.
2 Thess.
1 Timothy
2 Timothy
1 Peter
2 Peter
1 John
2 John
3 John
1 Tim.
2 Tim.
1 Peter
2 Peter
1 John
2 John
3 John
2:54 PM
Page 21
Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related Material | 21
Title of Book
1 Esdras
2 Esdras
The Rest of Esther
or Additions to Esther
The Wisdom of Solomon
or Ecclesiasticus
Additions to Daniel
The Song of the Three Holy Children
or Song of the Three Young Men
Bel and the Dragon
Prayer of Manasseh
1 Maccabees
2 Maccabees
3 Maccabees
4 Maccabees
Prayer of Azariah
Epistle of Jeremiah
Psalm 151
1 Esd.
2 Esd.
Rest of Est.
Add. Est.
Wisd. Sol.
Add. Dan.
S. of III Ch.
S. of III YM
Pr. Man.
1 Macc.
2 Macc.
3 Macc.
4 Macc.
Pr. Azar.
Ep. Jer.
Ps. 151
Ep Jer
Ps 151
Old Testament Pseudepigrapha
Assumption of Moses
Syriac Apocalypse of Baruch
Greek Apocalypse of Baruch
Ethiopic Book of Enoch
Slavonic Book of Enoch
Hebrew Book of Enoch
4 Ezra
Joseph and Asenath
Book of Jubilees
Letter of Aristeas
Life of Adam and Eve
Lives of the Prophets
Martyrdom and Ascension of Isaiah
Odes of Solomon
Paralipomena of Jeremiah
Pirke Aboth
Psalms of Solomon
Sibylline Oracles
As. Moses
2 Bar.
3 Bar.
1 Enoch
2 Enoch
3 Enoch
4 Ezra
L. Aris.
Adam and Eve
Mar. and As. Isa.
Odes Sol.
Pirke Aboth
Pss. Sol.
Sib. Oracles
MA Isa
2:54 PM
Page 22
22 | Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related Material
Title of Book
Old Testament Pseudepigrapha cont.
Story of Ahikar
Testament of Abraham
Testament of Adam
Testament of Benjamin
Testament of Dan
Testament of Gad
Testament of Job
Testament of Joseph
Testament of Levi
Testament of Naphtali
Testaments of the Twelve Patriarchs
Zadokite Fragments
T. Abram.
T. Adam
T. Ben.
T. Dan
T. Gad
T. Job
T. Jos.
T. Levi
T. Naph.
T. Pats.
Zad. Frag.
New Testament Pseudepigrapha
Acts of Andrew
Acts of Andrew and Matthias
Acts of Andrew and Paul
Acts of Barnabas
Acts of James the Great
Acts of John
Acts of John (by Prochorus)
Acts of Paul
Acts of Peter
Acts of Peter (Slavonic)
Acts of Peter and Andrew
Acts of Peter and Paul
Acts of Philip
Acts of Philip (Syriac)
Acts of Pilate
Acts of Thaddaeus
Acts of Thomas
Apocalypse of Dositheus
Apocalypse of Messos
Apocalypse of Peter
Apocalypse of Thomas
Apocalypse of the Virgin
Apocryphal Epistle of Titus
Apocryphal Gospel of John
Apocryphon of John
Apostolic Constitutions and Canons
Apostolic History of Pseudo-Abdias
Arabic Gospel of the Infancy
Acts Andr.
Acts Andr. Mth.
Acts Andr. Paul
Acts Barn.
Acts Jas.
Acts John
Acts John Pro.
Acts Paul
Acts Pet.
Acts Pet. (Slav.)
Acts Pet. Andr.
Acts Pet. Paul
Acts Phil.
Acts Phil. (Syr.)
Acts Pil.
Acts Thad.
Acts Thom.
Apoc. Dosith.
Apoc. Messos
Apoc. Pet.
Apoc. Thom.
Apoc. Vir.
(Apoc.) Ep. Tit.
(Apoc.) Gos. John
Ap. John
Apos. Con.
(Arab.) Gos. Inf.
2:54 PM
Page 23
Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related Material | 23
Title of Book
Armenian Gospel of the Infancy
Ascents of James
Assumption of the Virgin
Book Elchasai
Book of the Resurrection of Christ
by Barnabas the Apostle
3 Corinthians
Epistle to the Alexandrians
Epistle to the Apostles
Epistle of Christ and Abgar
Epistle of Christ from Heaven
Epistle to the Laodiceans
Epistle of Lentulus
Epistles of Paul and Seneca
Gospel of Barnabas
Gospel of Bartholomew
Gospel of Basilides
Gospel of the Birth of Mary
Gospel of the Ebionites
Gospel of the Egyptians
Gospel of Eve
Gospel of Gamaliel
Gospel of the Hebrews
Gospel of Marcion
Gospel of Mary
Gospel of the Naassenes
Gospel of the Nazarenes
Gospel of Nicodemus
Gospel of Peter
Gospel of Pseudo-Matthew
Gospel of Thomas
Gospel and Traditions of Matthias
History of Joseph the Carpenter
Hymn of the Dance
Hymn of the Pearl
Infancy Gospel of Thomas
Infancy Gospels
Martyrdom of Bartholomew
Martyrdom of Matthew
Martyrdom of Paul
Martyrdom of Peter
Martyrdom of Peter and Paul
(Arm.) Gos. Inf.
Asc. Jas.
Assum. Vir.
Bk. Elch.
Bk. Barn.
3 Cor.
Ep. Alex.
Ep. Apos.
Ep. Chr. Abg.
Ep. Chr. Heav.
Ep. Lao.
Ep. Lent.
Ep. Paul Sen.
Gos. Barn.
Gos. Bart.
Gos. Bas.
Gos. Mary
Gos. Eb.
Gos. Eg.
Gos. Eve
Gos. Gam.
Gos. Heb.
Gos. Marcion
Gos. Mary
Gos. Naass.
Gos. Naz.
Gos. Nic.
Gos. Pet.
Gos. Ps.-Mt.
Gos. Thom.
Gos. Trad. Mth.
Hist. Jos. Carp.
Hymn Dance
Hymn Pearl
Inf. Gos. Thom.
Inf. Gos.
Mart. Bart.
Mart. Mt.
Mart. Paul
Mart. Pet.
Mart. Pet. Paul
2:54 PM
Page 24
24 | Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related Material
Title of Book
New Testament Pseudepigrapha cont.
Martyrdom of Philip
Memoria of Apostles
Preaching of Peter
Protoevangelism of James
Revelation of Stephen
Secret Gospel of Mark
Vision of Paul
Mart. Phil.
Mem. Apos.
Pre. Pet.
Prot. Jas.
Rev. Steph.
Sec. Gos. Mk.
Vis. Paul
Abbreviations: Computer- and Internet-Related Terms
With the advent of computerization and the Internet comes a new set of
common abbreviations, acronyms, and initialisms, many of which are as
appropriate for books and conversation as they are for online communication. Many of these have become part of our daily parlance. The following
are some of the more frequently seen and heard. None use periods.
algorithmic language
(“ASK-ee”) American Standard Code for Information Interchange
beginners’ all-purpose symbolic instruction code
binary digit (sometimes BIT)
bits per second
computer aided design
computer-aided manufacturing
compact disc
digital audio tape
digital object identifier
disk operating system
dots per inch
dynamic random access memory
digital versatile disc (or digital video disc)
electronic data interchange
formula translator
frames per second
file transfer protocol
file transfer protocol (as part of an Internet location)
2:54 PM
Page 25
Abbreviations: Editorial and Proofreading Terms | 25
graphic interchange format
global positioning system
graphical user interface
high-definition television
hypertext markup language
hypertext transfer protocol
Internet protocol
information services
Internet service provider
information technology
kilobytes per second
local-area network
liquid crystal display
light-emitting diode
megabytes per second
musical instrument digital interface
multipurpose Internet mail extensions
optical character recognition
portable document file
print on demand (a downloaded file printed as a traditional book)
(“KWER-tee”) standard keyboard layout
random access memory
read-only memory
super audio compact disc (Sony format)
(“SCUZZ-ee”) small computer system interface
standard generalized markup language
transmission control protocol/Internet protocol
uniform resource locator
video compact disc
World Wide Web
World Wide Web (as part of an Internet address)
what you see is what you get
Abbreviations: Editorial and Proofreading Terms
Since editors and proofreaders share a common vocabulary, see
“Proofreading Abbreviations and Terms” for a list of terms that editors
should be familiar with.
2:54 PM
Page 26
26 | Abbreviations: Publishing Terms
Abbreviations: Publishing Terms
Like most industries, publishing has developed its own alphabet soup of
abbreviations, acronyms, and initialisms. Terms with asterisks are detailed
under their own headings elsewhere in this manual. (See also “Proofreading
Abbreviations and Terms.”)
American Booksellers Association
Book Expo of America (American Booksellers Association annual
Barnes and Noble
formerly Christian Booksellers Association, although this organization
now goes by the abbreviation only—CBA International; the trade
association for Christian retailers and suppliers. Often the abbreviation
refers to the annual trade convention sponsored by this organization
cataloging in publication* (library filing data provided by the Library
of Congress)
European Article Number (book barcode system; now referred to as
International Article Number)
International Article Number (book barcode system)
International Standard Book Number*
International Trade Paper Edition
Just in Time (an inventory management system; lowercased, refers to
the making of more frequent, smaller print runs to minimize
marketing and promotion
manuscript; manuscripts
not yet published
out of print
out of print, nonreturnable
out of print, returnable
out of stock
out of stock indefinitely
profit and loss (statement)
point of purchase (counter display)
point of sale (information obtained from retailer’s cash register data)
paper, print, and binding (manufacturing costs)
Religious Booksellers Trade Exhibit
signature (bundle of book pages)
suggested retail price
sold as set only
subsidiary rights
shipping and warehousing
Universal Product Code (bar code system for all products)
2:54 PM
Page 27
Abbreviations: References and Periodicals | 27
Abbreviations: References and Periodicals
Common References
The abbreviations for some reference books and periodicals have become
so common that they could be appropriately used in academic and some
nonacademic contexts provided that the full title of the book is given at the
point of first usage, in a footnote, or in a list of abbreviations in the front
matter of the book. For popular usage all such abbreviations are set in italics, whether they are based on the actual title or the author, editor, or compiler’s name. Such books include:
Strunk and White
The Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association
Bartlett’s Familiar Quotations, Justin John and Kaplan Bartlett
Brewer’s Dictionary of Phrase and Fable, Adrian Room
The Chicago Manual of Style, Fifteenth Edition
The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People, Stephen R. Covey
Christian Parenting Today
Christianity Today
The Christian Writer’s Manual of Style
Modern American Usage, Wilson Follett and Erik Wensberg
Fowler’s Modern English Usage, H. W. Fowler
The Literary Market Place
MLA Style Manual and Guide to Scholarly Publishing
The New York Times
The Oxford American Dictionary
The Oxford English Dictionary
Publishers Weekly
Roget’s Thesaurus (various editions)
The SBL Handbook of Style
The Elements of Style, E. B. White and William Strunk Jr.
Today’s Christian Woman
The Times Literary Supplement
Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, Eleventh Edition
(or other versions and editions bearing the name Webster)
Theological References and Periodicals
The following list shows the abbreviations for some of the most commonly used reference books, periodicals, and series in the field of biblical
and theological studies. These abbreviations are recommended primarily for
books of an academic nature. When such abbreviations are used, a key
should appear somewhere in the front matter of the book, usually in an introduction or a note to the reader.
2:54 PM
Page 28
28 | Abbreviations: References and Periodicals
Styling. These abbreviations are set without periods. Usually the title of the
work is abbreviated, in which case the abbreviation is italicized like any title,
but in some cases the name(s) of the author(s), editor(s), or compiler(s) is
more commonly abbreviated, in which case the abbreviation is not italicized.
The names and abbreviations of series are not italicized. For certain wellknown works, an editor’s or author’s surname stands as a substitute for
the actual title. For a more complete list of bibliographic abbreviations,
refer to the Journal of Biblical Literature’s “Instructions for Contributors”
Anchor Bible
Anchor Bible Dictionary
Josephus, Jewish Antiquities
Andrews University Seminary Studies
Biblical Archaeology Review
Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research
Bulletin for Biblical Research
W. Bauer, F. Danker, W. Arndt, and F. W. Gingrich, A Greek English
Lexicon of the New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature
(3d ed.)
F. Brown, S. R. Driver, and C. A. Briggs, The New Brown-DriverBriggs-Gesenius Hebrew-English Lexicon
F. Blass, A. DeBrunner, and R. Funk, A Greek Grammar of the New
Josephus, Bellum Judaicum (“The Jewish War”)
Bibliotecha Sacra
Biblical Theology Bulletin
Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Expository Times
Harvard Theological Review
International Critical Commentary (series)
Journal of Biblical Literature
Journal of the Evangelical Theological Society
Journal for the Study of the New Testament
Journal for the Study of the Old Testament
Journal of Theological Studies
Josephus, Jewish War; same as BJ
New American Commentary
Nag Hammadi Codices
New International Commentary on the New Testament
New International Commentary on the Old Testament
New International Dictionary of New Testament Theology
New International Dictionary of Old Testament Theology and Exegesis
2:54 PM
Page 29
Abbreviations: Religious Organizations and Parachurch Ministries | 29
NIV Application Commentary
New Testament Studies
Old Testament Library
Review and Expositor
Society of Biblical Literature Dissertation Series
Society of Biblical Literature Monograph Series
Theological Dictionary of the New Testament
Theological Dictionary of the Old Testament
Tyndale New Testament Commentary
Tyndale Old Testament Commentary
Trinity Journal
Tyndale Bulletin
Vetus Testamentum
Word Biblical Commentary
Westminster Theological Journal
Abbreviations: Religious Organizations and Parachurch Ministries
The following list shows abbreviations for some of the more common religious organizations, past and present, and various parachurch ministries.
The abbreviations for denominations are not included here. For those, see
“Denominations and Associations of Churches.”
American Academy of Religion (1909)
American Bible Society (1816)
American Council of Christian Churches (1941)
Academy of Christian Editors
Alliance of Confessing Evangelicals
Association of Christian Fighter Pilots
Association of Christian Schools International
Anglican Evangelical Group Movement (1906/1923)
Africa Inland Mission (1895)
Association for the Promotion of the Unity of Christendom (1857)
American Tract Society
Arab World Ministries
Bible Churchmen’s Missionary Society (1922), now Crosslinks
British and Foreign Bible Society (1804)
Baptist Missionary Society (1792)
Church Army (1882)
Christian Amateur Radio Fellowship
Catholic Biblical Association
formerly Christian Booksellers Association, although this organization
now goes by the abbreviation only—CBA International; the trade
association for Christian retailers and suppliers. Often the abbreviation
refers to the convention sponsored by this organization
2:54 PM
Page 30
30 | Abbreviations: Religious Organizations and Parachurch Ministries
Christians for Biblical Equality
Council of Biblical Manhood and Womanhood
Committee on Bible Translation
Campus Crusade for Christ
Colonial and Continental Church Society (1838), later
Commonwealth and Continental Church Society
Coalition of Christian Colleges and Universities
Confraternity of Christian Doctrine
Child Evangelism Fellowship (1937)
China Inland Mission (1865), now known as OMF
Christ in Youth
Christian Literature Society
Christian Medical and Dental Associations
Church’s Ministry Among Jewish People (1809)
Church Missionary Society (1799)
Church Pastoral Aid Society (1836)
Christian Solidarity Worldwide (1979)
Christianity Today, Inc.
Council for World Mission (1975), formerly LMS
Catholic Youth Organization
Evangelical Alliance (1846)
Evangelical Council of Financial Accountability
Evangelical Christian Publishers Association
Evangelical Christian Publishers Outreach (a part of ECPA)
Evangelical Environmental Network
Evangelical Fellowship in the Anglican Communion (1962)
Evangelical Foreign Missions Association
Evangelical Press Association
Evangelical Theological Society
Fellowship of Christian Athletes (1954)
Fellowship of Christian Magicians
Family Christian Stores (retailer)
Fellowship of Christians in Universities and Schools (1961)
Focus on the Family
Girls Everywhere Meeting the Savior (Girls’ Club)
Hearts at Home
International Aid
Institute for Biblical Research
International Bible Society
Intercollegiate Christian Union (1877; later IVF)
Industrial Christian Fellowship (1918)
InterContinental Church Society (1823)
International Foreign Missions Association
2:54 PM
Page 31
Abbreviations: Religious Organizations and Parachurch Ministries | 31
International Missionary Council (1921)
Institute of Theological Studies
InterVarsity Christian Fellowship (US; 1939)
InterVarsity Fellowship (Great Britain; 1927), now known as UCCF
London Missionary Society (1795), known since 1975 as CWM
Layman’s National Bible Association
Luis Palau Evangelistic Association
Missionary Aviation Fellowship
Mothers of Preschoolers
Mission to Seafarers (1856)
Mothers’ Union (1876)
National Association of Evangelicals
National Bible Association (formerly LNBA)
National Council of Churches
National Conference of Christians and Jews
National Ecumenical Coalition (1976)
National Prayer Committee
National Religious Broadcasters
Operation Mobilisation (1962)
Overseas Missionary Fellowship
Radio Bible Class Ministries (1938)
Religion News Service
Salvation Army (1865)
South American Missionary Society (1844)
Society of Biblical Literature
Southern Christian Leadership Conference
Student Christian Movement (1895)
They now go by acronym only; formerly Sudan Interior Mission
Sharing of Ministries Abroad (1979)
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge (1698)
Society for the Propagation of the Gospel (1701), now known as
Scripture Union
Student Volunteer Movement (1888)
TearFund (1968)
Trans World Radio
Universities and Colleges Christian Fellowship
Universities Mission to Central Africa (1857)
United Society for the Propagation of the Gospel
Willow Creek Association
World Council of Churches (1948)
Women’s Christian Temperance Union (1874)
2:54 PM
Page 32
32 | Abbreviations: Religious Organizations and Parachurch Ministries
World Evangelisation Crusade (1913)
World Evangelical Fellowship
Women of Faith
Youth for Christ (1944)
Young Men’s Christian Association (1844)
Young Men’s Hebrew Association
Youth Specialties
Youth with a Mission International
Young Women’s Christian Association (1855)
Young Women’s Hebrew Association
Abbreviations: Religious Terms
Several lists of abbreviations of religious terms can be found elsewhere in
this manual.
Academic degrees, religious
“Abbreviations, Academic Degrees”
Apocryphal books of the Bible
“Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related Material”
Bible books
“Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related Material”
Bible in other languages
“Bible Versions and Translations” not in English
Bible versions
“Bible Versions and Translations” in English
Hymn meters
“Hymn Meters”
“Abbreviations: Religious Organizations and
Parachurch Ministries”
Organizations, religious
“Abbreviations: Religious Organizations and
Parachurch Ministries”
Periodicals, religious
“Abbreviations: Reference and Periodicals, Theological”
Pseudepigraphal books
“Abbreviations: Books of the Bible and Related
References, theological
“Abbreviations: Reference and Periodicals, Theological”
The following abbreviations, which don’t fit neatly into any of the categories listed above, are common in both popular and academic books. An
asterisk (*) indicates that a more complete discussion of that word can be
found under its own entry in the text.
2:54 PM
Page 33
Abbreviations: Religious Terms | 33
AD *
Adm. Rev.
ana., ant.
Ap. Sed.
abbot or abbess
Ancient Biblical Manuscript
Center (Claremont, Calif.)
Anglican church or Anglican
ante Christum (“before
ante Christum natum
(“before the birth of Christ”)
anno Domini (“in the year
of [our] Lord”; usually
precedes date)
ante diem (“the day before”)
admodum reverendus (“very
anno Hebraico (“in the
Hebrew year”)
anno Hegirae (“in the year of
the Hegira”)
anno mundi (“in the year of
the world”; precedes date)
artium magister (“master of
ad maiorem Dei gloriam (“to
the greater glory of God”),
motto of the Jesuits
African Methodist Episcopal
annus (“year”)
anni (“years”)
apostle *
Apocrypha or Apocryphal
Apostolica Sedes (“Apostolic
Aquila’s Greek translation of
anno reparatae salutis (“in
the year of our
anno salutis (“in the year of
ab urbe condita (“after
Rome’s founding”; precedes
Beatus, Beati (pl.)
bar /ben (Aram./Heb. for
“son of”)
Babatha Archive
BC *
before Christ
before the Common Era
Book of Common Prayer
benedictio (“blessing”)
bona fide (“in good faith”)
Bar Kochba
British Library
British Museum
bon. mem. bonae memoriae (“of happy
beatitudo vestra (“your
Blessed Virgin Mary (beata
virgo Maria)
C. of E.
Common Era
Church of England
(or CE)
common meter—86.86
common meter doubled
86.86 86.86 (hymnody)
2:54 PM
Page 34
34 | Abbreviations: Religious Terms
Christian Methodist
Episcopal Church
cod., codd. codex, codices
comm(s). commentary
contra (“against”)
credo (“creed” in the
Christian Reformed Church
Canons Regular of the
Christian Science
Fr., F.
frater (“brother”)
General Association of
Regular Baptist Churches
one of the supposed
Deuteronomist sources of
Dominus (“Lord”)
dies (“day”)
defunctus (“deceased”)
Dei gratia (“by the grace of
Dominus noster (“our Lord”)
Dominus noster Jesus Christus
(“our Lord Jesus Christ”)
Deo optimo maximo (“To
God the best and greatest”)
domestic prelate
Dead Sea Scrolls
Deo volente (“God willing”)
one of the supposed Elohist
sources of Pentateuch
Eastern calendar
ecclesiastic or ecclesiastical
Eastern Orthodox
Episcopal or Episcopalian*
English translation
Law of Holiness
Hebrew Bible
Holy Communion
Used for documents earlier
attributed to Seiyal
Jesus (Greek, based on the
first and third letters of his
monogram for Greek name
for Jesus
Iesus Nazarenus Rex
Iudaeorum (“Jesus of
Nazareth, King of the Jews”)
one of the supposed Yahwist
sources of Pentateuch
Jehovah (Yahweh)
Jerusalem Talmud
Late Bronze Age
Latter-Day Saints
Late Latin
long meter—88.88
long meter doubled 88.88
88.88 (hymnody)
2:54 PM
Page 35
Abbreviations: Religious Terms | 35
m., mg.
marginal notes in Scripture
Middle Bronze Age
Methodist Episcopal Church
Khirbet Mird
Medieval Latin
manuscript, manuscripts
Masoretic Text of OT
nostra Domina, notre Dame
(“our Lady”)
Nag Hammadi Codex
New Series
notre Seigneur, nostro Signore
(“our Lord”)
New Testament (Novum
obiit (“died”)
Order of the Carthusians
(Ordo Cartusiensis)
Order of the Carmelites
(Ordo Carmelitarum
Order of the Discalced
Carmelites (Ordo
Order of the Cistercians
(Ordo Cisterciensium)
Order of the Franciscans,
Observant Franciscans (Ordo
Fratrum Minorum)
Order of Preachers,
Dominicans (Ordo
Old Syriac
Order of the Augustinians,
Eremites (Ordo Sancti
Augustini )
Order of St. Benedict,
Benedictines (Ordo Sancti
Benedicti )
pr. bk.
Order of Saint Dominic
Order of the Franciscan
Capuchins (Ordinis Sancti
Francisci Capuccini )
Oblates of St. Francis de
Sales (Oblati Sancti Francisci
Salesii )
Order of the Servants of
Old Testament
Priestly Narrative, source of
pater (“father”)
Palestine or Palestinian
Priestly Code
Presbyterian Church in
Presbyterian Church (USA)
preacher general
prayer book
pseudepigrapha or
Quelle (one of the supposed
source of Synoptic Gospels)
with refrain (hymnody)
Roman calendar
Roman Catholic
Roman Catholic Church
Reverend *
2:54 PM
Page 36
36 | Abbreviations: Religious Terms
Rt. Rev.
requiescat in pace (“[may he
or she] rest in peace”)
Right Reverend
Sabbatum (“Sabbath,” or
sanctus (“saint”)
servus Dei (“servant of
sine data (a book without a
Seventh-day Adventist
Society of Jesus, Jesuits
(Societas Jesu)
santae memoriae (“of holy
short meter—66.86
Society of Mary (Societas
short meter doubled 66.86.
66.86 (hymnody)
Sister (of a religious order)
licentiate in sacred Scripture
saint (female; Italian)
saint (female; French)
licentiate of sacred theology
Symmachus’s Greek
translation of OT
Tanak (Hebrew Scriptures)
Theodotion’s Greek
translation of OT
theology, theological
Textus Receptus
translation or translated
ut in omnibus Deus
glorificetur (“that God may
be glorified in all things”),
motto of the Benedictine
ven. (or V).
Vatican Library
Vacation Bible School
Vulgate (Jerome’s Latin
What would Jesus do?
XC (or XCS) Christus (Greek initials for
Xmas *
Abbreviations of Bible Versions and Translations
See “Bible Versions and Translations.”
2:54 PM
Page 37
Accents and Diacritics | 37
Accents and Diacritics
As a conglomerate of many languages, English has adopted a number of
accents and diacritic marks that are commonly used with certain foreign
words. (See also “Foreign Letters and Characters.”) Technically, there are
only three accent marks: the acute accent, the grave accent, and the circumflex. Apart from the breve and the macron, which are termed pronunciation
marks, the other marks added to certain letters are true diacritics. For most
purposes, all are generically referred to as either accent marks or diacritics.
The following is a list of those most commonly used in English:
Examples and Notes
canapé, cliché, fiancée, résumé
Cézanne, simpático
Thomas à Kempis, à la mode,
voilà, crèche, Pietà
château, fête, pâté, Rhône
Pronunciation Marks
to indicate short vowels
to indicate long vowels
umlaut (diaeresis,
trema, zweipunct)
façade, François, Niçoise, français
used mostly in Czech; sometimes called
an inverted circumflex
mañana, señor, señora, São Paulo
Brontë, Köln, naïve [the Scandinavians
use a º symbol instead of an umlaut]
In English-Language Contexts. For foreign words that have become common
in English, no simple rules can be given for when to retain an accent, or diacritic, and when to drop it. The language is in flux. It is becoming more common, for example, to see the acute accent and diacritics being dropped from
the words cliché, café, and naïve—thus, cliche, cafe, and naive. When a specific word is in question, this manual recommends conforming to the first
entry of that word in Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary. If the word
is not found there, then retain the accent. In many cases, the accent is best
retained to avoid misreading: for instance, résumé (or resumé) instead of
resume; pâté instead of pate.
Accents and diacritics should be retained in foreign place names (such as
São Paulo, Göttingen, and Córdoba) and personal names (such as Salvador
). In many cases, an alternate Anglicized
Dalí, Molière, and Karel Capek
2:54 PM
Page 38
38 | Accents and Diacritics
form exists that eliminates the accent or diacritic (such as Cologne in place
of Köln, or George Mueller in place of George Müller). The editor and
author should decide in each case which form would be expected, or more
easily understood, by the book’s ideal reader. See also “Misspelled Personal
Names” for other names of people that have accents and diacritics.
In Hymns, Plays, and Poetry. Occasionally in hymnody, theater scripts, and
poetry, a grave accent is used to indicate unexpected syllabification: as
in the word blessèd. Some actors’ editions of early English plays, such as
Shakespeare’s, use this device (which is not found in the original editions) to
alert the actor to the correct pronunciation. Poets too use these accents to
indicate the correct number of syllables for proper scansion. Such accents
should always be retained in direct quotation, as is the grave accent in this
For, though I knew His love Who followèd,
Yet was I sore adread
Lest, having Him, I must have naught beside.
Francis Thompson, “Hound of Heaven”
The poet Gerard Manly Hopkins often used the acute accent to indicate
a stressed beat within a line of his “sprung rhythm.” In this case, the entire
syllable or word is stressed, not just the letter over which the accent appears.
Márgarét, áre you gríeving
Over Goldengrove unleaving?
Leáves, líke the things of man, you
With your fresh thoughts care for, can you?
“Spring and Fall: To a Young Child”
For Accented Syllables. An acute accent is sometimes used in an explanatory
reference or a pronunciation guide to indicate which syllable of a word
should be emphasized when spoken. Often the syllables are separated by
hyphens or even spelled phonetically as an aid to pronunciation.
Cynewulf (kí-nuh-wolf)
On an acknowledgments page, the author credits the people and institutions that helped in conceiving, writing, and producing the book, often
including a brief description of their contribution. Some authors opt to incorporate their acknowledgments into the preface rather than providing a sep-
2:54 PM
Page 39
Acronyms and Initialisms | 39
arate acknowledgments page; this is especially efficient when very few people
are credited.
Placement. The acknowledgments page is customarily placed at the beginning
of the book after the foreword or preface (which generally have a looser connection to the book’s content) but before an introduction (which has a tighter
relation to the book’s content).
Although such acknowledgments may be quite important to the author,
most readers find them extraneous. For that reason, acknowledgments are
more regularly appearing at the end of books, in the same way that a film’s
credits usually appear at the end of the film. This is especially true when the
author or editor senses that the reader may not want to wade through a lot
of preliminary matter before tackling the content of the book itself, as in
some genre fiction, for example. Setting the acknowledgments at the end of
the book is perfectly acceptable when there is good reason to do so. By contrast, some fiction writers prefer to place the acknowledgments at the beginning of the book so that the spell of the narrative won’t be broken by
encountering extraneous material at the end. The author should communicate his or her preference to the editor.
Type Size. Although acknowledgments pages used to be set in type that is one
point smaller than text size, that practice is now much less common, and
text-type size is the norm. Still, it can be set smaller when space is a consideration or when there is a reason not to draw too much attention to it, as in
Tone. In writing an acknowledgments page, the author should be careful to
avoid making the reader feel excluded by making too many inside jokes
directed at those being acknowledged or by making those acknowledged feel
patronized (for example, by overpraising small matters or crediting those
whose contributions were marginal). The tone should be both warm and
Acronyms and Initialisms
An acronym is an abbreviation that by intention or common usage has
come to be pronounced as a word in itself or as a group of letters with the
force of a name or noun. Technically, this latter case is termed an initialism,
but rules governing the use of acronyms and initialisms are identical, so a
strict distinction between the two need not be observed for purposes of style.
Still, there are some minor differences, which will be specified below.
The names of many companies and organizations are acronyms: among
those pronounced as words, for instance, are such organizations as UNICEF
(United Nations International Children’s Emergency Fund), NOW (National
2:54 PM
Page 40
40 | Acronyms and Initialisms
Organization for Women), and NATO (North Atlantic Treaty Organization).
Among those pronounced as groups of letters with the force of a name or
noun (initialisms) are such organizations as the FBI (the Federal Bureau of
Investigation), the CIA (the Central Intelligence Agency), and the NCAA (the
National Collegiate Athletic Association).
Many other kinds of acronyms and initialisms are common, such as those
describing diseases—AIDS (acquired immune deficiency syndrome) and
SARS (severe acute respiratory syndrome)—and commercial products—ATV
(all-terrain vehicle) and SUV (sport utility vehicle). Note that the initialism
itself is capped even though the fully spelled-out name is not.
Furthermore, the etymologies of many common English words are rooted
in acronyms: for instance, radar (radio detecting and ranging), awol (absent
without leave), laser (light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation), jeep (from GP—general purpose), and snafu (situation normal all
fouled up). Computer technology has added a large number of new acronyms
to the language: for instance, ROM (read-only memory), DAT (digital audio
tape), and RAM (random access memory).
Styling. Generally, an acronym that is pronounced as a word and contains four or
fewer letters is all-capped, such as WAC (Women’s Army Corps), SALT (Strategic
Arms Limitation Treaty), and SWAT team (special weapons and tactics).
Organizational acronyms that have five or more letters (and are pronounced as words) are usually cap-lowercased, such as Nasdaq (National
Association of Securities Dealers Automated Quotations) and Amoco
(American Oil Company), although there are exceptions, which are established by the organizations themselves, such as UNICEF.
Those that have passed into common parlance as nouns are generally all
lowercased, regardless of how many letters they contain, such as sonar
(sound navigation ranging) and bit (binary digit). For some reason, some
computer-related acronyms continue to be all-capped by convention, such
as RAM (random access memory) and DAT (digital audio tape), perhaps to
distinguish them from already existing common nouns (in the case of RAM,
for instance). See “Abbreviations: Computer- and Internet-Related Terms”
for more examples.
Initialisms (abbreviations pronounced as a string of letters) are usually allcapped, regardless of the number of letters they contain: such as, the SPCA
(the Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals) and the NAACP (the
National Association for the Advancement of Colored People).
Periods are never used with either acronyms or initialisms.
With an Indefinite Article. When in doubt as to which indefinite article, a or an,
should precede an acronym, choose the one that would ordinarily be used
2:54 PM
Page 41
Addresses | 41
with the acronym as it is actually pronounced: e.g., an Amoco station; a
UNICEF worker; an ANSI character.
Introducing. As with other abbreviations, whenever an acronym might be unfamiliar to the reader, it should be defined or spelled out when first used in the
text unless it is used in a heading. In that case, the author should explain the
acronym at the next opportunity in the running text itself.
While in graduate school, he was an active member of FOCUS (Fellowship of
Christians in Universities and Schools). [first usage]
Note. Lest we think that acronyms are a recent phenomenon, a common
acronym familiar to Jewish scholars through the centuries is Tanak, which
is short for Torah (Law), Nevi’im (the Prophets), and Kethuvim (the
Writings), which are the three major sections of the Jewish Bible (the
Christian Old Testament).
AD stands for anno Domini (“the year of the Lord”) and defines the general historical era since the birth of Jesus. It was once considered grammatically improper to use the abbreviation with any but single-year references
and to insist that the abbreviation always precede the date. It has now
become acceptable, however, to use AD with century designations as well, in
which case the abbreviation follows the date.
AD 90 but the first century AD
Formerly AD was set in small caps with periods (A.D.) but that form is
quickly passing from common use. (See also “BC.”)
Ad Card
See “Author Card, or Ad Card.”
Three ways of showing mailing addresses are in common use, as follows:
Postal Style. The United States Postal Service prefers that addresses on envelopes
be rendered in all capital letters with no punctuation. Note also the extra
space between the city, state, and zip code.
2:54 PM
Page 42
42 | Addresses
List Style. Often one or more addresses are listed in the text of a book or on a
website or other electronic medium. For instance, the publisher’s address is
usually placed on the copyright page (see “Address of Publisher”); sometimes the author wants the reader to write to his or her home or organization; and sometimes a series of addresses are given in a reference or resources
section of the book. In these cases, addresses should be set in caps-andlowercase style with periods.
Louise Taylor
Senior Editor
Extremely Romantic Books
2200 East of Eden Blvd. SW
La Jolla Dune, CA 12345
In Text. When addresses are given in continuous text, as many elements as possible should be spelled out. For instance, spell out such words as Avenue,
Drive, Street, and so on, as well as state names. The primary exceptions to
this rule are the directional compass points that follow street addresses, such
as NW or SE. Also note that commas appear after each element, although no
comma should be placed between the state name and zip code.
Such books may be sent to Louise Taylor, Senior Editor, Extremely Romantic
Books, 2200 East of Eden Boulevard SW, La Jolla Dune, California 12345.
Style. In general, use numerals for address numbers (520 Walker Road).
Numeric street names should be spelled out as ordinals for First through
Ninth, though names with higher numbers should use numerals. For example: Fourth Street, but 10th Avenue. The abbreviations Ave., Blvd., and St. are
used when an address number is used (as in 1 Pennsylvania Ave.). Otherwise,
spell them out when no address number is used (as in Fifth Avenue or
Tobacco Road), and in all cases spell out designations like Alley, Center,
Court, Drive, Highway, Road, Route, Terrace, Way, etc. (Generally Road is
preferred to its common abbreviation, Rd., because in Postal Style the abbreviation becomes RD, which could be mistaken for Rural Delivery.)
Addresses, Spelling Out Numbers In
See “Numbers, Spelling Out Versus Using Numerals, Street Addresses.”
Address of Publisher
The inclusion of the publisher’s mailing address on the copyright page is
customary, though not mandatory, among US publishers. If the address does
not appear on the copyright page, however, it should appear elsewhere in
the book, most commonly on the title page or on a “reader response card”
at the end of the book.
2:54 PM
Page 43
All Rights Reserved Notice | 43
The address benefits readers and distributors who may want to contact the
publisher with questions, and its presence can result in added income for the
publisher since it can lead to book orders from stores or individuals, and
since it facilitates contact from people seeking permission to quote material
from the book.
When used, an afterword is the first element of a book’s back matter.
Usually short, an afterword is written by the author and comments upon
either the writing of the book itself or events in the author’s life since the
writing of the book, or it serves as a sort of extended acknowledgments page.
In a sense, it can have some of the same functions as the preface, except that
it falls after the body of the book. It can also be termed an epilogue, though
usually only when it is used to tie up narrative elements in the story itself. (See
also “Conclusion” and “Epilogue.”)
Agnostic Versus Atheist
Though often used synonymously, the terms agnostic and atheist have different shades of meaning. Agnostic was coined by nineteenth-century biologist T. H. Huxley, based on the reference to “the unknown god” in Acts
17:23, to indicate a belief that the nature of reality is such that humans cannot definitively determine whether a deity exists. By extension, it has come
to mean the general attitude that belief in a creator is irrelevant to living. An
atheist, by contrast, is more proactive in asserting that a divine being cannot
possibly exist.
See “Time and Dates, AH”
See “Hallelujah Versus Alleluia.”
All Rights Reserved Notice
The use of the phrase “all rights reserved” on the copyright page of a book
is recommended because it is the accepted formula for protection under the
Buenos Aires Convention, recognized by the US and most Latin American
countries. Some Latin American countries do not recognize the copyright
symbol ©, the word copyright, or the abbreviation copr. as providing legal
copyright protection.
2:54 PM
Page 44
44 | All Rights Reserved Notice
Many publishers place the phrase “all rights reserved” on the same line as
their copyright notice. Others place it on a line by itself elsewhere on the
copyright page, often accompanying the warning notice. (See “Warning
Although the word alms is usually used as a plural, it is also the singular
form of the noun as well. Since an article is seldom used with the noun (The
king gave alms to the poor), the issue of number is seldom a problem. As a
subject, however, it can take either a plural or singular verb, as in The alms
were distributed by the steward (plural); and The alms given to the monk
was one gold coin (singular). In the latter case, the singular form was preferred because the object of the sentence was also singular and the plural
verb would have sounded out of place.
Alphabet: Letters as Words
We forget that the letters of the alphabet are themselves words. We seldom
use their actual spellings since the letters alone (often italicized) suffice in
nearly all contexts, but when the careful writer needs to distinguish between
tea and the letter tee, for instance, or are and the letter ar, then this following list might be helpful. Note that the vowels are usually spelled with the letter alone, but if further differentiation is required, the forms in parentheses
may be used. See also “Spelling Out Words in Text.”
A—a (ay)
E—e (ee)
I—i (eye)
O—o (oh)
U—u (you)
Y—y (why)
Styles of Alphabetization. There are two styles of alphabetization: letter-forletter and word-for-word. Letter-for-letter style alphabetizes words as though
word spaces did not exist, while word-for-word style considers whole words
first, stopping at the first word space unless further distinction is needed.
Both styles alphabetize as though words with hyphens or apostrophes were
set solid, and both alphabetize only those word units that precede any commas. If two words are identical up to the point of the comma, the information after the comma should be used for the basis of arranging the identical
2:54 PM
Page 45
A.M. and P.M. | 45
words alphabetically. The two styles may be contrasted by examining the
Old Believers
Oldcastle, Sir John
Old Catholics
old covenant
Oldham, Joseph
Oldham, Martin
Oldham Library
Old-Home Week
Old Latin Versions
Olds, Benjamin
Olds, Ditmar
Old Believers
Old Catholics
old covenant
Old Latin Versions
Oldcastle, Sir John
Oldham, Joseph
Oldham, Martin
Oldham Library
Old-Home Week
Olds, Benjamin
Olds, Ditmar
For most purposes, such as indexes, this manual recommends a letter-forletter style of alphabetization. Neither style is likely to confuse readers,
although letter-for-letter style is slightly more common in popular and trade
references, while word-for-word is somewhat more common in academic
The Use of Articles and Pronouns in Indexes. In alphabetizing entries and
subentries in an index, initial articles (such as the and a) and initial pronouns
(such as him, her, and their) are generally ignored, and the entry is alphabetized according to the key word.
Mac, Mc, and St. In both styles of alphabetization, names beginning with the
prefixes Mac and Mc should be alphabetized letter-for-letter. Mc should not
be listed as though it were spelled Mac, as was once commonly done.
Likewise, place names that begin with the abbreviation St. should be alphabetized letter for letter and not as though they were spelled Saint.
A.M. and P.M.
The abbreviations a.m. (ante meridiem, “before noon”) and p.m. (post
meridiem, “after noon”) were once commonly set in small caps (A.M. and
P.M.) with periods. That style is no longer used as widely as it once was, but
it may be retained if applied consistently throughout a publication, especially
when an unusually strong artistic or literary mood needs to be conveyed.
This manual, however, in accordance with CMS, recommends lowercasing
those abbreviations, with periods, in most cases.
Noon and Midnight. The question sometimes arises as to whether 12:00 noon,
which is sometimes called the zero point, is considered a.m. or p.m. The
2:54 PM
Page 46
46 | A.M. and P.M.
answer is neither. In very technical writing 12:00 noon is marked with an
m., which stands for the Latin meridies, meaning “noon,” or “midpoint.”
Since few readers are familiar with that abbreviation, however, it should be
avoided in ordinary writing. Noon should simply be referred to as noon,
twelve o’clock noon, or 12:00 noon.
Midnight, however, is considered 12:00 p.m. or simply midnight.
Midnight itself is considered the final moment of the day just ending. One
second after midnight is the start of the new day.
This solemnizing Hebrew word, which ordinarily concludes a prayer,
means “may it be so” or “so be it.” Apart from prayer, it is also used to
express strong affirmation. Since it so often stands alone as an interjection—
“Amen!”—many writers mistakenly capitalize it in all instances. There is no
reason to capitalize it, however, when used within a sentence or after a
comma in a prayer: The chorus was followed by a rousing amen, or . . . in
Jesus’ name we pray, amen.
The word sometimes causes consternation in liturgical settings because it
is commonly pronounced two different ways: ah-men (short a) and ay-men
(long a). Both are correct, although ah-men (short a) is the more common.
That pronunciation is also the one usually used when the word is sung, since
diphthongs (two vowel sounds masquerading as one) such as ay (a long a
and long e together) are generally avoided in singing whenever there’s an
Curiously, the word is usually accented on the second syllable when spoken but on the first syllable or on both syllables when sung.
Americanizing British Publications
American publishers are increasingly less likely to spend time and money
restyling British publications to conform to American English, and vice versa.
American and British readers alike are more open to reading books that have
not been revised for their own form of English. For details of the many issues
involved, see “British Style” and “Mid-Atlantic Style.”
There are cases, however, when American publishers feel they have no
alternative but to recast British publications for an American readership. The
following procedures should help.
Reasons for Americanizing. Perhaps the most common reason to Americanize
a book is that the British character of the writing is so extreme that it would
simply be incomprehensible to the American target audience. Often the issue
is one of reaching younger American readers who might be confused by
2:54 PM
Page 47
Americanizing British Publications | 47
British spelling, punctuation, and slang, as was the case, for example, when
J. K. Rowling’s American publisher edited the Harry Potter books.
There are basically three levels of Americanization.
Level One: Converting Spelling and Punctuation. This level of Americanization
simply replaces British typographic and spelling conventions with American
ones. This involves converting single quotation marks (inverted commas) to
American double quotation marks, and the British double quotation marks
to the American single. Some British punctuation that rests outside the quotation marks would be moved inside (mostly periods and commas), according to American style. Some British publications use spaced en dashes where
US convention uses em dashes, and these would be changed. And finally, but
perhaps most importantly, British spellings would be changed to American
for all words that are basically the same in both languages: splendour would
be changed to splendor; theatre to theater; plough to plow; and so on.
This first level of Americanization is the most superficial, but it has the
benefit of causing the least distraction for the American reader while retaining the maximum amount of British character—a factor that would be
important in works of fiction, for instance. All other uniquely British words
and cultural references are retained.
Level Two: Converting Vocabulary. The second level of Americanization, which
would be added to the first, would be the actual conversion of words for
common objects that are different in the two styles of English. That is, lorry
would become truck in the American version; vest would become undershirt;
and so on. This can be done to a greater or lesser extent, depending on how
much of the British character is intended to remain in the publication. For
novels set in England, for instance, it may be important to retain the British
flavor of the original. In such cases, the editor would translate only those
words that might seriously confuse the American reader. For nonfiction, it
might be important to convert weights and measures from metric.
Level Three: Converting Cultural Equivalents. The most thorough level of
Americanization, added to the other two levels, would be a complete conversion of all the cultural and topical references. In this level of editing, the
editor is, in a sense, disguising the fact that the author is British. This would
only be done for books in which the British character is clearly inessential to
its appeal, for instance, in some self-help books or technical manuals that
for clarity or safety need to be rendered in language as close to that of the target reader’s as possible.
The issue here is not so much translating the individual words as it is finding recognizable cultural equivalents. Prime minister would become president, for example; Houses of Parliament would become Congress; and BBC
Radio might be changed to National Public Radio.
2:54 PM
Page 48
48 | Americanizing British Publications
This level obviously takes more time and work because such cultural
equivalents are not always easy to devise. This translating of equivalents must
be done with sensitivity and only when the British reference would be too
obscure for the majority of American readers, for many British cultural references are equally familiar to Americans: Stonehenge or Shakespeare’s birthplace, for instance.
This level of Americanization also runs the risk of making the book dated
if the cultural equivalents soon become passé, as would references to television shows, films, or current bestsellers.
An ampersand (short for “and per se and” and sometimes called the
“tironian sign”) is the typographical symbol &. It simply means “and,” and
in form it is a stylistic rendering of the Latin et (“and”) developed by
medieval calligraphers. Unlike most other letters and symbols, it can take on
a wide variety of forms, depending upon the typeface being used.
When to Use It. The symbol is seldom used in text type, although it is still often
seen in advertising, on book covers, in display typography, and in headings
to charts, lists, and tables where space is limited. If it is used in any of those
instances, that use should be spelled out on an editor’s style sheet and used
consistently throughout the work.
An ampersand may be used, at the discretion of the cover designer, to
replace and in a book’s title as displayed on the cover, even if the and is
retained elsewhere in the book.
Company Names. The ampersand should be retained in text, however, in the
abbreviations of company names, such as AT&T and A&P (since it would
look odd to write AT and T), and in the names of those few companies that
prefer the ampersand in their official moniker (when such preference is
known), such as Smith & Wesson and the former Harper & Row.
Drop the Serial Comma. Do not use a serial comma before an ampersand, no
matter what the context; for instance: Smith, Gundersen & Klein, not Smith,
Gundersen, & Klein.
An anachronism is an error of chronology. In writing, it is usually the
insertion of an object, concept, or detail from one period of time into another,
such as the famous clock that strikes the hour in Shakespeare’s Julius Caesar.
Anachronisms have only been considered contrary to artistic and literary
realism since about the eighteenth century, before which it was common to
see portraits of the Virgin Mary, for instance, garbed in the clothes of a
2:54 PM
Page 49
Antichrist | 49
Renaissance Dutch lady or a medieval French peasant. The King James Bible
translators used anachronisms from time to time, especially when the meanings of the Hebrew and Greek words were fuzzy. For instance, in Genesis
4:21, Jubal is said to be “the father of all such as handle the harp and organ.”
Most later translations render organ as flute.
While inadvertent anachronisms can be an embarrassment, most creative
writers know that intentional anachronism is but one more tool in the toolkit
of communication. They are a common source of humor and satire, as in
Mark Twain’s Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur’s Court; they are part of
the intrigue of most time-travel novels; and they are implicit in any modern
translation of an older work. To give readers a general sense of obsolete concepts and objects, a certain amount of deliberate anachronism is necessary.
That is part of the process of finding “dynamic equivalents” in translation,
as when the TNIV renders the Bible’s “ninth hour” as “three in the afternoon” (Matt. 27:45)—which, when you think about it, is not too far off
from Shakespeare’s clock in Julius Caesar. See also “Archaism.”
Anglican Church Versus Church of England
Anglican connotes the worldwide body of churches that are either loosely
or formally associated with the Church of England, including the Anglican
Church of Canada and the Episcopal Church in the US. The usual practice
is to use Anglican Church for modern references and Church of England for
historical references or for specifically referring to the church as it exists
today in the UK alone. See also “Episcopal and Episcopalian.”
Anglicizing American Publications
The process of restyling American publications for a British audience is
similar to restyling British publications for American audiences, only working in the other direction. The principles are the same, and they are outlined
in “Americanizing British Publications.” See also “British Style” and “MidAtlantic Style.”
See “Notes.”
The term antichrist, apparently first coined in the epistles of John (1 John
2:18, 22; 4:3; 2 John 7), can mean either “a person who opposes or denies
Christ” or “a false Christ.” When the term is used to mean the specific individual referred to in the Bible who will be defeated by Christ at the Second
2:54 PM
Page 50
50 | Antichrist
Coming, then the term is capitalized. Otherwise, it is lowercased to mean
someone who possesses a general spirit of evil and opposition to Christ.
Throughout Christian history, many people, from the Emperor Nero to
Mikhail Gorbachev, have been identified as either generic antichrists or the
biblical Antichrist himself.
The term apostate is used to describe a person who once accepted but then
rejected the Christian faith altogether. For a fuller discussion see “Heresy
Versus Schism.”
Apostles, Twelve
Sunday school students often puzzle over the fact that the twelve apostles
(from the Greek apostolos, meaning “messenger”) actually number fourteen
or more. The reason, of course, is that after the death of Judas, a man named
Matthias was chosen by lot to replace him, and Paul also applied the term
to himself. The New Testament also labels several other people apostles: for
instance, Barnabas (Acts 14:14), Jesus’ brother James (Gal. 1:19), and possibly Andronicus and Junias (Rom. 16:7). Finally, the term apostle is popularly used in the pulpit to describe any faithful follower of Jesus.
The meticulous writer, therefore, should only use the phrase the twelve
apostles when Jesus’ original disciples are being referred to: Andrew,
Bartholomew, James (son of Alphaeus, also called “James the Less”), James
(son of Zebedee, also called “James the Great”), John, Judas Iscariot
(replaced by Matthias after the resurrection), Matthew, Philip, Simon (Peter),
Simon (the Zealot), Thaddaeus, and Thomas (Didymus). When using the
word apostles alone, the writer should clarify the intended meaning.
Apostolic Fathers, The
The term apostolic fathers (lowercased) is sometimes mistakenly used
for Jesus’ apostles themselves, but it actually refers to the next generation
of Christian writers immediately after the original twelve. They are called
the “apostolic” fathers because they most likely knew the apostles personally. They are, notably, Clement of Rome, Hermas, Ignatius, Papias,
Polycarp, and the anonymous writers of 2 Clement, Didache, Barnabas,
and Diognetus. The writings of these individuals are corporately referred
to as the Apostolic Fathers (capitalized, in roman type).
2:54 PM
Page 51
Appendix | 51
The apostrophe ( ’ ) is a mark usually used in a word or number to show
an intentional omission, possession, or a plural, and its origins date back to
Roman and medieval calligraphy.
Contractions. The apostrophe is most commonly used in contractions to indicate the absence of a letter or letters: shouldn’t, ma’am, M’Cheyne. For more
details, see “Contractions.”
For Possessives. An apostrophe is used to denote possession (see “Possessives”).
An antiquated rule of grammar states that only people, not things, may possess an object and that therefore it is improper to say, “the book’s cover.” In
modern usage this rule may be ignored, and possessives may be used with
inanimate objects.
the prophet’s writings
the women’s advice
the apostles’ ministry
George MacDonald’s novels
With Plurals of Abbreviations. An ’s should be used to form the plurals of abbreviations with periods, the plurals of letters in common expressions, and the
plurals of letters when it would be confusing if only s were added. Note that
except when appearing in common expressions, letters used as letters are
italicized. In all cases, the ’s or s should be set in roman type.
Mind your p’s and q’s
S’s, A’s, I’s but Ts, Ds, xs, and ys
With Gerunds. The possesive ’s is usually added to any noun that is linked to a
gerund, as in the minister’s leaving the church.
With Numeral Abbreviations. If the numerals in a year reference are abbreviated to two numerals, they should be preceded by an apostrophe, as in “the
blizzard of ’78.” No apostrophe, however, should go before the s in decade
designations in numerals. In most cases the spelled-out form, eighties,
nineties, etc., is preferred to 80s, 90s, etc.
They graduated with the class of ’02.
It should not have surprised us when the seminarians of the 80s became the
ministers of the 90s. [Preferred: “when the seminarians of the eighties
became the ministers of the nineties.”]
An appendix is a convenient place to store information that is useful to
the reader but intrusive in the main text of a book. An author should avoid,
however, the tendency to lump unprocessed and unexplained research or data
2:54 PM
Page 52
52 | Appendix
in an appendix if it has only marginal value to the body of the book. An
appendix should contain only information that will be of positive value to
the reader.
Design. Since appendixes are meant to be read, they should be set in the same
size type as the main text of the book, or possibly one point size smaller.
They should be readable and inviting. Also, the titles and headings in an
appendix should match those in the main part of the book.
Reference in Text. In the main text of the book, the author should be sure to
make a detailed reference to every appendix, including the number and title
of the appendix and a brief explanation of why it will be of value to the
Enumerating. Although it was once common to use roman numerals to number appendixes when there are more than one, arabic numerals or capital
letters are now predominantly used.
The Plural. The plural form of appendix can be either appendixes or appendices,
although this manual recommends appendixes as the one appropriate for most
books. Appendices can appear slightly pretentious in popular writing.
If an anachronism is a modern word in an old setting (see “Anachronism”),
then you might say an archaism is an old word in a modern setting. Although
for most purposes this manual discourages the use of words marked
“archaic” in Webster’s, archaisms, like anachronisms, are useful tools in the
creative writer’s hands. They lend authenticity to historical fiction, provide
useful etymological illustrations for the nonfiction writer, and create comic
effects when necessary.
Among the more interesting archaisms of the Christian faith are such
words as All-welder (“the Almighty Ruler,” that is, God), holystead (“holy
place”), housel (“to receive last rites”) and unhouselled (not to have received
them), mare (“demon”; survives in nightmare), rood (“cross”), sooth
(“truth”; survives in soothsayer), and wedbreaker (the Wycliffe Bible’s poetic
word for “adulterer”). Nearly all of these are Anglo-Saxon words that have
been superceded by Latin interlopers.
The anachronistic second person singulars, thou, thee, thy, and thine, are
still commonly used in hymns and elsewhere. (See “Thou and Thee.”)
An entire class of archaisms are remembered only because they survive in
popular songs or customs: ebenezer, from 1 Sam. 7:12, meaning “monument,” survives in Robert Robinson’s hymn “Come Thou Fount of Every
Blessing”; langsyne, “long ago,” in Robert Burns’s “Auld Langsyne”; shrove,
“to have confessed,” survives in Shrove Tuesday, etc.
2:54 PM
Page 53
Author Signature | 53
All modern English words are fossils of the past. An archaism is simply a
fossil that has been left undisturbed for many years. When there is a good
reason to unearth them, do so. Otherwise, let them lie.
The word aureole is sometimes mistakenly used as a synonym for nimbus
or halo when speaking of religious art and iconography. Aureole, however,
is the golden sheen-like background that surrounds the entire body of a figure, as opposed to the nimbus, which is the circlet over the head (halo). Both
indicate sanctity and holiness.
Author Card, or Ad Card
The author card, which is also called the ad card or sometimes just the
card, is a page in a book reserved for listing the author’s other published
books or major publications (major articles, monographs, or other shorter
publications are usually not included). It is most often supplied by the publisher and is intended to promote the author’s other books from that publisher, although it may occasionally be to the author’s or publisher’s advantage
to include a more comprehensive list that includes the author’s books from
other publishers.
Placement and Size. If an author card is used, it is usually placed on page 2 of
the book; that is, the verso of the half-title page and facing the title page. It
is commonly set in text size or one point smaller.
Style. The list is usually headed by a phrase like “Other books by [name of
author].” If the author has coauthored any of the books on the list, the
name(s) of the coauthor(s) should be given in parentheses after the title so
that it doesn’t appear the author is trying to claim sole authorship.
Author Signature
At some time or other, nearly every author has been asked to sign a copy
of his or her book for an admiring reader. The signature should be done in
black ink and usually takes one of two forms: (1) If the reader is a collector
of the author’s first editions, it is customary for the author to sign only his
or her name on the title page, directly beneath the author’s own printed name
unless asked to do otherwise. A sole signature with no personalization
increases the value of the book if it is ever resold to the collectors’ book market. (2) If the author wishes to write a personal message, or if the author is
requested to write such a message, it can be done on the title page (if the
message is short) or on the half-title page (if the message is longer). Very long
messages are best written on the right-hand side of the flyleaf.
2:54 PM
Page 54
Back Matter, Elements of a Book’s
The back matter of a book is whatever follows the main body of the text.
Ideally, all parts of the back matter should begin on recto pages, but they
may begin verso if the design or space limitations dictate. The back matter
is arranged in the following order, as appropriate:
Afterword or conclusion or epilogue (though in some literary books, a
conclusion or an epilogue may be the final element of the body matter)
Note from the author
Acknowledgments (if not placed in the front matter)
Study questions (if not incorporated into the text)
Notes (if not placed as footnotes or as chapter endnotes)
Chronological table(s)
Bibliography, or “For Further Reading”
Index to maps
Proper-name index
Subject index
Scripture index
List of contributors
Author biographical note
Colophon, publisher’s note, or reader response page
Banns of Marriage
The term banns of marriage is lowercased and nearly always plural in
form. Banns is sometimes mistakenly thought to mean “bands” or “bonds,”
however, it means the announcement of an intention to be married and has
its origin in the Middle English word for “proclamation.” It is plural because
of the former English custom of posting in the church an announcement of
an impending marriage for three consecutive weeks. It is usually used with
the verbs to post or to publish and passive in construction: “the banns were
posted,” rather than “they posted the banns.”
Baptismal Name
See “Christian Name.”
2:54 PM
Page 55
Bible: Online Versions | 55
With Year and Century Designations. Since BC is an abbreviation for “before
Christ,” it logically comes after references to a year or century: Augustus was
born in 63 BC. Note that the abbreviation AD commonly comes before a
year designation though after a century designation (see additional details at
“AD”). The abbreviation BC was formerly set in small capitals with periods
(B.C.); that form is no longer common but may still be used when a feeling
of high literary or artistic quality needs to be conveyed.
In the US and the UK, the term believer has come into vogue in recent
decades as a synonym for Christian. It is both common and acceptable in
Christian writing since, for many writers, it seems an inoffensive way to distinguish practicing Christians from the nominal. Still, in some contexts, it
may have acquired a hint of Christian cant.
The term is limited by its generality, however. In a larger context it can
refer to a believer in any religion, so caution must be used when targeting a
readership made up of Christians and non-Christians or when attempting to
distinguish between Christians and the faithful of other religions.
Bible: Online Versions
The Internet is a valuable source for accessing complete Bible texts in various versions and languages. Some of these can be downloaded, while others are read-only. The following list shows only a few of the more common
versions from among the scores available online. For online versions of the
Vulgate and versions of the Bible in seventeen modern languages, see
American Standard Version
Amplified Bible
Analytical-Literal Translation
The Bible in Basic English
The Darby Translation
Hebrew Names Version of the World English Bible
International Standard Version
Jefferson Bible
King James Version
2:54 PM
Page 56
56 | Bible: Online Versions
King James Version, audio
Modern Literal Version
New American Standard Bible
New English Translation
New International Version
New International Version, audio
New King James Version
New Living Translation
Revised Standard Version
Today’s New International Version (NT)
Twenty-first Century King James Version
of the Holy Bible
Webster’s Bible
Weymouth’s New Testament in Modern Speech
World English Bible
World English Bible, audio
Young’s Literal Translation of the Bible
Bible Belt
No absolute geographical boundaries can be drawn around the region
referred to as the Bible Belt, a term that should be capitalized. Suffice it to
say that it is broadly synonymous with the American South, extending as far
west as Texas and as far north as Kentucky, Virginia, and Maryland, and
even portions of the southern Midwest. The term is often used derogatorily
to describe conservative fundamentalists and those who hold a largely uncritical view of biblical literalism, regardless of geographic location. Care should
be used in using the term since it is generally pejorative.
Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining
Using Copyrighted Versions. When an author quotes extensively from a copyrighted translation, paraphrase, or other version of the Bible, he or she should
write for permission from that version’s publisher just as he or she might
write for permission to use material from any other book (see “Permissions,
Obtaining: Author Guidelines”).
2:54 PM
Page 57
Bible Permissions: Guidelines for Obtaining | 57
Some publishers allow fairly extensive use of their Bibles without requiring the author to obtain written permission or pay fees, but since each publisher has different criteria, the author should be sure to write to the Bible
publisher for their guidelines. Any permission notice provided by the Bible
publisher should be placed on the copyright page. As a general rule, written
permission does not need to be obtained when:
1. The use of a Bible version is so minimal as to fall unquestionably under
the “fair use” defense category. Only one Bible publisher (New
American Bible), for instance, requires written permission to quote
fewer than 250 verses. Some allow as many as 500, 1,000, or even
2,500 verses to be quoted before written permission is needed or a fee
is required.
2. The version or translation is in the public domain (for example, the
King James Version). Care should be taken, however, because some
public-domain versions have been modernized or altered by their publishers to such an extent that the updated version has been newly copyrighted (for example, the New King James Version).
All quotations should be referenced in such a way that it will be clear to
the reader which version is being quoted. Usually some form of abbreviation
is used with the reference (see “Bible Versions and Translations”). When several quotations are used, a general note can appear on the copyright page, in
the acknowledgments, or elsewhere, indicating the version used. Supplying
the bibliographic information (publisher, edition, etc.) on the copyright page
or elsewhere is also recommended, even for versions for which no written
permission is needed.
If more than one version is used, then a statement should be provided to
clarify the abbreviations used with the references in the text. For example:
Scripture verses marked KJV are from the King James Version of the Bible. Those
marked NRSV are from the New Revised Standard Version [followed by any
bibliographic information or permission notice, as appropriate].
Guidelines for Common Copyrighted Versions of the Bible
The following are some of the guidelines for some major versions of the
The Amplified Bible (AB). Published by Zondervan. The publisher’s policy
states that up to 500 verses may be quoted without permission as long as the
verses quoted “do not amount to a complete book of the Bible, do not comprise 25 percent or more of the total text of the work in which they are
2:54 PM
Page 58
58 | Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining
quoted, and the verses are not being quoted in a commentary or other
Biblical reference work.”
The correct credit lines for the Amplified Bible, New and Old Testaments
respectively, should read:
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise indicated, are taken from The
Amplified Bible, Old Testament. Copyright © 1965, 1987, by the Zondervan
Corporation. Used by permission. All rights reserved.
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise indicated, are taken from The
Amplified Bible, New Testament. Copyright © 1954, 1958, 1987, by The
Lockman Foundation. Used by permission.
Requests for permission to quote from the Old Testament should be
directed to:
Attn: Amplified Bible Permission Director
5300 Patterson Ave. SE
Grand Rapids, MI 49530
Requests for permission to quote from the New Testament should be
directed to:
Director of Rights and Permissions—Amplified NT
The Lockman Foundation
PO Box 2279
La Habra, CA 90631
Contemporary English Version (CEV). Published by the American Bible Society.
The publisher’s policy states:
The CEV text may be quoted in any form (written, visual, electronic or audio)
up to & inclusive of five hundred (500) verses without written permission, providing the verses quoted do not amount to 50% of a complete book of the Bible
nor do the verses account for twenty-five percent (25%) or more of the total
text of the work in which they are quoted. This permission is contingent upon
proper copyright acknowledgment.
The credit lines may read:
Scripture quotations marked (CEV) are from the Contemporary English Version
© 1991, 1992, 1995 by American Bible Society. Used by Permission.
All Scripture quotations in this publication are from the Contemporary English
Version Copyright © 1991, 1992, 1995 by American Bible Society. Used by
2:54 PM
Page 59
Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining | 59
Permission may be obtained by writing to:
The American Bible Society
1865 Broadway
New York, NY 10023
English Standard Version (ESV). Published by Crossway Books. The publisher’s
policy states:
Up to 1,000 verses (inclusive) from assorted books of the English Standard
Version (ESV) may be quoted in printed (e.g., book, brochure, magazine,
newsletter, lesson outline), visual (e.g., film, video tape), and electronic forms
(e.g., computer diskette, CD-ROM, on-line) without written permission, as
long as the verses quoted do not amount to 50% of a complete book of the
Bible and do not make up 50% or more of the total text of the work in which
they are quoted.
These uses of the ESV must be acknowledged by an appropriate copyright
notice. . . . Permission is contingent upon an appropriate copyright acknowledgment.
Appropriate credit lines read:
Scripture taken from The Holy Bible, English Standard Version. Copyright © 2000;
2001 by Crossway Bibles, a division of Good News Publishers. Used by
permission. All rights reserved.
Scripture quotations marked “ESV” are taken from The Holy Bible, English
Standard Version. Copyright © 2000; 2001 by Crossway Bibles, a division of
Good News Publishers. Used by permission. All rights reserved.
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise indicated, are taken from The Holy
Bible, English Standard Version. Copyright © 2000; 2001 by Crossway Bibles,
a division of Good News Publishers. Used by permission. All rights reserved.
Requests for use of the ESV in excess of the above guidelines may be
addressed to:
Good News Publishers
Attn: Bible Rights
1300 Crescent Street
Wheaton, IL 60187
2:54 PM
Page 60
60 | Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining
Good News Translation (GNT; also called The Good News Bible, Good News
for Modern Man, and Today’s English Version [TEV]). Published by the
American Bible Society, whose policy (updated March 2003) reads:
The GNT text may be quoted in any form (written, visual, electronic or audio)
up to & inclusive of five hundred (500) verses without written permission, providing the verses quoted do not amount to 50% of a complete book of the Bible
nor do the verses account for twenty-five percent (25%) or more of the total
text of the work in which they are quoted. This permission is contingent upon
an appropriate copyright acknowledgment.
The correct credit line should read:
All Scripture quotations in this publication are from the Good News
Translation—Second Edition. Copyright © 1992 by American Bible Society.
Used by Permission.
Scripture quotations marked (GNT) are from the Good News Translation—
Second Edition. © 1992 by American Bible Society. Used by Permission.
Within North America, permission requests for commercial use should be
sent to:
Attn: Good News Translation Permission Director
5300 Patterson Avenue SE
Grand Rapids, MI 49530
Outside North America, permission requests may be addressed to:
Director of Permissions
American Bible Society
1865 Broadway
New York, NY 10023
The Message (MSG). The full title of this paraphrastic translation, which is the
work of author and scholar Eugene Peterson, is The Message: The Bible in
Contemporary Language. It is published by NavPress Publishing Group. The
publisher’s policy states:
You may quote up to 500 verses without written permission unless the verses
quoted amount to:
• A complete book of the Bible.
• 25% or more of the total text of your project.
2:54 PM
Page 61
Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining | 61
You must receive written permission to quote:
• 501 verses or more
• An entire book of the Bible
• Text that accounts for 25% or more of the total project.
You must include copyright information for The Message on the title page or
copyright page of the project in which verses are quoted.
Appropriate credit lines read:
Scripture quotations from THE MESSAGE. Copyright © by Eugene H. Peterson
1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002. Used by permission of
NavPress Publishing Group.
All Scripture quotations in this publication are from THE MESSAGE. Copyright ©
by Eugene H. Peterson 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 2000, 2001, 2002. Used
by permission of NavPress Publishing Group.
For permission, please write to:
NavPress Publishing Group
Attn: Kristen DiFelice, Rights Assistant
PO Box 35001
Colorado Springs, CO 80935
[email protected]
[email protected]
Fax: (719) 260-7223
The New American Bible (NAB). Published by the Confraternity of Christian
Doctrine, whose policy states:
1. Permission must be requested from the Confraternity of Christian
Doctrine for each usage regardless of the small amount of text used. A
copy of the manuscript should accompany each request. The Scripture
selections should be highlighted, and reference citations clearly marked.
2. Anyone may use up to 2,500 words of the text in a single non-liturgical
publication (including recordings) free of charge. . . .
A credit line should contain the basic information:
Scripture texts used in this work are taken from the New American Bible
Copyright © 1970 by the Confraternity of Christian Doctrine, Washington,
D.C., and are used by permission of copyright owner. All rights reserved.
2:54 PM
Page 62
62 | Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining
Scripture texts used in this work are taken from the New American Bible with
Revised New Testament Copyright © 1986 by the Confraternity of Christian
Doctrine, Washington, D.C., and are used by permission of copyright
owner. All rights reserved.
Scripture texts used in this work are taken from the Revised Psalms of the New
American Bible Copyright © 1991 by the Confraternity of Christian Doctrine,
Washington, D.C., and are used by permission of copyright owner. All rights
For permission write:
Publications Development Manager
Office for Publishing and Promotion Services
United States Catholic Conference
3211 Fourth Street NE
Washington, DC 20017–1194
New American Standard Bible (NASB). Published by The Lockman Foundation,
whose policy states:
The text of the New American Standard Bible . . . may be quoted and/or
reprinted up to and inclusive of five hundred (500) verses without express written permission of The Lockman Foundation, provided the verses do not
amount to a complete book of the Bible nor do the verses quoted account for
more than 25% of the total work in which they are quoted.
The standard credit line for the 1977 edition reads as follows:
Scripture taken from the New American Standard Bible, © Copyright
1960, 1962, 1963, 1968, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1975, 1977 by The Lockman
Foundation. Used by permission.
For the 1995 updated edition, use the above credit line with the addition
of “1995” to the end of the series.
Requests for permission to quote from the NASB should be sent to:
The Lockman Foundation
900 S. Euclid Street
La Habra, CA 90631
2:54 PM
Page 63
Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining | 63
New Century Version (NCV). Published by Thomas Nelson, Inc. The publisher’s policy states:
Up to 1,000 verses (inclusive) from assorted books of the New Century Version
(NCV) may be quoted in printed . . . visual . . . and electronic forms . . . without written permission, as long as the verses quoted do not amount to 50% of
a complete book of the Bible and do not make up 50% or more of the total text
of the work in which they are quoted.
These uses must be acknowledged by an appropriate copyright notice.... Permission
is contingent upon an appropriate copyright acknowledgement.
Use of the NCV text beyond [the above] requires written permission.
Appropriate credit lines read:
Scripture taken from the New Century Version. Copyright © 1987, 1988, 1991
by Word Publishing, a division of Thomas Nelson, Inc. Used by permission.
All rights reserved.
Scripture quotations marked “NCV” are taken from the New Century Version.
Copyright © 1987, 1988, 1991 by Word Publishing, a division of Thomas
Nelson, Inc. Used by permission. All rights reserved.
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise indicated, are taken from the New
Century Version. Copyright © 1987, 1988, 1991 by Word Publishing, a
division of Thomas Nelson, Inc. Used by permission. All rights reserved.
To request permission, please inquire in writing to:
Thomas Nelson Publishers
Attn: Bible Rights and Permissions
PO Box 141000
Nashville, TN 37214-1000
New International Version (NIV). Published by Zondervan for the International
Bible Society. The publisher’s policy states:
The NIV text may be quoted in any form (written, visual, electronic or audio),
up to and inclusive of five hundred (500) verses or less without written permission, providing the verses quoted do not amount to a complete book of the
Bible, do not comprise 25% or more of the total text of the work in which they
are quoted, and the verses are not being quoted in a commentary or other
Biblical reference work. . . .
2:54 PM
Page 64
64 | Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining
One complete copy of the work using quotations from the New International
Version must be sent to Zondervan within 30 days following the publication
of the work.
Rights and permission to quote from the NIV text in printed or electronic
media intended for commercial use within the US and Canada that exceed the
above guidelines must be directed to, and approved in writing by, Zondervan
Publishing House.
Rights and permission to quote from the NIV text in printed or electronic
media intended for commercial use within the UK, EEC, and EFTA countries
that exceed the above guidelines must be directed to, and approved in writing
by, Hodder & Stoughton, Ltd., 338 Euston Road, London, NW1 3BH,
Rights and permission to quote from the NIV text in media intended for noncommercial use which exceed the above guidelines must be directed to, and
approved in writing by, International Bible Society, 1820 Jet Stream Drive,
Colorado Springs, CO 80921-3969.
The most current credit line for “fair use” quotations from the NIV is:
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise indicated, are taken from the Holy
Bible, New International Version®. NIV®. Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984 by
International Bible Society. Used by permission of Zondervan. All rights
Note the use of the registered symbol after both the complete and abbreviated titles.
If NIV use falls outside the “fair use” guidelines, requiring a fee and written permission, then a more complete copyright notice is required:
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise noted, are taken from the Holy Bible,
New International Version®. NIV®. Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984 by
International Bible Society. Used by permission of Zondervan. All rights
The “NIV” and “New International Version” trademarks are registered in the
United States Patent and Trademark Office by International Bible Society.
Use of either trademark requires the permission of International Bible
Letters should be addressed to:
Attn: NIV Permission Director
5300 Patterson Ave. SE
Grand Rapids, MI 49530
In addition, if NIV or New International Version are to be used in a title
or on the cover of a book, special written arrangements must be made with
the International Bible Society.
2:54 PM
Page 65
Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining | 65
New International Reader’s Version (NIrV). Published by Zondervan for the
International Bible Society. The publisher’s policy states:
The NIrV text may be quoted in any form (written, visual, electronic or audio),
up to and inclusive of five hundred (500) verses or less without written permission, providing the verses quoted do not amount to a complete book of the
Bible, do not comprise 25% or more of the total text of the work in which they
are quoted, and the verses are not being quoted in a commentary or other
Biblical reference work. . . .
One complete copy of the work using quotations from the New International
Reader’s Version must be sent to Zondervan within 30 days following the publication of the work.
Rights and permission to quote from the NIrV text in printed or electronic
media intended for commercial use within the US and Canada that exceed the
above guidelines must be directed to, and approved in writing by, Zondervan
Publishing House.
Rights and permission to quote from the NIrV text in printed or electronic
media intended for commercial use within the UK, EEC, and EFTA countries
that exceed the above guidelines must be directed to, and approved in writing
by, Hodder & Stoughton, Ltd., 338 Euston Road, London, NW1 3BH,
Rights and permissions to quote from the NIrV text in media intended for noncommercial use which exceed the above guidelines must be directed to, and
approved in writing by, International Bible Society, 1820 Jet Stream Drive,
Colorado Springs, CO 80921-3969.
The most current credit line for “fair use” quotations from the NIrV reads:
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise indicated, are taken from the Holy
Bible, New International Reader’s Version®. NIrV®. Copyright © 1973, 1978,
1984 by International Bible Society. Used by permission of Zondervan. All
rights reserved.
Note the use of the registered symbol after both the complete and abbreviated titles.
If NIrV use falls outside the “fair use” guidelines, requiring a fee and written permission, then a more complete copyright notice is required:
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise noted, are taken from the Holy Bible,
New International Reader’s Version®. NIrV®. Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1998
by International Bible Society. Used by permission of Zondervan. All rights
The “NIrV” and “New International Reader’s Version” trademarks are registered
in the United States Patent and Trademark Office by International Bible
Society. Use of either trademark requires the permission of International
Bible Society.
2:54 PM
Page 66
66 | Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining
Letters should be addressed to:
Attn: NIrV Permission Director
5300 Patterson Ave. SE
Grand Rapids, MI 49530
The New English Translation (NET). Published online by Biblical Studies Press.
The publisher’s policy states:
From our website at, you may download the information and
print it for yourself and others as long as you give it away and do not charge
for it. In this case free means free. It cannot be bundled with anything sold,
nor can you charge for shipping, handling, or anything. It is provided for personal study or for use in preparation of sermons, Sunday school classes, or
other non-commercial study. . . .
For free distribution of more than 100 copies, you must obtain written permission and comply with reasonable guidelines of content control and include
currently valid BSP copyright and organizational acknowledgments.
The publisher’s credit line reads:
Copyright © 1997–2003 Biblical Studies Press. This material is provided for
personal use or for use in preparation of sermons, Sunday school classes, or
other oral communication. This material may be quoted in written form but
give credit where credit is due (author’s name and website address: It may not be reprinted for commercial publication. It may
be copied or reprinted for distribution as long as it is given away and no
charge is made for copies, shipping or handling.
You may contact Biblical Studies Press for permission for noncommercial
use by linking to or by calling 1-800-575-2425.
The New Jerusalem Bible (NJB). Published by Darton, Longman & Todd, Ltd.
and Doubleday for Random House, Inc. The publisher’s policy states:
We are pleased to grant permission for the inclusion of up to 2,500 words, free
of charge (providing such number of words does not constitute more than onethird of your total text), covering rights in the United States and Canada only.
The prescribed credit line reads:
Excerpt from The New Jerusalem Bible, copyright © 1985 by Darton, Longman
& Todd, Ltd. and Doubleday, a division of Random House, Inc. Reprinted by
2:54 PM
Page 67
Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining | 67
For permission to use outside the United States and Canada, please write to:
New Jerusalem Bible Permissions
Darton, Longman & Todd, Ltd.
1 Spencer Court
140-142 Wordsworth High Street
London SWL8 4JJ
New King James Version (NKJV). Published by Thomas Nelson, Inc. The publisher’s policy states:
Up to 1,000 verses (inclusive) from assorted books of the New King James
Version (NKJV) may be quoted in printed . . . visual . . . and electronic forms
. . . without written permission, as long as the verses quoted do not amount to
50% of a complete book of the Bible and do not make up 50% or more of the
total text of the work in which they are quoted.
These uses of the NKJV must be acknowledged by an appropriate copyright notice. . . . Permission is contingent upon an appropriate copyright
Appropriate credit lines read:
Scripture taken from the New King James Version. Copyright © 1982 by
Thomas Nelson, Inc. Used by permission. All rights reserved.
Scripture quotations marked “NKJV” are taken from the New King James
Version. Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson, Inc. Used by permission. All
rights reserved.
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise indicated, are taken from the New
King James Version. Copyright © 1982 by Thomas Nelson, Inc. Used by
permission. All rights reserved.
For permission requests that exceed the above guidelines, please write to:
Thomas Nelson Publishers
Attn: Bible Rights and Permissions
PO Box 141000
Nashville, TN 37412-1000
New Living Translation (NLT). Published by Tyndale House Publishers, whose
policy states:
2:54 PM
Page 68
68 | Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining
The text of the Holy Bible, New Living Translation, may be quoted in any
form (written, visual, electronic, or audio) up to and inclusive of five hundred
(500) verses without express written permission of the publisher, provided that
the verses quoted do not account for more than 25 percent of the work in
which they are quoted, and provided that a complete book of the Bible is not
When the Holy Bible, New Living Translation, is quoted, one of the following
credit lines must appear on the copyright page or title page of the work:
Scripture quotations marked (NLT ) are taken from the Holy Bible, New Living
Translation, copyright © 1996. Used by permission of Tyndale House
Publishers, Inc., Wheaton, IL 60189 USA. All rights reserved.
Scripture quotations are taken from the Holy Bible, New Living Translation,
copyright © 1996. Used by permission of Tyndale House Publishers, Inc.,
Wheaton, IL 60189 USA. All rights reserved.
Unless otherwise indicated, all Scripture quotations are taken from the Holy
Bible, New Living Translation, copyright © 1996. Used by permission of
Tyndale House Publishers, Inc., Wheaton, IL 60189 USA. All rights
For permission to quote in excess of the above guidelines, please write to:
Tyndale House Publishers, Inc.
Attn: Bible Permissions
PO Box 80
Wheaton, IL 60189
Fax requests are also accepted at (630) 668-8311.
New Revised Standard Version (NRSV). Published by Augsburg Fortress for
the National Council of Churches. The NCC’s permissions policy states:
The [New] Revised Standard Version Bible may be quoted and/or reprinted up
to and inclusive of five hundred (500) verses without express written permission of the publisher, provided the verses quoted do not amount to a complete
book of the Bible or account for fifty percent (50%) of the total work in which
they are quoted.
An appropriate credit line reads:
New Revised Standard Version Bible, copyright 1989, Division of Christian
Education of the National Council of the Churches of Christ in the United
States of America. Used by permission. All rights reserved.
2:54 PM
Page 69
Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining | 69
Permissions inquiries may be addressed to:
Augsburg Fortress
Attn: RSV/NRSV Permissions
Box 1209
Minneapolis, MN 55400-1209
Tel: 1-800-421-0239
Fax: (612) 330-3252
Today’s New International Version (TNIV). Published by Zondervan for the
International Bible Society. The publisher’s policy states:
The TNIV text may be quoted in any form (written, visual, electronic or audio),
up to and inclusive of five hundred (500) verses or less without written permission, providing the verses quoted do not amount to a complete book of the
Bible, do not comprise 25% or more of the total text of the work in which they
are quoted, and the verses are not being quoted in a commentary or other
Biblical reference work. . . .
One complete copy of the work using quotations from the Today’s New
International Version must be sent to Zondervan within 30 days following the
publication of the work.
Rights and permission to quote from the TNIV text in printed or electronic
media intended for commercial use within the US and Canada that exceed the
above guidelines must be directed to, and approved in writing by, Zondervan
Publishing House.
Rights and permission to quote from the TNIV text in printed or electronic
media intended for commercial use within the UK, EEC, and EFTA countries
that exceed the above guidelines must be directed to, and approved in writing
by, Hodder & Stoughton, Ltd., 338 Euston Road, London, NW1 3BH,
Rights and permissions to quote from the TNIV text in media intended for
non-commercial use which exceed the above guidelines must be directed to,
and approved in writing by, International Bible Society, 1820 Jet Stream Drive,
Colorado Springs, CO 80921-3969.
The most current credit line for “fair use” quotations from the TNIV
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise indicated, are taken from the Holy
Bible, Today’s New International Version®. TNIV®. Copyright © 2002, 2004 by
International Bible Society. Used by permission of Zondervan. All rights
Note the use of the registered symbol after both the complete and abbreviated titles.
2:54 PM
Page 70
70 | Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining
If TNIV use falls outside the “fair use” guidelines, requiring a fee and
written permission, then a more complete copyright notice is required:
All Scripture quotations, unless otherwise noted, are taken from the Holy Bible,
Today’s New International Version®. TNIV®. Copyright © 2002, 2004 by
International Bible Society. Used by permission of Zondervan. All rights
The “TNIV” and “Today’s New International Version” trademarks are registered
in the United States Patent and Trademark Office by International Bible
Society. Use of either trademark requires the permission of International
Bible Society.
Letters should be addressed to:
Attn: TNIV Permission Director
5300 Patterson Ave. SE
Grand Rapids, MI 49530
The Jerusalem Bible (JB). Published in the US by Bantam Doubleday Dell
Publishing Group, Inc. The publisher’s policy reads, in part:
Up to 2,500 words [may be quoted], free of charge (providing such number of
words does not constitute more than one-third of the total text), covering rights
in the United States and Canada only. For additional territory, please apply to
Jerusalem Bible Permissions, Darton, Longman & Todd, 89 Lillie Road,
London SW6 1UD, England.
The credit line should read:
Excerpt from The Jerusalem Bible, copyright © 1966 by Darton, Longman &
Todd, Ltd. and Doubleday, a division of Bantam Doubleday Dell Publishing
Group, Inc. Reprinted by permission.
Apply for permission to:
Director of Rights and Permissions—Jerusalem Bible
Bantam Doubleday Dell
666 Fifth Ave.
New York, NY 10103
The New Jerusalem Bible (NJB). Published in the US by Bantam Doubleday
Dell Publishing Group, Inc. The publisher’s policy reads, in part:
Up to 2,500 words [may be quoted], free of charge (providing such number of
words does not constitute more than one-third of the total text), covering rights
in the United States and Canada only. For additional territory, please apply to
New Jerusalem Bible Permissions, Darton, Longman & Todd, 89 Lillie Road,
London SW6 1UD, England.
2:54 PM
Page 71
Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining | 71
The credit line should read:
Excerpt from The New Jerusalem Bible, copyright © 1985 by Darton, Longman
& Todd, Ltd. and Doubleday, a division of Bantam Doubleday Dell
Publishing Group, Inc. Reprinted by permission.
Requests for permission to quote from the New Jerusalem Bible should be
sent to:
Permissions Manager
Bantam Doubleday Dell
666 Fifth Ave.
New York, NY 10103
New Revised Standard Version (NRSV). Published by the National Council of
Churches, whose policy states:
1. As a general rule, if the quotation is less than a full book in length and
fewer than 500 verses, permission is granted without application.
2. If a quotation of one portion of the NRSV consists of a full book or
more, or if quotations of several excerpts have a combined length of more
than 500 verses, or if the quotation is more than 50 percent of the word
content of the proposed publication and deemed to be 50 percent or more
of the basic message of the proposed publication, it will be necessary for
the author or publisher to arrange with the Division for permission.
Credit lines for the various NRSV editions are as follows:
New Revised Standard Version Bible:
The Scripture quotations contained herein are from the New Revised Standard
Version of the Bible, copyrighted 1989 by the Division of Christian Education
of the National Council of Churches of Christ in the United States of
America, and are used by permission. All rights reserved.
New Revised Standard Version Bible, Catholic Edition:
The Scripture quotations contained herein are from the New Revised Standard
Version Bible, Catholic Edition, copyrighted [date to come; not yet in print] by
the Division of Christian Education of the National Council of Churches of
Christ in the United States of America, and are used by permission. All rights
New Revised Standard Version Apocryphal/Deuterocanonical Books:
The Scripture quotations contained herein are from the New Revised Standard
Version Apocryphal/Deuterocanonical Books, copyrighted 1989 by the Division
of Christian Education of the National Council of Churches of Christ in the
United States of America, and are used by permission. All rights reserved.
2:54 PM
Page 72
72 | Bible Permissions, Guidelines for Obtaining
New Revised Standard Version Common Bible:
The Scripture quotations contained herein are from the New Revised Standard
Version Common Bible, copyright [date to come; not yet in print] by the
Division of Christian Education of the National Council of Churches of Christ
in the United States of America, and are used by permission. All rights
Permission requests should be addressed to:
The National Council of the Churches of Christ in the USA
Division of Christian Education
Program Ministry on Bible Translation and Utilization
475 Riverside Drive
New York, NY 10115–0050
The Revised Standard Version (RSV). Published by the National Council of
Churches, whose policy states:
1. As a general rule, if the quotation is less than a full book in length and
fewer than 500 verses, permission is granted without application.
2. If a quotation of one portion of the RSV consists of a full book or more,
or if quotations of several excerpts have a combined length of more than
500 verses, or if the quotation is more than 50 percent of the word
content of the proposed publication and deemed to be 50 percent or more
of the basic message of the proposed publication, it will be necessary for
the author or publisher to arrange with the Division for permission.
Credit lines for the various RSV editions are as follows:
Revised Standard Version:
The Scripture quotations contained herein are from the Revised Standard Version
of the Bible, copyright 1946, 1952, 1971 by the Division of Christian
Education of the National Council of Churches of Christ in the USA. Used by
Revised Standard Version Bible, Catholic Edition:
The Scripture quotations contained herein are from the Revised Standard Version
Bible, Catholic Edition, copyright 1965 and 1966 by the Division of Christian
Education of the National Council of Churches of Christ in the USA. Used by
Revised Standard Version Apocrypha:
The Scripture quotations contained herein are from the Revised Standard Version
Apocrypha, copyright 1957 by the Division of Christian Education of the
National Council of Churches of Christ in the USA. Used by permission.
2:54 PM
Page 73
Bible Style: The New International Version | 73
Revised Standard Version Common Bible:
The Scripture quotations contained herein are from the Revised Standard Version
Common Bible, copyright 1973 by the Division of Christian Education of the
National Council of Churches of Christ in the USA. Used by permission.
Permission requests should be addressed to:
The National Council of the Churches of Christ in the USA
Division of Christian Education
Program Ministry on Bible Translation and Utilization
475 Riverside Drive
New York, NY 10115–0050
Common Public Domain Versions of the Bible
Virtually all English translations of the Bible published in the US before
1923 are in the public domain, although some published in the British Isles
before that date may still be protected by copyright in the countries of the
British Commonwealth. Naturally, all the classic translations, such as the
King James Version, the Tyndale Bible, and the Douay-Reims, can be quoted
without restriction.
Many recent editions of the Bible are also public domain. Among the most
common are:
American Revised Version (1901)
American Standard Version (1901)
Bible in Basic English (1949; rev. 1962; PD in US but not UK)
Hebrew Names Version of the World English Bible (ongoing; as yet, online only)
Modern Literal Version (recent; in software and online only)
Revised Version (NT 1881, OT 1885, Apoc. 1895)
World English Bible (ongoing; as yet, online only)
Young’s Literal Translation (1862)
Bible Style: The New International Version
The translators and editors of the New International Version (NIV) and
Today’s New International Version (TNIV) of the Bible have established style
guidelines that are largely compatible with those outlined in this manual (and
by extension CMS), but they differ in a few significant ways. These style
exceptions are used for both the text of the Bible itself and for all peripheral
matter, and they are recommended for books and other publications that are
tightly tied to the NIV text or to its supplementary material—so tightly, in
fact, that the reader would be confused if these NIV style exceptions were not
used. In general, these style rules also apply to the New International Reader’s
Version (NIrV).
2:54 PM
Page 74
74 | Bible Style: The New International Version
Omit the Serial Comma. The NIV and TNIV texts omit the comma before and,
or, and nor in a series unless the comma is required for clarity or to avoid
Use Three-Dot Ellipses. The NIV and TNIV use only three-dot ellipses unless
the fourth dot, which is actually a period preceding the ellipsis, is essential
for clarity or to prevent misreading.
Lowercase Prepositions of Three or Fewer Letters in Titles. While The Christian
Writer’s Manual of Style, like CMS, now recommends lowercasing all prepositions in titles regardless of length, the NIV style is to lowercase only those
of three or fewer letters.
The Deity Pronoun. The NIV and TNIV style differs slightly from The Christian
Writer’s Manual of Style in its recommendation regarding the lowercasing
of the deity pronoun. While CWMS allows for some exceptions to the universal lowercasing of the deity pronoun, the NIV and TNIV do not. In both
the NIV and TNIV texts and in all their supporting material, the lowercase
form of the pronoun should be used without exception.
LORD and GOD with Small Caps. The small-capped forms LORD and GOD, as
they appear in the NIV and TNIV, should be retained in all quotations, regardless of context.
Spelling Out Numbers. The NIV and TNIV stylists recommend spelling out
numbers through ten in ordinary text. This includes numbers indicating
people’s ages. Use numerals for all numbers above ten except for large round
Abbreviations of Chapter(s). The NIV and TNIV abbreviate the words chapter
and chapters as ch. and chs., respectively, rather than chap. and chaps.
Punctuation with Bible References. While both CWMS and the NIV/TNIV use
an en dash between continuous verse numbers (Matthew 4:8–10), the NIV
and TNIV use an em dash rather than an en dash between continuous chapter numbers (Matthew 4—8) or continuous verses spanning separate chapters (Matthew 4:8—5:10). Unlike CWMS, the NIV and TNIV do not use a
space after a comma in nonconsecutive verse numbers (Matthew 4:6,8,10).
Differences of Style between the NIV and the TNIV. Although style continuity
was scrupulously maintained between the NIV and TNIV, there are a few
differences. The one that received the most attention is the TNIV’s use of
gender-accurate pronouns when a masculine pronoun is used in the original
language to denote both men and women.
Also, to facilitate this, the TNIV accepts third-person plural pronouns in
general references when the sense is singular. Although controversial, this
usage is largely accepted by grammarians and style experts.
2:54 PM
Page 75
Bible Style: The New International Version | 75
Capitalization. By and large, the NIV and TNIV use the capitalized forms
shown in this manual (see “Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms”),
but there are exceptions.
In general, the NIV and TNIV are less inclined to capitalize occasional
epithets for persons of the Trinity, Satan, and some biblical characters, events,
and locations. There are exceptions, however, which should be noted below.
The NIV and TNIV accept all the capitalized forms shown in the list in
“Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms,” except the following, which
are the preferred forms of the editors and translators of the NIV and TNIV:
NIV/TNIV tend to lowercase occasional epithets for persons of the Trinity
bread of life (Bible or Christ)
eternal God; Eternal God
(used both ways. See Romans
16:26 and Genesis 21:33)
great high priest
high priest (Christ)
King of glory
King of kings
light of the world
Lord of hosts
Lord of lords
man of sin
man of sorrows
Passover lamb
shepherd (though Shepherd in
Hebrews 13:20 and 1 Peter
water of life
NIV/TNIV tend to lowercase epithets for Satan
evil one
wicked one
NIV/TNIV tend to lowercase some biblical events, people, things, and places
book of life (book of judgment)
celestial city (abode
of the redeemed)
false prophet (of Revelation)
high priestly prayer
Lamb’s book of life
land of promise
new Jerusalem (heaven)
patriarch, the (Abraham)
promised land (Canaan or
sun of righteousness
tower of Babel
tree of life (in Garden of Eden
and Revelation 22)
word of life
word of truth
2:54 PM
Page 76
76 | Bible Style: The New International Version
Though some epithets for biblical events, people, things, and places are capitalized
Advent (Christ’s first coming)
Battle of Armageddon (final battle)
Children of Israel
Garden of Eden
Garden of Gethsemane
Holy City, holy city (used both ways. See Rev. 21:2, 10 and Rev. 22:19)
Holy Place, holy place (used both ways. See Ez. 45:3 and Ez. 45:4)
Last Judgment, the
Millennium, the
Nativity, the
Rapture, the
Sheol (italicize when referred to as a Hebrew word)
Tent of Meeting (use lowercase when talking about the construction of the
tabernacle but capitalize when the context refers to the finished tabernacle)
Triumphal Entry, the
Virgin Birth, the
NIV/TNIV tend to capitalize descriptive terms for the Bible and portions of the Bible
Book of the Covenant
Book of the Law
Canon, the (Scripture)
Gospel (John’s, et al.)
Law of Moses
Mosaic Law
Catholic church (but Roman
Catholic Church)
Christianize (-ization)
Christology (-ical)
Gentile laws (adj.)
Gnostic (generic)
Good News, the (the gospel)
Judge, judge (used both ways.
See James 4:12 and Heb. 12:23)
living word (Bible)
Rock, the (Christ); rock, the
(used both ways. See
Ps. 92:15 and 2 Sam. 22:2)
Savior (depends on usage; note
on 2 Sam. 22:3: “my refuge
and my savior”)
twenty-third psalm
2:54 PM
Page 77
Bible Versions and Translations | 77
Bible Versions and Translations
Kinds of Versions and Translations. Three basic types of Bible translations exist:
(1) literal, (2) paraphrastic, and (3) dynamic. These make up, in reality, more
of a gradation, or spectrum, than three distinct categories.
1. A literal translation attempts to provide an exact linguistic equivalent
for each word in the original. While such translations are accurate,
they are most useful for academic study. The average reader, however,
can find literal translations confusing, and such translations usually
require extensive annotations to explain outmoded idioms, vocabulary, and references.
2. At the other extreme is the paraphrase, which attempts to render the
original in easily understood modern equivalents so that little explanation is required. Its extensive use of contemporary idiom and jargon can result in an extremely readable Bible but one that is also blind
to certain shades of meaning and inference in the original. Paraphrases
are also more highly susceptible to the paraphraser’s own misperceptions and biases.
3. A dynamic translation tries to split the difference between the literal
and the paraphrase. It attempts to adhere as closely as possible to the
original language, but when obscure idioms, vocabulary, and references occur, it attempts to render them in modern “dynamic” equivalents. The challenges of dynamic translation can run in the direction
of both the literal translation—that is, obscurity and overexplanation—and the paraphrastic—that is, misleading inaccuracy. Ideally,
such problems are minimized, however, and most Bible translations
meant for a general readership strive to be dynamic.
Many other adjectives are used to describe many different kinds of Bible
translations and versions. The following list will help sort out the most
abridgment—a Bible from which certain passages or books have been
eliminated to facilitate ease of reading
chronological Bible—a Bible in which the narrative elements are chronologically
condensed Bible—a Bible especially shortened for ease of reading; usually more
extensively abridged than an abridgment
inclusive Bible—a Bible in which gender-specific language has been made nongender-specific, especially in those cases where the gender-specific
construction of the original is clearly meant to be generic
interlinear Bible—a Bible in which the translation is given between the lines of
the original language
2:54 PM
Page 78
78 | Bible Versions and Translations
lectern Bible—an oversize, often ornamental, Bible designed to be displayed on
a lectern or special stand near or on the altar of a church; the type is usually
very large so that a standing reader can easily read it
literal translation—a translation that attempts to give literal rather than
dynamic equivalents for each word of the original
modernized version—usually refers to an older version of a Bible that has been
rendered into more contemporary language
parallel Bible—a Bible in which two or more versions are shown side by side for
comparison and study
paraphrase—a modernized version, usually in colloquial language, of an
existing translation
paraphrastic translation—a modernized version, usually in contemporary
colloquial English, though translated from the original texts
pew Bible—a Bible specially printed and bound to be used by worshipers in a
church setting; often the type size is a little larger than normal, and most
annotations are eliminated
reading Bible—a Bible printed without verse numbers or intruding annotations;
sometimes also called a reader’s Bible
synchronized Bible—a Bible in which the Gospels or certain OT historical books
have been melded into a single continuous narrative; also called a harmony
translation—implies that a Bible has been translated freshly from the original
updated version—an older version of the Bible that has been revised or altered
in some form to keep pace with changing times and tastes; usually more
extensive than a modernized version, which implies just updating of
wide-margin edition—a Bible printed with columns of white space in which the
reader may write his or her own notes
What Is the Bible? When you say, “the Bible,” most people assume they know
what you mean, and yet the book exists in a mindboggling number of versions, paraphrases, and translations in English, to say nothing of the many
translations into nearly every language on earth. Beyond that, even its basic
canon is a matter of dispute among various traditions. For instance, many
people who staunchly defend the King James Version as the authoritative
English translation are surprised to find that the Apocrypha was not only
included in the original edition of 1611 but was considered canonical at the
time. The Apocrypha was also included in the earlier Wycliff and Tyndale
To sort out just what is meant by “the Bible,” we offer the following four
lists: (1) The Bible Canon According to the Major Religions and Denominations; (2) Bible Translations, Paraphrases, and Significant Editions in English (along with their academic reference abbreviations and as much
background information as could be conveniently included); (3) Important
Non-English Versions of the Bible; and finally, for fun, (4) Infamous Versions of the Bible (known largely for their errors or eccentricities).
2:54 PM
Page 79
Bible Versions and Translations | 79
The Bible Canon According to the Major Religions and Denominations
Jewish Bible
Contains 24 books, originally written in Hebrew. It is similar in content
to the Christian Old Testament, but the two Samuels are one book, as
are the two Kings and the two Chronicles, and the 12 shorter prophetic
books are combined into one book called “The Minor Prophets.” The
Jewish Bible is divided into four large groupings:
The Pentateuch (the Torah): Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and
The Former Prophets: Joshua, Judges, Samuel, and Kings
The Latter Prophets (the Former and Latter Prophets together are called the
Nevi’im): Isaiah, Jeremiah, Ezekiel, and the Minor Prophets (which
incorporates Hosea, Joel, Amos, Obadiah, Jonah, Micah, Nahum,
Habakkuk, Zephaniah, Haggai, Zechariah, Malachi)
The Writings (the Kethuvim): Psalms, Proverbs, Job, Song of Songs, Ruth,
Lamentations, Ecclesiastes, Esther, Daniel, Ezra, Nehemiah, and
The acronym used for the major sections of the Jewish Bible is Tanak (Torah,
Nevi’im, Kethuvim).
Greek Old Testament (Septuagint)
Written in Greek, it contains 50 books, including all those of the Jewish Bible,
though the minor prophets are separated, and many books are slightly
altered in content. Job is shorter in the Greek, for instance; portions of
1 Samuel and Jeremiah are not found in the Greek; and some verses are
in a different order in Ezekiel and Jeremiah.
The Septuagint adds the following apocryphal books not found in the
Jewish Bible: 1 Esdras, Tobit, Judith, Wisdom of Solomon, Wisdom of the
Son of Sirach (Ecclesiasticus), Baruch, Epistle of Jeremiah, Song of the
Three Holy Children, Susanna, Bel and the Dragon, 1–4 Maccabees, and
Prayer of Manesseh.
The Vulgate
The earliest Latin version of the Bible, based on the work of Jerome and
extensively revised and edited throughout the Middle Ages. It contains
73 books, with basically the same order and format as the Catholic Bible
(see below), which was based on the Vulgate.
Protestant Bible
Contains 66 books. Translated into many languages.
The 39 books of the Old Testament are traditionally divided as follows:
The Historical Books: Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, Deuteronomy,
Joshua, Judges, Ruth, 1 Samuel, 2 Samuel, 1 Kings, 2 Kings, 1 Chronicles,
2 Chronicles, Ezra, Nehemiah, and Esther
The Poetical Books: Job, Psalms, Proverbs, Ecclesiastes, and Song of Songs
2:54 PM
Page 80
80 | Bible Versions and Translations
Protestant Bible (cont.)
The Prophetic Books: Isaiah, Jeremiah, Lamentations, Ezekiel, Daniel, Hosea,
Joel, Amos, Obadiah, Jonah, Micah, Nahum, Habakkuk, Zephaniah,
Haggai, Zechariah, and Malachi
The 27 books of the New Testament are divided as follows:
The Gospels: Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John
The Acts of the Apostles
The Epistles, or the Letters: Romans, 1 Corinthians, 2 Corinthians, Galatians,
Ephesians, Philippians, Colossians, 1 Thessalonians, 2 Thessalonians,
1 Timothy, 2 Timothy, Titus, Philemon, Hebrews, James, 1 Peter, 2 Peter,
1 John, 2 John, 3 John, and Jude
Catholic Bible
Available in many languages and often based on the Vulgate (see above).
Contains 73 books (46 OT; 27 NT), which are essentially the same as the
Protestant Bible, except with the addition of the writings of the
Apocrypha (some of which are separate books and others additions to
existing OT books):
The Apocrypha: Tobit, Judith, Additions to the Book of Esther, Wisdom of
Solomon, Sirach, Baruch, Additions to the Book of Daniel (Susanna, The
Song of the Three Holy Children, and Bel and the Dragon), 1 Maccabees,
and 2 Maccabees
Note that in the Catholic Bible and Vulgate, the books of the Apocrypha are
interspersed throughout, whereas in some Protestant Bibles, when they
are included, they are in a separate section between the OT and NT.
Anglican Bible
The same as the Protestant Bible, except it often includes the apocryphal
writings from the Catholic Bible as edifying though not canonical. The
books of the Apocrypha usually appear as a separate section between
the OT and NT.
Eastern Orthodox Bible
Available in many languages. The same contents as the Catholic Bible, with
the addition of two more apocryphal books (1 Esdras and the Prayer
of Manasseh) and two OT pseudepigraphal writings (Psalm 151 and
3 Maccabees)
Muslim Bible
Muslims believe that the Jewish Bible and Christian NT are divinely inspired and
should be respected. They admire the Torah, the Psalms (called Zaboor),
and the Gospels (called Injeel ) in particular but believe both the OT and
NT texts are corrupted, with original portions having been lost or
tampered with by partisan faiths. They accept specific tenets of the Bible
insofar as they are confirmed by the Qur’an, and any tenet contradictory
to the Qur’an is rejected as a human corruption.
2:54 PM
Page 81
Bible Versions and Translations | 81
The Book of Mormon
The Church of Jesus Christ of the Latter-Day Saints (Mormons) accepts the
Protestant Bible as translated by Joseph Smith as authoritative but
considers the Book of Mormon, which is called “Another Testament of
Jesus Christ,” to be equally canonical.
Bible Translations, Paraphrases, and Significant Editions in English
Style. In general, the names for all versions and translations of the Bible are set
in roman type—for instance, the King James Bible, the New International
Version, the Douay Version—especially when those versions appear in many
different editions and formats. When a specific edition of a particular version
is referred to, however, it should be italicized as a common book title—The
Good News Bible, The NIV Study Bible, The King James 2000 Bible.
The abbreviations of Bible translations, paraphrases, and significant editions are usually set in roman type. If the abbreviation is an acronymn incorporating the initial letters of the version, the letters are set in full capitals; for
instance, NIV is the correct abbreviation for the New International Version.
This is a major change from the former style of setting those abbreviations in
small caps. Likewise, if the abbreviation is the last name of the translator or
paraphraser, it is set in roman type with an initial capital letter, followed by
lowercase letters; for instance, Phillips is the abbreviation for that author’s
paraphrase, The New Testament in Modern English. If the abbreviation is a
complete word from the title of a specific edition, then it is set in italics; for
instance, Anchor is the correct abbreviation for The Anchor Bible.
This list presents a standard that can easily accommodate variations in
typographic style as needed.
Abbreviation Title and Information
Amplified Bible; (1958–65, rev. 1987)
American Bible Union Version; (1912)
Aitken Bible (NT 1777, complete 1782; first English language Bible printed in
America; essentially adapted from KJV)
An Inclusive Version (1995; gender-neutral revision of NRSV; Psalms and NT only)
New Testament in Basic English (Alford)
Analytic-Literal Translation (Darkness to Light Ministries; 1999; online literal
NT trans.: )
The Anchor Bible (1964)
American Revised Version (1901; US edition of ERV; public domain)
American Revised Version, margin
American Standard Version (1901; US edition of ERV; public domain)
The Complete Bible: An American Translation (Goodspeed, Smith, and others;
NT 1923; OT 1927; Apoc. 1938)
Authorized Version (1611; same as KJV; used in British references; public domain)
2:54 PM
Page 82
82 | Bible Versions and Translations
The New Testament (William Barclay; 1968–69)
The Bassendyne Bible (first Bible printed in English in Scotland; NT 1576;
whole Bible 1579; used the text of the Geneva Bible)
The Basic Bible (C. K. Ogden; 1950; uses basic vocabulary of 850 words)
The Bible in Basic English (1949; updated 1962; public domain in US only)
New Testament in Language of Today (Beck; Lutheran; 1963; rev. 1976;
reprinted in 1990 as God’s Word to the Nations)
The Bishop’s Bible (Archbishop Parker and others; 1568; a revision of the
Great Bible; sometimes called “Matthew Parker’s Bible”; public domain)
Bible in Living English (1972; used by Jehovah’s Witnesses)
Berkeley Version in Modern English (NT 1945; OT 1959)
Bible in Worldwide English (Annie Cressman; 1959; also referred to as “Cressman”)
The Cassirer New Testament (Heinz W. Cassirer; 1989)
Common English New Testament (American Bible Union; 1865; public domain)
Contemporary English Version (American Bible Society; 1995; fifth-grade
reading level)
Complete Jewish Bible (1998; David H. Stern, OT)
Concordant Literal New Testament (1926; A. E. Knoch, NT)
The Centenary New Testament (1924)
Coverdale Bible (Miles Coverdale; 1535; first full English translation to be
printed and its 1537 edition was the first full version to be printed in
England; incorporates Tyndale’s Pentateuch and NT; public domain)
The Cotton Patch Version (1973; loose paraphrase by Clarence Jordan; same
as Jordan)
Cranmer’s Bible (the 1540 edition of the Great Bible, with prologue by
The Christian Standard Bible (Southern Baptist Convention; not yet published)
The Darby Translation (1871; Dispensationalist; public domain)
The Dartmouth Bible (abridgment of KJV; 1961)
Documents of the New Testament (1934; paraphrase by G. W. Wade)
Douay Version, also called Douay-Rheims Bible (NT 1582; OT 1609–10;
based on Vulgate)
The Easy to Read Version (for deaf readers and ESL readers; fourth-grade
reading level)
Emphasized Bible (Rotherham; NT 1897; OT 1902; public domain)
English Revised Version (first major revision of KJV; NT 1881; OT 1885; Apoc.
1895; same as RV; public domain)
English Revised Version, margin
The Holy Bible: English Standard Version (Crossway; 2001)
Geneva Bible (first English Bible with verse divisions; trans. by William
Whittingham, Anthony Gilby, and Thomas Sampson; 1560; popularly
referred to as “The Breeches Bible” for its translation of Gen. 3:7)
Good News Translation (same as TEV; also called Good News Bible and Good
News for Modern Man; NT 1966; OT 1976)
Great Bible (Coverdale’s revision of Matthew Bible; 1539; 1539 edition called
“Cromwell’s Bible” because of his portrait on title page; 1540 edition called
“Cranmer’s Bible” for his portrait)
2:54 PM
Page 83
Bible Versions and Translations | 83
God’s Word Translation (Luther Bible Society; 1995; update of Beck)
God’s Word to the Nations (1995; same as GWT)
Hammond’s Paraphrase (Henry Hammond; 1653; NT, based on KJV)
Holy Name Bible (1963)
Hebrew Names Version of the World English Bible (rev. of WEB that uses Hebrew
names; public domain)
The Bible in Basic English (Hooke; NT 1940; OT 1949)
The International Children’s Bible (1986; same as ICV)
The International Children’s Version (original name for NCV; 1986; same as
International Standard Version (ISV Foundation; NT 1998; OT not yet
Inspired Version (1867; supposedly “inspired” revision by Joseph Smith,
Mormon founder; also called Joseph Smith Translation; public domain)
Jerusalem Bible (first Catholic Bible translated from original languages rather
than from Vulgate; French 1956; English 1966; French version referred to as
BJ: La Bible de Jérusalem)
Jefferson Bible (Thomas Jefferson’s extracted version of KJV NT Gospels;
c. 1820; public domain)
The Jewish New Testament
Cotton Patch Version (Clarence Jordan’s dialect paraphrase; 1973; same as CPV)
Holy Scriptures: Jewish Publication Society Version of the Old Testament (1917)
The Joseph Smith Translation (Joseph Smith, founder of the Church of the
Latter Day Saints; 1867)
The King James 2000 Bible
Twenty-first Century King James Version of the Holy Bible (1994; modernized
King James II Version (1971)
King James, Clarified (modernized KJV)
King James Version (same as Authorized Version; 1611; public domain)
Holy Bible: A Translation from the Latin Vulgate in the Light of the Hebrew and
Greek Original (Knox; NT 1945; OT 1949)
Holy Bible from Ancient Eastern Manuscripts (Lamsa; 1933, 1939, 1940, 1957)
The Four Gospels and the Revelation (Lattimore; 1979); Acts and Letters of the
Apostles (Lattimore; 1982)
The Living Bible (Kenneth Taylor; paraphrase; NT 1967; OT 1970; also called
The Book, and later reprinted as The Way)
The Leeser Bible (a nineteenth century Jewish version by Isaac Leeser; public
Living Oracles (Alexander Campbell; 1835; NT; public domain)
The New Testament in Scots (Scots dialect NT by William L. Lorimer; 1983)
Literal Translation of the Holy Bible (Jay P. Green; 1976; only available on
software and online)
Matthew Bible (Thomas Matthew; 1537; first English Bible printed in
Modern King James Version (J. P. Green; 1999; modernized KJV)
Modern Language Bible (NT 1945; same as NBV; OT 1959)
2:54 PM
Page 84
84 | Bible Versions and Translations
Modern Literal Version (a software version, updating of the ASV; public
A New Translation of the Bible (Moffatt; NT 1913; OT 1924; rev. 1935)
Montgomery Centenary Translation of the New Testament in Modern English (Helen
Montgomery and American Baptist Publication Society; 1924)
Modern Reader’s Bible (Moulton; 1907; public domain)
The Message: The Bible in Contemporary Language (paraphrastic translation by
Eugene Peterson; NT 1993; whole Bible 2000)
New American Bible (Catholic; NT 1941; OT 1969)
New American Standard Bible (Lockman Foundation; NT 1963; OT 1971; rev.
New American Standard Bible (Lockman Foundation; 1995 update of NASB)
The New Authorized Version (1998; updated KJV with Apocrypha; same as
New Berkeley Version in Modern English (NT 1945; OT 1959; same as MLB)
The New Century Version (third-grade reading level; NT 1978; complete
1986; same as ICB and ICV)
The New Evangelical New Testament (1990; NT of GWTN)
New English Bible (NT 1961; OT and Apoc. 1970)
The New English Translation (Biblical Studies Foundation; 1997; software and
New International Reader’s Version (International Bible Society; 1996; thirdgrade-reading-level version of NIV; gender-inclusive language of British
edition removed in US version. Note the lowercase “r” amid the full capitals)
New International Version (International Bible Society; NT 1973; OT 1978)
NIV Study Bible (1985)
The New Jerusalem Bible (update of JB; 1985)
Tanak: The Holy Scriptures: The New Jewish Publication Society Translation
According to the Traditional Hebrew Text (1988; update of JPS)
New Jewish Version (rev. of JPS, 1962–82; Torah rev. 1985)
New King James Version (loosely based on KJV, though largely new trans.;
New Living Translation (Tyndale House; 1996; trans. based on LB, but less
paraphrastic; sixth-grade reading level)
New Life Version (Gleason H. and Kathryn Ledyard; 1969; third-grade reading
level, uses basic vocabulary of 850 words)
Noli New Testament (Albanian Orthodox Church in America; NT; 1961)
New Testament in Modern English (Norlie; 1951)
The New Testament (Noyes; 1868; public domain)
The New Revised Standard Version (National Council of Churches; 1990; rev.
of RSV; gender-inclusive)
New Scofield Reference Bible (KJV; 1967)
New Testament: An Understandable Version (1998)
New World Translation of the Holy Scriptures (Watchtower Bible and Tract
Society [Jehovah’s Witnesses]; loosely based on ASV; 1961)
Oxford Annotated Bible (RSV; 1962)
Original Bible Project (literal version was due 2000 online; still in progress)
2:54 PM
Page 85
Bible Versions and Translations | 85
Oxford Revised Standard Version (Catholic version of RSV)
New Testament in Modern English (paraphrase by J. B. Phillips; 1958; later
editions less paraphrastic)
People’s New Covenant (Christian Scientist; 1925)
Reader’s Digest Bible (heavily condensed RSV; 1982)
Revised English Bible (the second edition and revision of NEB; 1989)
Rheims New Testament (NT of DV; 1582; public domain)
Penguin Bible (Rieu; 1952)
Revised Standard Version (National Council of Churches; NT 1946; OT 1952;
Apoc. 1957; rev. of ASV)
Revised Version (NT 1881; OT 1885; Apoc. 1895; public domain)
Revised Version, margin
Simple English Bible (International Bible Translators, Inc.; NT 1980)
Joseph Smith Translation (Joseph Smith, Mormon; 1867; public domain; also
referred to as the Inspired Version, or IV)
Scofield Reference Bible (KJV; 1909)
Taverner’s Bible (trans. by Richard Taverner; 1537; public domain; revision of
Today’s Bible (retitling of GWTN; 1995)
Twentieth Century New Testament (based on Weymouth; 1898–1901; public
The Everyday Bible (1986; same as NCV)
Today’s English Version (American Bible Society; NT 1966; OT 1976; also
called The Good News Bible and Good News for Modern Man; easy reading
Third Millennium Bible (modernized KJV, with some Apocrypha; 1998; same as
Today’s New International Version (International Bible Society updating of NIV,
gender-inclusive; NT 2002; OT 2005)
Tyndale New Testament (1526; based largely on both Erasmus’s Greek
Testament and Latin version, as well as the Vulgate and Luther’s German
version; the Pentateuch followed c. 1530; public domain)
World English Bible (based on ASV; currently in progress; public domain)
Webster’s Bible (Noah Webster’s rev. of KJV, with updated spelling; 1833;
public domain)
Wesley New Testament (John Wesley’s rev. of KJV; 1790; public domain)
Weymouth’s New Testament in Modern Speech (Richard Weymouth; 1903; rev.
1924 and 1929)
Williams, C.B. New Testament: A Translation in Language of the People (Charles B. Williams;
Williams, C.K. New Testament in Plain English (Charles K. Williams; 1963)
Wuest Expanded Translation (1961)
Wycliffe Bible (c. 1380; trans. from Vulgate by Nicholas of Hereford and an
anonymous translator. Two early versions exist: Bodley [before 1382,
catalogued in Bodley Library as MS Bodley 959] and Purvey [c. 1400]. Not
actually printed in its complete form until 1810; public domain)
Young’s Literal Translation of the Bible (Young; 1862; based on KJV; rev. 1887,
1898, new rev. forthcoming; public domain)
2:54 PM
Page 86
86 | Bible Versions and Translations
Important Non-English Versions of the Bible
Abbreviation Title and Information
Version of Aquila (c. AD 130; Greek OT)
Bedell’s Bible (trans. of KJV into Irish)
Biblia Hebraica (Rudolf Kittel; Hebrew OT text; 1925 and others)
Biblia Hebraica Stuttgartensia (Hebrew OT text; 1983 and others)
La Bible de Jérusalem (original French; 1956)
Complutensian Polyglot (first Bible printed in Greek and Hebrew; in six
volumes; 1513–17)
Algonquin Bible (John Eliot; first Bible printed in America; 1662)
Erasmus New Testament (Latin trans. from Greek of NT by Erasmus; 1516)
Ferrara Bible (first Spanish OT, trans. from Hebrew; 1553)
Gutenberg Bible (Johannes Gutenberg; first Bible and first book printed on a
printing press with movable type; the Latin Vulgate; 1456; sometimes called
the Forty-two Line Bible; followed by the Thirty-Six Line Bible, c. 1458–59)
Hebrew Bible (OT; general name for many editions)
Polish trans. of Vulgate by John of Lemberg; 1561
Luther Bible (Martin Luther trans. into German; 1534)
Septuagint (3d and 2d centuries BC; Greek version of Hebrew Bible; the four
notable editions are the Complutensian, the Aldine, the Grabian, and the
Vatican Codex)
A specific copy of the Gutenberg Bible discovered in the Mazarin Library,
Paris, in 1760
Masoretic Text (basis for Christian OT; c. 1100)
Novum Testamentum Graece, 27th ed. (Erwin Nestle and Kurt Aland; 1993)
First complete Slavonic Bible, printed in Russia; 1581
First complete Latin translation from original languages by a modern scholar
(1528; Santes Pagninus)
An early French translation by Louis de Sacy; c. 1670
Sauer Bible (German Luther Bible; the first Bible printed in America in a
European language; 1743)
Stephanus Greek New Testament (printed in Paris by Robert Stephanus; first
NT to have verse numbers; one of the sources for KJV and other translations;
Version of Symmachus (late 2d. cent.; idiomatic Greek OT)
Version of Theodotion (early 2d cent.; Greek OT; partly a revision of LXX)
The Greek New Testament, 4th ed. (United Bible Societies; last rev. 2000)
Latin Vulgate (Jerome; 405; also called the Jerome Bible)
The New Testament in the Original Greek (B. F. Westcott and F. J. A. Hort;
Wuyck’s Bible (first authorized Polish translation; 1599)
The Zurich Bible (1530; incorporates Luther’s NT and portions of his OT;
predates Luther’s complete translation by four years)
2:54 PM
Page 87
Bible Versions and Translations | 87
Infamous Versions of the Bible
Why include a list of Bibles famous largely for their errors? Admittedly
this list is provided largely for whimsical reasons, but they do have a more
serious purpose as well. First, they are interesting in themselves. Second, the
list will assist the author, editor, and proofreader when a reference is made
to one of these Bibles.
Most books don’t achieve fame solely for their misprints, but the Bible is
an exception because of the aura of sanctity that surrounds it. The only other
writings that even distantly compete with the Bible for their number of infamous editions are the works of Shakespeare, which have acquired an aura of
sanctity all their own. For instance, in one edition, Hamlet’s famous “To be
or not to be” was rendered “To be or to be.” The edition was dubbed the
Optimist’s Shakespeare.
Also, there are some fine points to the styling of these titles. For instance,
when the misprint itself becomes part of the popular title, it is placed in quotation marks. If it is a generic term describing the mistake, the word is not
set in quotes. (In the following notes, the correct word is sometimes provided
in brackets.) All of these are set in roman type because they are actually
descriptive epithets rather than formal titles.*
“Adultery” Bible
A 1631 KJV, printed for Charles I by Robert Barker and Martin
Lucas, renders the seventh commandment “Thou shalt commit
adultery.” Also called the Wicked Bible.
A 1923 KJV contains a table of family affinities that includes the
line “A man may not marry his grandmother’s wife.”
The first Geneva Bible (1560) renders Gen. 3:7 “They sowed figge
tree leaves together, and made themselves breeches.”
The first Coverdale Bible (1535) translates “terrors” as “bugs”
in Ps. 91:5: “Thou shalt not nede to be afrayed for eny bugges
by night.” In its defense, however, the word bugges at that time
meant “bogie,” or ghosts.
An 1823 KJV translates “camels” for “damsels” in Gen. 24:61:
“And Rebekah arose, and her camels.”
A 1792 KJV has Philip denying Christ rather than Peter in Luke
An 1806 KJV reads “discharge” for “charge” in 1 Tim. 5:21:
“I discharge thee before God . . .”
An 1810 KJV renders Matt. 13:43 “Who hath ears to ear, let him
A KJV printed for Charles I renders Ps. 14:1 “A fool hath said in his
heart there is a God.”
Affinity Bible
“Breeches” Bible
“Bug” Bible
“Camels” Bible
Denial Bible
“Discharge” Bible
“Ears to Ear” Bible
“Fool” Bible
*This list is loosely adapted from both William S. Walsh’s Handy Book of Literary Curiosities
(Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1892) and Brewer’s Dictionary of Phrase and Fable (New York:
Harper & Brothers, n.d.).
2:54 PM
Page 88
88 | Bible Versions and Translations
“Forgotten Sins” Bible
Harwood’s Bible
“He” Bible; “She” Bible
Incunabula Bible
“Judas” Bible
Leda Bible
“Lions” Bible
“More Sea” Bible
“Murderers” Bible
“Placemakers” Bible
“Printers” Bible
“Rosin” Bible
“Sin On” Bible
“Standing Fishes” Bible
“To Remain” Bible
“Treacle” Bible
“Unrighteous” Bible
“Vinegar” Bible
Wicked Bible
“Wife-hater” Bible
A 1638 KJV renders Luke 7:47 “Her sins which are many are
forgotten [forgiven].”
English minister Edward Harwood (18th century) paraphrased NT
in the genteel language of the day. For example, in Rev. 3:15–16,
Christ tells the Laodicean church: “Since, therefore, you are now
in a state of lukewarmness, a disagreeable medium between the
two extremes, I will, in no long time, eject you from my heart with
fastidious contempt.”
The first KJV of 1611 renders Ruth 3:15 “he went into the city,”
which is, according to the Hebrew, correct. The second printing
incorrectly rendered it “she went into the city.” Nearly all
subsequent English versions reproduced the error until it was
corrected in the Revised Version, 1885.
Transposed numbers on the title page of this Elizabethan Bible
dated its printing as 1495 rather than 1594.
One printing of the 1611 KJV has Judas rather than Jesus initiating
the Last Supper in Matt. 26:26.
A 1572 Bishop’s Bible scandalously borrows decorative woodcuts
from an edition of Ovid’s Metamorphoses, including one of Leda
and the swan.
A notoriously error-riddled printing of KJV that, among other
errors, renders 1 Kings 8:19 “Thy son . . . shall come forth out of
thy lions [loins].”
A 1641 KJV renders Rev. 21:1 as “there was more sea” rather than
“there was no more sea.”
An 1801 KJV renders “murderers” for “murmurers” in Jude 16:
“These are murderers, complainers, walking after their own lusts.”
A 1562 Geneva Bible renders Matt. 5:9 “Blessed are the
placemakers [peacemakers].”
A 1702 KJV renders Ps. 119:161 “Printers [princes] have
persecuted me without a cause.”
The 1609 Douay Bible translates “balm” as “rosin” in Jer. 8:22:
“Is there noe rosin in Galaad?” See also “Treacle” Bible.
The first English Bible printed in Ireland (1716) renders John 5:14
as “Sin on more” rather than “Sin no more.”
An 1806 KJV renders Ezek. 47:10 “The fishes [fishermen] shall
stand upon it.”
In 1805 a proofreader marked on some galleys that a comma was
“to remain.” His instructions were mistakenly transferred to the
text of Gal. 4:29: “Persecuted him that was born after the spirit to
remain, even so it is now.”
The first Bishop’s Bible (1568) translated “balm” as “treacle” in Jer.
8:22: “Is there no tryacle in Gilead?” See also “Rosin” Bible.
A 1653 KJV leaves out the word “not” in 1 Cor. 6:9: “The unrighteous shall inherit the Kingdom of God.”
A 1717 KJV titles Luke 20 “The Parable of the Vinegar [Vineyard].”
See “Adultery” Bible.
An 1810 KJV renders Luke 14:26 “If any man come to me, and
hate not his father and mother . . . yea, and his own wife [life]
also . . .”
2:54 PM
Page 89
Boldface Type | 89
Bible Versus Scripture
See “Scripture Versus Bible.”
Biblical Time
See “Hours, Biblical” and “Watches of the Night.”
See “Sources.”
Block Quotations
See “Quotations.”
Body Matter, Elements of a Book’s
The body matter of a book is its essential content, its primary reason for
being a book in the first place. The elements of any book’s body matter
should be arranged in the following order, as appropriate:
Inside half-title page (recto if used, followed by a blank verso)
Part title page (on recto page, usually followed by a blank verso)
Part epigraph (if it applies to entire part; on recto, verso, or part-title page)
Chapter title page (on recto page)
Chapter epigraph (if it applies to chapter only; on recto, verso, or chapter-title
Chapter number and title (usually on recto page)
Text of chapter (usually starts recto)
Discussion questions (on recto, verso, or last page of chapter)
Chapter endnotes (on recto, verso, or last page of chapter)
Chapter bibliography or “For Further Reading” (on recto, verso, or last page of
Epilogue or conclusion (on recto page)
Boldface Type
As a rule, authors, designers, and editors should avoid using boldface type
in text, although it is commonly used in heads and display type. The kind of
emphasis gained from boldface type can usually be achieved with less unevenness of appearance and distraction by using italics.
By contrast, boldface type may be useful and appropriate in reference
books, workbooks, and other books in which design aesthetics are of secondary concern and in which extra emphasis is needed.
2:54 PM
Page 90
90 | Boldface Type
Boldface type is commonly used in reference materials to indicate crossreferences, though, again, italics are often used instead. In place of both boldface and italic, which can equally be confused with emphasis, many academic
works use cf. (Latin confer, to compare), which is an abbreviation commonly
used for cross-references. When boldface is used to indicate a cross-reference,
that fact should be made clear to the reader in a note at the beginning of the
Bookmaking Terminology
Like any trade, the book production industry has developed its own terminology. The list below demystifies some of the more common terms that
refer to the physical makeup of the book, as opposed to the typographic or
editorial makeup. These should prove helpful to the author when discussing
the actual packaging of his or her creation.
absorption—the rate at which ink dries as it is absorbed in paper
accordion fold—paper folded in a zigzag fashion
acetate—transparent plastic laid over artwork on which color separation and other
instructions can be written
achromatic colors—black, white, and gray are considered achromatic colors for
printing purposes
acid-free paper—paper made without acid content (neutral PH); prolongs paper
advance copies—copies of a book sent to an author or reviewer before publication
alkaline paper—high quality acid-free paper
antique—a natural or slightly cream-colored paper
antique finish—a slightly rough texture on paper, often used on covers
archival paper—the highest quality acid-free paper, used mostly for documents
back flap—the back (right hand) folded portion of a dust jacket
back lining—a cloth or paper strip glued to the signatures to hold them together
bind—to join pages together with thread, wire, glue, or other adhesives
binding—the gathering and adhering of printed signatures
bleed—when printed material is intended to run off the trimmed edge of a page
blind stamp—embossing a book’s cover or dust jacket with a raised image that
does not carry ink or metallic leaf; also called blind embossing
blowup—to enlarge
broadside—a single sheet, printed flat and either unfolded or folded once
broadside page—a printed page that must be turned on its side to be read
2:54 PM
Page 91
Bookmaking Terminology | 91
case—the cover of a hardcover book
casebound—a book with a stiff cover; also called hardcover or clothbound
cast off—to estimate the length of a book before typesetting
chapbook—a single signature book, usually with fewer than 44 pages
clothbound—a book with a hard cover; also called hardcover or casebound
composition—the setting of the book’s type
crash—the piece of cloth sometimes used to reinforce the spine of a book’s cover
crop—to trim the edges of a photo or other graphic image
dead copy—once a new set of galleys is run, the previous version is called the
dead copy; sometimes called foul proof
dead matter—the old galleys and papers returned from the printer
die cut—the cutting of holes in paper by using sharp steel rules bent to the
appropriate shape
double-page spread—facing pages on which the print or image runs across the
drop shipment—paying to have a shipment sent to another address
dummy—a mockup, or preliminary layout, to give a rough idea of the finished
dust jacket—the printed and folded paper sheet that wraps around the cover of a
hardcover book
embossing—pressing a relief image onto paper, either with or without foil or ink
end paper—also called end sheet; the piece of paper glued to the inside of a
book’s cover to hide the tabs where the case is glued to the signatures. End
papers can be printed or colored or left blank.
errata—a loose, printed piece of paper inserted into a book, acknowledging and
correcting printer’s errors
f & g—short for “folded and gathered”; an unbound copy of a book’s signatures
flap—the front or back folded portion of a dust jacket
flap copy—the text printed on a book’s dust jacket flaps
flyleaf—the half of the end paper not glued down to the case; it is usually the first
and last page in any book
foil—thin metallic material impressed on paper with a stamping die; used on
foul proof—see dead copy
foxing—brown spotting on old or non-acid-free papers
front flap—the front (left hand) folded portion of a dust jacket
galleys—pages of the book printed out for inspection purposes before the final
printing is done
gatefold—a page that folds out; a cover or two facing interior pages that fold out
from the book
gutter—the space, or margin, between two columns of text; in most books this
falls in the place where the pages are gathered into the spine
2:54 PM
Page 92
92 | Bookmaking Terminology
halftone—a method of reproducing art of photographs that converts the image
into a series of minute, printable dots
hard copy—a paper copy as opposed to a computer or digitized copy
hardcover, or hardbound—a book with a stiff cover; same as clothbound or
headband—a piece of decorative fabric, formerly sewn, now glued to the top and
bottom of a hardcover book, between the case and the gathered pages
hinge—the place where the cover is connected to the spine of the book; also
called a joint
imposition—arranging the pages so that they will print in the correct order
ink-jet printer—a method of printing by spraying minute dots of ink onto paper
jog—to align paper along the edge
joint—the place where the cover is connected to the spine of the book; also called
a hinge
keyline—a finished piece of art, showing the final position and color, ready for the
laser printer—a method of printing in which a beam of laser light is projected on
paper so as to attract ink (called toner)
library binding—an especially durable book bound in accordance with standards
established by the American Library Association
line art—artwork that contains no gray tones, only black and white; also called line
live copy—the most recent and current set of galleys; contrast with dead copy
mackle—an intentional double or blurred image on a printed page
markup—marking a paper copy of a book, indicating the elements of a book for
the typesetter; in digitized copies of manuscripts, this means the addition of
codes to indicate the different elements
newsprint—paper made from raw ground wood
oblong—binding a book along its shorter edge
offprint—a book page or the cover of the book, printed in single sheets for
promotional purposes
overrun—copies of a book printed in excess of the planned print run
paperbound—a book with a paper or light cardboard cover; also called softcover
perfect binding—a method of binding that uses glue to fasten the pages together
after the folds have been trimmed off
prepress—all the steps in production before the actual printing is done
printer-ready copy—a paper or digitized copy of the final book from which the
book will be printed
2:54 PM
Page 93
Bookmaking Terminology | 93
ream—500 sheets of paper, regardless of weight or size
recycled paper—previously printed paper than has been pulped, bleached of ink,
and made into new sheets of paper
run-around—type that is shaped so as to fit around an image on the page
saddlestitch—a binding method of holding the pages of a single signature
together by using a staple, wire, or thread
self-cover—using the same paper for the cover of a book as is used for the text
sew-and-glue—holding sewn signatures together with hot adhesive and a glued
paper cover
short run—a print run of 100 to 2,000 copies
show through—ink printed on one side of a page but visible from the other; some
show through is unavoidable, but the goal of printing is to minimize it
shrink wrap—clear plastic that is heat-shrunk around books to protect them in
signature—large sheets of paper that are printed, folded into booklet-looking
bundles, and gathered to make up the book’s pages
slip case—a decorated cloth- or paper-covered cardboard box into which a single
book or a set of books can be inserted
Smyth sewn—a method of sewing signatures together that allows the book’s
pages to open flat, with little bend in the gutter
softcover—a book with a paper or light cardboard cover; also called paperbound
spine—the part of the book that connects the two covers together and holds in
the book’s pages
spiral binding—holding pages together by use of a spiral-shaped length of wire
spot varnish—applying a shiny coating to only a specified portion of a book’s
tapes—strips of paper or cloth added to a book’s binding to give it extra strength
tear sheet—a page torn from a book, showing corrections needing to be made
thumb edge—the edge of the book opposite the binding
tip-in—a separate page intended to be glued into a book after printing
trade book—any book intended to be sold to the general public
trim—cutting away the edges of a book or of paper
varnish—a clear protective coating added to paper
vignette—an illustration in which the edges fade
watermark—a faint image impressed on paper by the papermaker to identify the
maker; can be seen only when held up to the light
webpress—a printing press that prints on a continuous roll of paper and on both
sides of the paper, and cuts and folds sheets into signatures
2:54 PM
Page 94
94 | Born Again
Born Again
This term, which finds its origin in John 3:3, should be hyphenated as an
adjective (born-again Christian) but set as two words otherwise (he was born
While this well-worn term still has credibility among evangelical
Christians, it has been somewhat tarnished through overuse. For many
people, both inside and outside the church, it has an aura of religious cant.
Since the seventies, the popular press has used it sarcastically to describe anyone who has adopted a new creed or enthusiasm with zeal, as in a born-again
fiscal conservative or a born-again vegetarian. For these reasons, the term
should be used with care or even avoided if the target readership is wider
than the specifically Christian subculture.
Braces { } are seldom used in ordinary typesetting. Sometimes referred to
as curly brackets, they are used primarily as a means of grouping a number
of items together, such as multiple lines of type. Unlike brackets and parentheses, braces are not necessarily used in pairs, and because of their special
function of bracketing many items, they are also extended in length as
Types. Four different typographic devices are commonly referred to as brackets:
square brackets [ ], usually called simply brackets
round brackets ( ), usually called parentheses
curly brackets { }, usually called braces
angle brackets < >, also called less than and greater than signs
All of these are used to enclose parenthetical or appended material in various contexts, but since, after parentheses, the square brackets are the most
often used in text preparation, the term brackets, unmodified, refers to them.
(For more detail about round brackets, see “Parentheses.”)
Appropriateness. By and large, all brackets, except for parentheses, should be
used as seldom as possible since most readers are unfamiliar with their technical functions. Wherever possible, commas or ordinary parentheses should
be used for parenthetical elements. In ordinary text curly brackets and angle
brackets should never be used. Square brackets, however, are unavoidable
in certain situations, such as in quoted material or within parentheses.
Within Quoted Material. Square brackets are most commonly used to contain
an editorial comment, substitution, or explanation within quoted material.
2:54 PM
Page 95
Brand Names | 95
The bracketed word may either replace a word in the original or be placed
next to a word as an amplification or as a correction to an error.
“On September 2, 1666, [Richard Baxter] witnessed the Great Fire of London.”
[Replaces a word in the original.]
“The creed was first proposed by Eusebius [of Caesarea] in AD 325.” [Amplifies
the meaning of a word.]
“Gutenberg [actually Fust and Shoeffer using Gutenberg’s types] completed the
Psalter in 1457.” [Corrects an error.]
For Parenthetical Thought. Brackets are also commonly used to mark a parenthetical statement made within an already parenthetical context (sometimes
called parentheses within parentheses).
Daniel interpreted the mysterious inscription (“Mene, mene, tekel, parsin”
[Dan. 5:25] ) immediately before Belshazzar’s death.
When Adjacent to Parentheses. When an open or close square bracket is placed
immediately adjacent to an open or close parenthesis, a thin space should be
inserted between them.
With Font Changes. All types of brackets should be set in the same font as the
surrounding sentence or text, not necessarily in the same font as the material contained within the brackets. For examples, see “Parentheses, With Font
Brand Names
Often, the distinction between brand names, which are trademarked and
therefore capitalized, and their generic equivalents is a useful one. The use of
a well-known brand name in writing is generally acceptable as long as the
writer has a specific reason for specifying the product by name, though obviously the writer should avoid any negative or defamatory statements about
the specific brand. If a product is being singled out for criticism by name,
the author or editor should always ask an attorney to review the manuscript
before publication. Also, the brand name should never be used in such a way
(as in a title or in cover or advertising copy) as to suggest that the brand’s
maker is endorsing the book or product.
In fiction, brand names are frequently used to give the narrative an air of
realism. Again, this is usually acceptable as long as the context is not one
that might give offense to the product’s manufacturer (such as a character
getting sick or dying after using a given product).
Even the above guidelines are no guarantee that an especially aggressive
trademark owner won’t attempt to sue for perceived damages or to have the
publisher cease using the name, but the guidelines offer the best protection
2:54 PM
Page 96
96 | Brand Names
for the publisher. Still, litigation, even if unlikely to succeed, can be costly. So
caution is recommended.
Trademark Symbol. When a brand name is used in text, the trademarkregistration symbol ® does not need to be shown after the brand or trade
name. This is distracting to the reader and unnecessary in most contexts. A
trademark symbol, ® or ™, should be used, however, whenever a registered
trademark name is used on the cover of a book, for instance, or in advertising copy or anywhere else where its use might be taken as an endorsement
of the product, and permission for its use must first be obtained in writing
from the trademark owner. In most cases, obtaining such permission must be
done by contract and an attorney should be consulted.
Word Lists. Two lists follow. The first itemizes some common brand names that
are often mistaken for generic terms. The generic name is also given as an
alternative. The second list shows brand names that because of their age,
common usage, or numerous imitators have passed into general use and are
therefore lowercased. The generic terms, as well as the words in the second
list, may be used in pejorative or negative contexts if necessary, since no specific manufacturer is implied.
Common Brand Names and Their Generic Equivalents
Alka-Seltzer—effervescent antacid tablets
Anacin—analgesic tablets, aspirin
Autoharp—button-chorded zither
Baggies—plastic bags
Band-Aid—adhesive bandage
Books on Tape—audio book, audio tape
Bufferin—buffered aspirin
Chap Stick—lip balm
Coca-Cola, or Coke—cola, pop, soda,
or soft drink
Crock-Pot—slow cooker
Dacron—polyester fiber
Day-Glo paint—fluorescent paint
Dictaphone—dictating machine
Dobro—metal bodied guitar
Drano—drain opener
Dumpster—trash bin
Fig Newton—fig cookie
Formica—laminated plastic
Frisbee—toy flying disk
Grand Marnier—liqueur
Jacuzzi—whirlpool bath
Jell-O—flavored gelatin dessert
Kitty Litter—cat-box filler
Kleenex—facial tissue or paper tissue
Kodak—film, camera, etc.
Kool-Aid—powdered soft-drink mix
Kotex—sanitary napkin (pl., Kotex)
Laundromat—coin-operated laundry
Levi’s—denim jeans (note ’s)
Liquid Paper—correction fluid
Lycra—spandex, a synthetic fiber
Maalox—antacid liquid
Mace—tear gas
Magic Marker—felt-tipped or marking pen
Masonite—hardboard product
Muzak—background music
Naugahyde—vinyl-coated fabric
Novocain—local anesthetic
NutraSweet—aspartame, nutritive
2:54 PM
Page 97
British Style | 97
Olean—olestra, non-fat cooking oil
Pampers—disposable diapers
Pepsi—cola soft drink
Perrier—carbonated mineral water
Ping-Pong—table tennis
Plexiglas—acrylic plastic
Popsicle—frozen dessert bars
Post-It—sticky tags, self-adhesive notes
Pyrex—heat-resistant glass
Q-Tip—cotton swab
Rollerblade—in-line skate
Rolodex—desktop address file
Saltines—soda cracker
Sanka—decaffeinated coffee
Saran Wrap—plastic wrapping film
Scotch tape—adhesive or cellophane tape
Sheetrock—plaster board
Simoniz, Simonize—paste wax
Stetson—cowboy hat
Styrofoam—plastic foam
Sweet’N Low—sugar substitute
Tabasco—pepper sauce
Tang—instant orange drink
Teflon—nonstick surface
Touch-Tone phone—pushbutton phone
Tupperware—plastic storage container
U-Haul—rented moving truck or trailer
Vaseline—petroleum jelly
Velcro—fabric fastener
Wite-Out—correction fluid
X-Acto—modeler’s knife, layout knife
Xerox—copier, duplicating machine, photo
Former Brand Names Now Considered Generic
hula hoop
mason jar
milk of magnesia
raisin bran
shredded wheat
“Britishizing” American Publications
See both “Americanizing British Publications” and “British Style.”
British Style
Oscar Wilde once wrote that the British have “everything in common with
America . . . except, of course, language.” Until a few years ago, British and
American publishing seemed mutually exclusive. It was thought that a British
book had to be Americanized to succeed in the US, and American books
Anglicized in the UK. This is still true to a degree, as evidenced by the differences between the British and American editions of J. K. Rowling’s Harry
Potter books.
But increasingly, boundaries are falling. Publishers are not nearly as concerned as they once were about styling books to conform to a particular
brand of English and are increasingly exporting them without “translation.”
2:54 PM
Page 98
98 | British Style
Many Americans expect British authors to read like British authors, “odd”
words and all, and vice versa. Even Harry Potter was not Americanized
nearly as much as he would have been ten years earlier. The contrasts
between the two styles are relatively straightforward, and readers, whether
British or American, find they adapt quickly to the other’s style. (See also
“Mid-Atlantic Style.”)
Only marginally more difficult is the challenge of vocabulary, especially
the slang and regional dialects of each language. Kipling’s dialect stories are
as baffling to Americans as Joel Chandler Harris’s are to the British.
While it is a mistake to overemphasize these differences, a few guidelines,
given below, will help editors and proofreaders navigate the contrasts
between American English and British English (a term disliked by many in
England, by the way, who prefer the term standard English). At the end is a
short vocabulary list that will offer a few common words in both styles.
British Spelling. The differences in spellings between common British and
American words can be loosely categorized as follows:
-ae and oe
-augh and ough
-ce / -se endings
-double l / single l
-ize / -ise endings
anaemia, anaesthetic, oedema
draught, plough
defence, offence
counsellor, jeweller, travelling
analyse, criticise, paralyse
(though -ize endings are gaining
ground in the UK)
colour, honour, labour, savour
centre, spectre, theatre
burnt, dreamt, learnt
connexion, inflexion
anemia, anesthetic, edema
draft, plow
defense, offense
counselor, jeweler, traveling
analyze, criticize, paralyze
-our / -or endings
-re / -er endings
-t / -ed for some verbs
-xion / -tion
color, honor, labor, savor
center, specter, theater
burned, dreamed, learned
connection, inflection
There are many exceptions to the patterns shown above, however. The
word glamour is not spelled glamor in the United States, for example, and
American orthography has retained such British -re words as acre, euchre,
lucre, and mediocre. Also note that the British are increasingly using -ize endings for such words as organize and agonize, and the Americans have never
discarded the British -ise ending in such shared words as advertise, chastise,
compromise, enterprise, exercise, and supervise. The British have also largely
shifted toward the American inflection, connection, etc.
American Episcopalians spell the word for morning prayer matins, while
the Church of England spells it mattins. For religious publishers, probably the
most noticeable spelling difference is the word Saviour, which is usually
spelled Savior in the United States, although many writers, basing their pref-
2:54 PM
Page 99
British Style | 99
erence on the King James Bible, use Saviour when referring to Christ (but
revert to savior for all other uses). Also note the difference between baptise
(UK) and baptize (US).
Many other spelling differences exist, but they follow no clear pattern. In
general these don’t pose a cross-cultural problem because most American
readers have little trouble adapting to such alternate spellings as catalogue,
cheque, enquire, fulfil, gaol (for “jail”), kerb (for “curb”), mum (for
“mom”), programme, skilful, storey, tyre, waggon, and many others.
The words towards and afterwards tend to be the forms preferred in the
UK, whereas both those forms and toward and afterward are used interchangeably in the US. In either case, maintain consistency.
Collective Nouns Are Often Plural in Number. Although the usage is not
entirely consistent in the UK, the British tend to view organizations and other
collective nouns for groups of people as plural, whereas Americans usually
view them as singular.
The corporation are braced for a takeover. [British, though sometimes is]
The government have issued checks. [British, though sometimes has]
The couple are travelling to Scotland after the wedding.
Do Not Use the Serial Comma. Most often, the British do not use the serial
comma in lists with and or or.
Use a Spaced En Dash in Place of an Em Dash. It is common in British typography to use an en dash, with spaces on either side, where American typography uses the em dash.
Three-Dot Ellipsis. Use only three-dot ellipses, never in combination with a
period, and always with a word space (or 3-to-em space) on either side. This
contrasts with the American style, which sometimes uses a period with the
ellipsis (called the three-and-four-dot ellipsis style). (See also “Ellipses.”)
Use Hyphens for Prefixes. In those cases when a prefix begins with the same letter as the word it precedes, the British insert a clarifying hyphen: co-ordinate,
re-evaluate, pre-eminent, no-one. This was frequently done in the US until the
mid-twentieth century, at which time such words began to be run together
(as in the case of coordinate) or separated (as in the case of no one).
Use Single Quotation Marks for Quotes. The British sometimes use single quotation marks (which they refer to as inverted commas) wherever Americans
would use double quotation marks, most commonly in direct quotations,
dialogue, some titles, and so on, although many British publishers also use
double quotation marks as a matter of house style. The British use single
quotation marks for primary quotations and double quotation marks for
“quotes within quotes.”
2:54 PM
Page 100
100 | British Style
Punctuation with Quotation Marks. In British style as in American, if a complete sentence is set in quotation marks, the periods (called full stops) and
commas are placed inside the quotation marks. Likewise, in dialogue, the
punctuation goes with the spoken words in quotes.
When a fragmentary quotation or a single quoted word, however, is run
into a larger context, the punctuation is set outside the quotation marks:
The publisher said that ‘Adrian is our bestselling author.’ [full quote]
The publisher said, ‘Adrian is our bestselling author.’ [dialogue]
The publisher said that Adrian is ‘our bestselling author’. [fragmentary quote]
The publisher referred to it as a ‘bestseller’. [single word]
In both British and American style, exclamation points (called exclamation marks in England) and question marks are only set inside the quotation
marks if they are part of the original quotation itself. In both systems, most
double punctuation marks (colons and semicolons) are set outside.
In other words, the general rule is this: Only those punctuation marks
found with the original source quotation should go inside the quotation
marks; all others go outside.
Fewer Periods in Abbreviations. The British rule is to not use a period in abbreviations when internal letters are eliminated (like Ltd, Mr, Mrs, Revd). Like
the Americans, however, the British retain the periods when the ending of
the word has been cut off (such as Corp., Gen., Inc., Prof., Rev.) and for personal initials (such as C. S. Lewis and J. R. R. Tolkien). UK stylists, like those
in the US, avoid periods in abbreviations of organizations, famous people
referred to by initial, terms of scholarship, units of measurement, acronyms,
and computer-related terms; but in addition, the British also tend to eliminate
the periods in:
time designations: AM, PM [often small-capped in the UK]
scholarly abbreviations: eg, ie, cf
Books of the Bible. The names of books of the Bible are nearly always spelled
out in British publications rather than abbreviated.
Use Periods in Expressions of Time. The British use a period (full stop) rather
than a colon in expressions of time: 3.30 AM, for instance. Also, they tend
to drop the zero (nought or cipher) before a single-digit designation for minutes: 7.5 PM rather than the American 7:05 PM. Also note that the British
use the twenty-four-hour clock more frequently than Americans: 15.00 rather
than 3:00 PM.
2:54 PM
Page 101
British Style | 101
Dates. The British use the European style of referring to specific dates by giving the day of the month first, followed by the month and the year with no
internal commas: 12 February 1953.
Footnotes. The British system of academic footnoting uses superior numbers,
with no periods, for both the callout and the bottom-of-page reference. The
style of both the Oxford and Cambridge Universities’ presses is to begin the
numbering of footnotes with 1 on every new page, unlike the US system that
begins the numbering with 1 with every new chapter, or, more rarely, sometimes numbering consecutively throughout the book. Alternatively, if footnotes are relatively few, the asterisk-and-dagger system may also be used as
in American publishing.
British Numbering. British and American terms for numbers are identical
through the millions, but thereafter they differ significantly, as follows:
one milliard, or one thousand million
one billion
one thousand billion
one trillion
one thousand trillion
one quadrillion
one thousand quadrillion
one quintillion
one thousand quintillion
one billion
one trillion
one quadrillion
one quintillion
one sextillion
one septillion
one octillion
one nonillion
one decillion
Also note that when these numbers are set in numerals, the American zero
(0) is referred to as a cipher or nought in England. Cross-cultural discussions
of high finance need to be carefully enumerated to verify accuracy. Several
famous law cases are on the books because the differences in number style
were not accounted for.
Authorized Version. The Bible issued by King James’s printers in 1611 is called
the Authorized Version in the British Isles and the King James Version in the
United States. A strict adherence to these uses is not essential since readers
in each country are likely to be familiar with the other’s terminology, but the
difference is usually observed whenever possible.
British Vocabulary. Many common objects have different names in England and
the United States. While many Americans know that the British lift is the
American elevator, fewer realize that the British vest is not part of a threepiece suit, but an undershirt. If a British play is a bomb, it is a success, while
an American theatrical bomb is a failure. Entire dictionaries have been compiled to list the differences between the two vocabularies (the best of which
2:54 PM
Page 102
102 | British Style
is British English A to Zed by Norman W. Schur), and their entries run into
the thousands. The following list contains only a few familiar differences by
way of example.
candy floss
car-boot sale
cookery book
drawing pin, push-pin
first floor
Girl Guide
inverted commas
jumble sale
knock-on effect
lead, or flex
ball-point pen
cracker or cookie
hood (car)
trunk (car)
cotton candy
trunk sale
railroad car
junk shop
french fries
garbage can
second floor
Girl Scout
quotation marks
rummage sale
side effect
electric cord
tea towel
vacuum flask
ground meat
bank loan
mail (verb)
baby carriage
line (of people)
round trip
dish towel
shopping cart
thermos bottle
rubber boots
whine, or cry
the letter z
2:54 PM
Page 103
Bullets | 103
Bullets are dot-like typographic devices used to call attention to items in
a list. They should be modest in appearance, neither too bold nor too light,
and they are usually separated from their accompanying text with a word
space. Ideally, they should be set so as to center on the height of the letter that
immediately follows them; that is, higher for a capital, lower for a lowercase
Bullets are usually not used for lists of items that contain only single words
or for short lines that do not carry over to a second line. A single row of dots
running down the left-hand side of text is unsightly.
Usually, bullets are set to the left of the listed items, and the runover lines
are set flush with the first word. This too can be unpleasant to the eye, so
some designers recommend that the bullet be indented but not allowed to
hang at the left.
If the list has only two or three items in it, indent the bullet from the left
margin. If it has more, allow the bullet to set flush with the left margin.
2:56 PM
Page 104
Call Versus Calling
The words call and calling have a special meaning in Christian usage, and
while they are similar, some distinctions should be observed. Call is the more
specific and temporal of the two, often being synonymous with one’s specific job. A seminarian, for instance, receives a call to become a pastor of a
church. This term is often rendered as a passive verb: The seminarian was
called to be the church’s pastor.
A calling, by contrast, has larger implications and is most often synonymous with one’s life path or core identity. This is the sense of the word as
used by Paul when he advises the Ephesians to “live a life worthy of the calling you have received” (4:1). That same seminarian, for instance, may have
realized early in life that it was his calling to someday serve as a pastor, but
at that point he had not yet received a call.
In some older references, the Song of Songs is referred to as Canticles or
the Book of Canticles or the Canticle of Canticles, the latter used in English
as early as the Wycliffe Bible of the fourteenth century. Though that usage is
now largely outdated, it is still often found in literary contexts or when the
plainer Song of Songs doesn’t seem to convey the exotic tone of the text itself.
Canticles retains the Middle Eastern flavor of the original. Like Psalms,
Canticles as a title has the form of a plural but takes a singular verb, since it
refers to a single book: Canticles is part of the Old Testament canon.
One argument for avoiding the term altogether is that other portions of
the Bible are also commonly referred to as canticles (lowercased), notably
those poetic portions that have been transformed into common liturgical
songs, such as the Psalms and the Magnificat (Luke 1:46–55).
No surer sign of insanity exists than an attempt to formulate inviolable
rules of capitalization. The following rules attempt to bring some order to
this topic. As in every other area of life, general consistency as well as flexibility are often the best one can hope for.
2:56 PM
Page 105
Capitalization | 105
Reasons for Capitalizing. Aside from reasons of typographic convention, the
purpose of capitalization is to show that a given word has a specialized or
specific meaning rather than a general one. This would include such words
as place names or proper names, the titles of books or works of art, specialized vocabulary, and so on.
Capitalization was not developed as a way of conferring status or respect.
We capitalize Baker, for instance, to signify the name of the carpenter who
lives down the street so that we may distinguish him from the baker next
door, whose name happens to be Carpenter. The recent tendency in editing
practice has been to avoid capitalization whenever it is not needed for such
purposes of specification, and many words formerly capitalized are now
commonly lowercased without any loss of clarity.
As a purely typographic convention, capitalization is used to distinguish
the beginning of sentences, some quoted material, special emphasis, and other
Specialized Vocabulary. Authors occasionally capitalize terms as part of a special vocabulary. Authors should inform the editor of these special uses and
should in all cases establish a consistent pattern of capitalization throughout the work.
Titles. Capitalize the first and last words of titles of books, software, or other
major publications or works of art. Also capitalize the first word following
a colon or a dash in a title.
All other words in titles should be capitalized, except for articles (a, an,
and the); prepositions of any length; and coordinating conjunctions (and, but,
or, for, and nor), all of which should be lowercased. An exception should be
made in the case of any preposition that is used adverbially or emphasized. For
example: Miss Julia Takes Over and One Flew Over the Cuckoo’s Nest.
The ordinary rules of capitalization in a title should be ignored, however,
when an existing work has been purposely titled to go against common style
(for example, E. E. Cummings’s books EIMI and is 5 or the ezine
WorkingPOET). Caution should be exercised in the case of some books,
though, because for design reasons titles are often rendered differently on
the cover. Generally, if the title is listed on the copyright page, accompanying the copyright notice, then that should be considered the correct version
to be used in all references to that book. Do not use the version in the Library
of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data, however, since that uses a different capitalization style altogether. If no title is shown accompanying the
copyright notice, then consider the title as given on the title page to be definitive (though a colon should be inserted when a subtitle is used, since such
colons are commonly dropped on title pages).
2:56 PM
Page 106
106 | Capitalization
Titles with Compound Words. The first word of a hyphenated compound in a
title or heading is always capitalized. The subsequent words in the compound
are capitalized unless they are articles, prepositions, or coordinating conjunctions. Also, when a hypenated number is used in a title, the second element is lowercased.
Orange-Red Leaves
“Ninety-five Theses”
King-Sized Mistakes
Old-Fashioned Gospel Hymns
Two-for-One Sale
Adverbs in Titles. An adverb in a title should always be capitalized, even though
the same word might not be capped when used as a preposition.
Looking Up to Jesus
Coming In Out of the Rain
Steady As She Goes
A Walk in the Rain
Titles with Words Beginning with A-. There is sometimes a question as to how
to capitalize titles with the prefix a-, a sort of old-fashioned way of expressing that the action of the verb to which it is attached is ongoing, as in ahunting or a-sailing. Such formulations are common in folk songs. There are
three ways of rendering such words when they appear in titles. Penguin Press,
in its seminal Penguin Book of English Folk Songs, opts to lowercase the a and
cap the letter following it: “Ships Are a-Sailing.” Other presses cap the a and
lowercase the following letter: “Ships Are A-sailing.” Oxford University Press
in its extensive publishing on music and folklore has elected to cap both elements: “Ships Are A-Sailing.” While there is no strong argument for any one
method, as long as consistency is maintained throughout a publication, we
recommend the Oxford system.
“A-Hunting We Will Go”
“Here We Come A-Wassailing”
“The Times They Are A-Changing”
After a Colon. Capitalize the first word after a colon only if that colon introduces two or more sentences in close sequence, announces a definition, presents a proverb or quotation, or introduces a question or formal statement.
Otherwise, the first word should be lowercased after a colon.
Here are the directions: Turn right at the first stoplight. Drive three miles and
make a left.
William Carey will be remembered for this phrase: Expect great things from
God; attempt great things for God.
Merton’s conflict was this: he didn’t know whether the Trappists would even
accept him or whether the army would draft him first.
2:56 PM
Page 107
Capitalization | 107
Racial Designations. As racial designations, the terms black and white are lowercased both as adjectives and nouns unless they form part of a phrase that
would require capitalization. Some contexts may require capitalization for
consistency, for instance, when those terms are included in a list of other
racial designations that are commonly capitalized. Also capitalize when the
racial designation is included in a general area of academic study or a social
Many blacks and whites marched together in the sixties.
The group included Blacks, Whites, Native Americans, and Hispanics.
a black gospel choir
the Black Studies program
the Black Muslims
Particles with Proper Names. Consult a dictionary or a biographical reference
book if in doubt about foreign names that use particles (connecting words,
such as von, de, etc.). The following guidelines, though somewhat confusing, should help in some cases: (1) Particles in well-known English and North
American names adapted from other cultures are usually capped (Mark Van
Doren, Bernard De Voto) unless the individual prefers a lowercase form
(Walter de la Mare, Aubrey de Vere). (2) French, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish,
Dutch, and German particles are usually lowercased if a name or title precedes them (Baron Manfred von Richtofen). (3) In French names Le, L’, La,
and Les are usually capped (La Bruyère), but de and d’ are not capitalized
(Honoré de Balzac, Charles d’Orléans). (4) For some names, the particle is
commonly dropped when the last name is used alone (Vondel, rather than
van den Vondel). When a particle is not preceded by a first name or a title
(except for French names using de or d’), capitalize it (Le Corbusier). A particle is always capitalized at the beginning of a sentence (De la Mare was
born in Charlton, Kent, in 1873) or when used as an author name at the
beginning of a bibliography.
Here are some further examples:
Charles de Gaulle
Catherine de Médici
Werner von Braun
Thomas De Quincey
Ludwig van Beethoven, but Beethoven
Corrie ten Boom, but the Ten Boom family
Leonardo da Vinci, but Da Vinci
Henry Van Dyke
2:56 PM
Page 108
108 | Capitalization
Personal Titles. When a title directly precedes a person’s name, it is capitalized.
When it follows or when it is used in place of the person’s name, it is
President George W. Bush; George W. Bush, president of the United States; the
president of the United States; the president
Gen. H. Norman Schwarzkopf; General Schwarzkopf; the general
Elizabeth II, queen of England; Queen Elizabeth; the queen
Traditional titles of the nobility, however, are often capitalized even when
they follow the person’s name or when the personal name is not given at all.
When the full title is given, it may be capitalized according to custom: for
instance, the Duchess of York’s latest children’s book or an exhibition of
paintings by the Prince of Wales.
Organizations. Like personal names, the names of businesses, educational institutions, and other organizations are capitalized and otherwise styled according to the individual organization’s preferences, even if those stylings go
against common sense or usage.
This is sometimes tricky since the advent of the Internet because major
online businesses often style their names differently in their logos than in
their running text. When in doubt, style the name according to that company’s usage in text rather than in their logo (for example, eBay rather than
ebay; rather than To further complicate this situation, the names of some Internet companies incorporate the .com while
others do not (Ask Jeeves, but If absolute accuracy is needed, query
the online company.
While authors should always adhere to the organization’s own styling of
its name, there is one exception: the article the should not be capitalized even
if that organization insists that it should be. Such “in-house” styles should
be reserved for official publications emanating from those organizations
alone. Some organizations, such as the University of Michigan, insist that
the article be capitalized when referring to the entire statewide network of
universities under its umbrella (The University of Michigan) and lowercased
when referring to a particular campus (the University of Michigan at Ann
Arbor). The problem is that this distinction will simply be lost on the majority of readers, rendering adherence to the rule meaningless. The reader should
not have to depend on a typographical device to make such distinctions clear.
Lowercase the article in all cases and qualify if further distinction is needed.
Compass Arts
eBay [company prefers closed spelling with interior capital]
HarperCollins [company prefers closed spelling with interior capital]
the Favorite Poem Project [even though the organizers capitalize the]
2:56 PM
Page 109
Capitalization | 109
Governmental Bodies. Generally, the formal names of governmental organizations and bodies are capitalized; however, as adjectives they are lowercased.
Generic terms and informal terms for governmental bodies are lowercased.
United States Congress; Congress; congressional
House of Representatives; the House; the lower house of Congress
Committee on Foreign Affairs; Foreign Affairs Committee; the committee
Parliament; parliamentary; early parliament; Houses of Parliament
General Assembly of Illinois; Illinois legislature; assembly
the crown
electoral college
federal government
state’s attorney
Political Organizations. Names of official political organizations are capitalized. The word party, however, is only capped when it is part of the official
Common Market
Communist Party
Democratic platforms
Fascist party
Grand Old Party (GOP)
Holy Alliance
Republican convention
Republican National Committee
Republican Party
Eras. Most period designations are lowercased (except for those derived from
proper nouns and a few that have come to be capitalized by tradition).
Age of Reason
age of steam
ancient Greece
Christian Era
colonial period
Eighteenth Dynasty
Era of Good Feeling
fin de siècle
first century
information age
Middle Ages
Paleolithic times
space age
Stone Age
the twenties but the Roaring Twenties
Victorian era
2:56 PM
Page 110
110 | Capitalization
Historical Events and Epithets. Most names for specific historical events, as
opposed to broad historical eras, are capitalized. Popular epithets and nicknames for most cultural or historical moments or events are capitalized.
Bamboo Curtain
California Gold Rush
Cold War
Fall of Rome
Great Depression; the Depression
but a depression; a recession
Industrial Revolution
Iron Curtain
Kentucky Derby
Pickett’s Charge
Vatican Council
World War I
Systems of Thought. To indicate broad systems of economic, philosophic, or
political thought, the noun or adjective should be lowercased. If the word is
derived from a proper name, however, it should be capitalized.
Likewise, most nouns and adjectives referring to general artistic, academic,
religious, or philosophic schools of thought are lowercased. When they are
derived from proper nouns, however, they are capitalized. Discretion is
required, and in any given work a particular term must be treated consistently.
Gregorian chant
religious right
Personification. When abstract concepts are personified or made into allegorical characters, they should be capitalized as though they were proper names.
Then a thousand men thronged together, crying aloft to Christ and his Virgin
Mother, that Grace might go with them in their search for Truth. (William
Langland, Piers the Plowman)
2:56 PM
Page 111
Capitalization | 111
Place Names. The rules for the capitalization of geographical nouns and adjectives are many and varied. Most specific questions can be answered by referring to a reference work such as Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary.
The following brief summary and the list that follows it should help with
most standard names.
Capitalize Western, Eastern, etc. when they are part of a formal place
name or are used in the sense of political division. Continent and Continental
are capitalized to designate Europe. Such terms as mountain and lake are
capitalized when they are part of a formal place name.
the Arctic Circle but the equator
the Continent (Europe) but the Australian continent
the East; Far East(ern); the Near East
the East Coast or the West Coast
Lake Michigan; Lakes Huron and Michigan
the Midwest
the North
the North Atlantic but northern Atlantic
the Northwest
Ohio River; the Ohio and Wabash Rivers but the river Nile
the South, the Old South, the Deep South
Southerner (Civil War) but southerner (common usage)
the Tropics but the tropic of Cancer
the Western world but the western plains
a westerner (from either the Western Hemisphere or the western United States)
When the article the is a traditional part of a place name, it should be lowercased. The one exception to this rule is The Hague, the capital of the
Netherlands, from the Dutch Den Haag.
the Hebrides
the Lesser Antilles
the Netherlands, but The Hague
the People’s Republic of China
Family Relationship. A term indicating a family relationship is lowercased when
used generically or when preceded by a modifier. It should be capitalized
when used as a family member’s common appellation, that is, when used as
if it were a proper name.
“Will Cousin Ed lead the singing, Dad?” his son asked hopefully.
“No, Son, but Mother’s brothers and her sister Carol will sing solos.”
2:56 PM
Page 112
112 | Capitalization
Terms of Affection. Common terms of affection, such as honey, dear, sweetheart, and so on, are lowercased unless they are used so often as to have the
force of a nickname.
Brand Names. The distinction between brand names, which are trademarked
and therefore capitalized, and their generic equivalents, which are lowercased, should be observed. For an outline of the rules for using trademarked
names in writing and a list of examples, see “Brand Names.”
Adjectives Derived from Proper Names. No rule satisfactorily resolves all doubt
about when to capitalize adjectives derived from proper names and nouns.
Usually, adjectives of direct biographical and geographical reference
(Socratic, Hawaiian) are capitalized, although there are some common exceptions; for instance, platonic and romanesque, which are lowercased probably because they have come to have primary meanings far removed from the
proper names from which they were derived.
When an adjective’s connotation is no longer immediate, a decision must
be made. It is usually a question of evocation. On one hand, the quintessentially American term french fries does not evoke France, so the adjective is
lowercased. On the other hand, French cuisine does evoke French food, so
it is capped. By the same token, brussels sprouts does not evoke Brussels any
more than lima beans evokes Lima, Peru, the city for which they were named.
Such lowercasing is more common with geographical adjectives, though it
occasionally happens with biographical adjectives as well; for example, most
style manuals lowercase cesarean section, which was named for Julius Caesar.
When in doubt, check the dictionary.
Byzantine (referring to Constantinople) but byzantine (meaning devious
or labyrinthine)
cesarean section—but note: C-section
Ferris wheel
Molotov cocktail
moroccan leather
russian dressing
Parts of a Book. Only capitalize the parts of a book when that part appears in
a title, heading, or caption. Otherwise, lowercase parts of a book in text.
“Appendix A [title]”
“Refer to chapter 3 for more information.”
“See figure 12”
“Turn to page 48”
2:56 PM
Page 113
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms | 113
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
Few matters of style have caused as much consternation to writers and
editors of religious books as the capitalization of biblical and religious terms.
Since Victorian times, religious books have tended to overcapitalize, a style
that looks religiose and antiquated to most readers in the twenty-first century.
The recent trend has been to undercapitalize. In an effort to bring some consistency to capitalization and to offer a rationale for adhering to a contemporary style, the following guidelines are offered.
The Persons of the Trinity and Deities of Other Religions. Capitalize all commonly accepted names for the persons of the Trinity. Also capitalize names
of deities from other faiths and from mythology. Lowercase, however, the
pronouns referring to persons of the Trinity (and deities of other religions).
For a focused discussion of this issue, see “Deity Pronoun: Capitalization.”
Holy Spirit
Epithets. Common epithets for persons of the Trinity, biblical characters, or figures in church history should be capitalized.
Judgment must be exercised in determining which words and phrases are
epithets that have the force of a proper name and are therefore capitalized,
and which are merely descriptive and are lowercased. When in doubt, the
lowercase form is usually preferred, and in all cases, when a style is decided
upon, consistency throughout the manuscript should be the rule.
Alpha and Omega
Ancient of Days
Divine Doctor
King of Kings
Man of Sorrows
Saint John the Divine
Son of Man
Venerable Bede
Virgin Mary
the Twelve but the twelve disciples
the Evangelists but the four evangelists
the Almighty but almighty God
the Good Shepherd but the second person of the Trinity
2:56 PM
Page 114
114 | Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
Apostle and Prophet. The words apostle and prophet are lowercased unless used
as part of a common epithet that has come to have the force of a proper
the apostle John but the Beloved Apostle
Paul the apostle but the Apostle to the Gentiles
the prophet Jeremiah but the Weeping Prophet
Pharaoh as a word. The word pharaoh should be capitalized only when it is
used as a proper name, which is, in most cases, when it is used without an
article. When an article precedes it, it is lowercased as a common noun.
Moses was raised in Pharaoh’s household.
At first he was afraid to address the pharaoh.
Religious Titles. Official religious titles of modern or historical personages are
capitalized according to the same rules as secular titles. When an official title
precedes a person’s name, it is capitalized. When it follows or when it is used
in place of a person’s name, it is lowercased. General names for religious
offices are lowercased, as are purely descriptive titles.
Archbishop Rowan Williams but the archbishop of Canterbury; the archbishop
Father Patrick O’Neil but the father
Bishop John Shelby Spong but John Shelby Spong, bishop of Newark
Pope John Paul II but the pope
the ministry, the papacy, the bishopric, the pastorate
evangelist Billy Graham
Names for Satan. Names and common epithets for Satan are capitalized.
the Devil but a devil
the Enemy (Satan, but,
the enemy, meaning
the forces of evil at large)
Evil One
Father of Lies
Adjectives Derived from Proper Names. Many, but not all, adjectives derived
from proper names are capitalized. Adjectives and adverbs derived from the
words God and Satan, however, are usually lowercased, though for a fuller
discussion, see “God Compounds.” Also see, “Personal Names, Adjectives
Derived from.”
Aaronic priesthood
Augustinian arguments
godlike power
godly woman
Isaian passages
Matthean version
miltonic verse [but Petrarchan sonnet]
Pauline writings
satanic rites
2:56 PM
Page 115
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms | 115
Epithets for the Bible. All names and common epithets for the Bible and for the
sacred writings of other traditions are capitalized and set in roman type.
Note, however, that the word bible is lowercased when used in a figurative
sense: The OED is the bible of English-language studies.
Good Book
the Word
For more details, see “Titles of Common Texts of the World’s Religions.”
Adjectives Indicating the Bible. Adjectives and adverbs derived from names for
the Bible or other sacred writings are usually lowercased, although the terms
Qur’anic (Koranic), Mishnaic, Pentateuchal, and Vedic are commonly capitalized since they have not come to have a general meaning beyond the works
to which they refer.
Names for Versions of the Bible. Names and nicknames of well-known or
important versions and editions of the Bible, especially when they exist in a
multiplicity of editions and formats, are capitalized and set in roman type.
When a specific edition of a particular version is referred to, however, it
should be set in italics like any other ordinary book title. See “Bible Versions
and Translations.”
The King James Version
The Syriac Version
The Vinegar Bible
The Vulgate
The New International Version
The New King James Version
but: The King James 2000 Bible
The NIV Study Bible
Books of the Bible. Names for all books of the Bible, the Apocrypha, and
pseudobiblical writings are capitalized. The words book, gospel, letter,
psalm, and epistle are generic terms that specify different forms of written
documents. They are lowercased unless they form part of the actual title of
a book as given in the specific translation of the Bible being used. (For a
full discussion of the capitalization of the word gospel, see “Gospel:
Job, the book of Job [NIV], but the Book of Job [MLB]
John, John’s gospel, the gospel of John [NIV], but the Gospel According to John
[KJV], the Gospel of John [Phillips]
Corinthians 1, First Corinthians, Paul’s first epistle to the Corinthians, the first
book of Corinthians, but the First Letter of Paul to the Corinthians [RSV]
the Gospel of Thomas [actual title]
2:56 PM
Page 116
116 | Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
the Protevangelion
Psalm 139
the Twenty-third Psalm but a psalm of David
Parts of the Bible. Names for specific parts, groupings, or passages of the Bible
are capitalized when those names have come to be used commonly as the
equivalents of titles in theological and devotional writing. (Note that in this
instance The Christian Writer’s Manual of Style departs from CMS, which
lowercases most parts, groupings, and passages of the Bible. The CMS alternative is recommended, however, for books intended for a broad or secular
readership. The capitalized system is best used when a solely Christian audience is intended.) Judgment must be exercised in determining whether a name
is generic or used as the equivalent of a title. For instance: David’s psalms,
but the Davidic Psalms. When in doubt, lowercase.
Accession Psalms
General Epistles
Historical Books
Lord’s Prayer
Love Chapter
Minor Prophets
New Testament
Olivet Discourse
Poetical Books
Synoptic Gospels
Upper Room Discourse
Wisdom Literature
the Ten Commandments but the first commandment
the Gospel According to Matthew [RSV] but Matthew’s gospel
the Gospels but the four gospels
the Epistle of Paul to the Romans [MLB] but Paul’s Roman epistle
the Book of Jeremiah [RSV] but Jeremiah’s book of prophecies
Law as a Word. The word law is capitalized only to clarify that it refers to the
Pentateuch as a whole or to the Ten Commandments.
the Law [Pentateuch] but the law [as opposed to grace]
Mosaic law
law of Moses
Davidic law
Parable as a Word. Unless used in an actual title, the word parable, like the
words book, gospel, letter, psalm, and epistle, is lowercased as a descriptive
term, as are any descriptive words that accompany it. Words describing specific parables should only be capitalized when they are proper nouns.
the parable of the prodigal son
the parable of the wicked serving men
the parable of the good Samaritan
2:56 PM
Page 117
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms | 117
Biblical Events. Accepted names for major biblical events, such as events in the
life of Christ, are set in lowercase.
the advent of Christ [but Advent, meaning the season]
the captivity
the captivity of the Jews
the creation [both the act and the things created]
How long were the six days of creation?
God looked over all his creation and said, “Very good!”
the creation of the universe
the crucifixion
the crucifixion of Jesus
the nativity
the nativity of Christ
Biblical and Sacred Objects. Names for important biblical objects are generally
lowercased. Many specific names of sacred concepts and objects of veneration, especially those associated with the persons of the Trinity, were once
capitalized. The modern practice is to lowercase them. Care must be taken
to distinguish between those words that are common nouns and therefore
lowercased, and those that form parts of epithets for people, which should
be capitalized. Note that the names for a very few legendary sacred objects
have become so common in imaginative literature that they are traditionally
capitalized and should continue to be so: the True Cross, the Holy Grail.
the blood of Christ
the brazen altar
the cross [both the wooden object and the event]
the golden calf
the holy name of Jesus
the light of Christ in the world, but the Light of the World
Noah’s ark
the seven seals
the star of Bethlehem
the tent
Biblical Eras. Names for biblical eras are lowercased.
the age of the prophets
the exile
the exilic period
the last day
the last days
the millennial kingdom
the millennium
2:56 PM
Page 118
118 | Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
Historic Documents. The titles of creeds, confessions, and other important documents of church history are capitalized and set in roman type.
Apostles’ Creed
Heidelberg Catechism
Thirty-nine Articles
Westminster Confession
Religious Observances. Common names for religious seasons, holy days, feast
days, saints’ days, and religious festivals and observances are capitalized.
Ash Wednesday
Christian Unity Week
Conversion of Saint Paul
Holy Communion
Holy Week
National Day of Prayer
Saint Valentine’s Day
Sacraments and Rites. Names of specific sacraments and rites are commonly
lowercased, except those indicating Communion, or the Eucharist, which are
traditionally capitalized. The seven sacraments recognized by the Roman
Catholic Church are baptism, confirmation, the Eucharist, penance, anointing of the sick (which is the term preferred to extreme unction), holy orders,
and matrimony. Names for general systems of religious rites (such as Latin
Rite, Roman Rite, Eastern Rites, and Western Rites) are capitalized. For more
details, see “Sacraments.”
Holy Eucharist
last rites
Lord’s Table
Masonic Rites
Sacred Host
sacred rites
Names of Denominations. Names of official denominations and the common
adjectives derived from them are capitalized according to denominational
usage. The article the should not be capitalized, even if that is the group’s
preference. See also “Denominations and Associations of Churches.”
Christian Reformed
Church of God
Roman Catholic
Seventh-day Adventism
Church as a Word. The word church is lowercased unless it is part of the formal or official name of a specific denomination. For instance, since there is
no official denomination called “the Reformed church,” church is lowercased. In “the Christian Reformed Church,” however, it is capped as part of
the official name of the denomination. Church is also lowercased when used
in a general sense or to refer to the universal church of all believers.
Baptist church
Christ’s church
the church
church and state
Episcopal Church
invisible church
2:56 PM
Page 119
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms | 119
Methodist church
Protestant church
Reformed church
Reformed Church in America
Roman Catholic Church
United Methodist Church
Names for Places of Worship. Words such as church, chapel, temple, meeting,
synagogue, tabernacle, mission, ministry, hall, fellowship, cathedral, congregation, and assembly are capitalized when they form part of the official
name of a local religious meeting place. Otherwise, as common nouns they
are lowercased. The article the should never be capitalized in front of a
church or denomination’s name, even if that church or denomination insists
that the article be capitalized. Like names for other organizations, it would
be too unwieldy to keep a definitive list of which churches and denominations prefer the capitalized article. Such “in-house” styles should be reserved
for official publications emanating from those churches and denominations.
Church of the Servant, but the church
Brick Bible Chapel, but the chapel
Temple Emmanuel, but the temple
St. Paul’s Cathedral, but the cathedral
Westminster Presbyterian Church, but the local Presbyterian church
Holy Spirit Catholic Church, but a Catholic church
the Brooklyn Tabernacle (even though the church prefers The Brooklyn
Tabernacle, with the article capped)
Religious Groups and Movements. The names for major historical religious
groups and movements, and the adjectives derived from them, are generally
capitalized. This includes the historical heresies and schisms. (See also
“Heresy Versus Schism.”)
the Great Schism
The names of broad modern religious movements that are not official
denominations, the names of general religious philosophies, and the adjectives derived from all such words should be lowercased. By the same principle, the terms liberal and conservative usually have a generic or relative use
and should be lowercased.
charismatic renewal
conservative church
ecumenical, ecumenism
secular humanism
2:56 PM
Page 120
120 | Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
Movement as a Word. The word movement is capitalized only if the adjective
that precedes it is capitalized. Tradition may be a factor in whether to capitalize; recognized historical movements are more likely to be capitalized,
while contemporary movements are less likely to be.
the Holiness Movement but the ecumenical movement
the Pentecostal Movement but the charismatic movement
the Temperance Movement
Religious Historical Eras. Common names for major periods and events in
church history are generally capitalized unless they are purely descriptive.
Great Awakening but the age of revivalism
Middle Ages but the medieval era
Heaven, Hell, Etc. Although place names in the Bible are ordinarily capitalized,
terms like heaven, hell, gehenna, sheol, tartarus, and hades are lowercased
as common nouns. This is done to accord with the style used by most of the
popular versions of the Bible. The seven heavens of Islamic tradition are also
lowercased: the first heaven, the second heaven, and so on. The word paradise is capitalized only when it refers specifically to the garden of Eden. The
word kingdom is usually lowercased.
Abyss but hades, sheol
garden of Eden
kingdom of God, Christ’s kingdom
New Jerusalem but heaven, paradise, the abode of the saints
seventh heaven
In classical and Western literary tradition, however, names for heaven and
hell are often capped, as in the Greek mythological Hades; Dante’s Inferno,
Purgatorio, and Paradiso; and Milton’s terms Heaven, Hell, and Paradise
(as used in Paradise Lost). Other literary place names and geographical locations within heaven, hell, and the other various abodes of the dead are capitalized as though they were ordinary geographical references.
First Circle of Hell
2:56 PM
Page 121
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms | 121
Epithets for Place Names. Common epithets for geographical places are capitalized. Care must be exercised to distinguish between those words and
phrases that are epithets and are therefore capitalized, and those that are
merely descriptive and are lowercased.
the City of David but the city where David reigned
the Eternal City
the Holy Land but the land of Jesus
the Land of Promise but the land of Canaan
Capitalization of Common Religious Terms
Aaronic priesthood
Aaronide (geneology of Aaron)
abomination of desolation
Abrahamic covenant
Abraham’s bosom
Abraham’s side
Abyss, the
advent, the
Advent season
Advocate, the
age of grace
age to come, the
Ahiram Inscription
Almighty, the
almighty God
Alpha and Omega (Christ)
ancient Near East(ern)
Ancient of Days, the (God)
angel (cap if theophany)
angel Gabriel, the
angel of the Lord (cap if
annunciation, the (the event)
Annunciation, the (the holiday)
Anointed, the (Christ)
Anointed One, the (Christ)
anointed Savior
anointing of the sick
ante-Nicene fathers
antichrist (the general spirit)
Antichrist (the person)
Apocalypse, the (Revelation of
Apocrypha, the
apostle Paul, Peter, et al.
apostles, the
Apostles’ Creed, the
Apostle to the Gentiles (Paul)
apostolic age
apostolic benediction (2 Cor. 13)
apostolic council (Acts 15)
apostolic faith
apostolic fathers (the men)
Apostolic Fathers, the (the group
of writings)
2:56 PM
Page 122
122 | Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
archbishop of Canterbury (but
Archbishop Smith)
ark, the (Noah’s)
ark of the covenant
ark of the testimony
ascension, the
Ascension Day
Athanasian Creed
atheism, -ist
atonement, the
Atonement, the Day of (Yom
Augsburg Confession
babe in the manger, the
baby Jesus, the
Babylonian captivity (Jews)
Babylonian Empire
baptism, the (of Christ)
Baptist, the (John the Baptist)
battle of Armageddon (final battle)
Beast, the (Antichrist)
beatific vision (theology)
beatitude, a
Beatitudes, the
bedouin (sing. and pl.)
Being (God)
Beloved Apostle, the
betrayal, the
Bible, the
Bible Belt, the
Bible school
bidding prayer
bishop of Rome (but Bishop Jones)
blessed name (Christ)
Blessed Virgin
blood of Christ
body, the (of Christ)
body of Christ (the church)
Book, the (Bible)
book of Genesis, et al.
Book of Life (book of judgment)
book of the covenant
book of the law
Book of the Twelve, the
Book of Truth
boy Jesus, the
brazen altar
Bread of Life (Bible or Christ)
Bridegroom, the (Christ)
bride of Christ (the church)
brotherhood of man
bulla (pl. bullae)
burning bush, the (Ex. 3)
burnt offering
Calvinist(ic), -ism
Canon, the (Scripture)
Canonical Epistles, the (James,
et al.)
canonical hours
canon law
canon of Scripture, the
captivity, the (of the Jews)
catholic (universal)
Catholic church, a (the building)
Catholic Church, the (the Roman
Catholic Church)
Catholic Epistles (James, et al.)
Celestial City (abode of the
cereal offering
charismatic church
2:56 PM
Page 123
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms | 123
charismatic movement
chief priest
Chief Shepherd (Christ)
child Jesus
children of Israel
chosen people (Jews)
Christ child
Christian (n. and adj.)
Christian Era
christianize, -ization
Christian socialism
Christmas Day
Christmas Eve
Chronicler, the
church, the (body of Christ)
church (building)
church (service)
church age
church and state
church father(s)
church in America
church invisible
church militant
Church of England
Church of Rome
church triumphant
church universal
church visible
City of David (Jerusalem,
Code of Hammurabi
College of Cardinals
Comforter, the (Holy Spirit)
commandment (first, et al.)
Commandments, the Ten
Communion (sacrament)
Council of Trent
Counselor, the (Holy Spirit)
covenant, the (old, new)
covenant of grace
covenant of the Lord, the
covenant of works
creation, the (both the act and
the result)
Creator, the
creator God, the
creed, the (Apostles’ Creed)
cross, the (both the wooden
object and the event)
Crucified One, the (as name;
lc as descriptor)
crucifixion, the
crucifixion of Christ, the
Crusades, the
curse, the
Daniel’s Seventieth Week
Davidic covenant
Davidic law
day hours (first seven canonical
Day of Atonement (Yom Kippur)
day of grace
day of judgment
day of Pentecost
day of the Lord
Dead Sea Scrolls
Decalogue (Ten Commandments)
Defender (God)
deism, -ist
Deity, the
deity of Christ
deluge, the (the flood)
2:56 PM
Page 124
124 | Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
devil, a
Devil, the (Satan)
Diaspora (the event and the
dispensation of the Law
dispersion, the
divided kingdom (period of
Divine Doctor (Christ)
Divine Father (God)
divine guidance
Divine King
Divine Liturgy (Eucharist, Eastern
divine office (canonical hours)
Divine Providence (God)
divine providence (God’s
Divinity, the (God)
divinity of Christ, the
doctor(s) of the church
Door, the (Christ)
Dragon, the (Satan)
early church
early church fathers
Early Church Fathers (title of work)
Eastern church
Eastern Orthodox church, an (a
Eastern Orthodox Church, the
Eastern religions
Eastern Rites
Easter Sunday
ecumenism, -ical
elect, the; God’s elect
Eleven, the
Elohist source
El Shaddai
Emmaus road
emperor, but Emperor Nero
empire, the (Babylonian)
end-time (adj.)
end time(s), the
Enemy, the (Satan)
enemy, the (satanic forces)
epistle (John’s epistle, et al.)
epistle to the Romans
Epistles, the (NT apostolic letters)
eschatology, -ical
Eternal, the (God)
Eternal City, the (Rome)
eternal God, the
eternal life
Evangel (any of the four gospels)
evangelical (adj.)
evangelicals, -ism
evangelist (someone who
evangelizes or a gospel writer)
Evangelists, the (the Gospels)
Evil One, the (Satan)
exile, the
exodus, the (from Egypt)
extreme unction (prefer anointing
of the sick)
faith, the (Christianity)
faith healing
fall, the
fall of humanity
fall of Jerusalem
false christs
2:56 PM
Page 125
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms | 125
False Prophet (of Revelation)
false prophet(s)
Farewell Discourses (John)
Father (God)
fatherhood of God
Father of Lies (Satan)
Fathers, the (fathers of the church)
fathers of the church, the
Feast (meaning Passover)
Feast of Booths (Sukkoth)
Feast of Esther (Purim)
Feast of Firstfruits
Feast of Tabernacles
Feast of the Dedication
Feast of the Lights (Hanukkah)
Feast of the Passover (Pesach)
Feast of Unleavened Bread
Fertile Crescent
fertility god(dess)
first Adam, the
first advent
Firstborn, the (Christ)
firstborn Son of God
First Cause, the
First Estate (Second Estate, etc.)
first person of the Trinity
First Vatican Council (1869–70)
flood, the
four evangelists, the
four gospels, the
fourth gospel, the
free will
Friend (Quaker)
fundamentalist(s), -ism
fundamentals of the faith
Galilean, the (Christ)
garden, the (Eden or Gethsemane)
garden of Eden
garden of Gethsemane
General Epistles
General Letters
Gentile, a (distinguished from Jew)
Gentile laws
Gloria Patri
gnostic (generic)
Gnostic(ism) (specific sect)
god (pagan)
God (Yahweh)
God Almighty
Godhead (essential being of God)
godhead (godhood or godship)
God is spirit
God Most High
God’s house
God’s Son
God’s Spirit
God’s word (his statement or
God’s Word (the Bible)
golden calf, the
golden candlesticks, the
Golden Rule, the
Good Book, the
Good Friday
good news, the
Good Samaritan, the (but the
parable of the good Samaritan)
Good Shepherd (Jesus)
good shepherd, the parable of the
gospel (see ”Gospel” )
gospel (John’s gospel, et al.)
gospel of Matthew
Gospels, the
gospel truth
grain offering
2:56 PM
Page 126
126 | Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
Great Awakening, the
Great Commandment, the
Great Commission, the
Great High Priest, the
great judgment, the
Great Physician, the
Great Schism (of 1054)
Great Shepherd, the
great tribulation, the
great white throne, the
Ground of Being
Guide, the (Holy Spirit)
guilt offering
Hades (Greek mythology)
hades (hell)
Hail Mary
Hanukkah (Feast of the Dedication)
Head, the (Christ, head of the
heaven (abode of the redeemed)
heavenly Father
Heidelberg Catechism
Hellenism (-istic)
Herod’s temple
high church
high priest, a
High Priest, the (Christ)
High Priestly Prayer, the
Historical Books, the (of Bible)
Hittite Law Code
Holiness Movement, the
Holy Bible
Holy Book (Bible)
Holy City (present or New
Holy Communion
holy day of obligation (Roman
Holy Eucharist
holy family
Holy Father (pope)
Holy Ghost (prefer Holy Spirit)
Holy God (but a holy God)
Holy Grail
Holy Island (Lindisfarne)
Holy Joe (slang for parson)
Holy Land (Palestine)
Holy League (1510–11)
Holy of Holies
holy oil
Holy One, the (God, Christ)
holy order(s)
Holy Place
Holy Roller
Holy Roman Empire
Holy Saturday
Holy Scriptures
Holy See
Holy Spirit
Holy Thursday
Holy Trinity
holy war
holy water
Holy Week (before Easter)
Holy Writ (Bible)
Holy Year (Roman Catholic)
house of David
house of the Lord
imago Dei
immaculate conception, the
2:56 PM
Page 127
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms | 127
incarnation, the
incarnation of Christ
infancy gospels, the
infant Jesus, the
Inklings, the (Lewis, Tolkien, et al.)
inner veil
Intercessor, the (Christ)
Isaian or Isaianic
Jacob’s trouble
Jehovah’s Witness
Jeremian or Jeremianic
Jesus Prayer, the
Jewish Feast (Passover)
Jewish New Year (Rosh Hashanah)
John the Baptist
John the Beloved
John the Evangelist
Jordan River (but the river Jordan)
Jubilee (year of emancipation)
Judaism, -ist, -istic
Judaize, Judaizer
judges, the
judgment day
judgment seat of Christ
King (God or Jesus)
King David (etc.)
kingdom, the
kingdom age
kingdom of God
kingdom of heaven
kingdom of Israel
kingdom of Satan
King James Version
King of Glory (Christ)
King of Kings (Christ)
kingship of Christ
Koran, Koranic (prefer Qur’an)
Lady, our
lake of fire
Lamb, the (Christ)
Lamb of God
Lamb’s Book of Life
land of Canaan
Land of Promise
last day(s), the
last judgment, the
last rites
Last Supper, the
last times, the
Latin Rite
Latter Prophets, the
law (as opposed to grace)
Law, the (Pentateuch)
Lawgiver (God)
law of Moses
Levitical decrees
Light (Truth or Christ)
Light of the World (Christ)
Litany, the (Anglican)
living God
living Word, the (Bible)
Logos, the
Lord, the
Lord Almighty, the
Lord of Hosts
Lord of Lords
2:56 PM
Page 128
128 | Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
Lord’s Anointed, the (Christ)
Lord’s anointed Savior, the (Christ)
Lord’s Day, the
lordship of Christ
Lord’s Prayer, the
Lord’s Supper, the
Lord’s Table, the
Lost Tribes
lost tribes of Israel
Love Chapter, the
low church
Lucifer (Satan)
Magnificat, the (“Song of Mary”)
Majority Text
Major Prophets, the (div. of OT)
major prophets (people)
mammon (cap for the god)
Man, the (Jesus)
Man of Sin (Satan)
Man of Sorrows
Markan or Marcan
Masoretic text
Mass, the (liturgy of the Eucharist)
Master, the (God)
matrimony (sacrament)
Mediator, the (Christ)
mercy seat
Messiah, the (Christ)
Middle Ages
millennial kingdom
millennium, the
minor prophets (people)
Minor Prophets, the (div. of OT)
Miserere, the
Mishnah, Mishnaic
modernist(s), -ism
Mosaic law (Pentateuch or Ten
Most High, the
Mount of Olives
Mount of Transfiguration
Mount Olivet
Mount Olivet Discourse
Mount Sinai
Muhammad (preferred)
Muslim (preferred)
Nag Hammadi codices
name of Christ, the
name of God, the
nativity, the
nativity of Christ, the
Near East
Neo-Babylonian Empire
new birth
New City (part of modern
new covenant (NT)
new heaven and new earth
New Jerusalem (heaven)
New Testament church
Nicene Creed
Nicene fathers
night office (canonical hour)
Ninety-five Theses
non-Christian (n. and adj.; but
Nonconformism, -ist
none (canonical hour)
2:56 PM
Page 129
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms | 129
northern kingdom
Nunc Dimittis
Old City (part of modern
old covenant (OT)
Olivet Discourse
Omega, the
omnipotence of God
Omnipotent, the
One, the (but the one true God
and God is the one who . . .)
Only Begotten, the
only begotten of the Father
only begotten Son of God
orders (sacrament)
Original Sin
outer court (of the temple)
Palestinian covenant
Palm Sunday
parable of the prodigal son, etc.
Paraclete, the
Paradise (garden of Eden)
paradise (heaven)
partial rapture
Paschal Lamb (Jesus)
Passion Sunday (fifth Sunday in
Passion Week
Passover Feast
Passover Lamb (Jesus)
Pastoral Epistles
Pastoral Letters
patriarch, a
Patriarch, the (Abraham)
patriarchs, the (church fathers)
Pauline Epistles
Paul’s epistles
Paul’s letters
Paul the apostle
peace offering
person of Christ
persons of the Trinity (the three)
Pesach (Passover)
Pharaoh (when used as name
without article)
pharaoh, the (general)
pharisaic (attitude)
Pharisaic (in reference to Pharisees)
Pilgrim Fathers
Pilgrims, the
pillar of cloud
pillar of fire
Poetical Books, the
pope, the
Pope John Paul II
post–Nicene fathers
priesthood of believers
priesthood of Christ
prime (canonical hour)
Prime Mover
Prince of Darkness
Prince of Peace (Christ)
Prison Epistles
Prison Letters
Prodigal Son, the (but the parable
of the prodigal son)
2:56 PM
Page 130
130 | Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
Promised Land (Canaan or
Promised One, the (Christ)
Prophetic Books, the
prophet Isaiah, et al., the
Prophets, the (books of OT)
prophets, the (people)
Providence (God)
providence of God
psalm, a
Psalm 119 (etc.)
psalmist, the
Psalms, the (OT book)
Psalter, the (the Psalms)
Purim (Feast of Esther)
Qur’an, Qur’anic (preferred )
rapture, the
real presence
Received Text, the
Redeemer, the
Reformed church
Reformed theology
resurrection, the
resurrection of Christ
River of Life, the (Christ)
Rock, the (Christ)
Roman Catholic Church
Roman Rite
Rosh Hashanah (Jewish New Year)
Sabbath (day)
sabbath rest (for the land)
Sabbath rest (for the people
of God)
sabbatical (n. and adj.)
sacramentalism, -ist
sacrament of baptism,
confirmation, etc.
Sacred Host
sacred rite(s)
Scripture(s) (Bible; n. and adj.)
scripture(s) (other religions)
Sea of Galilee
second Adam, the (Christ)
second advent, the
second coming, the
second coming of Christ
second person of the Trinity
Second Vatican Council (1962–65)
Semite, -ic, -ism
Sermon on the Mount
Serpent, the (Satan)
seven deadly sins, the
seven sacraments, the
Seventh-day Adventist
seventh heaven
Seventieth Week
sext (canonical hour)
Shabuoth (Pentecost)
shalom aleichem
2:56 PM
Page 131
Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms | 131
sheol (italicized only when referred
to as a Hebrew word)
Shepherd Psalm, the
Sinai Desert
Sinai peninsula
Sin-Bearer, the
sin offering
Solomon’s temple
son of David
Son of God
Son of Man
sonship of Christ
southern kingdom
Sovereign Lord
Spirit, the (Holy Spirit)
star of Bethlehem
stations of the cross
Sukkoth (Feast of Booths)
Sunday school
Sunday school teacher
Sun of Righteousness
Supreme Being, the
Sustainer (God)
Synoptic Gospels
Synoptics, the
synoptic writers, the
tabernacle, the (OT building)
table of shewbread
Talmud, talmudic
Targum, targumic
Te Deum
temple, the (at Jerusalem)
temptation, the
temptation in the desert, the
temptation of Christ, the
Ten Commandments (but the
second commandment, etc.)
Tent of Meeting
Tent of the Testimony
Ten Tribes, the
ten tribes of Israel, the
terce (canonical hour)
Testaments, the
Textus Receptus
third person of the Trinity
Thirty-nine Articles (Anglican)
throne of grace
time of Jacob’s trouble
time of the Gentiles, the
time of the judges, the
tomb, the
Tower of Babel
transfiguration, the
Tree of Knowledge of Good and Evil
Tree of Life
tribe of Judah
tribulation, the (historical event)
Trinity, the
triumphal entry
triune God
True Cross, the
Twelve, the
twelve apostles, the
twelve disciples, the
Twenty-third Psalm
united kingdom (of Israel)
universal church
universalism, -ist
upper room, the
Upper Room Discourse
2:56 PM
Page 132
132 | Capitalization: Biblical and Religious Terms
vacation Bible school
Vedas, Vedic
Victor, the (Christ)
Vine, the (Christ)
Virgin, the
Virgin and child
virgin birth, the
Virgin Mary, the
visible church
voice of God
Wandering Jew, the (legend)
Water of Life (Christ)
Way, the (Christ)
way, the truth, and the life
Weeping Prophet, the (Jeremiah)
Western church
Western Rites
Westminster Catechism
Wicked One, the (Satan)
Wisdom Literature, the
wise men
Word, the (Bible or Christ)
Word made flesh (Christ)
word of God (his statement or
Word of God (the Bible)
Word of Life
Word of Truth, the
Writings, the
Yahweh (italicized only when
referred to as Hebrew word)
Year of Jubilee
Yom Kippur (Day of Atonement)
Captions are brief descriptions that appear with illustrations or other
graphic matter. The author should be careful to make them as brief as
Type Size. They are usually set two point sizes smaller than the size of the text
type when the illustrations are set in the text, although they should be the
same size and face when set outside the text, on their own pages. Still, if a
caption runs more than two lines, it should be reduced in size to save space.
With Periods. Periods should be used only when the caption forms a complete
When the Illustration Is Turned on Its Side. If the graphic material needs to be
placed on its side to fit within the format of the book, then the caption should
run along the right-hand side of the page, that is, from the bottom of the
page to the top.
From Left and From Right. When identifying people in a photograph, say from
left or from right rather than left to right or right to left.
2:56 PM
Page 133
Cataloging in Publication Data (CIP) | 133
In popular usage, especially in the US, the term carol has become synonymous with Christmas song; however, it is correctly applied to a song for
any seasonal celebration. Only about half of the nearly two hundred songs
in The Oxford Book of Carols (1965 edition) relate to Christmas. Also, a
carol is most precisely defined as a song, usually with traditional words or
lyrics, that is used ceremonially or as part of a traditional seasonal celebration. While the songs “White Christmas” and “Frosty the Snowman” are
commonly regarded as Christmas carols in the US, for instance, they are
more accurately called Christmas songs. In its earliest meaning, carol
described a specific poetic form, consisting of four lines, rhymed AAAB, and
often the last line was either short or one of two repeating refrain lines.
Cataloging in Publication Data (CIP)
Cataloging in publication (CIP) data is the accurate cataloging information for a book as it will appear in the card catalog of the Library of
Congress. Providing this information on the copyright page of the book helps
libraries catalog and access the book easily—in both their card and electronic files. Although placing CIP information in a book is not legally mandated, its use is strongly urged. Many libraries will not buy a book unless
this information appears on the copyright page.
Note that the Library of Congress uses the unhyphenated form,
Cataloging in Publication Data, whereas many publishers use the hyphenated
compound-adjective form, Cataloging-in-Publication Data. There seems to
be no reason for preferring one form over the other.
Placement. Ordinarily, the CIP data appears on the copyright page of a book.
If a book’s copyright page is already too crowded or if there are other reasons for displacing the CIP data, it may appear elsewhere in the book (on
another page in the front or in the back), although a note stating where to
find the CIP data should appear on the copyright page as a courtesy to the
Accuracy. CIP data should be printed line-for-line and space-for-space as it
appears on the official paper or electronic form received from the Library of
Congress. The typeface, however, should conform to that of the rest of the
copyright page. The Library of Congress makes no other specifications than
Occasionally mistakes creep into the CIP data due to errors on the publisher’s originally submitted form, an error at the Library of Congress itself,
or an error in keying the data. Mistakes in birth date or in the spelling of an
2:56 PM
Page 134
134 | Cataloging in Publication Data (CIP)
author’s name, for instance, are not uncommon, and all CIP data should be
proofread carefully at every proof stage. The publisher may correct any such
error as long as the Library of Congress is informed of the change.
Changes. Other changes in the CIP data may be made by the publisher. For
instance, if the author prefers not to reveal his or her birth date, the publisher may substitute the word date for the birth year (although the actual
birth year should be provided on the application form for CIP). Also, if a
pseudonymous author prefers that no one know his or her actual name, then
a long dash may be substituted for the author’s real name on the CIP data.
Again, all such changes should be reported to the CIP Division of the Library
of Congress. In this last case, CIP should probably be registered in the
author’s pseudonym to begin with.
For Multi-authored Books. For multi-authored books, only the first author is
listed as the main catalog reference (that is, on the first line of the CIP data
itself). That is not a mistake, as many coauthors think. Coauthors are listed
as secondary catalog references.
For Reprints. In a reprint edition of a book, if no bibliographic information
(title, author, publisher, ISBN, page count, format, etc.) other than the year
of publication has changed, then a new CIP need not be applied for. This
means, for instance, that a reprint that has received a new cover does not
need a new CIP. If the book has gone from hardcover to paper, however, then
a new CIP should be applied for because a new ISBN also has to be obtained.
If a publisher is reprinting another publisher’s book, then a new CIP is needed
even if there are no other changes in the content of the book.
Publications That Do Not Need CIP. Printed matter of an ephemeral nature
(tracts, pamphlets, catalogs, etc.) and books that are not likely to be purchased by libraries (such as workbooks, some Bible studies, cartoon books,
comic books, and some series books) do not need CIP data. In some of these
cases, the Library of Congress will refuse to provide data for such books.
Contact. Questions concerning any aspect of CIP data will be answered by the
Copyright Office:
Copyright Office
Library of Congress
Washington, DC 20559
Telephone: (202) 287-8700
Many a Protestant eyebrow has arched over the line “I believe in the holy,
catholic, and apostolic church” from the Apostles’ Creed. The word catholic,
2:56 PM
Page 135
Chapter Opening Pages | 135
when lowercased, means “universal, or general.” Hence, the New Testament
epistles of James, 1 and 2 Peter, 1 John, and Jude are known as the Catholic
Epistles, because they are not addressed to any individual or church.
Otherwise, Catholic, when capitalized, refers exclusively to the Roman
Catholic Church.
CE and BCE
The scholarly abbreviations CE (“common era”) and BCE (“before the
common era”) are synonymous with AD (anno Domini, “year of our Lord”)
and BC (“before Christ”) respectively and are used primarily when a writer
feels the reader might be offended by the christocentric forms, as in writing
for Jewish, Islamic, or secular readers. Most Western scholars still prefer AD
and BC as the most commonly understood by the greatest number of readers in English, though CE and BCE are rapidly gaining ground.
To CE and BCE, Muslim scholars also add the abbreviation AH (anno
Hegirae, “in the year of the Hegira”), which relates to the year AD 622 when
Muhammad fled Mecca for Medina, a key turning point in the history of
Islam. (See “Islamic Religious Terminology.”)
In general usage, the term celebrant is used to mean anyone who celebrates. In Protestant contexts it can loosely refer to any worshiper at a religious service. Care should be taken, however, when using the word in the
context of the Roman Catholic Mass, in which celebrant refers specifically
to the person who officiates at the celebration of the Eucharist. In that case,
the word does not refer to those in the congregation.
Change of Title
See “Title Changes.”
Chapter Endnotes
See “Notes.”
Chapter Opening Pages
The first page of a chapter, called the chapter opening page or chapter
opener, should be designed with more flair than the standard text page; it
should feel to the reader like an invitation to the chapter’s content. As such,
it is an exception to the general rule that text typography should be invisible. (See “Typography, The Elements of Basic Book.”)
2:56 PM
Page 136
136 | Chapter Opening Pages
Ideally, and where space allows, opening pages should be set recto with the
chapter number, chapter title, and text starting lower on the page than a normal text page. Oftentimes in mass-market-size books, the chapter will need
to begin flush to the top of the text area.
Chapter as a Word. As in the table of contents, the word chapter is often omitted on a chapter opening page since a numeral alone usually suffices. The
exception is for those cases when the word is actually designed in such a way
as to be a part of the page’s artistic composition.
Chapter Number. Arabic numerals are standard for chapter numbers, but
roman numerals are sometimes used when there are very few chapters (no
more than about ten). Chapter numbers may be spelled out for design reasons, but in books with many chapters, the higher numbers are cumbersome.
Use arabic numerals unless there is a good design reason not to do so.
The title, if the chapter has one, should be the dominant element in the
design, not the chapter number. If the number is spelled out, it should be set
in a contrasting type or located well apart from the title so that it won’t
appear that the number is actually the first word of the chapter title.
Also keep in mind that if the word chapter is used and is set in all caps,
Roman numerals should certainly not be used, since the numbers cannot be
distinguished from the all-cap lettering.
Chapter Titles. If the chapter titles in a book tend to be long, the designer should
set them in caps-and-lowercase rather than all caps. Also, a period should
never follow a chapter title.
Initial Capitals. The first letter of the first word of a chapter is commonly given
a special treatment. An enlarged cap sitting on the baseline of the first line is
called a standing cap. If it is cut into the text so that it stands on the baseline of the second, third, or other succeeding line, it is called a drop cap.
These may be indented for design reasons, but they can be set flush left or
even hung out in the left margin. The entire first word can also be given this
sort of display treatment at the discretion of the designer. If the chapter actually begins with a quotation mark, the mark is dropped if any kind of
enlarged initial cap is used.
First Line of Text. When no oversized initial cap is used, and occasionally when
it is used, the first line of text may be given a special treatment. The first
word, phrase, or line may be set in small caps, italics, or a special font.
Alternatively, the first word, phrase, or line can be set cap-lowercase like the
rest of the text.
2:56 PM
Page 137
Children’s Books: Style and Format | 137
Running Heads and Folios. Running heads should not appear on a chapter
opening page. If the design calls for the folio to appear in the running head,
then an alternate location for the folio needs to be found, customarily centered below the text in the lower margin (called a drop folio), although that
can be altered to suit the needs of a particular design.
In the broadest sense the word charismatic means “personally attractive
and compelling.” In the stricter and more religious sense, it has come to mean
“characterized by an emphasis on the gifts of the Holy Spirit.” The careful
writer should make clear which meaning is intended. For both uses, it should
be lowercased. The reason that charismatic is lowercased while Pentecostal
is capitalized is that Pentecostal is actually used in the official names of a
denomination and association of churches, whereas charismatic is not.
Children’s Books: Style and Format
Christianity has a special relationship with children’s books, for most
scholars credit European Christian educators with having developed the idea
of a separate literature for children to provide both entertainment and moral
education. The Orbis Senualum Pictus (1658) by Jan Amos Comenius, a
bishop in the Moravian Church, is generally credited as being the first children’s picture book.
Although children’s books in our own time vary widely in length, format,
age of readership, and content, a few general guidelines are offered below.
Type Size. Even though children can read small type more readily than adults
(type as small as 8 point), larger types (12 point and above) are usually used
for children through the age of ten. For the very youngest readers, about ages
five through seven, type as large as 18 point is not inappropriate. At a fifthgrade level or higher, children are fully capable of reading faces in adult type
sizes: 9 point through 12 point. By and large, the younger the audience, the
larger the type, even if a publisher expects the parent to read the book to the
Type Face. Generally, familiar medium- to heavy-weight typefaces are preferred
by children themselves, especially in easy readers and some picture books
that young children are expected to read by themselves. Serif faces are the
most often used: Times New Roman, Bookman Antique, Century Schoolbook, and similar typefaces that are also common in adult books.
Picture books for preschool-age children are sometimes set in attractive
sans-serif fonts such as Arial, Eras, Lucida Sans, and others on the theory
2:56 PM
Page 138
138 | Children’s Books: Style and Format
that “block” letters are easier for children to identify and closer to a child’s
own block letters. Books that are especially design intensive often sport handwritten text, elaborate fonts, or exotic calligraphy to achieve special effects.
Typographic design of children’s books is an opportunity for the author, editor, and designer to work together.
Word Breaks and Justification. Generally, words should not be hyphenated or
broken over lines in books for younger readers. Hyphens tend to confuse
early readers. This also suggests that ragged-right setting is the most reader
friendly. In some cases—as in picture books, for instance—lines can even be
set so that each line ends with a complete phrase or sentence.
Word and Letter Spacing. Occasionally, for books intended for beginning readers, a larger than normal word spacing can be used—up to a full em. The
compositor should also be sure that no kerning is used, since letters that are
artificially squeezed together can cause problems for young readers. By the
same token, no extra letter space should be added. The type should be
allowed to letter-space itself as it was designed to do.
Paragraphing. In picture books and simple chapter books for beginning readers, it is common to avoid using paragraph indents, since it is felt that they
confuse young readers unnecessarily. This adds a special burden on the writer,
who has to be careful that the speakers in dialogue are kept distinct and that
“said references” are placed early in dialogue rather than later. Appellations,
if placed in the middle of a character’s speech, should not come at a full stop.
They should come midsentence so that it will be clear to the child or adult
that the character is continuing to speak and that the sentence that follows
is not a new character speaking. If dialogue issues are too complicated or
cause confusion in an unparagraphed setting, then traditional paragraph
indents should be used.
Margins. The margins in books for young readers should be wider than normal. Research has shown that narrow margins can actually lead the child’s
eyes off the page.
Lengths. The length of a children’s book should be age-appropriate. Although
firm rules cannot be established (who would have thought eight-year-olds
would be reading a 700-page Harry Potter novel?), the publishing industry
has developed some standards for length and age. Keep in mind that, especially for picture books and easy readers, part of the page count is taken up
with title pages, copyright information, dedications, and sometimes author
and artist information. So in the following chart, subtract four to six pages
from the total to estimate the number of pages available for the actual text.
2:56 PM
Page 139
Children’s Books: Style and Format | 139
Type of Book
Number of Pages
Number of Words
Board books
8, 12, 16
0–20 per two-page spread
Picture books
(to be read to
0–1,000 (with 0–40 per twopage spread); 100–500 average
for youngest readers (with 4–20
per two-page spread)
32, 48
48, 56, 64
Chapter books
80, 96, 112, 128
18,000–25,000 total, unless
there is a lot of design or art
Young adult books
(teenage readers; teens
who read at their level
should be able to read
adult books by age
16 or 17)
varies, usually 144+
Easy [early] readers
level 1 (can read
and write with help)
level 2 (can almost
read and write)
level 3 (can read
and write alone)
Other kinds of children’s books have parameters that are not as easily
quantifiable. For example, “hi-lo readers” are for children of various ages
whose interest in reading is exceptionally high although their skills are below
average for their age level. There are also “family readers,” which are picture
books with higher-than-average word or page counts that are meant to be
read to children in several sittings. “Novelty,” or “special format” books for
children can take whatever shape the imaginations of the author and designer
can conceive, and they follow no set pattern. In this last group are foldout
books, pop-up books, scratch-and-sniff books, and books enhanced with
computer chips to play music or make sounds.
Copyright Page. Because of the design-intensive nature of picture books and
some other kinds of children’s books, the copyright page is often shifted to
the end of the book. There is no legal requirement for the location of the
copyright page, so this practice is acceptable and common. Publishers often
put only the bare minimum of information required on the copyright pages
of their children’s books—the copyright notice, the country of printing
notice, and the all rights reserved notice.
2:56 PM
Page 140
140 | Children’s Books: Style and Format
Dedication Page. Again, because space is limited in books for young children,
the dedication is commonly incorporated on either the copyright or title
Chinese Transliteration
Two major systems of rendering Chinese words into English are now in
common use: the older Wade-Giles and the more recent pinyin. This manual
recommends pinyin for most purposes. Not only is it preferred by the greater
number of Chinese-English speakers and readers, but it is also easier in many
ways. It is the system endorsed by the People’s Republic of China, although
the government in Taiwan continues to use the Wade-Giles system. In addition, British and American libraries are slowly converting to pinyin so that,
eventually, most book, subject, and author references will be catalogued
according to that system.
For the time being, however, an exception should be made when a highly
familiar Chinese word or name already has a long-established romanized
form, such as, for instance, the names of classic literary works and certain
historical personages. Few English readers recognize the pinyin Kong Fuzi,
but most readers will immediately know who Confucius is. Still, because of
the library cataloguing conversion, even that may eventually change. (See
also “Titles of Common Texts of the World’s Religions.”) It is not always
easy to judge which forms are “long-established” and which aren’t. When in
doubt, use the pinyin. Also, render the names of even well-known modern
Chinese personages in pinyin: Mao Zedong rather than Mao Tse-tung.
Here is a short sampling of some of the differences between pinyin and
Wade-Giles. An asterisk follows the preferred forms.
Dao, Daosim
do fu
Du Fu
Li Bai
Mao Zedong*
Tao, Taoism*
Tao Te Ching*
Tu Fu*
Kung Fu*
Lao Tzu*
Li Po*
Mao Tse-tung
Qin dynasty*
Sichuan Province*
Tang dynasty*
Yangzi River*
Yi Ching
Zhou dynasty*
Zhou Enlai*
Chin dynasty
Kuan Yin
Szechwan Province
T’ai Chi Ch’uan*
T’ang dynasty
Yang-tse River
I Ching*
Chou dynasty
Chou En-Lai
2:56 PM
Page 141
Christian Holidays, Feasts, and the Liturgical Year | 141
The primary disadvantage of pinyin comes when it is pronounced, but if
a few rules are observed, those problems are easily resolved.
pinyin character
ts (as in its)
ch (as in chin but a little softer)
(similar to the French u or the German ü
when it follows j, q, x, or y)
sh (as in she but a little softer)
dz (as in adz)
For a very helpful chart of Wade-Giles and pinyin conversions, see Table
10.2 in CMS.
Christendom versus Christianity
Writers commonly use Christendom and Christianity synonymously to
mean the Christian faith as a whole. In precise usage, Christianity is applied
to the Christian faith as practiced around the world, but Christendom is more
limited to those parts of the world where Christianity has been a dominant
historical and cultural force. Christianity, for instance, is widely practiced in
Asia and Africa, but those continents are not usually considered part of
Christendom, although that is rapidly changing as the demographic weight
of the Christian faith shifts toward Asia and Africa.
Still, the term Christendom has geopolitical overtones, and some writers,
including Malcolm Muggeridge, use it to mean nominally Christian Western
culture in contrast to genuine Christian faith worldwide. In using this term,
which can have such different meanings, a writer should clarify his or her
Christian Holidays, Feasts, and the Liturgical Year
Movable and Immovable Feasts. There are eight primary movable feasts in the
historical Christian tradition, all of which are determined in relation to the
date of Easter: they are Sexagesima Sunday (sixty days before Easter), Palm
Sunday, Ash Wednesday, Good Friday, Easter, Ascension Day (or Holy
Thursday; forty days after Easter), Pentecost, and Trinity Sunday.
All the other feast days and holidays are considered fixed, or immovable
feasts, though the four primary ones are the Annunciation (March 25), the
Nativity of John the Baptist (June 24), Michaelmas (September 29), and
Christmas (December 25). These are also called the quarter days, because
they roughly correspond to the changing of each season.
2:56 PM
Page 142
142 | Christian Holidays, Feasts, and the Liturgical Year
The following list shows those holidays, and the preferred calendar placement, spelling, and styling of those holidays, that have had historical importance to the worldwide church.
Advent. Advent spans the period between Advent Sunday and Christmas.
Advent (from Latin adventus, meaning “coming”) is the season of remembering Christ’s nativity and, by extension, his return to earth.
1. Advent Sunday. In Western churches, Advent begins on the fourth
Sunday before Christmas (which is also the Sunday closest to
November 30). That Sunday is generally considered the beginning of
the church year, or calendar.
2. Christmas (December 25). Christmas (short for Christ Mass) is the
day on which the birth of Jesus is traditionally commemorated. It is
referred to as the Feast of the Nativity of Jesus Christ in some traditions, and although it actually ranks after Easter, Pentecost, and
Epiphany in liturgical importance, it is the most popular of the holidays of the church year.
3. Boxing Day (December 26 or 27). Though not part of the church’s
celebration of Advent, Boxing Day is observed in the UK and much of
its Commonwealth on the day after Christmas unless Christmas falls
on a Saturday, in which case Boxing Day is observed on the following
Monday. It was formerly the day on which families distributed boxes
of gifts to the household servants. Today the tradition survives by
remembering those who perform other public services, such as the mail
carrier and trash collector.
Epiphany (January 6). Epiphany (from Greek epiphainein, “to manifest”) is the
celebration of Christ’s manifestation to the Magi and to the Gentile world in
general. This is a particularly important holiday in the Eastern church, where
it is the commemoration of Christ’s baptism. In England, the evening before
Epiphany is referred to as Twelfth Night. Since in the church calendar, the
new day actually begins at sunset, Twelfth Night was considered the beginning of Epiphany itself, the twelfth day after Christmas. The span of days
from December 26 to January 6, inclusive, are the traditional twelve days of
Christmas. On the old style Julian calendar, Epiphany was, in fact, Christmas
day, and it is still a day of gift giving among some Christians.
Lent. The primary church season, Lent (from Anglo-Saxon lencten, meaning
“spring” or “March”) is traditionally a period of penitence and fasting commemorated between Ash Wednesday and Easter in preparation for Easter.
The modern dating of Ash Wednesday and Easter were determined at the
time of the Gregorian calendar reforms in 1582. The following are the major
dates of the Lenten season.
2:56 PM
Page 143
Christian Holidays, Feasts, and the Liturgical Year | 143
1. Shrove Tuesday. The day before Ash Wednesday; generally a time of
preparation for Lent. Outside the church, the day is better known as
Mardi Gras, the traditional day of feasting before the Lenten fast.
2. Ash Wednesday. A day of penance and the official beginning of Lent,
Ash Wednesday falls forty-six days before Easter. Commonly, Ash
Wednesday is considered to be forty days before Easter, but that traditional way of determining the date of Ash Wednesday does not count
the Sundays on the calendar.
3. Laetare Sunday, also called Mothering Sunday and sometimes
Refreshment Sunday. This is the fourth Sunday of Lent, on which some
small breaks in the Lenten penances were allowed.
4. Passion Sunday. The fifth Sunday of the Lenten season. In some traditions, the last two weeks of the Lenten season, from Passion Sunday
to Holy Saturday, are referred to as Passiontide.
5. Palm Sunday. The sixth Sunday of the Lenten Season, that is, the
Sunday before Easter, on which Christ’s triumphant entry into
Jerusalem is remembered. The seven-day period beginning on Palm
Sunday is called Holy Week.
6. Maundy Thursday. The Thursday before Easter, traditionally the day
on which Christ’s institution of the sacrament of Communion, or the
Eucharist, is commemorated. This day is sometimes referred to as Holy
Thursday, although in some traditions the term Holy Thursday refers
to Ascension Day (forty days after Easter). The word maundy is taken
from the Bible verse read for that day: “Mandatum novum do vobis”
(“A new command I give you”—John 13:34).
7. Good Friday. The Friday before Easter. On this day Christ’s crucifixion and death are remembered.
8. Holy Saturday. This day commemorates the resting of Christ’s body in
the tomb and is honored in some churches with a Paschal Vigil Service,
which begins late on this day and ends in the early hours of Easter
Sunday morning.
Easter, Easter Sunday. Sometimes called the Feast of the Resurrection of Christ,
Easter is the celebration of Christ’s resurrection. Technically not part of Lent,
which ends at midnight on Holy Saturday, Easter Sunday is meant to be a day
of joy and celebration.
All dates preceding Easter in the Lenten season are established in relation
to Easter Sunday. Several factors determine the date of Easter from year to
year. Easter is always on a Sunday, and that Sunday is the first to fall after the
fourteenth day of the “paschal moon” (which is a new moon). The paschal
moon is determined by considering which spring new moon will have a full
moon (fourteen days after the new moon) that either falls on or closest after
2:56 PM
Page 144
144 | Christian Holidays, Feasts, and the Liturgical Year
the vernal equinox (always March 21 for this calculation). These somewhat
confusing conditions being met, Easter can never occur before March 22 or
later than April 25.
The following chart shows the dates for Ash Wednesday and Easter.
Ash Wednesday
February 25
February 9
March 1
February 21
February 6
February 25
February 17
March 9
February 22
February 13
March 5
February 18
February 10
March 1
February 14
March 6
February 26
February 17
March 2
February 22
February 14
March 5
February 18
February 10
March 1
February 15
March 6
February 26
February 11
March 2
February 22
February 7
April 11
March 27
April 16
April 8
March 23
April 12
April 4
April 24
April 8
March 31
April 20
April 5
March 27
April 16
April 1
April 21
April 12
April 4
April 17
April 9
March 31
April 20
April 5
March 28
April 16
April 1
April 21
April 13
March 28
April 17
April 9
March 25
2:56 PM
Page 145
Christian Holidays, Feasts, and the Liturgical Year | 145
Pentecost. Celebrated on the seventh Sunday after Easter, this holy day commemorates the descent of the Holy Spirit on the apostles at Pentecost (Acts
2). Pentecost Sunday is also called Whitsun, or Whitsunday, in England. In
the Roman Catholic Church, Paschaltide is the period between Easter Sunday
and Pentecost.
Trinity Sunday. This day is set aside to honor the Trinity and is celebrated the
Sunday after Pentecost Sunday. In the Church of England, Paschaltide is the
period between Easter Sunday and the Saturday before Trinity Sunday.
Other Religious Holidays and Feast Days.
Week of Prayer for Christian Unity (January 18 to 25)
Conversion of Saint Paul (January 25)
Presentation of Christ, or Candlemas (February 2)
Annunciation, or Lady Day (March 25)
National Day of Prayer (first Thursday of May; interfaith observance in US;
mandated by act of Congress)
Ascension Day (the fifth Thursday after Easter)
Nativity of John the Baptist (June 24)
Feast of Saint Peter and Saint Paul (June 29)
Visitation (July 2)
Transfiguration of Our Lord (August 6)
Assumption of the Blessed Virgin Mary (August 15)
Michaelmas (September 29)
Worldwide Communion Sunday (first Sunday in October)
Reformation Sunday (Sunday nearest October 31)
Reformation Day (October 31)
All Saints’ Day (November 1)
All Souls’ Day (November 2)
Feast of the Immaculate Conception (December 8)
Feast of the Conception of St. Anne (December 9)
Saint Lucy’s Day, or Santa Lucia (December 13)
Saint Stephen’s Day (December 26)
Holy Innocents’ Day (December 28)
2:56 PM
Page 146
146 | Christian Name
Christian Name
Although the term Christian name, which simply means first name, has
been common in English since the sixteenth century, most stylists disapprove
of its use in most contexts. Like the synonymous baptismal name, it presumes that a person is Christian or has been baptized. Use the terms first
name or given name instead, unless specifically referring to a ceremony of
baptism at which a child receives a name.
The word church should only be capitalized when used in the actual name
of a denomination or a specific congregation’s meeting place: as in the
Church of England or Saddleback Church. When used to mean believers as
a whole, the historical church, or organized religion in general, the term
should be lowercased: as in the church in the Middle Ages or the worldwide
Church Fathers
See “Fathers of the Church or Church Fathers.”
See “Sources.”
Citing Electronic Sources (CD-ROMs, etc.)
See “Sources.”
Citing Webpages
See “Sources.”
Clerical Titles and Positions
Clerical titles are formal titles given to religious officials of various kinds;
they differ from clerical positions, which are common words used to describe
religious officials but usually do not have the status of a formal title.
Confusion occurs because many clerical titles shared by different denominations have slightly different meanings; therefore, the same word can be a
title to some believers and a position to others. The two lists below attempt
to sort out some of the confusion.
2:56 PM
Page 147
Clerical Titles and Positions | 147
Clerical Titles
archbishop—Eastern Orthodox and Roman Catholic: leads an archdiocese or
ecclesiastical province. Also a title of honor in the Roman Catholic Church
for the head of an important ecclesiastical see.
archdeacon—Roman Catholic and Anglican: the assistant to a diocesan bishop.
auxiliary bishop—Roman Catholic: assists an archbishop or bishop.
bishop—Eastern Orthodox and Roman Catholic: heads a diocese. Anglican: heads
a diocese or sometimes other posts. General Protestant: one who supervises
other clergy in a specific region. Mormon: heads a ward.
canon—Anglican: connected with a chapter, a cathedral, a collegiate church, or
sometimes assisting a bishop.
cardinal—Roman Catholic: a high-ranking bishop appointed by and ranking just
below the pope. (The term is no longer placed between a given name and a
surname in official titles.)
deacon—Anglican and Roman Catholic: a stage on the way to becoming a
priest. Some deacons do not advance farther and instead serve in the
church in unpaid positions. Addressed as “Rev.” in Anglican Church.
Mormon: the lowest grade of the Aaronic priesthood.
dean—Anglican: heads a cathedral or a seminary.
father—Eastern Orthodox and Roman Catholic: the title given to most priests.
Anglican: a title preferred by some Anglican priests.
general secretary—World Council of Churches: oversees the general assembly.
metropolitan—Eastern Orthodox: a bishop who ranks just below patriarch and
oversees an ecclesiastical province.
pastor—General Protestant: leads a congregation or local church. Roman
Catholic: heads a parish.
patriarch—Eastern Orthodox: title given to a high-ranking bishop who oversees
other bishops. Mormon: clergy of the Melchizedek priesthood able to
perform certain prescribed duties. Roman Catholic: next in rank to the pope,
a titular head of a given region.
presiding bishop—Episcopal: heads the Episcopal Church.
rabbi—Jewish: the leader of a congregation. Also, a teacher qualified to
expound and interpret the Law.
suffragan bishop—Anglican: assists a bishop.
Clerical Positions
canoness—Roman Catholic: a woman living in a religious community but not
under binding vows.
deacon—General Protestant: a lay officer, sometimes elected, who performs
pastoral care or administrative duties or oversees ministries or maintenance
duties in a church.
elder—General Protestant: A lay church officer, based on the principles set forth
in 1 Timothy 5:17. There are two kinds: a ruling elder assists a pastor in
administrative functions, while a teaching elder has pastoral and educational
duties as well.
2:56 PM
Page 148
148 | Clerical Titles and Positions
minister—General Protestant: describes most Protestant clergy.
pastor—General Protestant: a general term describing the person with the
primary authority over a local church, congregation, or parish.
priest—Roman Catholic, Eastern Orthodox, and Anglican: the person authorized
to perform religious rites and ceremonies, usually as an intermediary
between God and the congregants. In rank, a priest is between a bishop
and a deacon.
primate—Roman Catholic and Anglican: a bishop who has special authority over
other bishops or whose ecclesiastical area has primary importance.
rector—Anglican: heads a parish.
Cliché, Religious
See “Jargon, Religious.”
As a Pointer. A colon acts as a pointer to something that follows a particular
word, phrase, or sentence. It can introduce a question, quotation, example,
or amplification. In the case of a salutation to a letter, it can point to the
entire text of the letter itself. It may act as a substitute for such expressions
as that is, namely, for instance, and for example. Today a semicolon is used
more often than a colon between two closely related sentences.
That is what faith is: God perceived intuitively by the heart, not by reason.
Remember the words of Augustine: “Hasten more slowly.”
Many Christian writers have been instrumental in shaping the genre of prison
literature: Paul, Boethius, and Bunyan.
It was the golden age of revivalism: Moody, Torrey, and Sunday were the
familiar names of the time.
It was the golden age of revivalism; Moody, Torrey, and Sunday were the
familiar names of the time. [with semicolon]
With Direct Quotations. A colon may introduce a direct quotation when no
verb-of-saying is used.
Luther’s answer was unapologetic: “Here I stand; I cannot do otherwise.”
Capitalization. Capitalize the first word after a colon only if that colon introduces two or more sentences in close sequence, announces a definition, presents a proverb or quotation, or introduces a question or formal statement.
Otherwise, the first word should be lowercased after a colon.
2:56 PM
Page 149
Colophon | 149
To Introduce a Quotation or a List. Use a colon when quoted material or a list
is placed in a separate paragraph after an introductory statement. An introductory statement should not be followed by a colon if the series completes
the sentence.
Consider this passage from Arthur Dent’s Plain Man’s Pathway to Heaven: [. . .]
The three areas of Tolkien studies are
1. The works of fantasy
2. The literary criticism
3. The personal writings
Between Titles and Subtitles. In bibliographies and other references, a colon is
used between a title and subtitle—even when no punctuation appears on the
original title page, since publishers commonly drop the colons before subtitles on such pages. But when a dash is used in the title instead of a colon,
the dash should be retained in any reference to that work.
Between Volume and Page Numbers. In bibliographies and notes, a colon is
used to separate a volume number (and an issue number, if present) from a
page number. If no volume or issue numbers are given, a comma precedes
the page number.
Karen Burton Mains, “Healing the Wounds of Long Ago,” Christian Herald 110,
no. 11 (December 1987): 22.
Tom Carson, “Baring the Celtic Soul of U2,” Los Angeles Times Book Review
(March 27, 1988), 15.
In Scripture References and Times. Place an unspaced colon between chapter
and verse designations in Scripture references and between hours and minutes in time references.
John 3:16
7:21 a.m.
A colophon is a short printed notice, usually at or near the end of a book,
on which the publisher or, formerly, the printer gives details of the book’s
production, such as its typeface or the type of paper used. The colophon has
a long history in publishing, appearing at the advent of movable type, when
it was first used in the Mainz Psalter of 1457. Though not as common now
as it once was, a colophon is appropriate for any book of which the publisher is particularly proud or whose production values are unusually high.
Customarily, a colophon appears as a single page at the back of a book,
though for space reasons it may appear on the copyright page. It can be as
short or as long as can conveniently fit onto one page, though shorter is
2:56 PM
Page 150
150 | Colophon
usually better. Colophons are usually set in type one or two point sizes
smaller than the text type. A colophon can contain any or all of the following information:
Notes on the typeface(s) used in the book, including:
style, size, and leading
reasons why that typeface was used
the provenance of the face (designer, year, first use, etc.)
system on which it was set
Credit lines for the compositor and/or the designer
Notes on the paper used (weight and maker)
Credit line for the printer (including location)
Credit lines for the graphic artists or illustrators who contributed to the book
A general note on the series or imprint of which the book is a part
A comma serves several functions in writing. It can introduce a direct quotation, separate clauses of a sentence, indicate parenthetical statements, separate items in a list, and perform other uses. The word comma comes from
Latin and Greek roots, meaning “a piece cut off,” which indicates, metaphorically, the sort of uses to which the comma is put.
With Coordinating Conjunctions. A comma is placed before a coordinating
conjunction (such as and, but, or, nor, for) in a compound sentence. No
comma is needed when both clauses of the compound sentence are fairly
short. When one or both of the clauses are long or contain internal punctuation, a semicolon should be used before the conjunction in place of the
comma. Bear in mind, however, that a compound sentence differs from a
sentence with a compound predicate (that is, two or more verbs with the
same subject), in which case a comma should not be used.
True Christian love can sometimes get angry, but it is also constantly wary of
anger’s pitfalls. [compound sentence]
We seek a human Christ but we also seek a transcendent Christ. [short
compound sentence; no comma needed]
The pagan philosophers gave many admirable precepts, both for resigning
blessings and sustaining misfortunes; but lacking the motives and sanctions
of Christianity, however, they produce little practical effect.—Hannah More
[complex compound sentence with other internal punctuation; substitutes
semicolon for the comma]
God teaches us patience and produces in us whatever other virtues we may
exhibit. [compound predicate]
2:56 PM
Page 151
Comma | 151
With Restrictive Clauses. Commas should not be used to set off adjectival
clauses or phrases that restrict the meaning of the noun they modify. Commas
should be used, though, when the phrase or clause does not strictly identify
(restrict) the noun. The most helpful guiding principle is this: when the modifying phrase could be eliminated without essentially changing the reader’s
basic understanding of the sentence, commas should be used.
The translation proposed to King James I in 1604 became known as the
Authorized Version. [The phrase “proposed to King James I in 1604” restricts
the noun.]
This version, translated from the original languages, was not printed until 1611.
[The phrase “translated from the original languages” does not restrict the
With Appositives. When a word or phrase is placed in apposition to a noun, it
is set off by commas. If the word or phrase is restrictive, however, no commas should be used. Again, when the word or phrase can be eliminated without changing the basic meaning of the sentence, commas should be used.
John Wycliffe, the great fourteenth-century Bible translator, has been called
“the Morning Star of the Reformation.”
her husband, Robert Pearsall Smith
his brother, Charles [indicates that Charles is the only brother]
his brother Charles [indicates that there is more than one brother]
the poet Milton
the short story “Revelation” by Flannery O’Connor
With a Series of Elements. A comma is placed before and, or, and nor connecting the last two elements in a series of three or more. This is known as
the serial comma.
Though John is known for his sermons and Charles for his hymns, both Wesleys
were prolific writers of letters, journals, sermons, and hymns.
Many manuals, especially those intended for periodical writing and those
for writers in the UK, recommend dropping all serial commas. If done consistently, they can usually be dropped without noticeable effect, though this
manual recommends retaining it for several reasons. First, it is still the most
common style in American book publishing and, therefore, apt to be the one
most familiar to the largest number of readers. Second, experience has shown
that misreading can occur more often without the serial comma than with it.
Since it is a long-established book custom in the US, keep it until the major
style manuals recommend otherwise. (See “Ampersand, Drop the Serial
2:56 PM
Page 152
152 | Comma
With Namely, That Is, Etc. A comma should follow such expressions as namely,
that is, and for example (including the abbreviations i.e. and e.g., although
these abbreviations are discouraged in nonacademic books). These expressions should be preceded with a comma, a semicolon, or an em dash, depending on how great the break in thought is.
She wrote her thesis on the major English mystics, namely, Richard Rolle, Walter
Hilton, and Julian of Norwich.
With Dependent Clauses. A comma usually follows a dependent clause (either
restrictive or nonrestrictive) when that clause comes before the main clause
of the sentence. A comma is also used before nonrestrictive dependent clauses
that follow the main clause. A comma should not be used, however, when a
restrictive dependent clause follows the main clause.
Although Merton entered the monastery in 1941, he continued to write poetry
throughout his life. [dependent clause preceding main clause]
Galileo finally agreed to recant, although he was later rumored to have
recanted his recantation. [dependent clause following the main clause]
Dorothy Sayers was not allowed to graduate after earning her “first” at Oxford.
[restrictive, dependent clause that follows the main clause]
With Adverbial Phrases. When an adverbial phrase comes before the main
clause of the sentence, the phrase is usually followed by a comma, although
it may be omitted when the phrase is short and when the omission will not
result in confusion. The comma should also be omitted when the introductory adverbial phrase is immediately followed by the verb it modifies.
Not many years after surviving a storm at sea, John Newton committed his life
to Christ.
After the decree Latimer was free to preach anywhere in England. [short
adverbial phrase]
Two years before, his ministry had ended. [were the comma omitted,
misreading would result.]
On the altar stood the completed carving of the nativity. [adverbial phrase
followed by the verb]
With Multiple Adjectives. Two or more adjectives in sequence should be separated by a comma (or commas) when each, by itself, modifies the noun—
that is, if the word and could be inserted between them without changing
the basic meaning of the phrase. If an adjective modifies both a subsequent
adjective (or adjectives) and the noun, however, a comma should not be used.
Margaret Fell proved to be a faithful, sincere friend.
Caedmon was the first great devotional poet to write in English. [no comma
2:56 PM
Page 153
Comma | 153
With Numerals and Names. A comma should be placed between unrelated
numerals, although rewriting is often the best way to deal with such situations. A comma should also be used when confusion would result from the
juxtaposition of two unrelated proper names or when a word is juxtaposed
to itself.
In August 1670, 450 people heard William Penn preach in front of his
padlocked church. [original]
In August 1670, William Penn preached to 450 people in front of his padlocked
church. [rewritten]
For Walton, Donne was the premier poet of his day.
His theology seemed to echo Pope’s opinion that whatever is, is right.
To Show Ellipsis. In some cases a comma may indicate that a word or phrase has
been dropped. If the meaning is clear without it, the comma is not necessary.
Newman contributed twenty-four tracts to the series; Keble, nine; and Pusey,
We know that the Corinthians received at least two letters from Paul, and the
Ephesians one.
With Quotations and Sayings. Commas may be used to set off quotations or
sayings, whether or not quotation marks are used. If the quotation is long or
formal, a colon should be used instead of a comma. When the entire quotation is used as though it were a noun (for instance, as a subject of a sentence
or as a predicate nominative), it should not be set off by commas.
Meister Eckhart said, “The eye with which I see God is the very same eye with
which God sees me.”
The minister was fond of the old saw, Too heavenly minded to be any earthly
“I forgive you” is a primary assertion of the Christian life.
With Oh. Use a comma after oh when other words follow it, but not after the
vocative O, which is usually only used in direct address. Phrases such as oh
yes and oh no are so common, particularly in dialogue, that the comma is not
used after oh in these combinations.
Oh, Jerusalem!
O mighty king!
Gary Davis sang, “Oh yes! I belong to the band! Hallelu!”
2:56 PM
Page 154
154 | Comma
With Too. Use commas with too only when the word is used in an odd or unexpected place in a sentence, often for rhetorical effect. Otherwise, do not use
commas around too in the middle of a sentence or before it at the end of a
Saint Colm too was noted for his love of animals.
Saint Colm was noted for his love of animals too.
Saint Colm was, too, noted for his love of animals. [rhetorical effect]
To Show Disruption in the Flow of Thought. Adverbs, interjections, and other
similar words should be set off by commas when they interrupt the flow of
thought. Commas are not necessary, however, when these words do not disrupt the continuity.
Margery Kempe, not surprisingly, was too impulsive to attract disciples.
The sincerity of Constantine’s faith, alas, has often been questioned.
Eventually Cowper contributed to the Olney Collection.
“Sinners in the Hands of an Angry God” was indeed Jonathan Edwards’ most
famous sermon.
With Jr., Sr., Etc. Do not use a comma to separate Jr., Sr., I, II, III, and so on
from a proper name. This constitutes a major shift from the previous style.
Martin Luther King Jr.
Pope John Paul II
After the Last Element in a Series. It is not necessary to use a comma after the
last element of a series with no conjunction. Likewise, a comma is not needed
after expressions such as etc., and so on, or and so forth if they are the last
element of a series.
Pretentiousness, boasting, arrogance are all symptoms of pride.
Pretentiousness, boasting, arrogance, etc. are all symptoms of pride.
With Two or More Verbs. Two verbs with the same object should not be separated by commas. A series of verbs with the same object, however, should
be separated by commas, as would a series of nouns. In a sense, this is the
rule of the “serial comma” applied to verbs.
Jesus touched and healed the man with leprosy.
Jesus comforted, healed, and taught many people.
2:56 PM
Page 155
Computer- and Internet-Related Words | 155
Computer- and Internet-Related Words
Computers and the Internet have added words to the language so quickly
that no dictionary or style manual can hope to keep pace. Although online
style need not dictate print style, it has certainly had a great influence on it
and that influence will only increase. One of the primary difficulties has been
agreeing on a consistent style. In most cases, efficiency and brevity—that is,
the fewest number of keystrokes—are the goals of most online communication. For instance, email rather than e-mail and website rather than Web site.
E- Combinations. The e prefix poses special problems. This manual recommends dropping the hyphen in the most common words (email, ebook,
ezine). Since new e-words are being invented almost daily (e-trading, ecommunity), however, we recommend hyphenating all combinations that are
clearly temporary (e-thinking, e-storage) and all instances in which the lack
of a hyphen might cause misreading (as in e-edition, e-empire, or e-editing).
Still, since the use of the e prefix has reached the level of cliché, this manual
recommends that writers avoid such neologisms whenever possible. Ecombinations will most likely vanish in the future as books and ebooks
increasingly overlap and as commerce and e-commerce become synonymous.
Capitalization. Only time will tell whether some Internet-related words now
commonly capitalized will eventually be lowercased. There are, for instance,
some technical differences between Internet and internet, and Web site and
website, differences that are, for the most part, not clearly understood by the
majority of people who access websites on the Internet. This manual recommends lowercasing website and most other web- combinations, on the
general principal of minimizing keystrokes. Internet should be capped. To
add to the confusion, World Wide Web should be capitalized, even though
its abbreviation is always lowercased as www in webpage address. Also capitalize the Web and the Net.
List of Words. Here are a few computer- and Internet-related terms in their
most common style:
A drive (B drive, etc.)
backup (noun and adj.)
back up (verb)
cell phone (cellular telephone)
dialup (adj.)
dial up (verb)
disc (for CDs, CD-ROMs,
laserdiscs, DVDs, SACDs,
disk (for hard drives and floppy
ebook (preferred; but e-book is
also common; avoid e:book)
2:56 PM
Page 156
156 | Computer- and Internet-Related Words
email (preferred; but e-mail is
also common)
Ethernet (capped)
floppy disk
information highway (lc)
internet, the (any large network
made up of smaller ones)
Internet, the (the worldwide
research network)
logon, logoff (noun and adj.)
log on, log off (verb)
mouse (singular)
mouses, or mouse devices
Net, the (synonymous with the
printout (noun)
print out (verb)
real-time (adj.)
real time (noun)
search engine
spam (lc)
spellcheck, spellchecker
spelling checker
Web, the
website (though Web site is
word processor
World Wide Web, the
2:56 PM
Page 157
Concordance | 157
A conclusion falls at the end of the book and is a place for the author to
summarize the main themes, fill in additional details, and tie up loose ends
of the story or discussion. It is usually longer than an afterword and more
integral to the reader’s understanding of the body matter. (See also
“Afterword” and “Epilogue.”)
A concordance is a reference book that alphabetically lists the words used
in a given book, along with their references and often a short quotation to
show how that word is used in context. The term is most commonly applied
to Bible concordances, the most famous of which was Cruden’s Concordance
of 1737, though there are many scholarly concordances of literary works
and sacred writings of other traditions.
Several types of Bible concordances exist:
analytical concordance—analyzes according to Greek and Hebrew words
compact concordance—abridged, in a pocket-size binding
complete concordance—contains many words, but not such common words
as articles, prepositions, etc.
concise concordance—abridged for ease of use
condensed concordance—abridged, synonym for concise concordance
critical concordance—synonym for analytical concordance
exhaustive concordance—unabridged, contains every occurrence of every
word and analyzes according to Greek and Hebrew words
handy concordance—abridged, synonym for compact concordance
keyword concordance—abridged, using only words of special significance
red-letter concordance—the words spoken by Jesus are printed in red
thematic concordance—organizes entries by theme
topical concordance—organizes entries by chief topics, generally synonymous
with thematic concordance
unabridged concordance—a complete concordance, contains all words but
does not analyze according to Greek and Hebrew words
An entry in a Bible concordance is typically formatted as follows (although
punctuation is not retained exactly as in the original quotation):
12:12 Of making many b there is no end,
7:10 and the b were opened.
21:25 for the b that would be written.
20:12 the throne, and b were opened.
20:12 they had done as recorded in the b.
2:56 PM
Page 158
158 | Confession
Largely because of Augustine of Hippo’s famous and personally revelatory autobiography called The Confessions (c. 400), the term confession, as
a literary genre, has come to suggest a personal narrative in which the author
admits to misdeeds and indiscretions. We commonly forget, however, that
Augustine used the word to mean “praises” and “thanksgivings,” a series of
declarations of his faith in God. This sense of the word is still with us when
we say that someone is a “confessing Christian” or “confesses faith in
Eventually the word was applied to the admission of sin as part of the
Catholic penitential process, and as a modern literary genre it came to imply
an author’s (somewhat self-justifying) moral self-assessment, as in JeanJacques Rousseau’s seminal Confessions.
Contents Page
See “Table of Contents.”
Contractions (can’t, don’t, won’t, it’s, and so on) are customarily reserved
for dialogue and informal writing in which it is important to preserve a
speaker’s or author’s colloquial tone. Although the rule of avoiding contractions in fine writing is becoming much less common than it once was,
contractions should be used sparingly in formal and academic writing.
The tone, style, and genre of the book will usually dictate the extent to
which contractions should be used. Memoirs, for instance, in which an
author’s spoken cadences and voice are particularly colorful may require the
use of contractions. Academic books usually avoid contractions in an effort
to elevate the tone and authority of the author’s voice.
Contractions, of course, are always preserved in direct quotation.
I’m not tempted by despair; where there’s life, there’s hope. [informal,
I am reminded of Sir Thomas More’s idea that there is no sorrow on earth that
heaven cannot heal. [formal; “I am” and “there is” are not contracted]
“Here’s to us all—God bless us every one,” said Tiny Tim. [direct quotation]
2:56 PM
Page 159
Copyright Notice | 159
Copyright Holder and Copyright Owner
Usually, the copyright holder is the author or creator of the book or software. Such a person (or persons) is sometimes called the owner of copyright.
Under current laws, that person owns the copyright from the instant the
work is written or created. This person may then transfer some or all of those
rights (to a publisher, for instance, to print and distribute). The person or
organization to whom the author or creator has given legal responsibility to
reproduce the book and usually to sell other rights (film rights, serial and
subsidiary rights, etc.) is called the copyright owner.
Copyright Notice
A copyright notice is the publisher’s and author’s legal declaration that
they alone have the right to reproduce and sell the book or other printed
material in which that notice is given.
The Essentials. A legal copyright notice for books consists of three essential
1. The copyright symbol (©) (and/or the word copyright or the abbreviation copr.)
2. The year of publication
3. The name of the owner of copyright
For works published after March 1, 1989, a notice of copyright is not
required in order to protect the copyright of the book, but most sources recommend its use nonetheless—to make the legal status of the copyright unambiguous. Use of the correct copyright notice will generally defeat the defense
of “innocent infringement,” should anyone infringe on the copyright; and
without the notice, the publisher may not be able to collect damages from an
The order of the three elements is not prescribed, though they should be
juxtaposed in some fashion. The most common order is copyright / year / by
copyright owner:
Copyright © 2003 by Joni Eareckson Tada
[for the book The God I Love: A Memoir]
Although it is not necessary to use both the word Copyright and the ©
symbol together, it is often done as a convention.
2:56 PM
Page 160
160 | Copyright Notice
Name of Copyright Holder. In the copyright notice, the first and last name of
the copyright holder, usually the author, should be used. Commonly used
middle initials or middle names are acceptable. Abbreviations of names (Wm.
for William, for example) are acceptable as long as it is still obvious to whom
the name refers. In one case, an author named Frederick abbreviated his
name as Fr. in order to mislead people into thinking he was a Catholic monk.
Such a practice, of course, should be avoided.
Commonly used pen names are acceptable. If the owner of the copyright
is commonly known by a pseudonym, single name, or single initial, then that
is acceptable as well. When in doubt, the original contract should be consulted to find the most accurate form of name of the copyright holder.
Incorrect Copyright Notice. If one of the three essential elements is entirely
missing from the copyright notice, the notice could be considered legally
invalid, and a company lawyer should be contacted. Under the current copyright laws, this does not usually mean that copyright is forfeited, but it can
result in some limitations to certain privileges or protections.
If a single element is merely inaccurate, then the copyright is still valid,
and most privileges and protections are not affected. A copyright attorney
should be consulted nonetheless, and the correction made in subsequent
If the name of the copyright holder is misspelled or wrongly given, then
it should be corrected in the next printing. This is not usually a serious problem, although again, an attorney should be consulted.
If the wrong year of publication is given, it is usually not a serious problem if the date is off by only one year before or after the actual date of publication. The publisher should be sure, however, to correct the error when
applying for copyright registration after publication.
If the date in the notice is two or more years before or after the actual
publication date, however, then the law treats the entire notice as omitted,
and the publisher’s lawyers should be contacted.
Placement. While the Copyright Act of 1976 does not insist that the copyright
notice be placed on the copyright page, most publishers still do it since it is
the most convenient and obvious place to do it. The law states that the copyright notice should be placed in such a way so as to be “perceived visually”
on all copies of the work reproduced. This may seem obvious, but it is stated
in order to cover certain ambiguities, such as unreadable material on video,
DVD, or other electronic media. A mechanical aid to visual perception may
be assumed, such as a projector or video player. In the case of video tape,
DVD, and CD-ROM, the copyright notice must be printed on the cassette or
2:56 PM
Page 161
Copyright Page | 161
disc itself or on its accompanying cassette case as long as the case is not
meant to be thrown away. A performance copyright should be obtained for
any sound recordings also contained.
Copyright Dates for New Editions. Whenever a new edition of a book contains
material that might not be covered under the previous edition’s copyright,
the entire copyright should be renewed and a new date provided in the copyright line. In that case, both the original copyright date and the new one
should appear in the copyright notice. Technically, the first date need not be
shown, but for a number of reasons it is advisable to provide it. When more
than one year is given in the copyright notice, the lowest number is given
If the owner of the copyright has changed, then both the old and new
dates—along with the name of the old and new owners—should be shown.
This is needful especially when an author dies and the copyright is transferred to a surviving spouse, family member, or estate.
Compilations. Copyright experts recommend that in those cases in which contributors to a compilation or an anthology retain the copyrights to their own
works, the safest procedure is for each individual copyright holder to be listed
in addition to the compiler’s collective copyright for the whole work. This
can be done on the copyright page although it may mean providing additional pages at the front or back of the book to list all the copyrights for the
individual pieces. In this sense, they are treated the same as any permissions
notice would be treated.
Copyright Page
The copyright page is prepared by the publisher. It contains the legal copyright notice for the book in which it is contained. The essential content of this
copyright notice consists of the copyright symbol, the year, and the name of
the copyright holder. (See “Copyright Notice.”) An “all rights reserved”
notice and a declaration of the country in which the book was printed should
also appear. (See “All Rights Reserved Notice.”)
At the publisher’s discretion, the copyright page may also include the
Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data, which is used for library
classification; the International Standard Book Number (ISBN), which references a coding system used worldwide; any credits and permissions; disclaimers and other brief notes from the editor or author; a brief printing and
publishing history of the volume; edition and printing reference numbers;
and any other information deemed necessary.
2:56 PM
Page 162
162 | Copyright Page
Placement. The customary location of the copyright page is on the verso of the
title page. Occasionally, especially in some art books, gift books, children’s
picture books, or other books in which graphic elements are dominant, the
copyright page may be placed at the back of the book. The functional purpose, however, is that the copyright page should be easy for the reader to
find. The law states that it must provide the reader with “reasonable notice”
of copyright.
A unique problem is posed by page-a-day calendars. In this case, it is recommended that the copyright page be placed at the very end of the calendar,
so that it won’t be thrown away at the beginning of the year. This provides
the reader with “reasonable notice” of the copyright and ensures that the
copyright notice may be “visually perceived” for the maximum amount of
Country of Printing Notice
For all books printed in the United States, the copyright page should carry
the notice: “Printed in the United States of America.” Any time the actual
book is printed in a foreign country (whether by a foreign printer or by a
foreign division of a US printer), the name of that country should be specified on the copyright page. Even if only the dust jacket of a domestically
printed book were to be printed in a foreign country, a notice of the country of printing should appear on the dust jacket.
This notice is provided on printed material for customs reasons, and failure to do so could cause the shipment of books or other material to be
impounded by the US Customs Service.
Cover Copy
The cover of a book is basically a billboard. It is an advertisement for the
book’s contents and is designed to get attention. The interior of the book,
by contrast, is usually more subtle. Too much distraction inside will diminish the reader’s appreciation for the contents. The interior design of a book,
as designer Beatrice Ward used to say, should be a crystal goblet through
which the color of the wine can be seen without distortion. (See “Typography, The Elements of Basic Book.”)
The same is true for the words themselves, those that appear outside and
inside the book. The cover copy is basically a sales pitch for the book, and
the writer of such copy should be granted a great deal of freedom in the way
that pitch is expressed. The writer should be free to break rules of grammar
and punctuation when there is a good reason to do so. In fact, a good copywriter should be breaking the rules.
2:56 PM
Page 163
Crucifixion, the, and Resurrection, the | 163
It is common for editors, authors, and proofreaders to complain that cover
copywriters and designers have made mistakes, and they are right in doing
so when clear error is involved. But in many cases, the copywriter has broken a rule for good reason, and his colleagues should be sensitive to that.
Ideally, the book’s cover copy should largely echo the style used in the text
of the book itself, but when there’s a reason not to, so be it. Call it “copywriter’s license.” For example, serial commas may be dropped in display copy
to save space, numerals may be used when necessary to facilitate rapid communication, and fragmentary sentences are common in cover copy.
Titling. Book designers should have the freedom to “fiddle” with the style of a
book’s title as it will appear on the cover of the book. A subtitle usually does
not need to be preceded by a colon on the cover even though it appears with
the colon on the copyright page. The title may be set in all caps or all lowercase letters. Some words may be emphasized in unusual ways. Punctuation
can be tampered with; for instance, a serial comma can be dropped from a
list in the title if there is a design reason to do so.
Crucifixion, the, and Resurrection, the
Unlike CMS and some other manuals of style, The Christian Writer’s
Manual of Style does not urge writers and editors to capitalize such terms as
the crucifixion and the resurrection in most writing for the general reader.
Such capitalization is a holdover from a time when devotional books commonly capitalized many religious objects, ideas, and events that are no longer
capitalized. While capitalization is legitimately used to distinguish specific
objects from generic ones, we feel the article the does enough to distinguish
which crucifixion and which resurrection are being referred to. When writing of the crucifixion, there is little doubt as to whose crucifixion is meant.
There is the added disadvantage that the capitalized terms may appear to
hold special meanings for the author not clearly understood by readers, especially those who may not be Christians. For instance, in a popular book that
attempts to argue for the historicity of the crucifixion of Jesus or an apologetic that tries to make an objective case for the resurrection, capitalizing
those terms may make the reader feel that the writer has a preconceived bias
toward one point of view and cannot, therefore, be objective. Typographic
style should not suggest partisanship in a book purporting to be objective.
Like most of the rules in this manual, however, this one may be broken
when appropriate. The terms may be capitalized when the author and editor agree that they should be, for instance, in scholarly works in which the
crucifixion and the resurrection are discussed as largely theological concepts,
or, like the deity pronoun, in devotional works intended to have a somewhat
antiquated feel.
2:56 PM
Page 164
164 | Crusade and Crusades
Crusade and Crusades
The terms crusade and crusades are legitimate words in most contexts,
although they should be avoided when used figuratively for Christian evangelism, modern military campaigns, or any effort to promote beliefs or values cross-culturally. There are two reasons for this. First, the terms have
acquired negative overtones in the popular press, suggesting extremism or
zealotry, as in the parents’ crusade to ban Huckleberry Finn from the school
library. Second, and perhaps more importantly, the terms are an affront to
Muslims worldwide.
The terms still strongly evoke the Crusades of the eleventh, twelfth, and
thirteenth centuries because they were specifically coined to describe those
wars (from the French croisade and Spanish cruzada, meaning “blessed by,
or marked with, a cross”). If evidence were needed to prove that the use of
those terms is now considered culturally insensitive, one need only remember the criticism President George W. Bush received in late 2001 when he
characterized the war against terrorism as “a crusade.” Even before then,
the Billy Graham Association had distanced itself from the term crusade.
When in doubt, find another word. Such words as outreach, campaign,
event, and appeal can usually be substituted, as in: a city-wide evangelism
outreach or a spiritual campaign to bring nonbelievers into the church.
2:56 PM
Page 165
Five Kinds of Dashes. Five kinds of dashes, varying in length and function, are
commonly used. If a word processor does not allow for these distinctions,
they may be indicated on the printout as follows:
Kind of dash
en dash
one-em dash
two-em dash
three-em dash
After the hyphen (see “Hyphenation”), the em dash (—) is the most frequently used dash in ordinary writing. When used alone, the word dash usually refers to an em dash.
Em Dash
Em Dash for Sources. An em dash can be used to indicate the source or credit
line of a quote when that quote is set off from the text, as in an epigraph or
block quotation. Note that in these cases the period should be used in conjunction with the em dash in order to avoid misreading.
Alms are but the vehicles of prayer.—John Dryden
A man without religion is like a beast without a bridle.—Latin proverb
Em Dash for Break in Continuity. An em dash can indicate an abrupt shift in
the continuity of a sentence or a thought or a strongly rhetorical turn of
Nothing in this world is to be taken seriously—nothing except the salvation of
a soul.—Bishop Fulton Sheen
Feel for others—in your pocket.—C. H. Spurgeon
Em Dash for Parenthetical Thought. A dash may be used to insert parenthetical matter that carries special emphasis or importance to the main thrust of
the sentence. Commas usually set off parenthetical matter that has a close
affinity to the rest of the sentence but does not carry any special emphasis.
2:56 PM
Page 166
166 | Dash
Parentheses should be used for extraneous matter that is not essential to the
argument of the sentence.
We must become so pure in heart—and it needs much practice—that we shall
see God.—Henry Drummond
Mistress Anne Bradstreet—a woman and a Puritan no less—may be regarded
as the first major American poet.
Helen Waddell, who also wrote Beasts and Saints and the novel Peter Abelard, is
probably best remembered for her translation of The Desert Fathers.
Erasmus Darwin (grandfather of Charles) and Lamarck postulated the
inheritance of acquired characteristics.
Em Dash for Summary of List. When several items are listed and then summarized as a group by a single word in a concluding sentence or clause, a
dash should separate the list from the concluding sentence or clause.
Wycliffe, Tyndale, Coverdale—all had a dream of seeing the Bible generally
available in English. [All is the summarizing word in this case.]
Em Dash as a Pointer. Occasionally the dash may be used, like a colon, as a
kind of pointer to direct the reader to something that follows an introductory phrase. It should be reserved, however, for those instances when a special emphasis is being placed on the words that follow the dash. In most cases
a colon will suffice.
That is what we are here for—to do God’s will.—Henry Drummond
Em Dash with Other Punctuation. In some circumstances the dash may be
used in combination with other punctuation. When a dash immediately concludes a quotation and is immediately followed by the speaker reference, a
comma should follow the dash. Often dashes are used in place of commas
to introduce a parenthetical idea into a sentence; in these cases a question
mark or exclamation point can be used in combination with the dash when
“Mine is comic art—,” Flannery O’Connor quipped.
Southwell knew the dangers—who more than he?—of returning to England.
Em Dash in Dialogue. In dialogue, broken, hesitating, or interrupted speech is
indicated by an em dash. An en dash is used to indicate stuttering.
“I can’t—don’t even ask—swear such an oath!” [Em dash]
“What was—” A peal of thunder interrupted him. [Em dash]
“I s–see. B–but why?” asked Brother Juniper. [En dash]
2:56 PM
Page 167
Dash | 167
Avoid Overusing the Em Dash. Writers of advertising copy often lean heavily
on em dashes to give a sense of immediacy and excitement to their copy. Like
exclamation points and italics, the em dash is emphatic, but if any of those
devices is used too often, they can prove counterproductive by numbing the
reader’s attention.
Even when not overused, em dashes have a tendency to cause the reader
to pause a fraction of a second while reading. Too many of them can lead to
what one editor refers to as “stop-and-start” reading, something that every
author should be careful to avoid.
Authors and editors should be wary of overusing em dashes. Commas can
be substituted for the em dash when a mildly parenthetical thought is
intended, or parentheses can be used when the parenthetical thought is more
tangential. When used as a pointer, the em dash can usually be replaced with
a colon without any loss of sense.
Em Dashes at the Ends of Lines. When an em dash falls at the end of a line of
type, it should be set on the right-hand margin rather than allowed to begin
the next line (at the left margin). An em dash, which is often very thin, set
on the left-hand margin can be mistaken for an indent.
En Dash
The British Dash. In the very same places where American editors would
place an unspaced em dash in running text, British editors often use an en
dash with a word space on either side – as in this famous prayer by Dag
Night is drawing nigh – For all that has been – Thanks!
For all that shall be – Yes!
The advantage of this style is that the dashes appear less emphatic and
blend more smoothly with the type. Because in some fonts the em dash is
actually lighter in weight than the en, many typographers complain that the
em dash, if used too frequently, can make a page of type look like Swiss
cheese – full of holes! Also, in some fonts, unless the em dash is hair spaced,
it can appear to touch the letters on either side of it.
Even in American publishing, the British en dash style can be used effectively – and without apology or hesitation – in books that require an especially
refined appearance, are of a high literary quality, or contain an inordinate number of dashes.
2:56 PM
Page 168
168 | Dash
En Dash with Numbers and Dates. In American publishing, the en dash is primarily used to indicate successive, inclusive, or continuing numbers, as in
dates, page numbers, or Scripture references. See “Numbers, Inclusive
(Elision)” for special rules governing elision of numbers.
May–June 1967
pp. 29–41
John 4:3–6:2
En Dash in Compound Adjectives. An en dash should replace a hyphen in a
compound adjective if one of the adjectives is already hyphenated or is made
up of two words.
the Norman–Anglo-Saxon church
pre–Civil War
an Old Testament–New Testament contrast
Two-Em Dash
A two-em dash indicates that an entire word or name has been omitted
from a sentence.
A certain pastor in the village of —— was known to have cooperated with the
A two-em dash can also indicate that a series of letters has been omitted
from within a word.
A dilapidated sign caused the confusion; it read, “Bay View Church; R——ent
[Repent] Now!”
The book was signed C. W——s [Williams?].
Three-Em Dash
A three-em dash indicates a name that is repeated in a bibliography.
Jansson, Tove. Comet in Moominland. London: Ernest Benn, 1951.
———. The Exploits of Moominpappa. London: Ernest Benn, 1952.
———. Finn Family Moomintrool. London: Ernest Benn, 1950.
See “Time and Dates.”
2:56 PM
Page 169
Deity Pronoun: Capitalization | 169
Authors often dedicate their work to a specific person or persons and
sometimes include a short sentiment by way of appreciation. This is the dedication. It has its roots in those times when authors actually had to find
patrons to finance the publication of their work.
The dedication usually appears on a page by itself just after the copyright
page but before the epigraph, contents page, and any other introductory
material. It is customarily centered line-for-line on the page, and a little above
the center of the page, unless the designer has decided to alter its setting. The
words dedication or dedicated to should not be used in the dedication itself,
nor is it necessary to use the heading Dedication. A dedication page should
not bear a folio number or running head, nor should it be listed in the table
of contents. Customarily, no period is used at the end of a dedication.
In some cases, where space is of special concern, a dedication may be
placed at the top of the copyright page and can even be set a point size or two
larger than the type on that page as long as there is sufficient visual space
between the two blocks of copy.
Deity Pronoun: Capitalization
The capitalization of pronouns referring to persons of the Trinity has been
a matter of debate for many decades. Should He be capitalized when referring to God or not? Impassioned arguments have been offered up on both
sides of the question. The following paragraphs outline Zondervan’s policy
and the reasoning behind it.
In Most Cases, Lowercase the Deity Pronoun. Although both the lowercase and
capped styles have long and deeply rooted pedigrees in English literature, this
manual advocates the use of lowercase pronouns in nearly all situations.
Reasons for Lowercasing. Many religious publishers and most general publishers have adopted the lowercase style, in large part to conform to the styles
of the most commonly used versions of the Bible (the King James Version, the
New International Version, and the Revised Standard Version). It is the style
recognized as contemporary by the greatest number of readers and writers
both inside and outside the church.
Because capitalizing the deity pronoun, as well as a vast number of other
religious terms, was the predominant style in late nineteenth- and early
twentieth-century publishing, it gives a book, at best, a dated, Victorian feel,
and at worst, an aura of complete irrelevance to modern readers.
2:56 PM
Page 170
170 | Deity Pronoun: Capitalization
Contrary to popular opinion, capitalization is not used in English as a
way to confer respect (we capitalize both God and Satan, Churchill and
Hitler). As pointed out elsewhere (see “Capitalization: Biblical and Religious
Terms”), capitalization is largely used in English to distinguish specific things
from general. Jesus is no more specific, in that sense, than Peter, and both
should therefore be referred to as he.
Some writers argue that the capitalized style should be used to avoid confusion of antecedents in closely written text (for instance, whether Jesus or
one of the disciples is being referred to as he in a given passage). Even in this
last case, a careful writer should be able to make the meaning clear without
capitalization. After all, the writer should be able to distinguish between the
twelve disciples without resorting to typographic tricks.
Many readers, especially the younger ones, do not recognize the reasons
for such typographic conventions, and the capitalized pronoun may actually
cause confusion or be read as emphasis when none is implied.
Finally, an insistence on the capped style can introduce unintended religiopolitical overtones into a publication. When He is capped for God or Jesus,
it can appear to younger readers especially, as though the author is purposely
emphasizing the maleness of the deity, in direct response to feminist theologians who argue for the inclusiveness of God. Apart from the merits of either
side of that debate, the capitalized deity pronoun introduces a polemical
overtone that may wholly detract from the topic at hand.
Is Capitalization Ever Justified? There are some situations in which the capitalization of deity pronouns is preferred, for instance, in books that have a
deliberately old-fashioned tone or when the author quotes extensively from
a Bible version that uses the capitalized style (such as the New King James
Bible or the New American Standard Bible). When deity pronouns are capitalized, though, the words who, whom, and whose should not be.
If a publication falls under one of those categories, the author should discuss his or her preference with the editor ahead of time, and the preferred
style should be specified on a style sheet so that the other editors and proofreaders involved in the project will be informed.
In Quotations. Even when lowercasing the deity pronouns in a given publication, the capitals should be retained in any quotations from other books that
use the capped style. Likewise, if the deity pronoun is capped in a publication, the lowercase should be retained in all quotes where it is found in the
original source. Quotations should always retain the style of the original as
a matter of accuracy (or unless otherwise noted in a footnote or on the copyright page). See “Quotations.”
2:56 PM
Page 171
Denominations and Associations of Churches | 171
Denominations and Associations of Churches*
Because of the array of religions and religious denomintations in the US,
confusion often exists about correct names and spellings of certain denominations. The following list is adapted from The Handbook of Denominations
in the United States and should provide a good basis for accuracy and consistency. Also, following some of the major denominations are the abbreviations by which they are known.
Adventist Churches
Advent Christian Church
Branch Davidians
Church of God General Conference
Church of God (Seventh Day)
Seventh-day Adventist (Adventist)
Baptist Churches
Alliance of Baptist Churches
American Baptist Association
American Baptist Churches in the USA
Baptist General Conference
Cooperative Baptist Fellowship
General Association of General Baptist Churches
General Association of Regular Baptist Churches (GARBC)
National Association of Free Will Baptists
National Baptist Convention of America, Inc.
National Baptist Convention, USA, Inc.
National Missionary Baptist Convention of America
National Primitive Baptist Convention, USA
North American Baptist Conference
Primitive Baptist
Progressive National Baptist Convention, Inc.
Reformed or Sovereign Grace Baptists
Separate Baptists in Christ (General Association)
Seventh Day Baptist General Conference
Southern Baptist Convention (SBC)
Brethren and Pietist Churches
Brethren Church (Ashland)
Brethren in Christ Church
Church of God (Anderson, Indiana)
Church of the Brethren
Church of the United Brethren in Christ
Evangelical Covenant Church
Evangelical Free Church of America
Fellowship of Grace Brethren Churches
Moravian Church (Unitas Fratrum)
Old German Baptist Brethren (Old Order Dunkers)
Unity of the Brethren
*Frank S. Mead, Samuel S. Hill, and Craig D. Atwood, The Handbook of Denominations in
the United States, Eleventh Edition (Nashville: Abingdon, 2001), 7–14. Used by permission.
2:56 PM
Page 172
172 | Denominations and Associations of Churches
Catholic Churches
American Catholic Church
Eastern Rite Catholic/Uniate Churches
Liberal Catholic Church
Mariavite Old Catholic Church, Province of North America
Old Catholic Churches
Polish National Catholic Church of America
Roman Catholic Church (RC)
Christian Churches (The Stone-Campbell Movement)
Christian Church (Disciples of Christ)
Christian Churches and Churches of Christ
Christian Congregation, Inc.
Churches of Christ
Church of Christ, Scientist (Christian Science) (CS)
Church of God and Saints of Christ
Community Churches, International Council of
Community of God and Saints of Christ
Congregational Churches
Congregational Christian Churches (National Association)
Conservative Congregational Christian Conference
United Church of Christ (UCC)
Divine Science
Episcopal/Anglican Churches
Anglican Catholic Church
Episcopal Church
Episcopal Orthodox Christian Archdiocese of America
International Communion of the Charismatic Episcopal Church
National Organization of the New Apostolic Church of North America
Reformed Episcopal Church
Southern Episcopal Church
Friends (Quaker)
Evangelical Friends International
Friends General Conference
Friends United Meeting
Religious Society of Friends (Conservative)
Fundamentalist/Bible Churches
American Evangelical Christian Churches
Baptist Bible Fellowship International
Baptist Missionary Association of America
Berean Fundamental Church
Bible Fellowship Church
Bible Presbyterian Church
Christian and Missionary Alliance
Christian Brethren (Plymouth Brethren)
Conservative Baptist Association of America (CB America)
Grace Gospel Fellowship
Independent Fundamentalist Churches of America (IFCA International Inc.)
2:56 PM
Page 173
Denominations and Associations of Churches | 173
Holiness Churches
Apostolic Christian Church of America
Apostolic Faith Church
Apostolic Overcoming Holy Church of God
Churches of Christ in Christian Union
Church of Christ (Holiness) USA
Church of God (Holiness)
Church of the Nazarene
Wesleyan Church
Hutterian Brethren
Nation of Islam
Jehovah’s Witness (JW)
Conservative Judaism (United Synagogue of Conservative Judaism)
Hasidic Judaism
Orthodox Judaism (Orthodox Union)
Reconstructionist Judaism (Jewish Reconstructionist Federation)
Reform Judaism (Union of American Hebrew Congregations)
Latter-day Saints (Mormons)
Church of Christ (Temple Lot)
Church of Jesus Christ (Bickertonites)
Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints (LDS)
Reorganized Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints
Lutheran Churches
Apostolic Lutheran Church of America
Association of Free Lutheran Congregations
Church of the Lutheran Brethren of America
Church of the Lutheran Confession
Evangelical Lutheran Church in America (ELCA)
Evangelical Lutheran Synod
Lutheran Church—Missouri Synod
Wisconsin Evangelical Lutheran Synod
Mennonite Churches
Beachy Amish Mennonite Churches
Bruderhof Communities
Church of God in Christ, Mennonite
Conservative Mennonite Conference
Evangelical Mennonite Church
Fellowship of Evangelical Bible Churches
Mennonite Church Canada
Mennonite Church US
Missionary Church
Old Order Amish Churches
Old Order (Wisler) Mennonite Church
2:56 PM
Page 174
174 | Denominations and Associations of Churches
Methodist Churches
African Methodist Episcopal Church (AME)
African Methodist Episcopal Zion Church
Christian Methodist Episcopal Church (MEC)
Congregational Methodist Church
Evangelical Church of North America
Evangelical Congregational Church
Evangelical Methodist Church
Free Methodist Church
Free Methodist Church of North America
Pillar of Fire
Primitive Methodist Church, USA
Southern Methodist Church
United Methodist Church (UM)
Native American Religion
Orthodox and Oriental Orthodox Churches
African Orthodox Church
Albanian Orthodox Archdiocese in America
American Carpatho-Russian Orthodox Greek Catholic Church
Antiochian Orthodox Christian Archdiocese of North America
Armenian Church
Bulgarian Eastern Orthodox Church
Greek Orthodox Archdiocese of North America
Holy Eastern Orthodox and Apostolic Church in North America, Inc. (EO)
Malankara Orthodox Syrian Church and Mar Thoma Orthodox Church in
America (Indian Orthodox)
Orthodox Church in America (Russian Orthodox)
Romanian Orthodox Episcopate of America
Serbian Eastern Orthodox Church
Syrian Orthodox Church of Antioch (Archdiocese of the USA and Canada)
Ukrainian Orthodox Church of the USA
Pentecostal Churches
Assemblies of God, General Council of
Assemblies of the Lord Jesus Christ
Bible Way Church of Our Lord Jesus Christ, World Wide, Inc.
Christian Catholic Church
Christian Church of North America, General Council
Church of God (Cleveland, Tennessee)
Church of God in Christ
Church of God of Prophecy
Church of Our Lord Jesus Christ of the Apostolic Faith, Inc.
Church of the Living God, Christian Workers for Fellowship
Church of the Living God, The Pillar and Ground of the Truth, Inc.
Congregational Holiness Church
Elim Fellowship
Full Gospel Fellowship of Churches and Ministers, International
Independent Assemblies of God, International
International Church of the Foursquare Gospel
2:56 PM
Page 175
Denominations and Associations of Churches | 175
International Pentecostal Church of Christ
International Pentecostal Holiness Church
Open Bible Standard Churches, Inc.
Pentecostal Assemblies of the World, Inc.
Pentecostal Church of God
Pentecostal Free Will Baptist Church, Inc.
United Holy Church of America, Inc.
United Pentecostal Church International
Vineyard Churches International
Presbyterian Churches
Associate Reformed Presbyterian Church
Cumberland Presbyterian Church
Cumberland Presbyterian Church in America
Evangelical Presbyterian Church
Korean-American Presbyterian Church
Orthodox Presbyterian Church
Presbyterian Church (USA) (PCUSA)
Presbyterian Church in America (PCA)
Reformed Presbyterian Church of North America
Reformed Churches
Christian Reformed Church in North America (CRC)
Hungarian Reformed Church in America
Netherlands Reformed Congregations in North America
Protestant Reformed Churches in America
Reformed Church in America (RCA)
Reformed Church in the United States
Salvation Army (and related organizations)
American Rescue Workers
Salvation Army (SA)
Volunteers of America, Inc.
Schwenkfelder Church
Spiritualist and Theosophical Bodies
National Spiritual Alliance of the USA
National Spiritualist Association of Churches
Swedenborgian Church (The General Convention of the New Jerusalem
in the USA)
Triumph the Church and Kingdom of God in Christ, International
Unification Church
Unitarian Universalist Association
Unity School of Christianity and Association of Unity Churches
Universal Fellowship of Metropolitan Community Churches
Worldwide Church of God
2:56 PM
Page 176
176 | Devotional Books
Devotional Books
At one time, most books of nontechnical religious reflection were termed
devotional reading, since they were meant to be read in conjunction with a
believer’s “devotions,” or times of prayer and meditation. But since the
Victorian era, the term devotional book, or just devotional, has come to
mean a specific genre of religious literature. Growing out of the medieval
books of hours, which gathered together prayers to be recited at specific
hours of the day (see “Hours, Canonical”), the devotional book now most
commonly refers to a book of short daily readings. The earliest known daily
devotional reader is probably the Feliré, written in Gaelic verse in the early
ninth century by an Irish monk known as St. Oengus the Culdee.
The conventional, though by no means mandatory, elements for a daily
devotional reading are (1) a Bible verse; (2) a meditation, which may or may
not relate to the Bible verse; and (3) a closing prayer, which incorporates
some theme of the verse or meditation. Other elements can include (1) an
epigraph or quote from another author; (2) an assigned reading, in which
the reader is directed to read a portion from some other book or from the
Bible; (3) a directed activity, in which the author suggests to the reader an
activity that would put the message into practice; and (4) a blank or rulelined workbook section, in which the reader is encouraged to write his or
her responses and reflections in the book itself.
Forms. The following are the most common forms of devotionals, although
they may be creatively adapted into any number of forms:
Type of devotional
daily devotional
This term most often refers to a complete year’s worth of daily
readings—usually 366, accounting for leap years (February 29).
This is the most common and successful type of devotional book.
A book of daily readings from classic Christian authors
A devotional in which rule lines are provided for readers to
write out their own responses
Usually rounded off to 90 daily readings
Usually rounded off to 60 daily readings
Usually rounded off to 30 daily readings
The text of the Bible divided into daily readings or expanded
with daily reflections on the Bible text; most often 366 readings
classics devotional
devotional journal
three-month devotional
two-month devotional
one-month devotional
devotional Bible
2:56 PM
Page 177
Dictionaries | 177
Format and Design. By and large, devotional books are trimmed smaller than
the average book in order to convey a feeling of intimacy and worshipfulness.
They should be hand sized. The challenge is that daily devotionals usually
contain 366 readings, which can result in books that are extremely thick.
Smaller, more condensed type fonts and thinner papers like those used for
Bibles are sometimes used, and the margins around the text area are often
Since devotional books are to be sipped rather than drunk in long
draughts, their page design allows for considerable graphic flourish—which
would prove too distracting in books like novels that are meant to be read
in long stretches. Such flourishes can include decorative borders, dingbats,
florets, and even illustrations.
Indexes. Many devotional books include a Scripture index, an author index (in
a compilation), a topical index, or a subject index, depending on the uses to
which the reader might put the book.
See “Accents and Diacritics” and “Foreign Letters and Characters.”
Dialogue, Paragraphing
See “Paragraphing Dialogue.”
This manual recommends the use of Webster’s Third New International
Dictionary (often referred to as Webster’s Unabridged) and MerriamWebster’s Collegiate Dictionary, Eleventh Edition (2003) as helpful standard
references. They are descriptive rather than prescriptive dictionaries; that is,
they list words in common use without making strict judgments as to which
are acceptable.
The editors of these dictionaries have listed the definition of each word
according to historical sequence, so that the first definition is usually the oldest, though not necessarily the most common.
For writers and editors to agree on matters of consistent spelling, meaning, and capitalization, this manual recommends a few rules in the use of
these dictionaries (rules that are applicable to most standard dictionaries):
2:56 PM
Page 178
178 | Dictionaries
Use First Alternative. When alternate spellings are given, use the first. In some
cases, the editors of the dictionary list the preferred alternative first; in other
cases, all the alternatives are so common that they are simply listed alphabetically. In either case, the principal of the “first alternative” should resolve
most inconsistencies.
Use Main Entries Only. Use spellings given in main entries only. Do not use
spellings from alternative entries that are followed by such phrases as var of
(variant of).
Use Standard English. In most cases, do not use words whose definitions or
spellings are qualified by such terms as archaic, nonstand (nonstandard), obs
(obsolete), slang, or substand (substandard) unless those words are specifically intended, as in a quotation from an older source. Such other-thanstandard words, however, can be effectively used in humor, historical fiction,
dialect, and other kinds of writing that require special vocabulary.
Capitalization. Unless otherwise specified by the publisher’s manual of style,
capitalize all words marked cap (capitalize) or usu cap (usually capitalized),
but lowercase all words marked sometimes cap (sometimes capitalized).
Words marked often cap (often capitalized) may be capitalized or lowercased
according to preference, context, and common sense.
Disability Designations
For most uses, the term disability is preferred to the term handicap.
Disability refers to an individual’s particular condition while handicap refers
to the person’s specific limitation in a particular instance. A disability is not
necessarily a handicap. For instance, a person’s blindness is a disability, but
it is only a handicap in those instances when vision is required (in reading
street signs, for example). That person would not be considered handicapped
when reading Braille or doing any other activity that can be done without
sight. A person in a wheelchair is not handicapped if his or her workplace is
wheelchair accessible. All of us are handicapped when our environment
imposes limitations on our abilities.
Focus on People. When writing about people with disabilities, the best policy
is this: Define them as people first. It is demeaning to use the disability as
the primary descriptor for the person. For instance:
2:56 PM
Page 179
Disclaimer | 179
people with disabilities
a child with epilepsy
people with visual impairment
a woman with quadriplegia
adults with mental retardation
a man with schizophrenia
the disabled
an epileptic child
the blind
a quadriplegic
the retarded
a schizophrenic
At times the writer needs to use a brief descriptor to define a group in
terms of their specific disability, as in a medical or sociological study. If using
terms that focus on the people first, like the ones in the preceding list, is simply too cumbersome in context, then terms challenged and impaired, combined with the disability, may be used: as in the mentally challenged or the
hearing impaired. Whenever possible, however, the “people first” rule should
be used.
Avoid Emotionally Charged Terms. In writing about people with disabilities,
avoid the tendency, common to those who do not share the disability, to
assume the person is necessarily suffering because of it. Unless referring to a
particular instance of struggle or hardship, avoid falling into locutions such
as: a victim of epilepsy, suffering from hearing impairment, the burden of
deafness, or afflicted with mental retardation.
Avoid Antiquated and Insensitive Terms. Do not use epithets that express insensitivity to people with disabilities, such as crazy, crippled, deaf mute,
deformed, hare-lip, lame, lunatic, mongoloid, paranoid, retarded, and so on.
The Use of the Word Normal. The writer should also avoid using the term normal to describe those who do not have a given disability. That term assumes
that the disabled person is somehow abnormal. Use such terms as those without this disability or a non-disabled person instead.
A disclaimer is the publisher or author’s written declaration, usually
placed on a book’s copyright page, that while every effort has been made to
make the content of the book accurate and safe, the publisher and author
cannot be personally liable for unintentional errors that may result. It can
also be used to assert that the publisher does not endorse products, companies, or websites that may have been referenced by the author. Though a
2:56 PM
Page 180
180 | Disclaimer
disclaimer is not usually legally protective, it puts the reader on notice that
he or she is expected to take responsibility for the way the content of the
book is understood and applied.
Unlike most of the information on the copyright page, which only needs
to achieve a basic level of legibility, a disclaimer should be prominently placed
so as to be clearly noticeable to the average reader. They are often positioned
either at the very top or immediately after the copyright notice.
In general, any book that an editor feels might require a disclaimer should
be carefully reviewed by an attorney. While many publishers do not use disclaimers, most experts recommend that publishers err on the side of over- rather
than underuse of disclaimers.
Some types of books that might benefit from disclaimers are shown in the
following list, although these are only examples, not an exhaustive list:
Cookbooks, where ingredients might be easily confused or create hazards
Health and fitness books, in which certain exercises, diets, or medications might
cause injury
How-to books, in which some procedures might lead to injury
Books of advice, in which a reader’s financial status, reputation, or health could
be affected
Novels, in which a person might feel he or she is being personally libeled in the
guise of a fictional character
A standard disclaimer for a book of health advice, for instance, might read
as follows:
This book contains advice and information relating to health and medicine. It is
not intended to replace medical advice and should be used to supplement
rather than replace regular care by your physician. Readers are encouraged
to consult their physicians with specific questions and concerns.
A disclaimer of nonendorsement for a product, company, or website mentioned in the text might read something like the following:
The [products, companies] recommended in this book are offered as a resource
to the reader. They are not intended in any way to be or imply an
endorsement on the part of the publisher.
Often, disclaimers must be individually shaped for each instance, and it is
best to have an attorney review the phrasing and content. This manual of
style carries disclaimers on its copyright page.
Websites. In this age of the Internet, publishers are increasingly adding disclaimers to their copyright pages, stating that the Web addresses cited in the
book are for information purposes only and not necessarily accurate or
endorsed by either the author or publisher. This is done because popular
domain names, if allowed to lapse, have been taken over by pornography or
2:56 PM
Page 181
Dot | 181
gambling enterprises in an attempt to lure unsuspecting Web surfers. Thus,
the following disclaimer might be appropriate in some books:
The Web addresses (URLs) recommended throughout this book are solely
offered as a resource to the reader. The citation of these websites does not
in any way imply an endorsement on the part of the author(s) or the
publisher, nor do the author(s) or publisher vouch for their content for the
life of this book.
Ditto marks indicate the repetition of a printed element from one line to
the next. In form they differ from quotation marks by being straight instead
of curled. On those rare occasions when ditto marks are needed, a double
prime mark (") is used in typeset copy whenever possible. In typewritten
copy, ordinary quotation marks are used.
Divine Office
See “Hours, Canonical.”
Doctor of the Church
While the term doctor of the church is loosely used to mean any of the
early theologians of the Christian faith, originally only four were so called
in the Western tradition (St. Jerome, St. Ambrose of Milan, St. Augustine
of Hippo, and St. Gregory the Great) and four in the Eastern tradition
(St. Athanasius of Alexandria, St. Basil the Great of Caesarea, St. Gregory of
Nazianzus, and St. John Chrysostom). The writings of these individuals
proved especially important in the forging of Christian doctrine as it has been
handed down to us today. Now, more than thirty individuals are considered
to be doctors of the church. When using the term, it is best to define whether
the narrow or general sense is being referred to. See also “Fathers of the
Church or Church Fathers.”
A dot is simply a period that is used in a webpage address. Technically, it
is not a punctuation mark but a character that separates elements in a URL.
Confusion with Periods. Some editors are concerned that when a webpage
address appears at the end of a sentence in text, the final period might be
mistaken as a final dot in the address. Though a few readers may make that
mistake, most will understand the period in its correct context. Also, most
search engines know to ignore periods mistakenly typed at the end of a URL.
See “Webpage Addresses (URLs).”
Spelling Out. Spell out dot in the term dot-com (an online company).
2:56 PM
Page 182
182 | Doxology
Lowercased, the term doxology (from the Greek doxa for “glory”) refers
to any general expression of praise and glory to God, most often in a liturgical setting and usually short. Capitalized, it becomes the title of any specific such expression. Most doxologies are addressed to God, as contrasted
with blessings and benedictions, which are largely addressed to worshipers.
People often refer to “The Doxology” as though there were only one,
when in fact many are commonly used. Among Protestants, “The Doxology”
usually refers to what is formally known as the Lesser Doxology or, in
Roman Catholic tradition, the Gloria Patri. There is also the Greater
Doxology, known to Roman Catholics as the Gloria in Excelsis.
Here are a few of the most well-known doxologies:
The Greater Doxology (“Gloria in Excelsis”; based on Luke 2:14)
Glory to God in the highest and on earth peace, good will to men.
The Lesser Doxology (“Gloria Patri”)
Glory be to the Father, and to the Son, and to the Holy Spirit. As it was in
the beginning, is now, and ever shall be, world without end. Amen.
The Trinitarian Doxology
Through him, with him, in him, in the unity of the Holy Spirit, all glory and
honor is yours, almighty Father, for ever and ever.
Thomas Ken’s Doxology (“The Benediction”; based on Psalm 103)
Praise God, from whom all blessings flow;
Praise Him, all creatures here below;
Praise Him, above ye heavenly host;
Praise Father, Son, and Holy Ghost.
The Doxology of the Lord’s Prayer (Matthew 6:13)
For thine is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen. (KJV)
Paul’s Doxology (Ephesians 3:20–21)
Now to him who is able to do immeasurably more than all we ask or
imagine, according to his power that is at work within us, to him be
glory in the church and in Christ Jesus throughout all generations, for
ever and ever! Amen.
Other Biblical Doxologies
Romans 16:27, Jude 25
2:56 PM
Page 183
Eastern Orthodox Versus Orthodox
When capitalized, the term Orthodox refers to those Christian denominations listed under Orthodox and Oriental Orthodox Churches in the
Handbook of Denominations in the United States (see “Denominations and
Associations of Churches” for complete reference). But since some readers
may miss the capital letter and assume the term simply means “conforming
to established religious teaching,” a careful writer should use the term
Eastern Orthodox in a first reference. Otherwise, the terms Eastern
Orthodox and Orthodox are used interchangeably.
The terms cover the eleven national churches and four patriarchs of those
churches, which came into being after the Great Schism of 1054. Some writers mistakenly refer to just one of the national churches, usually Greek
Orthodox or Russian Orthodox, to mean Eastern Orthodoxy as a whole.
This is an error. It is also a mistake to refer to Orthodox denominations as
Protestant. Orthodoxy predates Protestantism by several centuries. (See
“Catholic” and “Protestant.”)
Ebook, Elements of the
Ebooks and other texts designed to be viewed on handheld readers, computer screens, or other display devices pose interesting problems for the
designer, editor, and, in some cases, the author. Unlike print books that display two pages (called a spread), most reading devices for ebooks can legibly display only a single page at a time. This means that chapter openers
cannot start on right-hand pages, for instance, nor can the folios or running
heads alternate position right-to-left as in the traditional book. Blank pages
that often appear on the back of such pages as the dedication and the halftitle page are superfluous in the ebook and should be eliminated since there
is no reason to make a reader turn a blank page in an ebook. Traditional
page numbering becomes irrelevant insofar as any ebook element can begin
on either an odd- or even-numbered page, whereas in print books, most elements begin on odd-numbered rectos. Because of the greater flexibility in
text sequencing, page numbers may be less important than the reader’s own
electronic “bookmarks.” Ebooks can use color more liberally than print
books, simply because no actual printing ink is involved.
2:56 PM
Page 184
184 | Ebook, Elements of the
Not the least of the differences between the ebook and the traditional
book can be found on the opening page. The ebook’s front cover is its first
page, usually obviating the need for a traditional half-title page and sometimes even a title page. Cross-references, footnotes, endnotes, and indexes
may work quite differently in the ebook, for they may be electronically linked
to other portions of the book or embedded in the text itself.
The future of ebooks is a matter of debate. They could well become more
like Internet webpages and less like the traditional book. In fact, with continuing advances in wireless communications, it is possible that the line
between ebooks and websites could become quite thin indeed. On the other
hand, due to a lack of both a standard reader and a universal format, at present the promise of ebooks seems to be foundering. For the foreseeable future,
readers may prefer that their books, even their ebooks, look as much like the
traditional book as possible. For sustained reading many readers prefer paper
to handheld devices, and research is already underway to make magnetized
paper that can carry downloadable text so that the electronic books of the
future may, in fact, look like the paper books of the present, except that the
text can be continually changed.
With the form and future of ebooks so much in flux, here are at least some
general design suggestions, which can be contrasted with the standards listed
in the entry titled “Typography, The Elements of Basic Book.” In many cases,
a designer may wish to modify a print design when transforming a print book
into an ebook. On the other hand, those electronic texts that are destined to
be printed out as print-on-demand (POD) books should probably continue
to be formatted like the traditional print book.
Keep in mind that the following lists of elements of the ebook are merely
extrapolations of traditional print-book typography. These are offered as
default elements, in a sense, and may be liberally modified as appropriate.
Ebook Front Matter. The following are the elements of the front matter of an
ebook, as appropriate.
Cover (the book’s cover is the ideal first page)
Title page (a half title page can also be used, but it is usually preferable to allow
the full title page to be the first text page in an ebook after the cover; if the
title page is simply a reiteration of the cover, however, the title page can be
dropped altogether)
Ad card (list of author’s other books) or Frontispiece
Copyright page (in some cases, publishers move the ebook’s copyright page to
the end of the book so as not to distract the reader)
Epigraph (if it applies to the entire book)
Contents (entries may be linked to the beginnings of the parts, chapters, or
other elements themselves)
2:56 PM
Page 185
Ebook, Elements of the | 185
List(s) of maps, illustrations, or charts (may be linked to their locations in the text)
List of abbreviations
Foreword (usually by someone other than the author)
Preface (usually by the author)
Introduction (usually by the author)
Inside half title (optional, though it serves as a good marker that the actual text
is about to begin)
Ebook Body Matter. The following list shows the elements of an ebook’s body
matter, as appropriate.
Part title page
Part epigraph (if it applies to the entire part)
Chapter title page
Chapter epigraph (if it applies to the chapter only)
Chapter number and title
Text of chapter
Discussion questions
Chapter endnotes (may be linked to a separate endnote file)
Chapter bibliography or “For Further Reading”
Ebook Back Matter. The following is a list of elements of the back matter of an
ebook, as appropriate.
Study questions (if not incorporated into the text)
Notes (may be linked to their locations in the text)
Glossary (may be linked to words used in the text)
Chronological table(s)
Bibliography, or “For Further Reading”
Index to maps (may be linked)
Proper-name index (may be linked)
Subject index (may be linked)
Scripture index (may be linked)
Author biographical note
Colophon or publisher’s note
The Author and the Ebook. Already the writing of an ebook is demanding that
authors rethink the traditional writing process, especially if the ebook is to take
advantage of its unique strengths and be more than just a print book squeezed
into an electronic format. Since ebooks allow for different elements and possibilities, the author who knows ahead of time that his or her manuscript will
be published as an ebook may want to keep the following things in mind even
before the writing of the book begins.
2:56 PM
Page 186
186 | Ebook, Elements of the
Ebooks allow for almost instantaneous linking of different portions of the
text. This can be as simple as shifting between a chapter title on the contents
page and the beginning of that chapter itself; or it may be as complex as providing glosses, cross-references, or secondary references for information given
in the text. In the writing of a book, the author should be aware of what
portions of the text might be conveniently linked to each other for the benefit of the reader. Also, explanatory notes, definitions of terms, and other
information can be embedded in the text or as drop-down boxes to aid readers when needed.
Footnotes, for example, instead of appearing at the bottom of the page,
might become a small window that opens when the highlighted callout symbol is clicked. Instead of traditional cross-referencing, the reader might be
given the option of actually moving to the part of the text referred to in the
cross-reference. Words can be defined, biographic and bibliographic information can be provided, and multimedia files can be opened with a click of
the mouse.
Since the seventies, an entire generation of experimental novelists has
explored the possibilities of “hypertext” fiction, which depends far less on
linear structure than the traditional novel. Authors may eventually learn to
take advantage of the nonlinear possibilities of the ebook, allowing the reader
to jump around in the text, creating a unique experience with each reading.
The word e-church, like so many other e combinations, should probably
continue to be hyphenated for the time being. Odds are the e- prefix will
become closed over time if it doesn’t disappear entirely before then.
The word ecumenical is commonly used to mean one of three distinct
things. First, it has been used by the Roman Catholic Church to mean “all
the inhabited world” or “worldwide” Catholicism (from the Latin oecuminicus). A convocation of Catholic bishops from around the world is considered an ecumenical convocation. This use of the term became particularly
popular during the Second Vatican Council, 1962–65.
The term has also come to mean “worldwide” in the sense of “interdenominational,” or representing all the different Christian faiths. There is
a worldwide ecumenical movement that seeks to promote dialogue and unity
among different Christian denominations.
Finally, the word has also come to imply “inter-faith,” or representing the
various major religions of the world. Often an ecumenical conference might
be attended by Christians, Muslims, Jews, Buddhists, and Hindus alike.
2:56 PM
Page 187
Editing | 187
The careful writer should make sure that the written context clarifies
which of these meanings is intended.
Other than the author, no one should be more familiar with a book than
its editor. Editing is the process by which a book’s content is shaped into its
finished, most reader-friendly form. It involves a comprehensive overview
and analysis of a book’s content, structure, style, elements, and design.
Editors are responsible for combining all aspects of the book, interior and
exterior, into a cohesive whole that expresses the author’s ideas most clearly,
is consistent with the publisher’s standards and mission statement, and fulfills the book’s implied promise of excellence to the most important person
of all, the reader.
Although H. G. Wells once said, “There is no greater joy than to correct
another’s copy,” editing is far more than correcting. It can be compared to
conducting an orchestra. The conductor does not necessarily know how to
play every instrument in the orchestra, but he or she knows enough about
each to be able to bring them together into a harmonious whole. Similarly,
an editor need not be an author, printer, designer, salesperson, marketer, and
copywriter, but he or she should be familiar enough with those functions to
create the best book possible. Books are verbal and visual symphonies.
Just as music is a link between the composer and the listener, books connect the author with the reader. As the middle person in that process, the editor becomes an advocate for both. Any editorial task that does not facilitate
that connection is not worth doing. In the face of a publisher’s financial interests in the book, the editor is often the person most devoted to ensuring that
neither the author nor the reader’s interests are lost. A strong editorial voice
in behalf of the author is, in many cases, a crucial reason that some writers
remain at a publishing house. It keeps them coming back and bringing new
readers with them. And ultimately, if the authors and readers are happy, the
publisher’s accountants will be as well.
Levels of Editing
Good editing requires that editors visualize at the outset what the finished
product will look like and seek to capture that image in word, format, style,
illustration, and symbol. At least three functions are commonly referred to
as editing, though quite different in intent and responsibility. They are sometimes called “the levels of editing.”
1. Macro editing. This is the broadest level of editing. The editor reads the manuscript, usually the writer’s preliminary draft or in some cases a partial manuscript or proposal, and responds with no more than a few pages of critique.
2:56 PM
Page 188
188 | Editing
On this level, the editor shares her or his most basic responses to the author’s
work: first impressions, needs for major cuts or additions or restructuring,
and suggestions for revision. This is perhaps the most creative level of editing because the editor can sometimes assist the author in shaping the book
2. Substantive, or content, editing. A substantive, or content editor is usually
responding to an author’s first complete draft of the book. The editor focuses
on the structure of the author’s ideas and their arrangement into words.
Good content editing requires changes to, and queries concerning, specific
words, phrases, sentences, or even long passages to make a book accurate,
complete, clear, and precise. Content editors seek to eliminate discrepancies,
buttress viewpoints, clarify the obscure, provide missing information, and
reorganize material as needed. They work directly with the author by suggesting revisions. The editor is responsible to suggest ways of enhancing the
aesthetic qualities of the author’s language. Good literary style is inevitably
intertwined with content because the subject matter and author’s purposes
affect tone, reading level, and degree of formality.
Content editing is dynamic and interactive. It usually takes place on a copy
of the complete manuscript itself, whether hard copy or electronic. Since each
book requires individual treatment, many editors provide authors with a
printout or a marked-up copy of the edited manuscript.
3. Copy editing. The copy editor is responsible for the details of “house style,”
or “press style,” which deal with such mechanical aspects of language as capitalization, spelling, grammar, use of numbers, outline style, punctuation,
and so on. This manual attempts to establish a standard of style for religious
When possible, a copy editor checks the accuracy of dates, quotations,
references, and factual information, although the accuracy of such information is ultimately the author’s responsibility. A copy editor’s opportunities
for making changes in an author’s manuscript are restricted to obvious errors,
inaccuracies, ambiguities, and inelegancies; and the copy editor’s interaction
with the author is often limited to occasional queries. In recent years, however, as content editors find themselves more rushed, copy editors often
become an author’s primary contact person, especially in matters of manuscript preparation. Unless authorized to do so, the copy editor should not
presume to make the kinds of dynamic revisions or suggestions that are properly the domain of the author, the macro editor, and the content editor. You
might say that the copy editor’s job is to “micro edit.”
2:56 PM
Page 189
Editing | 189
Editing and Correcting on Computer
In spite of what computerization has long promised, the “paperless book”
remains a largely unattainable ideal. While theoretically it is possible to write,
edit, proofread, and even publish books without using a single sheet of paper,
it is seldom practical or even possible. For instance, many publishers require
their authors to provide a paper copy of the manuscript for reference purposes; proofreaders still prefer to read paper copies, and tests seem to show
that proofreading on paper is more accurate; and salespeople and marketers
are more likely to ask for a paper copy when they wish to familiarize themselves with the manuscript. The one process that seems to have made the
transition to computerization most smoothly is editing itself, though some
challenges still remain.
Every editor should be familiar with the following computerized tools:
Revision Tracking. Editing and word-processing software systems allow the editor to switch a revision-tracking function on and off. When turned on, the
tracking function records every editing change made to the manuscript,
changes that can be viewed in a printout and in the data itself. Many authors
prefer to see every change made and to respond to each one individually,
although authors can also become unnecessarily alarmed if they feel attacked
for every minor change that is made. (For instance, simply adding the serial
comma throughout a manuscript can make the manuscript look very heavily edited.) In a sense, revision tracking enshrines the negative by making the
positive very difficult to see.
As a result, many authors are happy for their editors to turn off the tracking software so that both of them can focus on a clean, edited copy. The burden, however, remains with the editor to outline the general changes made
in the manuscript (style matters, types of corrections made, and so on). A
style sheet of corrections can be provided to an author to clarify some of
these issues. The use or non-use of editorial revision tracking is a matter that
should be left either to company policy or to an individual agreement
between the author and editor.
Annotations and Queries. One of the most useful tools on the editor’s computer
desktop is the author-query function. This allows the editor to insert numbered callouts into the manuscript, to which embedded queries are attached.
Those queries can then be printed on a separate sheet of paper or sent digitally to the author. Internal queries (intended only for others within the publishing house to see) can also be incorporated into the data. These tools are
highly recommended.
2:56 PM
Page 190
190 | Editing
Spelling and Grammar Checkers. Spelling and grammar checkers are only as
smart as the people using them. In spite of the manufacturer’s claims, they
are never as good as human spelling and grammar checkers. Of the two, editors often use spell-checking programs to catch missed typos. They are helpful, for instance, in catching proper names that may have been misspelled or
spelled two different ways in the course of a manuscript. Still, their value is
limited, since they are unable to distinguish between homonyms (two, too,
to, for instance) and are impotent in the face of correctly spelled words in the
wrong place (as in more gist for the mill).
In the opinion of most professionals, most grammar-checking programs
are only a hair better than none at all. They are primarily designed for
business-writing purposes, and most editors do not use them because they
are not only time-consuming but they subtly train the editor to “edit for the
checker” rather than for the reader. Most grammar software programs don’t
like long sentences, passive constructions, split infinitives, and complex and
unconventional syntax, not taking into account that there are often excellent stylistic reasons to allow these. Grammar checkers, if taken too seriously,
lead to writing as colorless as a box of crayons with only shades of white to
choose from.
Editing and Correcting on Paper
Although most manuscripts are now prepared and edited electronically,
some editing, proofreading, and correction checking are still done on paper
printouts. The following guidelines offer suggestions for hand-rendering
Clarity. Since either the author or a keyboard operator will have to enter the editor’s paper-copy changes into the electronic data, the editor should make sure
that all notations and queries are as clear and as clean as possible.
Colored Pens or Pencils. The content editor, the copy editor, and the proofreader, if they are all working on the same set of galleys, should use pens or
pencils of different colors so that their corrections can be distinguished. Pencil
allows for erasure and is therefore preferred by many editors, but pencil also
smudges more easily than pen. Pen, on the other hand, is often cleaner but
does not allow for erasure. It’s a toss-up, though this manual recommends
pen as long as the editor thinks through the change thoroughly before committing it to paper.
Handwritten Corrections. For corrections and annotations made to a paper
copy of a manuscript, block printing is preferred to handwriting because it
is more legible. Authors, editors, and proofreaders should print. This also
aids in keeping changes, queries, and annotations concise.
2:56 PM
Page 191
Ellipsis | 191
Insertions. Lengthy insertions in a paper manuscript, whether by the editor or
author, should be typed on a full-size page and inserted after the page on
which the insertion is to be made. Again, the placement of all insertions
should be clearly marked. Inserted pages should be given the same number
as the page they follow but with the addition of a lowercase a, b, c, and so
on. The data generated by those insertions should be saved to a disk so that
they can be easily added to the authoritative data copy.
Queries on a Paper Manuscript. Editorial queries and notes are most conveniently listed on a separate sheet of paper with page and line references.
Queries and notes in the margins of the manuscript can easily confuse the
keyboard operator, causing the queries to be inserted into the text. If an occasional short query or note is inserted in margins of the text, the editor should
remember the proofreader’s rule that anything not meant to be typeset should
be circled.
Editorial Markup. On paper, editorial notation uses symbols and markings similar to standard proofreading symbols but with one difference: editorial work
is done in the text itself, while proofreading corrections are indicated in the
text with a symbol and in the margin with an annotation.
Editing Terminology
See “Proofreading Abbreviations and Terms.”
Electronic Manuscripts
See “Manuscript Preparation: Author Guidelines.”
Elision of Numbers
See “Numbers, Inclusive (Elision).”
An ellipsis ( . . . ) is a typographic device that indicates when words are
missing from a direct quotation. Ellipses are also frequently used to show a
trailing off or an indecisiveness in thought or speech.
Two styles are common in writing and editing: (1) the three-dot style and
(2) the three-and-four-dot style. For fiction books in which quotations from
other sources are rare, this manual recommends the simpler three-dot style
(though it formerly recommended the three-and-four-dot style). For all other
books, especially those containing quotations from other sources and for
most academic books, this manual recommends the three-and-four-dot style.
Both styles are described in detail here. The basic difference between the two
is how they handle periods.
2:56 PM
Page 192
192 | Ellipsis
The Three-Dot Style. A three-dot ellipsis can indicate (1) that words within a
sentence have been omitted; (2) that words at the beginning or end of a sentence have been omitted, whether or not it leaves the sentence grammatically
complete; or (3) that the end of a sentence has been left unfinished to indicate a trailing off of thought or speech. In the three-dot style, in other words,
the ellipsis replaces any period that may have been present in the original
context. When the ellipsis follows a complete sentence or thought, no period
should appear before the ellipsis, though the first letter of the word following the ellipsis should always be capitalized to show the beginning of a new
sentence or thought. Generally, no other punctuation is used with three-dot
ellipses in this style, except for question marks and exclamation points.
Normal word spaces should be placed on both sides of the three-dot ellipsis
in all cases.
“The more often he feels without acting . . . the less he will be able to feel,”
wrote Screwtape to Wormwood. [Words within the quotation are omitted.]
Job focuses on God, not on God’s questions. He shows this by beginning his
answer by saying, “I know that you . . .” (Job 42:2). [shows omission in
incomplete sentence]
“I am cold and weary, ink is bad . . . The day is dark.” [omission between
complete sentences]
“My only friend is God; I have no drinking cup or goblet other than my
shoe! . . .” [exclamation point used with three-dot ellipsis after complete
The Three-and-Four-Dot Style. In this style, a three-dot ellipsis is used to indicate (1) that words within a quoted sentence have been omitted or (2) that
words at the beginning or end of a sentence have been omitted, but only
when it leaves the sentence grammatically incomplete. Otherwise, a four-dot
ellipsis (which is simply a period followed by a three-dot ellipsis) indicates an
omission that does not render the sentence grammatically incomplete. In
other words, use a four-dot ellipsis when the context would ordinarily call
for a period (that is, after a grammatically complete sentence). While the
“fourth dot” (the period) should be spaced evenly with the other three dots,
it should be set without space next to the word it follows.
“Mother Teresa . . . is one such woman. . . . Malcolm Muggeridge has given her
. . . the most beautiful tribute.”—Kari Torjesen Malcolm
“In 1007 the great gospel of Colmcille was stolen from the sacristy of the
church of Cenannus. . . .”
2:56 PM
Page 193
Ellipsis | 193
Split Over Line. It is acceptable for an ellipsis to fall either at the end or the
beginning of a typeset line, as long as it does not stand on a line by itself (as
at the end of a paragraph). Most typographers, however, prefer that the ellipsis fall at the end of a line if there is an option. If the four-dot ellipsis is used,
it may split over the line break, with the first dot (the period) remaining on
the end of the first line and the three subsequent dots carrying over to the
next line, again, as long as the three-dot ellipsis never stands on a line by
itself. The dots in a three-dot ellipsis may never be split.
Sheldon’s preface began, “In His Steps was written in 1896.
. . . The book has been translated into twenty-one languages.”
With Other Punctuation. When a question mark or exclamation point precedes
the omitted portion of the quotation, that punctuation mark is retained and
followed by a three-dot ellipsis. Other punctuation, such as a comma, may
be retained before or after the three-dot ellipsis if it helps clarify the meaning of the sentence or better shows what has been omitted.
“But now, Lord, what do I look for? . . . Do not make me the scorn of fools”
(Ps. 39:7–8).
“For he spoke, . . . he commanded, and it stood firm” (Ps. 33:9).
For Trailing Off of Thought. An ellipsis is used to indicate a trailing off of
thought, daydreaming, or hesitation, although frequent use of ellipses for
this purpose is discouraged. Also, do not use an ellipsis to indicate a sudden
interpolation or an external interruption of thought or speech; in those cases,
use an em dash instead.
If only the people would read the Bible . . . if only . . . , thought Frelinghuysen, then
God would bring about revival.
Niebuhr—Reinhold, that is, not Richard—was a pastor in Detroit in the
Before or after Bible Quotations. Unless the context demands it (usually with
a sentence fragment), do not place ellipsis points before or after a verse or a
portion of a Bible verse. An introductory word such as and, for, but, verily,
or therefore may be omitted from the beginning of a Bible verse without
inserting ellipsis points.
“God so loved the world that he gave his one and only Son” (John 3:16). [The
word For has been omitted.]
2:56 PM
Page 194
194 | Ellipsis
Rigorous Style. CMS adds a third style, the rigorous style, which is used only
when extreme precision is needed when quoting from other sources, that is,
in academic and scholarly books that require letter-for-letter accuracy in quotations or when manuscripts are reproduced or quoted that contain lacunae.
The rigorous style is basically the three-and-four-dot style, though in addition, brackets are placed around any initial letters that, for the sake of the
context, have changed case (caps to lowercase and vice versa) and an ellipsis surrounded by brackets indicates words missing from an original manuscript source (lacunae). (See CMS 11.62–11.65 for more details.)
“[R]emember my commands; . . . [D]o what is pleasing in his sight”—Tobit
4:19, 21. [brackets used to indicate change of case]
“They could not enter its gates, nor could they [. . .] could not overrun its walls
[. . .] nor [. . .] would they see her treasure ruined. . . .”—Levi’s “Teaching in
Praise of Wisdom” from the Dead Sea Scrolls. [brackets used with ellipses to
indicate lacunae]
Em Dash
See “Dash.”
Emmanuel Versus Immanuel
See “Immanuel Versus Emmanuel.”
En Dash
See “Dash.”
See “Notes.”
An epigraph is a short line or small block of type, most often a quotation
from another author, which is set by itself on a page, usually at the beginning
of the book (this is called the book epigraph and is usually placed before the
table of contents) or somewhere at or near the beginning of each chapter
(called a chapter epigraph). It is usually set in the same type size as the text
or one size smaller. In most instances, quotation marks should not be placed
at the beginning and end of an epigraph, though internal quotation marks
should be retained as in the original.
2:56 PM
Page 195
Epigraph | 195
Book Epigraph. A book epigraph can have several functions: to make a wry
comment on a book’s content; to summarize a book’s thesis; to identify a
recognized authority; to whet the reader’s appetite; and, at times, to acknowledge the quote from which the title of the book itself is taken. When used at
the beginning of a book, an epigraph page should not contain a running head
or a folio number. The epigraph should stand alone. Only as a last resort,
when space is very limited, should it be relegated to the copyright page.
Chapter Epigraph. A chapter epigraph is more limited in function, usually simply glossing the content of the chapter in some way. By the time the reader
has finished the chapter, there should be no doubt as to the appropriateness
of the chapter epigraph. A good epigraph can attract or even mystify the
reader, but it should never confuse.
Gathering Epigraphs. Some disciplined writers who read widely keep “commonplace books” or journals of their favorite quotations for use in their own
writing and as epigraphs. Workingman’s philosopher Eric Hoffer once said
that he kept a notebook with him at all times, just to write down favorite
quotes as he read. He assumed, he said, that he would otherwise remember
The Pitfalls. While the judicious use of epigraphs can enhance a book, some
authors use them as a means of appearing more erudite than they are. A serious reader can usually distinguish between the writer who has actually read
Pliny the Younger, for instance, and the one who has simply lifted an appropriate quotation from some reference like Bartlett’s Familiar Quotations.
Credit Line. For most epigraphs only the author’s name needs to be given as
the source. It is usually not necessary to list the title of the author’s work as
well. The title should be given, however, if it helps the reader understand the
context of the quotation more fully or is, for some other reason, essential to
the quotation. Also, if the author’s name is not known or when quoting the
Bible, then the title or chapter-and-verse reference alone should be used as the
Citing Sources. It is not necessary for the author to cite the precise source of an
epigraph in a footnote or endnote. This may seem overly pedantic to many
readers. An epigraph should serve as something of a flourish to a piece of
writing and need not be cited, unless the author has a special reason for doing
so (for instance, if the quotation is copyrighted and the original publisher
has required that a source and credit line be given).
2:56 PM
Page 196
196 | Epilogue
An epilogue is generally synonymous with the terms afterword and conclusion, though it has a somewhat more literary tone. In some literary works,
such as fiction, drama, biography, history, and other narrative nonfiction,
an epilogue summarizes the events that take place after the main action of the
story, just as a prologue fills in the narrative background before the story
begins, and is therefore distinct from both the afterword and the conclusion.
Despite its name, a literary epilogue is not part of a book’s back matter but
is the final element of the body matter.
Such a literary epilogue is often, though not always, written in the same
voice as the main part of the book, that is, in the narrator’s or character’s
voice rather than the author’s, when those voices are distinct. If written in the
author’s voice while the rest of the book has a different narrative voice, it
should be called an afterword or, if more lengthy, a conclusion. (See also
“Afterword” and “Conclusion.” Contrast with “Prologue.”)
Episcopal and Episcopalian
Episcopal is the adjective, Episcopalian the noun; as in: The Episcopalian
spoke with the Episcopal minister. When capitalized, both terms refer to the
Protestant Episcopal Church, which is the name given in the US to the
Anglican Church. When lowercased, the terms refer to bishops or the governing authority of bishops, which is usually called the episcopacy.
Although less frequently used now than formerly, an errata slip or page is
provided when the publisher feels that certain mistakes in a book’s print run
are important enough to warrant bringing the reader’s attention to them even
before those mistakes can be corrected in the next printing. This is accomplished by inserting a small, loose slip of paper, bookmark-like, into the front
matter of the book, usually immediately following the contents page. In especially large print runs or for especially important books, the slip, or even a
full-size errata page, is “tipped in” (glued in) to the book perpendicular to
the book’s spine.
The word errata, by the way, even though it is the Latin plural of the word
erratum (mistake) is considered a singular noun in publishing convention:
An errata is called for.
Customarily, the notice is kept as simple as possible, with the errors given
first, followed by the corrections. The italicized words for and read, along
with the page number, are used to indicate the incorrect and corrected versions respectively.
Page 55, for Chuck Berry read Wendell Berry
2:56 PM
Page 197
Ethnic and Racial Designations | 197
Note that no punctuation should be used unless the punctuation is actually part of the corrected copy.
In his book Language on a Leash, editor and writer Bruce O. Boston
defined errata as “flecks of spinach on the flashing editorial smile” (114).
Ethnic and Racial Designations
Terms used to describe ethnic and racial groups should be chosen with
care and should only be used when those designations are essential to the
context. They should also be limited to only those terms used by the groups
to describe themselves or terms used as legal designations by the government.
Generally, hyphenate them as adjectives but set them as two words when
used as nouns.
an African American, but African-American children
Alaska Native
Arab American
Asian American
Lebanese American, Scandinavian American, and so on
Puerto Rican
Part-Hawaiian (US Government legal status)
but otherwise: part-Japanese, part-Chinese, and so on
Specificity. Whenever possible, be specific. Even generic terms can have negative connotations in the wrong contexts. As appropriate, use Lakota, for
instance, rather than Native American or American Indian; Mexican rather
than Hispanic; Saudi rather than Arab.
Self-determination. Allowing ethnic groups, racial groups, and other social communities to define their own terms of reference has become a common and
accepted practice. While this is sometimes difficult to determine when some
subgroups within the larger group disagree with the designation, nevertheless, to honor people is to honor their preferred forms of self-reference, whenever that can be determined. For example:
Rather than
African American
Native American
colored person, Negro
2:56 PM
Page 198
198 | Ethnic and Racial Designations
Black and White. The term black is less often used for people of African descent
in the United States than it once was, having given way to African American
as the preferred form. Still, black is common in sociological discussions when
contrasted with white as a racial designation. The term black is lowercased
unless it is used in phrases like Black English, Black Power Movement of the
sixties, and Black Studies.
To describe Caucasians, white is acceptable but seems to be waning in use,
though still common in sociological contexts. Like black, it is lowercased.
The term white is appropriate when it is used as a specific term of contrast
and comparison to black, as in discussions of culture or social issues.
Avoid Derogatory Terms and Stereotypes. Needless to say, derogatory terms
for ethnic and racial groups should be scrupulously avoided except, possibly,
in fiction when such terms might be used in dialogue as a way of characterizing the speaker (as bigoted or racist, for instance). Even then care must be
taken so that the reader understands the views are those of the fictional character, not the author.
The term evangelical is lowercased in all its forms (evangelicalism, evangelicals, and so on), though it should be capped when referring to a specific
name of a church or denomination or, in the case of the Evangelical Church
in Germany, to specify the Lutheran Protestants as opposed to the Calvinists.
Even though those who describe themselves as evangelicals do not always
agree on its definition, it can generally be used to mean those Protestants
since the Reformation, and especially since the time of John Wesley, who
stress the importance of (1) the four gospels, (2) the inerrancy of the Bible,
(3) personal conversion, and (4) salvation by faith in the atoning death of
Christ. Their worship tends to focus on preaching rather than ritual, and
they emphasize each believer’s responsibility in evangelization.
The term evangelical often needs to be used with caution when writing for
a mixed audience of believers and nonbelievers. People outside the Protestant
church often see evangelical as a synonym for fundamentalist or the religious
right, largely with political overtones; whereas people inside the church accept
the term more as a description of a personal theological viewpoint.
2:56 PM
Page 199
Explicit | 199
Exclamation Point
The form of the exclamation point, or exclamation mark, is said to have
been developed by early printers as a sort of graphic abbreviation of the Latin
word io, meaning joy. The character was originally rendered “oI ” and was
later simplified to the mark as we know it today.
An exclamation point is used after a sentence or a word to express surprise, enthusiasm, astonishment, or special emphasis. Along with the period
and the question mark, it is considered an “end stop” (a mark that ends a
sentence). The use of exclamation points is traditionally minimized in formal writing, since overuse tends to limit the effectiveness of the device. Using
too many exclamation points is the typographic equivalent of crying wolf.
Still, they are especially useful in fictional dialogue and in colloquial and
informal writing.
With the Question Mark. Oftentimes an exclamation point is needed in the
same place in the sentence that a question mark is needed. Since the general
rule states that the stronger of two punctuation marks is retained when two
might seem to be appropriate, the exclamation mark is usually retained.
Was it Quasimodo who shouted, “Sanctuary!” [Question mark not placed at
end of sentence]
Spanish Exclamation Points. In Spanish-language writing and publishing, an
inverted exclamation point ( ¡ ) precedes an emphatic statement while a regular exclamation point ( ! ) follows it. This device should not be reproduced
when translating Spanish quotations into English, although it may be retained
at the author’s and editor’s discretion when reproducing the quotation in
Sometimes, at the very end of a book, an author will provide his or her
name and the date of the completion to give the work a formal sense of closure. Sometimes the location of the book’s completion is also provided. This
is called an explicit. In former times, an explicit would also provide the name
of the scribe who copied the book, although that function has been largely
replaced by the modern colophon. (See “Colophon.”) An explicit is still occasionally used with works to which the author wishes to lend an air of special gravity or significance.
2:56 PM
Page 200
Fathers of the Church or Church Fathers
The terms fathers of the church or church fathers are often loosely used
to mean those theologians who forged the early doctrines of the Christian
faith, especially in the first twelve centuries after Christ. In stricter usage,
however, the fathers of the church were not only those who forged the doctrines but those, especially of the first six centuries, whose lives were of
exceptional holiness and orthodoxy. The primary early and later fathers of
the church are:
Early Fathers
first century: Clement of Rome
second century: Cyril of Jerusalem, Ignatius of Antioch, Justin Irenaeus, Polycarp
third century: Cyprian, Dionysius
fourth century: Hilary, Ephraem the Syrian, Optatus, Epiphanius
fifth century: Peter Chrysologus, Pope Leo the Great, Cyril of Alexandria,
Vincent of Lerins
sixth century: Caesarius of Arles
Later Fathers
seventh century: Isidore
eighth century: John the Damascene, the Venerable Bede
eleventh century: Peter Damian
twelfth century: Anselm, Bernard
Fathers is not capitalized unless it is used alone to stand for church fathers.
First Estate
The church used to be referred to as the First Estate (capitalized). In
England it was commonly said that three “estates” ruled the lives of the
people: the First Estate was the “Lords Spiritual” (the church); the Second
Estate was the “Lords Temporal” (the king and nobility); and the Third
Estate was the “Commons” (the people). An added Fourth Estate, according to a famous quip by Edmund Burke, was said to be the most powerful
of all—the press. In modern usage, only the Fourth Estate is referred to, and
any attempt to refer to the church as the First Estate will only be met with
2:56 PM
Page 201
Foreign Letters and Characters | 201
Folios Versus Page Numbers. The folio is the number actually printed on the
page. This differs from a page number in that while all pages follow each
other in a numerical order, not all those numbers are actually printed on the
page. For instance, page numbers are usually not printed on nontext pages,
such as title pages, copyright pages, epigraphs, dedications, and part-title
pages. An example would be a book’s half-title page, which is always page
1, but since no number is actually printed on that page, it cannot be said to
have a folio. A folio will ordinarily appear on any page that also has a running head, except for chapter openers, which usually have a folio but no running head.
In general practice, the distinction between folios and page numbers is not
an important one. But it becomes problematic in some academic and reference books in which the folio of the front matter are given in roman numerals and in which the actual body text begins with arabic numeral 1. In that
case, the first page of body text might actually be the eleventh page in the
book (page number 11), but it bears the folio 1. If an introductory text page
preceded it, that introductory page would be referred to as page 10, or folio
X (roman numeral 10).
Blind Folio. When a folio is customarily not printed on a page, such as the part
title, copyright, or contents pages, it is said to be a blind folio.
Drop Folio. When a folio is printed at the bottom of a page or as part of a running footer, it is called a drop folio or foot folio.
See “Notes.”
Foreign Letters and Characters
Many foreign languages that use the Latin alphabet use unusual characters, most of which can be accommodated in type with the use of diacritical
marks. (See “Accents and Diacritics.”) But there are a few special letters and
punctuation marks that are used, though infrequently, in English typesetting.
It is useful to know what to call them and how they look. The following is
a list of these:
Example or Explanation
Å, å
Danish a
Danish and Norwegian, as in Ångström; the
Scandinavian form of the umlaut; replace with aa if
the character å is not available
2:56 PM
Page 202
202 | Foreign Letters and Characters
Example or Explanation
Æ, æ
Œ, œ
ash (ligature)
Ø, ø
Danish o
double s, s-set
the long s
Old English; as in Ælfric; formerly used in Latin words,
such as Cæsar; also used in Danish and Norwegian; the
Œ, œ form is still common in French
Danish and Norwegian; as in Søren Kierkegaard
German for the sound ss; replace with ss if the character
ß is not available
not an f but an s, formerly used in English; usually lacks
all or part of the crossbar ( ∫ )
Icelandic and Old and Middle English for the th sound as
in three
Old and Middle English for the th sound, as in them
Middle English for the y sound in year or the gh sound in
Old English; for the sound w
eth, or edh
Foreign Phrases Common to Christian Life and Worship
The pervasive influence of Christianity can be seen in the number of foreign phrases relating to Christian life and worship that have become common
in English. The plethora of Latin phrases in the following list is due to the
many centuries when Latin was the official language of the church.
Adeste Fideles—(Latin) “O Come, All Ye Faithful.” A popular Christmas hymn.
ad majorem Dei gloriam—(Latin) “To the greater glory of God.” Motto of the
Jesuits. Often abbreviated, AMDG.
agape—(Greek) “Love.” Used to imply a nonsensual kind of love; charity.
Agnus Dei—(Latin) Short for Agnus Dei, qui tolles peccata mundi (“Lamb of God,
who takes away the sins of the world.”) Also, the portion of the Catholic
Mass or Episcopal Communion when these words are spoken or sung.
agrapha—(Greek) “Unwritten sayings.” This usually refers to statements of
Jesus that are not found in the four gospels.
Anima Christi—(Latin) “Soul of Christ.” A well-known Eucharistic prayer: “Soul
of Christ, sanctify me.”
Anno Domini—(Latin) “In the year of our Lord.” (AD) Used for year designations
after the time of Christ.
apologia pro vita sua—(Latin) ”apology for one’s life.” A confession, or selfjustification. Capped, the title of Cardinal Newman’s spiritual
Ars Moriendi—(Latin) “The art of death.” The shortened title of a fifteenth
century religious text, which eventually grew into an entire genre of books
of meditations about death. Lowercased, the term refers to the general
spiritual practice of meditating upon one’s own death.
auto-da-fé—(Spanish) “Act of faith.” The formulaic religious rites of the Spanish
Inquisition, which preceded the judgment portion of a heresy trial. Has
come to be synonymous with the burning at the stake of a person accused
of heresy.
2:56 PM
Page 203
Foreign Phrases Common to Christian Life and Worship | 203
Ave, Maria—(Latin) “Hail, Mary.” Traditionally, the first words of the angel’s
greeting to Mary at the annunciation (Luke 1:28). Also, the small beads of
the Roman Catholic rosary. (The large beads are the Paternosters.)
benedicamus Domino—“Let us bless the Lord.” Used in some Roman Catholic
offices. The response is Deo Gratias (“Thanks be to God”).
benedicite—(Latin) “Bless [the Lord].” A common blessing or grace. Also,
capitalized, a song of praise based on Daniel 3:28–29.
Benedictus—(Latin) “Blessed.” The first word of Zechariah’s song of
thanksgiving in Luke 1:68–79.
Benedictus qui venit—(Latin) The first words of Benedictus qui venit in nomine
Domini (“Blessed is he who comes in the name of the Lord,” Matt. 21:9).
Capitalized, a portion of the Sanctus of the Roman Catholic Mass.
biblia pauperum—(Latin) “Bible of the poor,” referring to medieval picture
books illustrating Bible stories for the illiterate.
Capitalavium—(Latin) “Washing of the head.” An early medieval name for Palm
confessio fidei—(Latin) “Confession of faith.”
confiteor—(Latin) “I confess.” The opening words of the Roman Catholic
contemptus mundi—(Latin) “Contempt for the world.”
credo—(Latin) “I believe.” A creed. Sometimes refers specifically to Augustine’s
paradox: “I believe because it is impossible.”
Dei gratias—(Latin) “By the grace of God.” Abbreviated DG.
Dei judicium—(Latin) “The judgment of God.”
Deo favente—(Latin) “With God’s favor.”
Deo gratia—(Latin) “Thanks to God.”
Deo optimo maximo—(Latin) “To God the best and greatest.” Its abbreviation,
DOM, is inscribed on bottles of wine made by the Benedictines.
Deo volente—(Latin) “God willing.” Sometimes abbreviated DV.
de profundis—(Latin) “Out of the depths.” The first words of Psalm 130. The
phrase is used to express general spiritual despair, and the psalm is
sometimes used at burial services.
Deus absconditus—(Latin) “Hidden God.” The idea that it is not possible to
grasp God with human understanding.
Deus vult—(Latin) “God wills it.” The (misguided) motto of the First Crusade.
Dies Irae—(Latin) “Day of Wrath.” The name of a medieval hymn about the
Last Judgment, based on Joel 2:31.
Dieu avec nous—(French) “God with us.”
Dieu et mon droit—(French) “God and my right.” Motto of the British
Dieu vous garde—(French) “May God protect you.”
dixit Dominus—(Latin) The first words of Dixit Dominus Domino meo (“The Lord
says to my Lord,” Ps. 110:1, or Ps. 109:1 in Vulgate). Capitalized, the first of
five psalms sung on certain feast days in Roman Catholic vespers.
Dominus vobiscum—(Latin) “The Lord be with you.”
dona nobis pacem—(Latin) “[Lord,] grant us peace.” Used liturgically as a
prayer response and, when capped, as the title of numerous musical
2:56 PM
Page 204
204 | Foreign Phrases Common to Christian Life and Worship
Ein Feste Burg Ist Unser Gott—(German) “A Mighty Fortress Is Our God.” A hymn of
Martin Luther’s.
ex cathedra—(Latin) “From the throne.” Often applied to any pronouncement of
great authority; originally refers to papal announcements.
felix culpa—(Latin) “Happy fault.” The idea that Original Sin was providential in
that it provided a means for Christ’s coming into the world.
fiat lux—(Latin) “Let there be light” (Gen. 1:3).
Formgeschichte—(German) “Form criticism.” The study of determining the date
and origins of Bible passages by their structure and form.
Fratres Minores—(Latin) “Little [or Inferior] Brothers.” A term of intentional selfabasement with which Franciscan monks describe themselves.
gloria in excelsis—(Latin) “Glory to God in the Highest.” Sung by the angels
announcing Christ’s birth (Luke 2:14); the basis for the “Doxology.” The Gloria
is a portion of the Ordinary of the Roman Catholic Mass.
Gott ist über all—(German) “God is over all.”
Gott mit uns—(German) “God with us.”
hic jacet—(Latin) “Here lies . . .” Used before a name on a tombstone inscription.
imago Dei—(Latin) “The image of God.”
in hoc signo vinces—(Latin) “In this sign you will conquer.” The words of
Constantine the Great, referring to the cross on his military banners.
jubilate Deo—(Latin) “Shout for joy to the Lord.” Capitalized, it is used as the title
for any number of liturgical songs based on Psalm 100.
jus divinum—(Latin) “Holy law.”
kirk—(Scottish) “Church.”
kyrie eleison (Greek) “Lord have mercy.” A prayer used in Western and Eastern
churches as a response during Mass. Also, capitalized, the title of any musical
setting of this prayer.
laborare est orare—(Latin) “To work is to pray.”
Lasciate ogni speranza, voi ch’entrate—(Italian) “Abandon all hope, you who
enter.” The words over the entrance to hell in Dante’s Inferno.
laus Deo—(Latin) “Praise God.”
Legenda Aurea—(Latin) “The Golden Legend.” A thirteenth-century collection of
Bible stories and saints’ tales, categorized by feast days and compiled by Jacopo
da Voragine.
magnificat—(Latin) First word of “My soul glorifies the Lord,” the words of Mary to
Elizabeth (Luke 1:46–55). Capitalized, a reading or song long used in church
mea culpa—(Latin) “Through my own fault.” Used to acknowledge one’s own
guilt for sin, often accompanied by the gesture of striking one’s fist to one’s
memento mori—(Latin) “Remember that you will die.” Used as a noun, it refers to
any object, such as a skull, that aids in the contemplation of mortality.
miserere—(Latin) The first word of Psalm 51, “Have mercy on me, O God.”
Capitalized, the name for a service during Lent when these words are sung.
Also, a place in the church choir for kneeling.
Missa solemnis—(Latin) “High Mass” in the Roman Catholic Church.
2:56 PM
Page 205
Foreign Phrases Common to Christian Life and Worship | 205
nunc dimittis—(Latin) The beginning of “Nunc dimittis servum tuum, Domine”
(“Sovereign Lord, . . . you now dismiss your servant in peace”), the words of
Simeon at the presentation of Jesus in the Temple (Luke 2:29–32). Capitalized,
it has become a common canticle sung at the concluding of services in both
the Anglican and Roman Catholic Churches. Also, a general term for dismissal.
obiit—(Latin) “He [or she] died.”
ora pro nobis—(Latin) “Pray for us.”
oremus—(Latin) “Let us pray.”
Pater noster—(Latin) First words of the Lord’s Prayer, “Our Father” (Matt. 6:9–13).
Also, closed up, the large beads of the Roman Catholic rosary.
pax vobiscum—(Latin) “Peace be with you.”
pietà—(Italian) “Pity.” An artistic representation of Mary holding Jesus’ dead body
across her lap.
prie-dieu—(French) “pray God.” A small prayer desk with a sloping top and a
kneeling board. Pl.: prie-dieux.
quo vadis?—(Latin) “Where are you going?” From the pseudepigraphal Acts of
Peter, in which Peter, while fleeing Rome, encounters Christ. Peter asks, “Where
are you going?” Christ answers, “To be crucified again.” Peter is convicted and
returns to face his own martyrdom. Capitalized, the title of a popular novel by
Henry K. Sienkiewicz.
requiem—(Latin) First word of the prayer Requiem aeternam dona eis, Domine
(“Give the eternal rest, O Lord”). Sung at the beginning of the Roman Catholic
Mass for the Dead.
requiescat in pace—(Latin) “Rest in peace” (RIP). Used on gravestone inscriptions.
salve, Regina—(Latin) First words of “Hail, holy Queen, mother of mercy,” a hymn
sung in the Roman Catholic Church from Trinity Sunday to Advent.
Sanctum Sanctorum—(Latin) “The Holy of Holies” in the Jewish temple, into which
only the high priest can enter. By extension—the presence of God.
sanctus—(Latin) “Holy.” The first word of Sanctus, sanctus, sanctus, Dominus Deus
Sabaoth (“Holy, holy, holy, Lord, God of Sabaoth”). Capitalized, a portion of
the Ordinary of the Roman Catholic Mass.
similitudo Dei—(Latin) “The likeness of God.”
sola scriptura—(Latin) “Scripture only.” The Bible as sole authority in matters of faith.
stabat Mater—(Latin) The opening words of a Latin hymn in the Roman Catholic
Church recounting the seven sorrows of Mary at the cross (“The Mother was
standing”). Capitalized, the title of the hymn sung the week before Easter.
Te Deum—(Latin) Opening words of a Latin hymn: Te Deum laudamus (“You,
Father, we praise).
ut in omnibus Deus glorificetur—(Latin) “that God may be glorified in all things.”
The motto of the Benedictine order.
Via Dolorosa—(Latin) “Way of Sorrow.” Name of the path through the streets of
Jerusalem taken by Christ on the way to the cross.
via negativa—(Latin) “Way of denial.” Refers to an approach to the Christian faith
that denies worldly pleasures as distractions from God.
via positiva—(Latin) “Way of affirmation.” Refers to an approach to the Christian
faith that affirms the physical world as a gift from God to be enjoyed.
vita nuova—(Italian) “New life.”
vox populi vox Dei—(Latin) “The voice of the people is the voice of God.”
2:56 PM
Page 206
206 | Foreword and Preface
Foreword and Preface
A foreword and a preface are two types of introductory material placed
at the beginning of a book, usually relating to the main text of the book but
not necessarily essential to its understanding. The main difference between
the two types is authorship. Generally, a foreword is written by someone
other than the author. The name of the person who wrote it should appear
either after the title, especially if that person is well known, or at the end of
the foreword itself.
A preface, by contrast, is usually written by the author. It is not necessary
to place the author’s name either before or after the preface if its authorship
is clear; that is, when the front matter contains no material by anyone other
than the book’s author. If two or more prefaces are reprinted from various
editions of the book, the preface for the most recent edition usually appears
first, followed by the next most recent, and so on. Unless there is a compelling reason for presenting the prefaces in some other order, the original
preface should appear closest to the text itself. The same rule applies to forewords and introductions. (See also “Introduction.”)
Formatting Electronic Manuscripts
See “Manuscript Preparation: Author Guidelines, Formatting Conventions.”
Forms of Address, Religious
The following list shows the common titles of religious occupations and
the forms of address used for such people in various circumstances. Last
names or place names are used in the blanks unless otherwise specified.
written: “The Right Reverend [first and last name], Abbot of ——”
salutation: “Right Reverend” or “Dear Father Abbot” or “Dear Father”
spoken: “Father”
introduction: “The Right Reverend [first and last name], Abbot of ——”
written: “The Most Reverend [first and last name], Archbishop of ——”
salutation: “Your Excellency” or “Dear Archbishop ——”
spoken: “Your Excellency” or “Archbishop ——”
introduction: “His Excellency” or “Archbishop ——”
Bishop, Episcopal
written: “The Right Reverend [first and last name], Bishop of ——”
salutation: “Right Reverend Sir” or “Dear Bishop —— ”
spoken: “Bishop ——”
introduction: “The Right Reverend [first and last name], Bishop of —— ”
2:56 PM
Page 207
Forms of Address, Religious | 207
Bishop, Roman Catholic
written: “The Most Reverend [first and last name], Bishop of ——”
salutation: “Your Excellency” or “Dear Bishop ——”
spoken: “Your Excellency” or “Bishop ——”
introduction: “His Excellency” or “Most Reverend Sir” or “Bishop ——”
written: “Brother [first name]” or “Brother [first and last name]”
salutation: “Dear Brother” or “Dear Brother [first name]”
spoken: “Brother [first name]” or “Brother”
introduction: “Brother [first name]”
written: “His Eminence, [first name] Cardinal ——, Archbishop of ——”
salutation: “Your Eminence” or “Dear Cardinal ——”
spoken: “Your Eminence” or “Cardinal —— ”
introduction: “His Eminence, Cardinal —— ”
Note: The Roman Catholic Church no longer sanctions placing the title Cardinal
between a given name and a surname.
Clergy, Protestant (Minister)
written: “The Reverend [first and last name]” or “The Reverend [last name]”*
salutation: “Dear Dr. [or Mr. or Ms.] ——”
spoken: “Dr. [or Mr. or Ms.] ——”
introduction: “Dr. [or Mr. or Ms.] ——”
*“DD” is customarily added to the written form of address if the person holds a
doctorate of divinity
written: “Brother [first name], OSF [or other order initials]”
salutation: “Dear Brother [first name]” or “Dear Brother”
spoken: “Brother [first name]” or “Brother”
introduction: “Brother [first name]” or “Brother [first and last name]”
written: “The Right Reverend Monsignor ——”
salutation: “Right Reverend Monsignor” or “Dear Monsignor ——”
spoken: “Monsignor” or “Monsignor ——”
introduction: “Monsignor ——”
written: “Sister [first name], SC [or other order initials]”
salutation: “Dear Sister [first name]” or ”Dear Sister”
spoken: “Sister [first name]” or “Sister”
introduction: “Sister [first name]” or “Sister [first and last name]
2:56 PM
Page 208
208 | Forms of Address, Religious
written: “His Holiness, the Pope” or “His Holiness, Pope —— ”
salutation: “Your Holiness” or “Most Reverend Father”
spoken: “Your Holiness” or “Most Holy Father”
introduction: “His Holiness” or “The Holy Father” or “The Pope” or “The
written: “The Reverend [first and last name]”
salutation: “Reverend Father” or “Dear Father ——”
spoken: “Father” or “Father ——”
introduction: “Father ——”
written: “Rabbi [first and last name]”
salutation: “Dear Rabbi [or Dr.] [first and last name]”
spoken: “Rabbi” or “Rabbi [or Dr.] ——”
introduction: “Rabbi [or Dr.] [first and last name]”
written: “Sister [first name]” or “Sister [first and last name]”
salutation: “Sister [first name]” or “Dear Sister”
spoken: “Sister [first name]” or “Sister”
introduction: “Sister [first name]”
Superior, Father
written: “The Very Reverend [first and last name], CP [or other order initials],
Superior of —— ”
salutation: “Reverend Father” or ”Father Superior”
spoken: “Father [first name]” or “Father”
introduction: “The Very Reverend [first and last name], Superior of ——”
Superior, Mother
written: “The Reverend Mother Superior, Convent of ——” or ”Reverend
Mother [first and last name], SM [or other order initials], Convent of ——”
salutation: “Reverend Mother” or ”Dear Reverend Mother”
spoken: “Mother [first name]” or “Mother”
introduction: “Reverend Mother [first and last name], Convent of —— ”
Forms of Christian Books
While Christians have written novels, memoirs, poetry, and so on, they
have also invented genres and forms of books that are unique to the faith or
at least primarily associated with it. In the list below, those marked with
asterisks are discussed in more detail under their own entries elsewhere in
this manual.
2:56 PM
Page 209
Forms of Christian Books | 209
apocalyptic fiction—subgenre of science fiction and fantasy genre dealing with
the end of the world, the tribulation, and the imminent return of Christ.
Inspired by Revelation, Daniel, and the apocryphal writings that discuss
apocalyptic events. (Example: C. S. Lewis’s That Hideous Strength)
Bible study—a book that interprets the meaning of Bible passages verse by
verse, most often in an attempt to apply that meaning to day-to-day living.
Bible studies often include a basic interpretive essay for each passage, study
and discussion questions, and blanks or rule lines for readers to record their
book of hours—books, often elaborately decorated, that contain prayers for
each of the divine offices, short meditations, records of saints’ days and holy
days along with short lives of the saints, selected Bible passages, and
liturgical readings. These were especially popular in the Middle Ages and the
Renaissance. (Example: Les Très Riches Heures de Duc de Berry, early fifteenth
clerical novel—a novel describing the daily life of a priest or minister, often, but
not necessarily, in rural settings. (Examples: Georges Bernanos’s Diary of a
Country Priest and Jan Karon’s Mitford Series)
commentary—like the Bible study, the commentary seeks to interpret Bible
passages verse by verse, but its focus is not so much on application as it is
on the precise meanings of words, phrases, and sections.
* concordance—an alphabetical listing of words used in the Bible, along with
their specific verse reference and a short quote to show how the word is
used in context. Concordances are helpful in tracking down references or
doing word or thematic studies in the Bible. (Example: Cruden’s
Concordance, 1737)
* devotional—a daily devotional contains a short reading or meditation for
each day, to be used as part of the reader’s devotional exercises. Each
reading commonly includes a Bible verse, a meditation, and a prayer.
(Example: Mrs. Charles E. Cowman’s Streams in the Desert, 1926)
illuminated manuscript—refers to the form rather than the book’s content;
often a unique copy of a Bible or a book of hours that has been rendered in
calligraphy with marginal drawings and elaborate initial letters. They are
considered works of art in themselves. (Example: The Book of Kells, ninth
martyrology—collections of stories of noted martyrs. (Example: Acts and
Monuments, familiarly known as Foxe’s Book of Martyrs, 1563)
prayer book—a collection of prayers and rites either for private devotions or
public liturgy. (Example: The Book of Common Prayer, 1549)
* red-letter Bible—an edition of the Bible in which the words of Jesus are
printed in red. The majority of modern Bibles use this device.
saint’s life—also called a hagiography, the saint’s life is an inspirational
biography of noted saints. Most common in the Roman Catholic Church.
(Example: Butler’s Lives of the Saints, 1756–59)
spiritual thriller—a subgenre of fiction that describes supernatural forces being
unloosed in everyday life, it usually follows the ways in which believers and
nonbelievers react to the situation. The Christian counterpart to the
supernatural thriller. (Example: Charles Williams’s War in Heaven and Bill
Myers’s Blood of Heaven)
2:56 PM
Page 210
210 | Four Cardinal Virtues, The
Four Cardinal Virtues, The
The phrase the four cardinal virtues is lowercased in most contexts. The
virtues are, in order, (1) prudence, (2) justice, (3) temperance, and (4) fortitude. (See also “Seven Deadly Sins, The.”)
The frontispiece is a graphic element, sometimes a photo of the author or
biographical subject of the book, that is placed across from the book’s title
page. Traditionally, it is printed on high quality photographic paper and
glued (“tipped”) in, in which case it is not considered part of the book’s pagination. Most commonly and more economically, it is set as a halftone or
piece of line art on the verso of the half-title page, where the author ad card
usually appears. In those cases, the frontispiece is included in the book’s pagination and may be included in the table of contents. If there is a list of illustrations, it should be listed first.
Front Matter, Elements of a Book’s
A book’s front matter is made up of all the pages preceding the textual
content of the book itself. These preliminary elements are traditionally
arranged in the order shown in the following list, where appropriate, and
usually only deviate from this order when there is a compelling reason for
doing so, such as a limitation of space or idiosyncratic design. For more information, see the entries for each different kind of front matter.
Half title (on recto page)
Author card (sometimes called ad card; lists the author’s other books) or
frontispiece (on verso page) or series title page
Title page (on recto page)
Copyright page (on verso page; can be moved to the end of the book if space
or design warrant it)
Dedication (usually on recto page)
Epigraph (if it applies to the entire book; usually on recto page)
Contents page, or Table of Contents (usually begins on recto page)
Errata (if any, slipped in or set on verso of contents page)
List(s) of maps, illustrations, or charts (usually on recto page)
List of abbreviations (usually on recto page)
Foreword (by someone other than the author; usually begins on recto page)
Preface (by the author; usually begins on recto page)
Acknowledgments (usually begins on recto page)
Introduction (usually by the author; usually begins on recto page)
Inside half title (on recto page)
Prologue (comes immediately before chapter 1 and is properly considered the
first element of the body matter)
2:56 PM
Page 211
Fundamentalist | 211
It is curious that the term fundamentalist has come to describe radical theological conservatives of nearly any faith, including Islam and Hinduism—
curious because the term originally described a very specific movement within
Christianity. Early in the twentieth century, a group of Christians formulated
what they believed to be the five nonnegotiable “fundamentals” of the
Christian faith: (1) the inerrancy of the Bible, (2) the divinity of Christ, (3) the
virgin birth, (4) the atonement, and (5) the physical resurrection and imminent
return of Christ.
As with so much Christian terminology, fundamentalist and fundamentalism should be used carefully and with an awareness of how a particular
group of readers views those terms. Beyond the confines of Christian readership, and often even within that readership, the terms imply religious
zealotry, even extremism, of all stripes and is usually considered pejorative.
2:56 PM
Page 212
Gender-Accurate Language
Since the 1970s, an awareness of subtle sexist messages in the English language has demanded that writers and editors develop a new sensitivity to the
implications of common words. So attuned have most writers become that
they largely take the following rules for granted.
Writers should strive for accurate, unbiased communication and avoid
debasing terms, stereotypes, and language that expresses an inherent superiority of one sex over the other. Not only are the words themselves important but so is the overall tone of a written passage. The following guidelines
can help writers and editors be more sensitive to sexist language so they
might affirm through words and attitudes the worth of all people.
Simple Accuracy. For the sake of accuracy, words and phrases should be gender neutral when the sex of persons is unknown, immaterial, or consisting
of both male and female. Good substitutes may be difficult to devise but seldom impossible. Gender-accurate language should improve communication
and not result in awkwardness, inexactness, or obscurity.
chairperson (for a man or woman when the gender is immaterial to the context
or unknown)
chairpersons (referring to a group of mixed gender or possibly mixed gender)
chairman (when it is important to the context to specify that the chairperson is
a male)
chairwoman (when it is important to the context to specify that the
chairperson is a female)
Man as a Generic Term. The use of man as a generic term for both men and
women is best avoided whenever possible. Although this preference originally began in the 1970s as a consciousness-raising rule among some in the
women’s movement, it has passed into general usage and is no longer just a
matter of “political correctness.” While most older readers are not confused
by the generic man, after thirty years of writers’ generally avoiding its use,
younger readers now often take the gender specification quite literally. When
a text reads, “Blessed is the man who does not walk in the counsel of the
wicked” (Ps. 1:1), many take it to refer exclusively to a male. Here are some
generally outmoded terms and some alternatives:
2:56 PM
Page 213
Gender-Accurate Language | 213
man, mankind
common man
humanity, people, human beings, humankind
the average person, the ordinary citizen
maturity, adulthood
work force
spokesperson, representative
forerunners, forebears, ancestors
Vocational Terms. Many vocational terms unnecessarily focus on gender and
should be avoided.
insurance man
steward, stewardess
waiter, waitress
homemaker, consumer
insurance agent
press operator
flight attendant
server, serving person
In the case of the word firefighter, representatives for the firefighters themselves prefer the gender neutral term as the most accurate reflection of what
both men and women in that profession do. They fight fires. Beyond that, the
sex of the firefighter is immaterial in most cases. When gender specificity is
absolutely essential to a written passage, the terms male firefighter and female
firefighter should suffice.
Double Standards. Avoid double-standard semantics, such as describing a
behavior as acceptable for one sex but not for the other. Connotations as
well as denotations must be carefully considered. For example, don’t use the
word domineering to describe a wife if a husband displaying similar behavior would be described as authoritative.
assertive businessman, pushy businesswoman
thrifty woman, miserly man
cautious woman, spineless man
spirited little boy, unruly little girl
Negative Overtones. Select words carefully to indicate gender. Many widely
used terms have negative overtones and should not be used in fine writing.
2:56 PM
Page 214
214 | Gender-Accurate Language
ladies, gals, girls (for adults)
old maid, spinster
the little woman, my better half
women’s libber
my old man
little old lady
dirty old man, little old man
man and wife
single woman
wife, spouse
my husband, spouse
elderly woman
elderly man
man and woman, or husband and wife
When Gender Is Significant. Do not hide gender if it is significant for the reader.
Grammar. Do not violate essential rules of grammar simply to avoid a genderspecific word or phrase.
Disclaimers. In certain works that do not allow for reediting, such as reprints
of classics or other previously published works or quotations from such
works, it may be advisable to place a disclaimer somewhere in the front matter, perhaps on the copyright page, although this is probably only necessary
when the quoted author’s opinions are of such an inflammatory nature as to
be offensive to a large number of readers.
Deliberate Sexism. It should be noted that “sexist” language can be appropriate to evocative communication in certain circumstances, such as when used
to add color to a fiction writer’s palette. Such language can be especially
effective in dialogue to characterize the speaker’s assumptions and background. This manual is far from saying that such language is forbidden,
merely that it should be used consciously and for a desired end. Still, since
each publisher has its own policy regarding sexist speech, a writer should
check with the editor first.
Neutral Pronouns. Use neutral pronouns instead of the generic he whenever
possible. Changing a phrase or recasting an entire sentence usually yields an
acceptable alternative. Many people ask why we should avoid male generic
pronouns. One answer is that an entire generation has now been raised with
little awareness of that linguistic custom in English. Some common, acceptable solutions are offered here:
1. Alternate “he” and “she.” One solution is to alternate gender-specific
pronouns (he and she) as they are needed in different contexts throughout a work.
2. Use the Third-Person Plural Pronouns. Sometimes changing the pronouns from the singular to the plural remedies the problem: He asked
any student who knew the answer to raise their hand. (Although that
usage is still frowned upon by some experts, the majority of style manuals now list it as acceptable.)
2:56 PM
Page 215
Gender-Accurate Language | 215
3. Change Entire Reference to Third-Person Plural. By changing the neutral “he” to “they,” the male-only reference can become inclusive without changing the meaning: He asked students who knew the answer to
raise their hands.
4. Change to First-Person Plural. Often, shifting a “he” to a “we” is a
helpful solution.
5. Use “he or she” and “him or her.” Although these wordy constructions grow tiresome after only a few uses in close proximity, they can
be used in place of a generic he to express that the discussion concerns
both males and females. The problem with this solution is that it can
quickly look stiff, formulaic, and distracting if used too often.
6. Use Passive Voice. Occasionally a sentence may be restructured into
passive voice to avoid the male-only generic pronoun. Since this is perhaps the least satisfactory of the solutions, use it only as a last resort.
7. Use “one.” Curiously, English has a longstanding generic pronoun,
one, although it is seldom used now because it sounds a bit stuffy. In
the right context, however, it can be effectively used but should not be
repeated too often.
Here are some examples of these solutions:
[Original sentence] A Christian needs to be concerned about his witness before
the watching world. [Problem: the neutral subject Christian is followed by
the male pronoun his, presuming that Christians are invariably male.]
[Solution 1: alternate his and her] A Christian needs to be concerned about her
witness before the watching world. [She is used. In the next instance, he
would be used.]
[Solution 2: their with singular reference] Each Christian needs to be concerned
about their witness before the watching world. [Acceptable, though some
reject this solution.]
[Solution 3: third-person plural] Christians need to be concerned about their
witness before the watching world. [Preferred to solution 2, whenever
[Solution 4: first-person plural] As Christians we need to be concerned about
our witness before the watching world.
[Solution 5: his or her] A Christian needs to be concerned about his or her
witness before the watching world. [Acceptable, although his or her can
become awkward if used frequently.]
[Solution 6: passive voice] A Christian’s witness before the watching world
should be a matter of concern. [Acceptable, although the passive
construction can sound convoluted and artificial if not handled well.]
[Solution 7: Use one] As a Christian, one needs to be concerned about one’s
witness before the watching world. [Acceptable, although one can sound
stiff in many contexts.]
Do not use the forms s/he, he/she, him/her, or other such combinations
when a neutral pronoun is needed. These forms only distract the reader.
2:56 PM
Page 216
216 | God Compounds
God Compounds
When compound words are formed with the word god, they are usually
set solid (without a hyphen) and lowercased: such as godchild, goddaughter, goddess, godfather, godhood, godless, godlike, godling, godly, godmother, godparent, godsend, and godson.
When God as deity is specifically being referred to, then the compounds
are usually hyphenated and the word God is capitalized: God-fearing, Godforsaken, God-inspired, and God-given.
A few conventional compounds do not fit this general rule, however:
god-awful (colloquial), godforsaken (colloquial), Godspeed (customarily
The word gospel (from the Old English godspel, meaning “good tale” or
“good news”) has come to have several common meanings: (1) the general
message of Christ’s kingdom; (2) one of the first four books of the New
Testament canon; (3) any of the several apocryphal books about the life or
sayings of Jesus; (4) a liturgical reading from one of the first four books of
the New Testament; (5) any statement that is said to be infallible, as in the
gospel truth or If he said it, it’s gospel; (6) a specific style of religious music.
As a result, the word is subject to imprecision and misreading. A careful
writer should make his or her meaning clear whenever the term is used.
Capitalization. Many different rules have been suggested for the capitalization
of the word gospel, most of which are confusing and contradictory. This
manual, therefore, advises that the word gospel be lowercased in all contexts
and for all uses except when contained in an actual title (“The Gospel
According to Saint Matthew” [KJV]), when used as a collective title for the
four canonical gospels as a whole (“the Gospels”), or, obviously, in headings
and titles. This style is consistent with the King James Version, the New
International Version, and Today’s New International Version, and it will
also keep authors, editors, and readers from having to split hairs over the
different shades of meaning the word can have in particular contexts.
gospel music
gospel revival
gospel tent
the gospel writer
the gospel of Christ
the true gospel
the gospel of salvation
to preach the gospel
but the Gospel of Thomas (if that is the title in the Bible version used;
otherwise, John’s gospel or the gospel of John)
The Gospel According to Peanuts
the Gospels, but the four gospels
the Synoptic Gospels
2:56 PM
Page 217
Graphics | 217
The Term Gospel Side. The term gospel side of a church or cathedral formerly
meant the left side of the altar as one faces the front. This was the side of the
chancel from which the gospel was traditionally read. The term is now
archaic and is best avoided unless defined for the reader.
The Term Gospeler. The term gospeler once referred to anyone who read from
Scripture in a liturgical setting, a meaning that is now archaic. While the
term is now rare, it is still occasionally used pejoratively to refer to an overly
zealous evangelist.
Position. In both the electronic and paper copies of a manuscript, the author
should clearly indicate the placement of photos, diagrams, tables, and other
graphic material. In printed materials, the editor and compositor should
strive to place full-page graphics and illustrations on the right-hand page
whenever possible; this gives them more presence and emphasis than a lefthand placement allows.
Originals. Valuable original photographs, artwork, or other documents should
not be submitted with the manuscript. Photocopies will suffice until such
time as the publisher needs to reproduce the originals, usually at first proofs.
When submitting valuable original documents for reproduction, the author
should always compile a thorough checklist, one copy accompanying the
documents themselves and another copy remaining with the author.
Sideways Placement. If a graphic needs to be turned sideways to fit within the
book’s format, the bottom of the graphic should run along the right-hand
side of the upright page.
Reductions. Authors often worry that graphics will not look as good when
reduced to the size of the book page, but there is what has been called “the
graphic artist’s secret”: most line art and photographs actually look better
when reduced.
Folios. Folios, or page numbers, do not need to be placed on pages with fullpage graphics, especially if the number will look lost or out of place. On the
other hand, page numbers should be retained if there is a list of illustrations
in the front matter. If page numbers are not used, the list-of-illustrations page
can use “facing page numbers”; for instance, Illustration 1, facing page 10.
2:56 PM
Page 218
218 | Greek and Hebrew Transliterations
Greek and Hebrew Transliterations
Various systems are used for transliterating Hebrew and Greek. The following chart should be helpful in most cases.
s, ß
u, y
u, um
Special Characters
y e
y i
2:58 PM
Page 219
Hagiography Versus Hagiographa
These two technical terms for different kinds of religious literature are
sometimes confused. Hagiography, which is set in lowercase roman, is the
study and compiling of what is commonly called “lives of the saints.” As a
group, that literary genre is called hagiology. In ironic usage, hagiography has
also come to mean any biography that is effusive or tends to gloss over the
subject’s weaknesses and foibles.
Hagiographa, which is always capitalized as a formal title and set in
roman type, is sometimes referred to simply as the Writings, or Kethuvim. It
is one of the three major divisions of the Old Testament, the portion that is
neither the Law (Pentateuch, or Torah) nor the Prophets (or Nevi’im). The
Hagiographa includes Psalms, Proverbs, Job, Ruth, Lamentations, Song of
Songs, Ecclesiastes, Esther, Daniel, 1 and 2 Chronicles, Ezra, and Nehemiah.
Some scholars in some traditions also include Tobit and other similar apocryphal books.
Half-Title Page
The half-title page is actually an interesting holdover from an earlier era
of printing history when books were sold without covers. (The poor could
read the book as a paperback, the wealthy could have the book bound in
leather.) The half-title page identified the book in lieu of any other outside
covering. It also served to protect the interior pages from dirt and wear.
If present, the half-title page is usually page 1 of any book. Only the title
of the book, without the subtitle, appears there. In some books, the half-title
page may be replaced by endorsements, quotations from reviews of earlier
editions of the book, descriptive copy, or the author’s biography. If space is
a consideration, the half-title page may be dropped altogether. See also
“Second Half-Title Page.”
Hallelujah Versus Alleluia
Ambiguity exists concerning the correct spelling of the Hebrew liturgical
interjection halelu-Jah, “praise the Lord (Jehovah),” which occurs primarily
in Psalms and once in Revelation. Is it hallelujah or alleluia?
Most authorities consider alleluia to be the most accurate rendering of the
term, relating most closely to the Greek (Septuagint) and Latin (Vulgate).
2:58 PM
Page 220
220 | Hallelujah Versus Alleluia
But that does not take into consideration the longstanding traditional use of
hallelujah in English, which dates back to the early sixteenth century.
Generally, though not exclusively, hallelujah is used in most Protestant
churches, while the Latin alleluia is preferred by the Roman Catholic,
Anglican, and Eastern Orthodox churches.
Within the context of a particular book, when in doubt, go with the
spelling of the predominant Bible version being used. In the absence of that,
use hallelujah as a spoken interjection (“I may be a sinner but, hallelujah,
I’m saved”) and for general conversation and low-church settings. Use
alleluia in formalized liturgical settings (“The congregation responded with
rousing alleluias”), since that is the form most often used in worship and
liturgical song. One exception to this last rule, however, is found in Handel’s
famous oratorio, The Messiah, in which the word is spelled hallelujah in the
well-known chorus of that name.
Here is the breakdown of which spelling is used by the major Bible
Neither—TEV (“praise God”)
Headings and Subheadings
Chapters of nonfiction books are often divided into sections, each with
its own heading, the theory being that the occasional breaks will give the
reader a breather that will encourage further reading. Often, those sections
are broken down into subsections, each of which bears its own subheading.
Levels. The various levels of headings are referred to by letters: A-heads,
B-heads, C-heads, and so on. Since readers do not often recognize the various levels of subheads within a chapter, however, authors and editors are
encouraged to minimize the number of levels. At its worst, a book with too
many subheads reads like it is merely an annotated outline.
Style. Cap-lowercase setting is usually preferred for headings and subheadings,
since that style is more readable and less obtrusive than all-caps.
Spacing. More white space should be placed over the heading than under it. It
should always visually appear to be part of the text for which it serves as the
heading. If the paragraph immediately preceding the heading ends with very
few words, the line spacing can be reduced somewhat to keep the spacing
from looking too large.
Breaking Over Lines. When a heading or subheading is long enough to break
over a line, it should be broken by sense, that is, at the end of a phrase.
2:58 PM
Page 221
Heresy Versus Schism | 221
Hebrew Transliterations
See “Greek and Hebrew Transliterations.”
Helpmeet and Helpmate
Although accepted in most dictionaries, the now-archaic words helpmeet
and helpmate are best reserved for informal, colloquial, or humorous contexts, based as they are on a misreading of Genesis 2:18 (KJV): “I will make
him an help meet for him.” Meet, in the Jacobean English of the King James
Version, means “suitable,” not “mate.”
Heresy Versus Schism
Though the line between heresy and schism often seems blurred in early
church history, there is a distinction. The basis for a heretic’s break with the
church is usually doctrinal, whereas that for a schismatic’s is not. Heretics
have unorthodox beliefs but can, and often do, perceive themselves as
remaining within the main body of the church. Schismatics can be entirely
orthodox in their beliefs while willfully separating themselves from the
church as a sort of alternative to the faith, usually for reasons other than
doctrine. The line does become blurred, of course, when a schism has its
roots in a heresy.
The term apostate, which is different in meaning from both heretic and
schismatic, applies solely to a person who has willfully rejected the Christian
faith. Heretics and schismatics usually perceive of themselves as followers of
Christ, while an apostate does not.
Although all of these terms were liberally applied as late as the Reformation and Counter-Reformation, they are generally considered too harsh and
strong to apply to major historic branches of the Christian faith today. By
and large, it is best to leave them to the historians. When applied to specific
groups in our time, the word cult has come to have some of the same weight
as heretical sect.
As a matter of consistent style, the names of important heretical movements and schisms in the early church are always capitalized, whether or not
they find their etymology in a person’s name. Here is a brief list of a few of
the major heresies and schisms of the first millennium of the Christian faith:
Heresies of the Early Church
Adoptionism—(eighth century) the doctrine that Jesus was not God’s true son
but adopted as an inspired human
Apollinarianism—(fourth century) the doctrine that Christ possessed a divine
Logos rather than a human mind
Arianism—(fourth century) the belief that Christ was a superior but wholly
created human being and therefore not divine
2:58 PM
Page 222
222 | Heresy Versus Schism
Heresies of the Early Church cont.
Cainites—(second century) a sect that rejected the NT in favor of the Gospel of
Judas, believed the earth to be the creation of an evil force, and identified
with Cain of the OT
Docetism—(first century) a Gnostic doctrine rejecting the OT; it taught that
Christ’s sufferings were apparent, not real
Ebionitism—(first century) a doctrine that denied the divinity of Christ and the
virgin birth
Gnosticism—(late second century) emphasized an esoteric revealed knowledge
as the way to salvation; maintained that the material world was evil and,
therefore, Christ’s human and divine natures were separate
Macedonianism—(fourth century) the doctrine that denied the Holy Spirit as a
fully divine part of the Trinity
Manicheanism—(second century) followers of Mani; actually a distinct religion,
but its strong influence on Christianity was considered heretical. Their
doctrine was dualistic, giving nearly equal weight to good and evil.
Marcionism—(second century) a Gnostic offshoot that maintained that the OT
God was different than the NT God and that Christ was not born of a
Millenarianism—(second century) also called the Chiliasts, for whom an
essential doctrine was a belief in Christ’s earthly one-thousand-year reign
over the faithful after his return. This belief was revived in many forms
throughout the nineteenth century.
Monarchianism—(second century) emphasized the unity of God at the
expense of the Trinity
Monophysitism—(fourth century) the doctrine that Christ’s incarnate nature
was purely divine
Montanism—(late second century) the apocalyptic personality cult of its leader,
Nazarenes—(second century) a sect for whom it was essential to assert that
Christ, while divine, conformed to all the Mosaic rites and customs
Nestorianism—(fifth century) the doctrine that Christ’s human and divine
natures were separate, not unified
Pelagianism—(fourth century) the theological system asserting that the human
will seeks salvation apart from divine grace
Sabellianism—(early third century) the doctrine that Christ was identical in
nature to God the Father, a later form of Monarchianism
Schisms of the Church
Donatist Schism—(fourth century) followers of Donatus, who believed their
sect to be the true, uncorrupted church, and that only those achieving
exceptional holiness could belong
Great Schism of 1054—the historical point at which Eastern Orthodoxy and
Roman Catholicism officially split though the origins of their differences
considerably predate that era
Novatianist Schism—(third century) followers of a Roman presbyter Novatian,
who was orthodox in doctrine but felt he could not accept the cultural and
political compromises of the church at large
2:58 PM
Page 223
Holy Grail | 223
Holidays, Christian
See “Christian Holidays, Feasts, and the Liturgical Year.”
Holidays, Jewish
See “Jewish Holidays and Feasts.”
Holy Bible
We forget that the full name of the Bible in many English versions is The
Holy Bible (in Latin, Biblia Sacra, the formal title of the Vulgate). In writing, the full title is perfectly acceptable, although if overused, it can sound
falsely pious. Use the Bible in most ordinary writing unless one occasionally
needs the ring of extra authority implied by the full term.
The term is usually set in roman type—the Bible—unless a specific edition is referred to, such as The NIV Study Bible.
See also “Scripture Versus Bible.”
Holy City
In Christian and Jewish contexts, the Holy City (capped) is nearly always
Jerusalem. That term, however, is applied not only to the earthly Jerusalem
but also to the New Jerusalem, that is, heaven. To some readers, the term
can alternatively suggest Rome, the seat of the papacy. The written context
should make the meaning clear.
Also keep in mind that many other religious faiths have their own holy
Sacred City
Christian, Protestant
Christian, Roman Catholic
Muslim, Indian
Muslim, worldwide
Jerusalem or New Jerusalem
Jerusalem, New Jerusalem, or Rome
Holy Grail
The term Holy Grail is used to describe a legendary bowl, or in some versions a wide-brimmed cup, which the apocryphal Gospel of Nicodemus identifies as both the wine bowl of the Last Supper and the receptacle in which
Joseph of Arimathea is said to have caught the blood of Jesus as he hung on
2:58 PM
Page 224
224 | Holy Grail
the cross. As such, it achieved great mythical significance, possessed of lifegiving qualities. Even the remote possibility of such a relic existing fired the
imaginations of numerous medieval writers, and stories of knights going on
quests to recover it soon became symbols of the soul’s quest for union with
God. It plays an important part in many of the Arthurian tales.
The term, which can be referred to, interchangeably, as the Holy Grail or
the Grail, is always capitalized, even when used metaphorically: The
Gutenberg Bible is the Holy Grail of book collectors.
Holy Land
The term Holy Land is capitalized as an epithet for the geographic region
of roughly 14,000 square miles, bound on the south by the Sinai Desert, on
the east by Syria and Jordan, on the north by Lebanon, and on the west by
the Mediterranean Sea.
In using the term, it is important to remember that the land is “holy” to
each of the three great monotheistic religions: Judaism, Christianity, and
Islam. For Jews it is the land of Israel, as promised to them by God in the
book of Exodus; for Christians, it is the place of Jesus’ life and ministry; and
for Muslims, it is the place from where Muhammed is said to have ascended
to heaven. The term is always capped in all such references. When referring
jocularly to other locations, the term is lowercased: He had finally arrived at
that holy land for gamblers—Las Vegas.
Holy Writ
The term Holy Writ, referring to the Bible, has a long history in English,
dating back to before the twelfth century, though it now has a sort of antiquarian mustiness to it and is seldom used.
It is also used, semi-jocularly, to refer to any writing that has undeniable
authority; and when used in that sense, it is usually lowercased: Though the
First Folio contains numerous errors, it is still regarded as holy writ by
Shakespeare scholars.
Hosanna Versus Hosannah
Hosanna and hosannah are variant spellings of a liturgical and biblical
interjection that is used as an expression of adoration and praise. The word
is found in Matthew 21:9 and elsewhere. It is lowercased unless it stands
alone or begins a sentence. The form without the final h is the first option
given by Webster’s and is also the form used in the NIV, but either spelling
is acceptable as long as it is used consistently and conforms to the major
Bible version used.
2:58 PM
Page 225
Hours, Biblical | 225
Hours, Biblical
Anyone who has read the Bible knows that the NT writers had a different way of telling time. Many readers have puzzled over exactly what times
the ninth or eleventh hour are. One of the advantages of Today’s New
International Version, following its stated goal of dynamic equivalence, is
that it translates the biblical hours of the day into modern “clock time,” following this scheme:
Biblical Time
Modern “Clock Time”
first hour
second hour
third hour
fourth hour
fifth hour
sixth hour
seventh hour
eighth hour
ninth hour
tenth hour
eleventh hour
twelfth hour
7:00 a.m.
8:00 a.m.
9:00 a.m.
10:00 a.m.
11:00 a.m.
12:00 noon
1:00 p.m.
2:00 p.m.
3:00 p.m.
4:00 p.m.
5:00 p.m.
6:00 p.m.
This scheme is only roughly equivalent, however, because it falsely suggests
that biblical time was as rigidly measured as is modern time. The NT writers
divided the daylight portion of the day into twelve hours, but as the days grew
shorter or longer with the seasons, the hours themselves changed length. Thus,
the third, sixth, and ninth hours (the three used most often in the Bible) are
more generally equivalent to midmorning, midday, and midafternoon respectively. No clocks struck the hour in Bible times, and to say “the ninth hour”
meant an approximate time, give or take about half an hour either way. Also,
the first hour usually implies sunrise, which in the earth’s temperate zones is
closer to 6:00 a.m. in the summer than to 7:00 a.m.
The term the eleventh hour had the same metaphorical implications for the
Bible writers as it does for us today—that is, a final, critical moment of decision—but for different reasons. In our time, the eleventh hour suggests the
hour before midnight, a crucial time when Cinderella must return home
before midnight, for instance, or when Dr. Faustus, in Christopher Marlowe’s
play of the same name, delivers his famous “Eleventh Hour Soliloquy” one
hour before midnight, at which time the demons are scheduled to carry him
off to hell. In Bible times, by contrast, the eleventh hour was late afternoon,
an hour before sunset, when a field worker’s usable daylight hours were soon
2:58 PM
Page 226
226 | Hours, Biblical
to expire. The day’s business had to be concluded, and the traveler needed
to find shelter. Similar symbolism; different time of the day.
Hours, Canonical
Confusion exists regarding the names and times of the canonical hours of
the divine office, that is, the assigned daily prayers that priests and laity of
some denominations (Roman Catholic, Anglican, and Eastern Orthodox)
are encouraged to pray throughout the day. This confusion arose because
the hours of the Roman Catholic Church have changed over time, because
the number of hours differs from denomination to denomination, and
because the matins is the last prayer of the day in Roman Catholic tradition,
while it is the first prayer of the day in the Anglican tradition.
From about the fifth century until the Reformation, there were eight traditional hours of the Roman Catholic Church. The first seven were considered the day hours; the last one, matins, the night hour.
prayer upon rising
the first hour, or 6:00 a.m.
the third hour, or 9:00 a.m.
the sixth hour, or 12:00 noon
the ninth hour, or 3:00 p.m.
late afternoon or early evening
late evening
late night
This system was later simplified, and the modern Roman Catholic hours
specified in the official Breviary of 1971 are lauds, a midday prayer (either
terce, sext, or none), vespers, and compline.
The Church of England simplifies this even further, including only a morning prayer (called matins, spelled mattins in England) and an evening prayer
A question also arises concerning the capitalization of these terms.
Although this manual recommends lowercasing the names of the hours in
general usage, they are sometimes capped in the traditions to which they are
associated. If readership is confined to a specific tradition, follow the capitalization of that tradition.
2:58 PM
Page 227
Hymn Meters | 227
Hymn Meters
Authors often quote hymn lyrics and other old or traditional songs from
musical tablature, but it is often hard to determine where the lines should be
broken. Even in those hymnals that capitalize the first letter of each line—
and they are becoming fewer—indentation patterns can still be difficult to
interpret. The list below shows the most common stanza forms, with line
breaks and indentation patterns indicated.
Meter Abbreviations. In parentheses after each term, the common hymnbook
abbreviation is given for that stanza form as well as the number of syllables
in each line. The periods between the numbers indicate the most common
caesuras, that is, the strong breaks in the lines so that the singers can catch
their breath. A solidus (slash) is sometimes used between the verse and chorus (as in 8888/88).
Interchangeability. The lyrics to any song can be sung to the tunes of any other
song in that same form—a favorite trick of church music directors. For
instance, the words of “Amazing Grace” (in Common Meter) can be sung to
the tune of “All Hail the Power of Jesus’ Name” (whose tune, “Coronation,”
is also in Common Meter). Also note that traditional Christian hymnody is
almost exclusively iambic.
Indentations. In hymns with lines of varying lengths and whose lines vary by
two or more syllables (as in 86.86 or 66.86), the shorter lines are indented.
Differences of one syllable between varying lines (as in 87.87) do not usually
result in any indentation.
Rhyme scheme can also be a factor in determining indentation. While
hymns with series of repeating couplets (aabb), as in Long Meter, are usually
aligned left, many Long Meter songs with alternating rhymes (abab) or alternating unrhymed and rhymed lines (abcb), indent the even numbered lines
(as in the Long Meter Double Meter example below).
The following are examples of the most common metrical forms of
hymnody, all of which are taken from the great American shape-note hymnal, The Sacred Harp (1860).
Common Meter (CM—86.86)
Amazing grace! (how sweet the sound)
That saved a wretch like me!
I once was lost, but now am found,
Was blind, but now I see.
(“Amazing Grace”)
2:58 PM
Page 228
228 | Hymn Meters
Common Meter Double (CMD—
As on the cross the Savior hung,
And bled and wept and died;
He poured salvation on a wretch
That languished at his side.
His crimes, with inward grief and shame,
The penitent confessed;
Then turned his dying eyes to Christ,
And thus his prayer addressed.
(“Converted Thief”)
Long Meter (LM—88.88)
Lift up your hearts, Immanuel’s friends,
And taste the pleasure Jesus sends;
Let nothing cause you to delay,
But hasten on the good old way.
(“The Good Old Way”)
Long Meter Double (LMD—
The busy scene of life is closed,
And active usefulness is o’er;
The body’s laid in calm repose,
And sin shall ne’er distress it more.
The happy soul is gone to rest,
Where cares no more shall spoil its peace:
Reclining on its Savior’s breast,
It shall enjoy eternal bliss.
(“Paradise Plains”)
Short Meter (SM—66.86, rhymes abcb)
He wept that we might weep,
Each sin demands a tear;
In heav’n alone no sin is found
And there’s no weeping there.
(“Jesus Wept”)
2:58 PM
Page 229
Hyphenation | 229
Other Forms
Determining the line breaks and indent patterns for the following meters
is a matter of common sense and applying the principles set forth in the
meters listed above.
Common Proper Meter (CPM—886.886)
Short Hymnal Meter (SHM—66.86; same as Short Meter but rhymes ABAB)
Hallelujah Meter (HM—66.66.88)
Long Proper Meter (LPM—88.88.88)
Proper Meter (PM—no general pattern. The Geneva Psalter had a different
meter for nearly every psalm; thus, each had its own “proper” meter.)
Miscellaneous. All other stanza forms are indicated by syllable counts alone:
for instance, 664.6664 (“My Country ’Tis of Thee”), 77.78 (“Just a Closer
Walk with Thee), and 87.87 (“In the Cross of Christ I Glory”).
See “Hyphenation,” “Dash,” and “Spelling Out Words in Text.”
Standard Reference. To resolve problems of word division, the hyphenation of
compound words, and other uses of the hyphen, this manual recommends
Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary as an authoritative and accessible
standard. Because of frequent revision, college editions of dictionaries, like
Webster’s, tend to include newer words and a more current hyphenation style
than unabridged editions. Other dictionaries are as comprehensive, but once
an editorial standard has been chosen, it is important for a publisher’s editors and proofreaders to use it consistently.
In many instances an author must use personal discretion in hyphenating,
and editors must constantly adopt additional words as they gain currency.
Only the most basic rules of hyphenation are given here. More detailed information can be found in sections 7.33–7.45 in The Chicago Manual of Style,
Fifteenth Edition.
Compound Adjectives. When two or more words form an adjectival unit (compound adjective) precede a noun, hyphens are placed between the words.
Compounds that are so familiar as to preclude the possibility of misreading
need not be set with hyphens (such as high school prom, Sunday school class,
Old Testament translation). When the compound adjective is used as a predicate, it is set with no hyphens. Since some familiar compound adjectives are
2:58 PM
Page 230
230 | Hyphenation
always hyphenated, it is best to check the dictionary. A hyphen is not used
when an adverb ending in -ly is combined with an adjective.
R. A. Torrey’s well-timed anecdote was effective.
R. A. Torrey’s effective anecdote was well timed. [predicate; no hyphen]
The nineteenth-century liturgy sounded strange to our ears; it seemed so oldfashioned. [old-fashioned is always hyphenated]
a badly needed reform
a highly effective testimony
Syntactical Use. Hyphenation frequently depends on the syntactical use of a
phrase or expression.
Is he born again? [predicate adjective]
Is he a born-again Christian? [adjective]
Soul winning is not a negotiable duty of the Christian life. [noun]
Graham’s inspired soul-winning sermons reached many. [adjective]
Prefixes and Suffixes. Many common prefixes and suffixes are set without
hyphens, although Webster’s should always be consulted for exceptions.
Among the prefixes and suffixes that do not commonly use hyphens are anti-, co-,
non-, out-, over-, post-, pre-, pseudo-, re-, semi-, super-, -fold, and -like. Keep
in mind, though, that if confusion or misreading will result, or if a prefix is
added to a proper name, proper adjective or noun, or numeral, then a hyphen
should be used. Also use a hyphen if the added prefix or suffix results in a
double vowel (unless the word already appears in Webster’s without the
out-Herod Herod
preestablished [Webster’s]
preexist [Webster’s]
reelect [Webster’s]
re-enumerate [double vowel]
2:58 PM
Page 231
Hyphenation | 231
Exceptions to the Prefix and Suffix Rule. The main exceptions to the previous
rule are the prefixes all-, ex- (meaning former), half-, and self-, which generally use hyphens unless the word is listed otherwise in Webster’s.
all-faiths meeting
all-weather arena
halfway [Webster’s]
Changes in Meaning. Keep in mind that the meanings of some words will
change depending on the insertion or deletion of a hyphen.
They worked to recover the ministry’s losses.
They worked to re-cover the pews.
God, in essence, brings about a re-creation of his church.
We need recreation to refresh ourselves.
Noun Pairs. When two nouns of equal importance are temporarily yoked, they
should be hyphenated. It should be emphasized that the use of a solidus
(slash) is incorrect insofar as it can create ambiguity. (For instance, although
the solidus used to stand for or, many readers are unaware of that fact and
read it to mean and.)
Word Division. Hyphens are used to indicate a word that has been broken for
copy-fitting purposes over two lines of type. For a full discussion of when
and how this is done, see “Word Division.”
Spelling Out Words. A hyphen is used to spell out words in text or dialogue.
“I can’t remember; is Niebuhr spelled N-I-E or N-E-I?”
2:58 PM
Page 232
Immanuel Versus Emmanuel
Though the names for Christ Immanuel and Emmanuel are generally
interchangeable, being different romanized versions of the Hebrew word
found in Isaiah 7:14, Immanuel is preferred since it is the form common to
the most widely used versions of the Bible (KJV, RSV, NIV, and others).
Emmanuel (from the Septuagint’s Emmanouel) is acceptable, however, in the
many Christmas stories and carols (for instance, “O Come, O Come,
Emmanuel”) that use that form. When in doubt, use Immanuel.
Roman Catholic Imprimatur. An imprimatur, which is the Latin word for “let
it be printed,” is used in Roman Catholic publishing. It is the official notice
placed on a blank front-matter page (usually facing the title page, in place of
the author ad card) or on the copyright page that declares that a bishop and
his representatives have reviewed the book and found nothing in it contrary
to Catholic doctrine or general morals.
In its most common form, the entire phrase Nihil obstat quominus imprimatur (“Nothing stands in the way of allowing this to be printed”) is given,
along with the date and the bishop’s name and full title, all usually rendered
in Latin.
Other Imprimaturs. The word imprimatur can also refer to an official license
granted to a publisher in those countries in which government review and
approval are required whenever a book is published. The word is also used
metaphorically to mean “an official stamp of approval.”
Inclusive Language
See “Gender-Accurate Language.”
Although many kinds of indexes exist, all serve the same function: to make
portions of text more accessible to the reader. Not all books need an index.
Fiction, devotional, gift, and general inspirational books, for example, usually do not contain the kind of information that would necessitate an index,
though even among those genres there are exceptions. But any work con-
2:58 PM
Page 233
Indexes | 233
taining facts that the reader might need to locate quickly, such as works of
reference or scholarly research, can benefit from a good index.
Who Prepares an Index? The author is the ideal indexer, since no one else has
so clear and comprehensive an understanding of the book’s contents. In many
cases, the author is contractually responsible for preparing the index, in
which case, the author may opt to hire a professional or have the publisher
hire a professional to compile the index, the expense in either case being
borne by the author. When the publisher hires the indexer, the fee can usually be deducted from the author’s royalties. In either case, the index is prepared from a clean set of final galleys provided by the publisher. (For a
thorough review of techniques for compiling indexes, authors should be sure
to read Chapter 18 of The Chicago Manual of Style, Fifteenth Edition.)
Types of Indexes. There are two principal types of indexes common to religious
publishing: the subject–proper-name index and the Scripture index.
Subject–Proper-Name Index. This kind of index lists references and page numbers to all major subjects and proper names discussed in the text of the book
itself. In some cases, there may be an advantage to splitting the index into
separate indexes: a subject index and a proper-name index.
Typographic Considerations. Indexes are most commonly set in double columns
to conserve space, but specific designs may differ. An even white column of
space (from 1 to 1-1/2 picas) rather than a rule line should be used to separate the columns.
There are two typographical styles: the paragraph style and the column style.
Paragraph style is convenient when space is a consideration; column style, however, tends to make each entry slightly easier to read. In both styles, commas
are used before page numbers. In the paragraph style, a colon separates the
main heading from the subentries, while in column style, no additional punctuation is generally used. The following examples illustrate the two styles:
Paragraph Style
Column Style
Heaven: NT conceptions of, 28–32; OT conceptions of, 32–33; pagan views of, 20–25;
theological implications of, 33
NT conceptions of, 28–32
OT conceptions of, 32–33
pagan views of, 20–25
theological implications of, 33
Helen, St. (mother of Constantine)
abandonment of, 133
advocacy of Christianity, 160, 167,
birth of Constantine, 126
marriage, 120
restoration under Constantine, 150–52,
Helen, St. (mother of Constantine): abandonment of, 133; advocacy of Christianity,
160, 167, 180–84; birth of Constantine,
126; her marriage, 120; her restoration
under Constantine, 150–52, 160
2:58 PM
Page 234
234 | Indexes
For issues relating to alphabetization in indexes, see “Alphabetization.”
Subentries in Indexes. Subentries under each index heading may be listed in
three ways: (1) alphabetically, which, as the most common and most versatile, is the preferred method for most indexes; (2) chronologically, used
mainly for indexes of predominantly biographical information; and (3)
numerically by page number, which should be reserved for simple indexes
that do not contain a large number of subentries. Only one style should be
used throughout an index. If the index is set in paragraph style, a colon separates the entry heading from the subentries, and semicolons separate subentries from each other.
Cross-references. Cross-references are an important element of any thorough
index. They indicate where alternate entries or additional information might
be found under other headings. In a paragraph-style index, a cross-reference
that includes the whole entry is placed at the end of the entry; in column style,
such an inclusive reference is placed after the main-entry heading. In both
styles, when only a subentry is being cross-referenced, the cross-reference
appears immediately after the subentry. The word see indicates that an entirely
different heading should be referred to, and the words see also indicate that
additional information may be found under another entry. The word see,
whether alone or in the phrase see also, is usually capped, set in italics, and
preceded by a period. In paragraph style, however, the cross-reference is placed
in parentheses and the word see is lowercased when only the subentry is being
Paragraph Style
Column Style
Bird, William. See Byrd, William
Bishop’s Bible, the, 182, 188. See also Bibles:
before 1611
Blake, William: paintings of, 228–30; poetry
of, 233–39 (see also Religious Poetry); his
visions, 211. See also Artists; Painters
Bird, William. See Byrd, William
Bishop’s Bible, the, 182, 188. See also
Bibles: before 1611
Blake, William. See also Artists; Painters
paintings of, 228–30.
poetry of, 233–39. See also Religious
his visions, 211
Scripture Indexes. Scripture indexes inform the reader of all the Bible quotations used in a book. Most often they only contain references to those verses
that are actually quoted, although for some scholarly works the index may
also include those Bible verses that are referred to but not quoted. The
Scripture index is usually set in double columns and is arranged in the same
2:58 PM
Page 235
Inklings | 235
order as the books of the Bible itself. Within each book of the Bible, entries
are listed numerically by chapter and verse numbers; a chapter-only reference precedes any chapter-and-verse references for that same chapter. When
continuous references begin with the same verse number, the one with the
lower ending number precedes one with a higher ending number. Although
leader dots are no longer used for tables of contents and subject–propername indexes, they are still common in Scripture indexes. The most common form is as follows:
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113–14
1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1:1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 12, 117
1:1–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
1:1–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 18
2:4–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60–61
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6:14–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
15:21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
20:1–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 100–101
Other Kinds of Indexes. Other kinds of indexes are the title-and-first-line index
(for books of hymns and poetry), the concordance (common to Bibles), the
index of place names (common to atlases), and the author or contributor
index (for compilations, reference works, and anthologies). An index can be
tailored, in fact, for almost any kind of book in which information needs to
be organized for accessibility.
See “Acronyms and Initialisms.”
Initials, with Periods
See “Period, With Initials and Abbreviations.”
The group of writers who clustered around C. S. Lewis and J. R. R.
Tolkien from the mid-1930s to the late 1940s used the term Inklings to
describe themselves. Among the other members were Owen Barfield, J. A. W.
Bennett, Lord David Cecil, Nevill Coghill, Jim Dundas-Grant, Hugo Dyson,
Adam Fox, Colin Hardie, R. E. Havard, Warren H. Lewis, Gervase Mathew,
R. B. McCallum, C. E. Stevens, John Wain, Charles Williams, and Charles
2:58 PM
Page 236
236 | Inklings
The term Inklings is capitalized when referring to the group and is always
used in the plural, as in He was one of the Inklings, rather than He was an
Because some Christian bookstores occasionally include George MacDonald
and G. K. Chesterton in their Inklings section, it is sometimes assumed they
were themselves part of that group. They lived before the Inklings’ time,
however, and were simply influences. Dorothy Sayers and Joy Davidman
are also sometimes listed, but as women, they were never, in fact, invited to
join the men.
Another common mistake is to refer to the Inklings as a group of
“Christian writers.” Not all of the Inklings would have described themselves
as such. Barfield, for instance, was a philosophical anthroposophist who long
debated matters of faith with Lewis.
Inside Half-Title Page
See “Second Half-Title Page.”
An interjection is a specialized part of speech, usually independent of any
grammatical construction, that is used as an exclamation or a sudden expression of emotion. The Bible and the church use many special interjections that
are termed liturgical interjections, such as amen, alleluia, and hosanna.
Uses. Interjections are particularly useful for fictional dialogue, where they lend
immediacy and realism. While a nonfiction writer can spice up his or her
exposition with an occasional authorial interjection, the use of interjections
should be limited since they call too much attention to themselves and can
make the writing seem self-conscious.
Repetition of Letters. Some writers tend to repeat letters (“Ahhhhh,” “h’mmmm,”
or “ho-hoooo”), which is acceptable if a comic effect is intended. By and large,
however, such extended words not only draw too much attention to themselves
but also do not communicate well to readers, who can even perceive such
spellings as errors. Most stylists advise that the letters not be extended beyond
three repetitions (“Ahhh,” “h’mmm,” or “ho-hooo”). In fact, using only two
usually suffices.
Spelling. Since the spelling of interjections can vary from author to author and
from dictionary to dictionary, the following list offers a standard styling for
some of the most common conversational interjections in English.
2:58 PM
Page 237
Interjections | 237
ai, aie, aiee
argh, aargh
ay, ay me
ha, hah
hee, hee-hee
h’m, hum
hurrah, hurray
expression of satisfaction, delight, content; can have negative
connotation of regret or longing
exclamation of discovery, contempt, triumph, irony, etc.
clearing the throat; drawing attention to oneself; interrupting
greeting, hailing someone, often thought of as a sailor’s term
expression of grief, despair, pain
expression of grief or woe; now considered comically
melodramatic and antiquated
an expression of despair, often mock or exaggerated frustration
(one of Charlie Brown’s favorites)
expressing sympathy, either feigned or sincere; incredulity,
disgust, or disappointment
expression of regret or sorrow. Not aye, which is an affirmative
vote (as in aye and nay)
expression of disdain or contempt (as in Scrooge’s “bah
a whirring sound with the lips; the state of being cold
expression of dim-wittedness; currently used by teenagers as a
mocking accusation of stupidity
a shriek or scream of fright, usually comic (Eek! A mouse!)
used as a question, “Is that right?” or to beg the listener’s
agreement; often used as Canadian locution
expressing a pause, searching for words, inarticulateness. Be
careful not to double the r, since it will be misread as the verb
to err (to commit an error)
sound of drowning or of water in a drain; sometimes repeated,
usually comic in effect
the act of swallowing, usually expressing anxiety or fear
expression of contempt, surprise, triumph, joy, or discovery
laughter, derision, or amusement
communicates indignation, a dissatisfied turning away, a certain
self-righteousness, a blustering clearing of the throat
laughter or giggling
thoughtful pondering, musing
surprise, calling attention to something (as in land ho)
expression of discovery or laughter (used by Santa Claus)
usually followed by a question mark; expression of surprise,
doubt, disbelief, confusion; also an expression of wondering
expression of disdain or disgust, doubt or uncertainty
shout of a marching cadence
cheer; expression of joy, excitement, etc.; also huzzah, which
has an antiquated feel
a marching cadence or a football quarterback’s directive
expression of disgust
expression of content with taste of food or drink; also can be
thoughtfulness, similar to h’m
2:58 PM
Page 238
238 | Interjections
oy, oy vey
rah, rah-rah
sh, shh
tsk-tsk, tsk
yech, yecch
yuck, yuk
yum, yummy
expression of surprise, pain, abashment, or understanding; used
often in direct address
taunting, discovery, contempt
dismay or surprise, usually involving a mistake or accident
usually followed by exclamation point; expression of sudden pain
intense pain
Yiddish expression of a sigh
expression of disgust, as with a bad odor
expression of relief, fatigue; sometimes an expression of sensing
an unpleasant smell
expression of disappointment, indignation, or dismissal
a cheer, a shout of encouragement
request for someone to be quiet
euphemistic expression of surprise or exasperation
laughter or giggling
expression of scolding; “For shame!”
expression of disgust, aversion, or fright
expression of pause, filling time, searching for words
positive; saying yes; also mock agreement
same force as “Oh, no!”; favorite expression of toddlers when
something falls
negative; saying no
hesitation, doubt, searching for words
expression of relief after a close scrape
“stop” or “slow down”; usually said to horses
expression of being impressed; powerful emotion, either good
or bad
an expression of disgust
getting someone’s attention
expression of pain or dismay
expression of disgust, distaste
expression of content with taste of food or drink
suggesting sleep or snoring; is considered comic no matter how
many times the letter is repeated
International Standard Book Number (ISBN)
An International Standard Book Number (ISBN), which is a standard part
of the CIP data, should be obtained for every publication. (See “Cataloging
in Publication Data [CIP].”) If no CIP is used in a particular book or if the
CIP is located elsewhere in the book, then the ISBN should still be shown
somewhere on the copyright page. The ISBN should also always appear
somewhere on the cover or flap of the book (it is customarily included in the
EAN, or barcode).
2:58 PM
Page 239
Internet Resources | 239
Cloth and Paper Editions. If a book is to be published in both cloth and paper
editions, then each edition should have its own ISBN.
Series. Each book in a series should have its own ISBN. If a multivolume set of
books is to be sold only (and invariably) as a unit, then a single ISBN can be
assigned to the set, though this is fairly rare. An example of this would be
when volume one contains a text and volume two contains the annotations
to that text, or when two or more closely related books are available only as
a boxed set.
Reprints and Revisions. If a book will be reprinted with a new format or binding style or is being heavily revised (as opposed to only simple corrections
being made), a new ISBN should be assigned. If the book cover is to be
redesigned without changing the format and content of the original, it should
keep the original ISBN. (See also “Reprints and Revisions.”)
Note: It is redundant to say, as is commonly done, “ISBN number,” since the N
in the abbreviation already stands for “number.” Just saying “ISBN” suffices.
Internet-Related Words
See “Computer- and Internet-Related Words.”
Internet Resources
The Internet offers previously unimaginable tools for writers, researchers,
editors, and proofreaders. Caution is necessary, of course, because of the
amount of misinformation disseminated freely on the Internet, but the following websites have proven to be authoritative for specific purposes.
Foreign Names. For the spelling of foreign names, the public databases of the
Central Intelligence Agency is extremely useful:
Trademarks. To ascertain the accurate ownership of trademarks, check the website of the International Trademark Association:
Or check the Federal Government’s list at:
US Geography. For the accurate spelling of US geographic locations that can’t
be found in Webster’s, check the Federal Government’s database:
2:58 PM
Page 240
240 | Internet Resources
World Geography. For the accurate spelling of geographic locations worldwide
that can’t be found in Webster’s, check:
To avoid confusion, the publisher and the Christian organization that go
by this name in the US have recently standardized the spelling. Thus:
InterVarsity Press and InterVarsity Christian Fellowship.
The organization that goes by that name in the United Kingdom used to
hyphenate it (Inter-Varsity), but they now go by another name altogether:
UCCF—the Universities and Colleges Christian Fellowship.
An introduction is the final portion of a book’s front matter, containing
material pertinent to the main content of the book itself. The introduction is
usually written by the author but can, on occasion, be written by someone
else. If a well-known person has written the introduction, it is best to place
that writer’s name at the beginning of the introduction, right after the title,
where it will be noticed. Otherwise, the author’s name and a dateline (if used)
should come at the end of the piece. If the introduction is written by the book’s
author, no signature or dateline is needed unless the writer requests it.
What distinguishes an introduction from a foreword or a preface is the
degree of relatedness to the text itself. An introduction has a closer thematic
connection to the content of the book and is more essential to the understanding of the text than a foreword or a preface, both of which can usually
be left unread without limiting the reader’s appreciation of the book. Of
course, determining the level of relatedness to the text can be a highly subjective matter, but this principle should help: high level of relation to the text
= introduction; low level of relation to the text = foreword (written by someone other than the author) or preface (written by the author). (See also
“Foreword and Preface.”)
Islamic Religious Terminology
As one of the three great monotheistic faiths, all of which ultimately
claim their authority from Abraham, Islam is rapidly becoming more familiar in the West. With more than 840 million Muslims worldwide, Christians
and Jews alike owe it to themselves to know more of the religion’s history,
culture, and customs. The following list shows only a few of the more common Islamic religious terms, with recommended spelling, capitalization, and
2:58 PM
Page 241
Islamic Religious Terminology | 241
styling, as well as some rudimentary definitions. (Also see “Jewish Religious
AH—the abbreviation of anno Hegirae (“in the year of the Hegira”); the
beginning of the Islamic calendar, which began on July 16, AD 622. Like AD
and BC, it is usually set in full caps without periods. Islamic scholars often
use the abbreviations BCE (before the common era) to specify dates before
the birth of Christ and CE (common era) to specify dates between the birth
of Christ and 622. See Hegira.
Allah—the Arabic word for God; always capped
ayatollah—among various Shiite teachers and interpreters of the law, an
ayatollah is the most learned and respected; the term is capped as a title
when it precedes a proper name
fakir—a Muslim religious mendicant or, by extension, a Muslim or Hindu holy
man noted for asceticism
fatwa—an opinion rendered by a religious leader on a matter of interpretation
of the law; it is a recommended opinion but not necessarily legally binding
on believers; occasionally spelled fatwah
five pillars of Islam, the—(sometimes capped) the five essentials of the Muslim
faith: (1) belief that “there is no god but God, and Muhammad is his
prophet”; (2) praying five times a day, facing Mecca; (3) giving alms;
(4) fasting during Ramadan, the ninth month of the Islamic year; and
(5) making at least one pilgrimage, or hajj, to Mecca, if possible
hajj—most Muslims attempt to make at least one pilgrimage to Mecca in the
course of a lifetime. This pilgrimage is called a hajj, while the pilgrim is
called a hajji
Hegira—Arab word meaning “flight”; always capped when referring specifically
to Muhammad’s flight from Mecca to Medina, AD 622. The Muslim
calendar begins with that event; hence, AH (anno Hegirae, “in the year of
the Hegira”) for dates. Sometimes spelled Hejira. When lowercased, it means
any escape from a dangerous situation, somewhat similar in sense to the
Hebrew word exodus
imam—the prayer leader in a mosque; can also mean one who claims descent
from Muhammad and serves as a religious leader with responsibility over a
given region
Injeel—(capped) the NT Gospels
Islam—the term itself means “submission to God”
Islamic calendar—a lunar calendar that retrogrades in thirty-year cycles and is
reckoned in terms of years since the Hegira (AD 622, which is termed 1 AH
by Muslims)
jihad—literally, “the struggle along the path toward God,” often implying one’s
personal struggle in the faith, though it is sometimes interpreted to mean
armed conflict or holy war against one’s enemies
Koran—see Qur’an
Muhammad—(c. 570–632) the founder of Islam and the receiver of the faith’s
holy scriptures, the Qur’an, in about 610. He is considered by Muslims the
final prophet in a line of prophets that stretches back to Abraham
mujahideen—one who carries out a jihad; a holy warrior; sometimes
synonymous with guerrilla fighter
2:58 PM
Page 242
242 | Islamic Religious Terminology
mullah—an interpreter or teacher of Islamic law; the term is capped as a title
before a proper name
Qur’an (Koran)—the holy book, written in Arabic, believed by Muslims to be
Allah’s direct revelation to Muhammad; the form Qur’an is replacing Koran.
Either is acceptable, though Qur’an is to be preferred whenever possible
since it is the form used by most Muslim writers writing in English
Ramadan—the ninth month of the Islamic calendar, during which the faithful
are required to fast
Sharia—the literal meaning is “the path to the water hole”; the term refers to
Islamic law as a whole
sharif—a person of influence or importance in Muslim countries; originally
refers to any descendent of Muhammad through his daughter Fatima
sheikh—a learned Muslim leader or chief; sometimes spelled sheik; the term is
capped as a title before proper names
Shia (n.), Shiite (n. and adj.)—the branch of Islam that believes Ali and the
Imams were Muhammad’s legitimate successors; see Sunni
Sunna—the customary practices of Islam based on the extra-Qur’anic
teachings of Muhammad
Sunni—the branch of Islam that adheres to the orthodox traditions and
believes that the first four caliphs after Muhammad were his legitimate
successors; see Shia
talib—a student of Islamic law
ulema—a group of Muslim scholars
Zaboor—(capped) the Psalms of the OT
Italic type, the right-leaning letters that accompany most typefaces, were
first devised by the Renaissance Venetian printer Aldus Manutius for his
series of Roman classics. Said to be inspired by the elegant handwriting of the
Italian poet Petrarch, the type took up less space than ordinary roman type
and allowed Aldus to produce readable, compact editions at a reasonable
price. That sort of publishing, in fact, helped fuel the Renaissance itself.
Although Aldus set entire books in italics, they should be used with discretion in our time. Extended passages of italic type are not only more difficult to read than the roman type, but tests have shown that they slow the
reader down considerably, even causing distraction, fatigue, and at times confusion. Entire sentences or paragraphs should thus not ordinarily be set in
Nor should a careful writer need to use italics frequently for emphasis,
although a word or phrase may occasionally be italicized when a specific
emphasis will not be clear to the reader any other way. A dependence on italics for emphasis is a sign of poor writing.
Italics are indispensable, however, in some fairly defined situations.
Foreign Words and Phrases. When the author expects certain foreign words or
phrases to be unfamiliar to the reader, they should be set in italics. But for-
2:58 PM
Page 243
Italics | 243
eign words and phrases that have become common in English should not be
italicized. As a general rule, those foreign expressions that appear among the
main entries of Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary do not require italics. Those not listed in the main entries of Webster’s or in the “Foreign Words
and Phrases” section at the back of that dictionary are, in most cases, unfamiliar enough to require italics.
If an unusual foreign word or phrase is introduced as a way of conveying
a specialized or technical meaning, it should be italicized when first defined.
Thereafter it may be set in regular type.
Latin Terms and Abbreviations. With the exception of sic, which is always italicized, scholarly Latin terms and abbreviations should be set in roman. Even
words requiring italics when spelled out should be roman when abbreviated.
Consult Webster’s and CMS.
et al.
i.e. (id est)
Thoughts. We no longer recommend that a person’s thoughts, imagined words,
and unspoken prayers (called unspoken discourse), when expressed in the
first person, always be set in italics. There are two reasons for this. First,
long stretches of italics can be difficult to read, and, second, italics can be
mistaken for emphasis. Italics may be used when such thoughts are infrequent or cannot be conveyed without italics. Otherwise, thoughts should be
expressed in roman type, with or without quotation marks, according to the
author’s preference.
I will lay my weapons upon the altar of Christ, thought Ignatius as he rode
toward Montserrat. [italic style for occasional use]
“Dear Father,” prayed Augustine silently, “make me pure—but not quite yet!”
[quotation style]
Ananais looked at the blind man and thought, Surely I have not been called to
heal him! [roman, without quotation marks]
Dream Sequences, Flashbacks, and Other Narrative Devices in Fiction.
Sometimes in fiction italics may be used to distinguish typographically
between the simple past tense, in which the story is being told, and such
things as dream sequences, flashbacks, and other fictional devices. If such
devices are frequent or highly extended, the editor and author may want to
consult with the book’s designer or compositor so that either an alternate
typographic setting may be sought or a typeface with a highly readable italic
face may be chosen.
2:58 PM
Page 244
244 | Italics
Words as Words. A word referred to as a word should be set in italics. Its definition may be set in roman type within quotation marks if it is a formal definition. But when a word is quoted from a specific context, quotation marks,
not italics, should be used.
Early Methodist ministers used the word liberty to describe an openness to
God’s Spirit in their preaching.
By feretory, hagiographers mean “a shrine in which a saint’s bones are
deposited and venerated.” [formal definition]
The word world has various meanings in Scripture; in John 3:16, for instance,
the Evangelist writes “world” to denote the inhabitants of our planet, not
the broader cosmos.
Specialized Vocabulary. Technical terms or special terminology of any kind,
especially when accompanied by a definition, are usually set in italics in the
first reference and in roman type thereafter.
Medieval theories of impanation asserted that the elements of Communion
could be both the real presence of Christ and bread and wine at the same
time. Impanation was condemned as heretical and is no longer
Titles. Italics are used for titles of certain works and for some names. (Compare
the following list with the one given in “Quotation Marks, In Titles.”)
Italicize the titles of:
Audio recordings, record albums, audiocassettes, compact discs, SACDs, DVDs,
Hallelujah! The Very Best of the Brooklyn Tabernacle Choir; Spirit of the Century
The Lion, the Witch and the Wardrobe; Paul: A Novel; Fresh Wind, Fresh Fire
CD-ROMs (software programs, however, are set cap-lowercase, roman, with no
Compton’s Interactive Bible; Zondervan International Bible Deluxe
Curriculum materials (in book or multimedia forms)
Marketplace AD 29; What’s So Amazing about Grace Groupware
The Dawn Mistaken for Dusk; Riding the Bullet
Films, feature-length
Chariots of Fire; Shadowlands; The Prince of Egypt; The Apostle; The Lord of the
Rings: The Fellowship of the Rings
Legal cases
Roe v. Wade; Brown v. Board of Education
Long poems or collections of poems
Paradise Lost; Songs of Innocence and Experience; A Scripture of Leaves
2:58 PM
Page 245
Italics | 245
Musical compositions, collections of
Preludes and Fugues; Sports et Divertissements; The Bay Psalm Book
Newspapers, magazines, and newsletters (except for the initial the in running
the Christian Science Monitor; Mars Hill Review; the Christian Century
Operas, musicals, ballets, and other performance-length musical compositions
Amahl and the Night Visitors; Godspell; The Nutcracker; The Symphony of
Paintings, sculptures, and other works of art
Self-Portrait in a Convex Mirror; David; The Bayeaux Tapestry; The Gates of Hell
The Cocktail Party; The Producers; Shadowlands
Ships and aircraft (though the designations USS, SS, and HMS are not italicized)
USS Constitution; the space shuttle Challenger; the Spirit of St. Louis
Television and radio series, shows, and programs (though the names of
individual episodes should be in quotation marks)
Joan of Arcadia, Touched by an Angel; All Things Considered
Videocassettes and DVDs
Larry Boy and the Fib from Outerspace; The Sound of Music
Web addresses/URLs
Web-based magazines, ezines, email newsletters
Gadfly Online; the Faith and Imagination Newsletter (but Web-based
companies should be set in roman type like any company:,
The word magazine is set lowercase and in roman type when it is not part
of the official name of a publication: TIME magazine; Eternity magazine;
but Parents’ Magazine.
The initial article of a title may be dropped when syntax warrants it, such
as following a possessive noun or pronoun. An initial article should also be
omitted if another article or an adjective precedes it.
They planned on reading Tolkien’s Lord of the Rings aloud. [The omitted]
The powerful Jesus I Never Knew by Philip Yancey . . . [The omitted]
Added in Quotations. When specific words within run-in or block quotations
are italicized for emphasis, the reader should be notified. An ascription, such
as italics mine or emphasis added, should be placed in parentheses immediately after the quotation.
Note the contrast in David’s parallelism: “When we were overwhelmed by sins,
you forgave our transgressions” (Ps. 65:3, italics mine).
For Titles of Specific Modern Editions of the Bible. When the title of a specific
modern edition of the Bible is referred to, it should be set in italics, unlike the
2:58 PM
Page 246
246 | Italics
names of general versions of the Bible, which are set in roman type, especially when they appear in many editions and formats.
Specific Editions:
Good News Bible: The Bible in Today’s English Version
The King James 2000 Edition
The Message
The New Testament in Modern English (J. B. Phillips)
The NIV Study Bible
The Oxford Annotated Bible: Revised Standard Version
Scofield Reference Bible: King James Version
Young’s Literal Translation of the Bible
General Versions:
Breeches Bible
Jerusalem Bible
King James Version
New International Version
J. B. Phillips’ paraphrase of the New Testament
Revised Standard Version
Today’s English Version
The King James Version and the New American Standard Bible. In most editions of the King James Version of the Bible, italics are used to indicate words
for which there are no direct correspondents in the original texts. The translators often added words to make sense of certain elliptical passages or to
fill in words that were only implied in the original. In almost no case should
these italics be reproduced when printing quotations from the King James
Version. (For a fuller discussion of this topic, see “Quotations from the Bible,
Italics in the King James Version.”)
The New American Standard Bible follows the King James style; in addition, it uses italics anytime the Old Testament is quoted in the New. Again,
these italics should not be reproduced when quoting the NASB.
“And Pharaoh said unto his servants, Can we find such a one as this is, a man in
whom the Spirit of God is?” [Gen. 41:38, as it appears in the KJV.]
“And Pharaoh said unto his servants, Can we find such a one as this is, a man in
whom the Spirit of God is?” [The same passage as it would be quoted.]
2:58 PM
Page 247
Jargon, Religious
Every religion develops its own unique vocabulary. It helps the faithful
communicate with each other but often leaves those outside feeling excluded.
So-called evangelical Christians have developed a vocabulary that is often
opaque to non-Christians as well as to Christians outside evangelical circles.
While much of this vocabulary may be unavoidable when communicating to
a narrowly defined market, writers should be especially wary of using such
Christian jargon when writing for a larger audience.
Unconsciously, some writers allow the often-outdated rhetorical language
of sermons, hymns, and devotional literature to shape their prose, resulting
in indefiniteness, lack of originality, and, at worst, insincerity. Like clichés,
anachronisms, and archaisms, jargon has a legitimate and valuable purpose
in the hands of a careful writer, but it can be an obstacle to good communication. Religious writing can only be strengthened as writers learn to find
fresh and contemporary ways of expressing their ideas. Here are a few classic bits of evangelical jargon and cliché that should be used with discretion,
if at all.
abundant life
after God’s own heart
alive to the Spirit
believe on (the name of the Lord)
better part of valor [or wisdom
or whatever]
born again
brothers and sisters in the Lord
burden on my heart
carnal desires
cast a vision
Christian walk
crossed over (to die)
daily walk, one’s
den of iniquity
depths of depravity
depths of despair
desires of the flesh
desires of your heart
devout Catholic
epitome of evil
eternal refuge
eternal resting place
eternal reward
fervent prayer
fleshly desires
forever and ever
from on high
get into the Word
giant of the faith
God-fearing man [or woman]
God made known to me
God revealed to me
God-shaped vacuum
good Christian
groanings of the spirit
grounded in the faith
grounded in the Word
heart of the gospel
heathen, the
2:58 PM
Page 248
248 | Jargon, Religious
heavenly angels
heavenly anthems
hedge of protection
hellfire and damnation
highest heavens
hopeless sinner
inspired Word of God
just pray (just ask)
laid upon my heart
let go and let God
life abundant
life-changing experience
life everlasting
life of sin
lift [someone] up in prayer
lift up the Lord
lusts of the flesh
meet his [or her] Maker
moved by the Spirit
of old [as in “Abraham of old”]
passions of the flesh
pearly gates
poor sinner
prayer warrior
precious blood of Jesus
prepare our hearts
primrose path
prodigal ways
realms of glory
rooted in the faith
rooted in the Word
saving knowledge of Christ
seventh heaven
share a verse [of Scripture]
sins of the fathers
snares of the Devil
sorely tempted
soul of humility
soul-stirring message
spiritual high
spiritual state
spoke to my heart
stand before the judgment seat
stars in one’s crown
storms [tempests] of life
straight and narrow
take captive every thought
take it to the Lord
throughout eternity
time immemorial
traveling mercies
trials and tribulations
trophies of grace
trust and obey
unrepentant sinner
unspoken needs
unto eternity
uphold in prayer
urgings of the Spirit
vale of tears
victorious living
walk by faith
walk in the Spirit
walk with God
watch and pray
weeping and moaning
wicked ways
wiles of the Devil
wondrous ways of God
word of prayer
Jesu is a Latinized form of the name Jesus. In English it is occasionally
found in liturgical and literary contexts, especially when they have an especially Latinate character. Otherwise, its use is considered obscure and slightly
affected. The term should be retained, however, when it is part of a Latin or
formal title, as in J. S. Bach’s “Jesu, Joy of Man’s Desiring,” Gabriel Fauré’s
“Pie Jesu,” or St. Bernard’s “Jesu Dulcis Memoria.”
2:58 PM
Page 249
Jewish Religious Terminology | 249
Jewish Holidays and Feasts
Jewish holidays and feasts can be baffling to those not familiar with the
customs. The following brief description of the seven major seasons and holidays of the Jewish calendar should offer some clarification.
Rosh Hashanah (Jewish New Year) falls on the first and second days of the
Hebrew month Tishri (September–October). After ten days of penitence,
Yom Kippur is observed. Together, Rosh Hashanah and Yom Kippur are
termed the High Holy Days.
Yom Kippur (Day of Atonement) is a day of praying for forgiveness for the sins
of the past year and for fasting, observed on the tenth day of Tishri.
Sukkoth (Feast of Tabernacles) is the annual harvest celebration. This eight-day
festival begins on the fifteenth day of Tishri. The day after the end of Sukkoth
is Simhath, which celebrates the completion of the annual reading of the
Torah. Also spelled Sukkot.
Hanukkah (Feast of the Dedication) is an eight-day festival commemorating
the victory of Judas Maccabeus and the rededication of the temple in
Jerusalem. It starts on the twenty-fifth day of Kislev (December) and incorporates the Festival of Lights, in which the eight candles of the menorah are
lit. Sometimes spelled Chunahak or Hanukah.
Purim (Feast of Esther, or Feast of Lots) is a joyous festival commemorating the
deliverance of the Persian Jews from a massacre as recounted in the Book of
Esther. It is celebrated on the fourteenth day of Adar (February–March).
Passover (Pesach) commemorates the exodus of the Jews from Egypt. It is celebrated from the fourteenth to the twenty-second days of Nisan (March–
Shabuoth (Pentecost, or Feast of Weeks) takes place on the sixth and seventh
days of Sivan (May–June) around the world, though only on the sixth in
Israel. It is an agricultural festival during which the story of the grain harvest
in the Book of Ruth is recounted. Secondarily, the festival commemorates
the receiving of the Ten Commandments.
Jewish Religious Terminology
Judaism, along with its later offshoots, Christianity and Islam, is one of
the world’s three great monotheistic faiths. It is particularly important for
Christians to understand the Jewish roots of their own faith, and the following list of Jewish religious terms provides some basic information. Such
a brief list is unavoidably superficial and incomplete, but it offers a few of
the most common terms, along with their recommended spelling, capitalization, and definitions.
2:58 PM
Page 250
250 | Jewish Religious Terminology
bar mitzvah—when a Jewish boy reaches age thirteen, he is considered to be a
morally responsible adult; he is then called a bar mitzvah (Hebrew: “son of the
law”), as is the initiation ceremony that takes place at that time
bas mitzvah—when a Jewish girl reaches age thirteen, she, like a bar mitzvah (see
previous entry) is considered a morally responsible adult; she is called a bas
mitzvah (Hebrew: “daughter of the law”), or sometimes a bat mitzvah, which is
also the name of the initiation ceremony that takes place
B’nai B’rith—the largest international Jewish service organization, founded in 1843
by Henry Jones, committed to training, charity, and education
Hasidism—a Jewish religious movement founded in about 1750, tending toward
mysticism and stressing personal devotion over scholarly interpretation of the
Kabbalah—a mystical method of interpreting the Hebrew Scriptures originating in
the eleventh century and referring to the body of written literature that has
grown up around it. Usually capped; also sometimes spelled Cabala, Cabbala,
Cabballah, and Kabalah. In precise writing, usually used without an article
kipa—(also spelled kippah), a yarmulke, or skullcap
kittel—a white ceremonial robe in which the dead are wrapped; sometimes worn
by worshipers during Yom Kippur; pronounced so that it rhymes with little
menorah—a ceremonial candelabra used in Jewish worship, accommodating seven
or nine candles
mezuzah—a small scroll on which is written the texts of Deuteronomy 6:4–9
(beginning “Hear, O Israel: The LORD our God, the LORD is one”); 11:13–21
(beginning “So if you faithfully obey the commands . . .”); and the name
Shaddai. In Jewish custom, this scroll is attached to the doorframe of a house as
a reminder of one’s faith. The word mezuzah literally means “doorpost”
midrash—stories told, sometimes with elaborations, from the Hebrew Bible; to
teach a lesson in the Law or a moral principle
mitzvah—a commandment in Jewish law; the plural is mitzvoth, though mitzvahs
is also common
Orthodox—refers to Orthodox Judaism; one of the principle movements within
Judaism, teaching that the Law is divinely given and therefore immutable and
without exception
patriarchs—Abraham, Isaac, Jacob; the founders and forefathers of the Jewish faith
phylactery—one of two small, leather, square boxes that contain passages from
Scripture and are worn by Jewish men on the head and forearm during certain
seder—a Jewish ceremonial meal served at the beginning of Passover as a
commemoration of the exodus from Egypt
shofar—the ram’s horn trumpet used on Jewish holidays; the plural of shofar, by
the way, is shofroth
tetragrammaton—the four letters of the Hebrew alphabet that stand for God’s
personal name: YHWH, or JHVH
Yahweh—the name by which God is known (Ex. 3:14); used in place of his proper
name, which is unknowable
yarmulke—(pronounced YAH-muh-kuh) Yiddish term for the skullcap. In the US
the Hebrew term kipa is more often used. To avoid confusion, the English
skullcap is the most convenient fallback
2:58 PM
Page 251
King James Version, Use of Italics in the
See “Quotations from the Bible: Italics in the King James Version.”
King James Version’s Contributions to English
The King James Bible has been more influential than even the works of
Shakespeare in shaping the way English speakers write and speak. Many
common idioms come directly from the pens of the King James translators
(and their heavy borrowings from the Wycliffe and Tyndale Bible translators
before them), but it is surprising how often we forget their source, let alone
remember the specific verse they are from. Here is a short reference guide
for a few of the King James Version’s most common idiomatic contributions
to the English language, though note that the phrases below are the forms the
words have taken in popular usage, not the exact phrasing in the Bible—for
instance, we tend to say, “There’s nothing new under the sun,” while the KJV
states, “There is no new thing under the sun.”
Common Phrases from the King James Version
angels unawares, to entertain
ask and you shall receive
blind leading the blind, the
bread on the waters, to cast
coals of fire upon someone’s head, to heap
cup runneth over, my
dead bury the dead, let the
drop in the bucket, a
eye for an eye, an
eye to eye, to see
fall from grace
fat of the land, the
filthy lucre
fleshpots [of Egypt]
fly in the ointment, a
Heb. 13:2
Matt. 7:7
Matt. 15:14
Eccl. 11:1
Prov. 25:21–22
Ps. 23:5
Matt. 8:21–22
Isa. 40:15
Matt. 5:38 (Ex. 21:24)
Isa. 52:8
Gal. 5:4
Gen. 45:18
1 Tim. 3:8
Ex. 16:3
Eccl. 10:1
2:58 PM
Page 252
252 | King James Version’s Contributions to English
glass darkly, through a
green pastures
hide one’s light under a bushel, to
house divided, a
inner man, the
iron sharpening iron
kill the fatted calf, to
labor of love
lamb among wolves, like a
land of milk and honey, a
law unto oneself, a
let my people go
mighty are fallen, how the
money is the root of all evil, love of
mouths of babes, out of the
multitude of sins
nothing new under the sun
pearls before swine, to cast
powers that be, the
respecter of persons, no
right mind, in one’s
riotous living
root of the matter, the
salt of the earth, the
scales fall from one’s eyes, to have the
skin of one’s teeth, by the
stars in their courses, the
suffer fools gladly, to
sun go down on your wrath, don’t let the
thorn in the flesh, a
threescore and ten (years)
time for every purpose under heaven, a
tooth for a tooth, a
turn the other cheek, to
valley of the shadow of death, the
wages of sin is death
wolf in sheep’s clothing, a
worthy of one’s hire, to be
1 Cor. 13:12
Ps. 23:2
Matt. 5:15
Matt. 12:25
Eph. 3:16
Prov. 27:17
Luke 15:30
1 Thess. 1:3
Luke 10:3
Ex. 3:8
Rom. 2:14
Ex. 5:1
2 Sam. 1:25
1 Tim. 6:10
Ps. 8:2
1 Peter 4:8
Eccl. 1:9
Matt. 7:6
Rom. 13:1
Acts 10:34
Mark 5:15
Luke 15:13
Job 19:28
Matt. 5:13
Acts 9:18
Judg. 12:6
Job 19:20
Judg. 15:20
2 Cor. 11:19
Eph. 4:26
2 Cor. 12:7
Ps. 90:10
Eccl. 3:1
Matt. 5:38 (Ex. 21:24)
Matt. 5:39
Ps. 23:4
Rom. 6:23
Matt. 7:15
Luke 10:7
2:58 PM
Page 253
King James Version Versus Authorized Version | 253
The influence of the King James Version is so pervasive that some phrases
in English are commonly mistaken as coming from that Bible. Here are a few
Phrases Sometimes Mistakenly Thought to Be Biblical
all that glitters is not gold
amazing grace
cleanliness is next to godliness
dark night of the soul
death’s door, at
God helps those who help themselves
Chaucer (quoting a proverb)
hymn by John Newton
John Wesley (quoting a proverb)
book by St. John of the Cross
Book of Common Prayer
Benjamin Franklin, Poor
Richard’s Almanac
Robert Browning, “Pippa Passes"
Laurence Sterne, Sentimental
Book of Common Prayer
on US coinage since 1865, but
inspired by “Star-Spangled
a prayer of St. Francis
Book of Common Prayer
William Blake poem
Shakespeare, Macbeth
Tennyson, “Morte d’Arthur”
God’s in his heaven (all’s right with the world)
God tempers the wind to the shorn lamb
have and to hold, to
in God we trust
instrument of thy peace, make me an
land of the living, in the
little lamb, who made thee?
milk of human kindness, the
more things are wrought by prayer
than this world dreams of
quality of mercy (is not strained), the
sickness and in health, in
snake in the grass, a
tender mercy
worldly goods, all one’s
Shakespeare, Merchant of Venice
Book of Common Prayer
Book of Common Prayer
Book of Common Prayer
King James Version Versus Authorized Version
In the United States, the term King James Version (KJV) is more readily
understood than the term Authorized Version (AV) as the name of the 1611
edition of the Holy Bible commissioned by King James I of England.
Authorized Version is used primarily in the United Kingdom and its
2:58 PM
Page 254
Large Print Books
The average adult reader with no visual impairment, or the reader with
adequate vision correction, is capable of comfortably reading 9-point type
with 2 points of leading, provided that the line lengths are not too long and
the typeface is a standard text face. But nearly every reader will suffer some
level of visual impairment as he or she ages. According to the National
Association for Visually Handicapped (NAVH), more than 26 million
Americans qualify as visually impaired; and as the baby boomers grow older,
that number will increase.
Whether book and software publishers are up to the challenge posed by
aging readers remains a question, though with the advent of book-ondemand printing and customized, downloadable texts, the technologies for
producing large-print editions, sometimes euphemistically called comfort editions, are becoming less expensive.
Standards. Both the NAVH and the American Printing House for the Blind have
established rigorous standards for the large-print book. Sadly, either because
publishers are often ignorant of these standards or because they simply do
not find them economically viable, many so-called large-print books do not
meet these standards.
Often publishers photographically enlarge the pages of a book and deem
it “large print” in a process called “shooting it up,” even though that enlargement may not bring the type up to the large-print standard. Furthermore,
many publishers do not print their own large-print editions but license them
to specialty printers, some of which “shoot up” inexpensive editions that are
not adequate in size or leading.
Most of the guidelines established by advocates for the visually impaired
insist on 16- or 18-point type as the minimum. There is a preference for sansserif types, which tend to blur less when read, although some scientific studies show that the difference between serif and sans serif is minimal. (Some
studies marginally endorse serif typefaces as the more readable for average
2:58 PM
Page 255
Large Print Books | 255
(Times New Roman)
This is an example of a 16-point serif type
This is an example of an 18-point serif type
This is an example of a 16-point sans-serif type
This is an example of an 18-point sansserif type
While the US Government Printing Office and the Library of Congress
have yet to establish a standard for what constitutes a “large-print book,”
the following guidelines, provided by the NAVH, are useful. While not all
of these standards are feasible for every book, they offer a target to shoot
for and a helpful yardstick by which all so-called large-print books can be
NAVH Standards and Criteria for Large Print Publications
1. No edition may exceed an overall size of 8-3/4" x 11-1/4", with a maximum
sheet size of 8-1/2" x 11".
2. The finished book shall not exceed 1-1/4" in thickness, with a maximum
weight of three pounds. (This does not apply to technical or reference
books—that is, a dictionary, atlas, etc.)
3. An off-white or natural vellum or matte offset stock must be used to prevent
4. Gutter margins should not be less than 7/8", with the outside margin
smaller, but not less than 1/2".
5. Type size should not be smaller than 16 point—preferably an 18-point type
should be maintained.
6. When resetting, it is recommended that a sans serif or modified serif be
used. Helvetica, Century, or Garamond are examples of particularly good
typefaces. It is recommended that medium type style be used with bold for
titles, captions, etc. (See #11 for further information.)
7. Letter spacing, word spacing, and leading must be adequate in order to
avoid crowded copy, as white space is of utmost importance to many of the
visually impaired.
8. Density is extremely important, and copy that appears gray will not be
9. The binding shall allow for as much flexibility as possible, with the hope that
a loose spine will be employed in order to allow the book to lie as flat as
possible. It is recommended that all books be side sewn for durability.
10. A vertical line must be used to separate columns.
2:58 PM
Page 256
256 | Large Print Books
11. If photographically enlarged from the original edition, broken letters must
be avoided. Careful scrutiny of selections should be made either by the
editorial department of the respective publisher, or NAVH will offer this
service if small print editions are sent to us prior to the enlarging process.
With easy accessibility of computer type, excellent large print can be
prepared. It is recommended that, for most typefaces, a medium font be
used with a laser printout of at least 400 DPI.
12. Signatures or tear sheets of all books that are to carry the NAVH Seal of
Approval must be sent to NAVH prior to final printing for examination.
(NAVH, 3201 Balboa Street, San Francisco, CA 94121; or NAVH, 22 West
21st Street, New York, NY 10010)
13. The NAVH seal shall appear on jackets (when used), as well as on either the
front cover or on the copyright or credit page of each book. At least four
copies of each completed book shall be given to NAVH.
Additional Standards. In addition to these standards, the following suggestions
ought to be given serious consideration:
1. If a book is re-typeset or conceived of as a large-print book to begin with,
it should be set ragged right to avoid as many words broken over lines as
2. Ideally, the average line of type should contain no more than twelve to
fourteen words. This helps the eye to “track back” to the next line most
3. Numerals should be used for all numbers over ten. Research has shown that
numerals are more easily read and understood than numbers that are
spelled out.
4. Leading (space between lines) is as important as the typeface itself in
readability. Most standards recommend leading at least one and a quarter
to one and a half times the measurement of the type itself. That is, a 15- to
18-point leading for a 12-point type.
Large-Print Bibles. Because of the difficulty in producing truly large-print editions of the Bible, many publishers do not acknowledge the actual type size
of the text in their promotional material, fearing, perhaps, that 10- or 11point type will not sound like “large print” to those with visual impairments.
In any case, the following list is made up largely of those Bibles for which the
publishers do acknowledge the type size.
Holy Bible New Living Translation (2000, Tyndale, 12-point type)
Holy Bible: New Revised Standard Version Anglicized Edition, Containing the Old
and New Testaments with the Apocryphal/Deuterocanonical Books (2000,
Oxford, 12-point type)
KJV Holy Bible, Giant Print Reference Edition (2000, Zondervan, 14-point type)
KJV Giant Print Bible (1991, Nelson, 24-point type)
Life Application Study Bible: New Living Translation (2000, Tyndale, 12-point
Nelson Classic Giant Print Center-Column Reference Bible: KJV (1994, Nelson,
13-1/2–point type)
2:58 PM
Page 257
Limited Edition, Certificate of | 257
New American Standard Giant Print Bible (1998, Foundation Publications, 14point type)
NIV Holy Bible Giant Print Reference Edition (1990, Zondervan, 14-point type)
NIV Large Print Reference Bible (1986, Zondervan, 12-point type)
NIV Thinline Bible, Large Print (1996, Zondervan, 10-point type)
The terms layperson and laypeople have generally replaced the older terms
layman and laymen as non-gender-specific terms. This manual recommends
using the more traditional term laity whenever appropriate, since it refers to
both men and women. Laymen and laywomen are best reserved for those
instances when it is important to specify that a group of laypeople consists
entirely of members of one sex or the other, as in the leadership conference
was attended by two hundred laywomen.
Legal Deposit
The term legal deposit refers to the legally mandated provision of copies
of published books and other material to a national library, such as the
Library of Congress. In the United States every publisher is required, as a
condition of copyright protection, to provide two copies of every copyrightable work to the Copyright Office of the Library of Congress within
three months of publication. This also applies to foreign works that are published in the US by means of either distribution of imported copies or a new
edition printed in the US.
For more details, contact the Copyright Office, Library of Congress, 101
Independence Avenue SE, Washington, DC 20559-6000;
(this website also provides a means of searching copyright registrations from
1978 to the present). Phone: Public Information Office (202) 707-3000;
Forms and Publications Hotline (202) 707-9100.
Legends, Periods with
See “Period, With Captions and Legends.”
Letters of the Alphabet as Words
See “Alphabet: Letters as Words.”
Limited Edition, Certificate of
The certificate of limited edition, which is also called a limit notice, sometimes appears on the copyright page of gift books, deluxe editions, and other
finely printed books to indicate that the print run of the edition is limited to
a specific number of copies. This can often increase the collector value of
2:58 PM
Page 258
258 | Limited Edition, Certificate of
such books. It is usually only done for first printings of the first edition, and
only when the print run is relatively small (less than 1,000). It has been done
for larger print runs, but the labor involved can be prohibitive. The notice
often appears on its own page in the front matter, in which case it is called
a limit page; or the information is included in the colophon at the back of the
The phrasing of the limit notice is not standardized but may take either
of two general forms. First, the notice may specify how many copies were
printed and provide a space or rule for an individual copy number to be written in. It is customary to write the copy number in pencil.
This edition was printed in a limited edition of [NUMBER OF COPIES IN THE
FIRST PRINTING], of which this copy is number [NUMBER OF INDIVIDUAL
Second, a limit notice may simply specify how many copies of the book
were printed. This is more cost-efficient because it saves hours of tedious
hand numbering.
This volume is one of a limited edition of [NUMBER OF COPIES IN THE FIRST
PRINTING] copies.
Extra copies of such editions that do not bear a limited edition number are
referred to as “out of series.”
See “Outlines and Lists.”
LORD and GOD (Small-Cap Forms)
Many English versions of the Bible (KJV, RSV, NIV, and TNIV among
them) use the cap-and-small-cap forms LORD and GOD to translate the
Hebrew Yahweh (YHWH or Jehovah) and the regular lowercase form Lord
and God to translate Adonai and other words denoting the deity. This is a
useful distinction for Bible readers insofar as Yahweh tends to indicate greater
personal intimacy on the part of the speaker than Adonai, which is a more
formal mode of address. The question becomes how strictly to adhere to this
distinction when quoting short passages from one of these versions. The following general guidelines should be adapted to the sensibilities and tastes of
each publishing house:
In academic materials, Bible studies, works of theology, books of sermons,
formal Bible exposition, and any writing that focuses on aspects of the Bible
itself, the small-cap LORD and GOD style should be strictly maintained when
quoting from a Bible version that uses that style.
2:58 PM
Page 259
LORD and GOD (Small-Cap Forms) | 259
In works of a highly popular or informal nature, such as devotionals, popular theology, fiction, biographies, and autobiographies, the small-cap style
may be used at the joint discretion of the author and the editor. It does not,
however, need to be maintained if there seems to be no compelling reason to
adhere to it, since the distinction between LORD and Lord is lost on most
readers and can even lead to confusion. For instance, many people think that
the GOD form is simply used to give the word special emphasis, just as italics or capital letters might do. In such popular works, its presence can be
superfluous. Furthermore, many readers mistakenly feel that the small-cap
form lends the words more, rather than less, formality.
When Genesis 2:15 says, “The LORD God took the man and put him in the
Garden of Eden,” the Hebrew word for “man,” adam, may in fact be a pun
on adamah, which means “ground.” [academic usage]
As an inveterate gardener, he adopted Genesis 2:15 as his favorite Bible verse:
“The Lord God took the man and put him in the Garden of Eden to work it
and take care of it.” [informal, or popular usage]
If the cap-and-small-cap style is used in a work for a popular audience, a
note of explanation should be given on the copyright page:
In the following pages, the forms LORD and GOD, in quotations from the Bible,
represent the Hebrew Yahweh, while Lord and God represent Adonai, in
accordance with the Bible version used.
Such a notice is not needed in academic works for which the readership
is more likely to be familiar with this typographic custom.
2:58 PM
Page 260
While the Gospels nowhere specify how many magi, who were probably
astrologers, came to visit the infant Jesus, three different gifts are mentioned:
gold, incense, and myrrh (Matt. 2:11). Out of that fact has grown the unreliable tradition that the magi themselves were three in number, referred to
as the three wise men or the three kings. The term magi is the plural of the
Latin magus, meaning “magician,” or “sorcerer.”
This manual recommends lowercasing the terms magi, the three wise men,
and the three kings in most references, although they may be capitalized, as
appropriate, in the traditional manner in such seasonal literary works as pageants, poetry, sermons, and Christmas stories.
During the Middle Ages, legends grew around these figures, and they even
acquired names: (1) Melchior, king of Arabia, who brought gold; (2) Caspar,
king of Tarsus, who brought frankincense; and (3) Balthazar, king of Ethiopia
(depicted as having dark skin), brought myrrh.
Manuscript Preparation: Author Guidelines
Preparing the Manuscript. A book manuscript prepared for a publisher should
be printed on one side only of standard 8-1/2-by-11-inch white paper, doublespaced, with approximately one-inch margins on all sides. Zondervan editors
recommend, when possible, that authors use Times New Roman type in a
font size of 12 points (what was called “pica” back in the days of the typewriter), a standard that results in approximately 350 words per page and
facilitates the estimation of the total pages of the finished book. Colored
printer papers, thin papers (such as onion skin), and erasable-bond papers are
unacceptable. No staples, binders, or paper clips should be attached to any
portion of the manuscript.
The page layout of the electronic version of a manuscript should conform
to the same general standards as the paper version outlined in the previous
paragraph. Many publishers prefer to receive the author’s manuscripts in an
electronic form (submitted on a disk or sent online) with or without an
accompanying printout. If the contract does not specify a preferred form or
format, a call to the editor is in order.
2:58 PM
Page 261
Manuscript Preparation: Author Guidelines | 261
Electronic-only submissions are becoming more common, but formatting
inconsistencies can be a problem. In the electronic version, the data should
be as free of formatting as possible to allow the publisher to convert the data
most easily. Authors should resist the temptation to design and format the
manuscript to appear like a printed book. The plainer the better. For details,
see Formatting Conventions below.
Many publishers require that both a paper copy (“hard copy”) and an
electronic copy be submitted. This is done for several reasons. While the electronic version is used for producing the book itself (by “capturing the keystrokes,” as compositors say), the paper copy is used to make sure that no
data has been corrupted or lost in the conversion of data from the author’s
computer to the publisher’s. Sometimes, paragraph breaks, subhead levels,
indents, nonroman characters, accents and diacritical marks, italics and other
font changes, extracts, footnotes, and other formatting can be lost in the conversion process.
Authors sometimes wonder why the publisher can’t simply print out their
own paper copy from the submitted disk. The reason is that such a copy
would only reproduce any mistakes that might have slipped into the publisher’s possibly corrupted version. Clearly, in the not-too-distant future, technology will obviate the need for a hard-copy printout, but at this time they
are still a valuable reference.
File System. For ease of conversion, the author’s electronic manuscript should
be prepared on a file system compatible, if possible, with the publisher’s.
Compatibility will vary from publisher to publisher, so the author should
request an individual publisher’s guidelines. Zondervan recommends
Macintosh, DOS, or Windows-compatible systems. Saving files in a Rich
Text format is required because other formats, such as Text (.txt) or ASCII,
eliminate italic and bold characters as well as some formatting when converted to other systems.
One of the most efficient ways for an author to check the compatibility
of the publisher’s computer system is by using a sample disk. This disk should
include at least one text file that contains all the book’s elements (title page,
part title page, chapter opening page, typical text page, subheads, etc.). This
sample should be accompanied by a paper printout so that the compositor
or editor can check to make sure that all the elements converted correctly.
Backup disks. The author should keep backup copies of any files sent to a publisher. Ideally, a copy should be kept on the author’s computer hard drive as
well as on a removable medium, CDR-W or other storage disk, such as a
Zip disk.
2:58 PM
Page 262
262 | Manuscript Preparation: Author Guidelines
Single or Multiple Files. Most books can be efficiently converted and edited
when included in a single file. If the author’s computer does not have the
memory to conveniently allow an entire book to be placed on a single file,
then the individual chapters of the book, or the other subdivisions, may be
relegated to their own files. If the book is split into multiple files, however,
a clear file-labeling system should be established. For convenience, a filelabeling convention should identify: (1) the abbreviated title, (2) the correct
order of the files, and (3) the chapter or part of the book included in that
file. We recommend the following labeling convention: TI00fm (in which TI
= title; 00 = file number 00; fm = front matter). Although most systems now
accept file names of more than eight characters, this labeling convention is
still used as a way of standardizing file names and to encourage both brevity
and clarity. Thus, a complete book might look like this:
(title/file number 00/front matter)
(title/file number 01/chapter one)
(title/file number 02/chapter two)
(title/file number 03/chapter three)
(title/file number 04/chapter four)
(title/file number 05/chapter five)
(title/file number 06/chapter six)
(title/file number 07/chapter seven)
(title/file number 08/epilogue)
(title/file number 09/rear matter, such as an afterword or endnotes)
(title/file number 10/index)
Formatting Conventions. As stated before, less formatting is better. The following tips should help:
1. Use the computer’s basic word-processing software rather than any
desktop-publishing software that might be available. The desktop formatting will only have to be stripped out later by the publisher and
could contribute to errors when being converted between systems.
2. If possible, use 12-point Times New Roman as the default typeface.
3. Double space everything—all text, notes, bibliographies, captions, etc.
4. Paginate the manuscript consecutively from beginning to end, which
for multiple files may require manually setting a new page number at
the beginning of each file.
5. Use the word-wrap feature on the computer; that is, only place a return
at the end of a paragraph and after a title or heading.
6. Use the computer’s automatic indent function (“indent first line of paragraph” feature), if available, rather than inserting a tab or multiple
spaces at the beginning of each paragraph.
2:58 PM
Page 263
Manuscript Preparation: Author Guidelines | 263
7. Do not hyphenate words at the end of a line. Use hyphens only for
compound words.
8. Use only one space between sentences or after a colon—not two.
9. Use three pound signs ( # # # ) to indicate any needed line or section
breaks in the text. Though that symbol is likely to change in typesetting, it is the conventional symbol for text breaks in manuscripts.
10. Although other formatting is discouraged, it is best to use the computer’s built-in functions for indicating underlined, italicized, and boldfaced text as well as superscripts and subscripts. Assuming that the
files are saved in Rich Text format, these elements will not be lost.
11. Type all heads in cap-lowercase. Do not use all caps or boldface type
for headings. To differentiate between various levels of headings within
the text, either center the A-heads and flush-left the B-heads, or, if there
are more than two levels of headings, use braces or parentheses to indicate the level before the heading: {A}, {B}, {C}, etc. If there is more complexity to the hierarchy of subheads than that, it may be best to
indicate the levels on a paper printout of the manuscript, using the letters A, B, C, and so on. In any case, a consistent method of distinguishing various levels of subheadings should be used. Since the goal
is to make the levels of subheads clear during the conversion of manuscripts from the author’s to the publisher’s software, it is preferred
that the author not use pre-programmed formatting styles, since these
can be lost in the conversion process.
12. Footnotes and endnotes should be marked by consecutive reference
numbers in the text. Start over again with 1 at the beginning of each
chapter if your software allows that. The text of endnotes (notes that
appear at the end of the chapters or end of the book) should appear
together in an attached notes file linked to the text document. Consult
your editor if you are unsure about using footnotes versus endnotes.
13. Put complex tables, charts, and graphs in a separate file, especially if
they require any formatting other than standard text. Indicate where
each table goes within the text by a consecutive reference such as
14. Use the tab key rather than the spacebar to align tabular material.
15. If your book has artwork, indicate its placement in the text with a consecutive reference such as “FIG1 HERE.” If artwork is stored on a disk,
clearly label the disk with the software and hardware used to create the
artwork. Important: Do not embed artwork into word-processing files.
Put all captions in a separate file and number them so that they can easily be paired with the artwork with which they belong. Zondervan
prefers Adobe Illustrator, EPS, or TIFF files.
2:58 PM
Page 264
264 | Manuscript Preparation: Author Guidelines
16. Never type an l (el) when a 1 (one) is intended, or vice versa. By the
same token, do not interchange 0 (zero) and O (oh).
Preparing Artwork. When the book includes artwork (or any graphic matter
reproduced from another source), a clean photocopy of the original should
accompany the paper manuscript, and its correct location should be noted
in the pages. The author should keep the original on hand until such time as
the publisher needs it for scanning (creating a digital file of the image), usually when the first set of proofs are run. In the electronic version of the manuscript, the artwork, if it is already digitized, should be segregated in a
separate graphics file and not embedded in the word-processing document
along with the written text. Inclusion of graphics files in a word-processing
document will increase the likelihood of an inaccurate conversion of the data.
Preparing Tables and Charts. Simple tabular material such as charts and graphs
may be inserted directly into the text, whether in the paper or electronic version. If the material is complex or involves nontype elements (such as line
art, curved figures, or three-dimensional graph formatting), then it should
be placed in a separate file to be inserted later (see previous paragraph on
“Preparing Artwork”). If you can easily type the table, graph, or chart using
the basic keys on the keyboard (letters, numbers, tabs, symbols), they should
be included in the text. Anything more complex than that should be considered art and will need to be freshly created by the compositor, digitally
scanned, or submitted in a separate graphics file.
Making Copies. Some publishers, Zondervan among them, require the author to
provide two hard (paper) copies of the manuscript, one for editing and the
other for review, cost estimate, and design. Other publishers request only one
copy clean enough for photocopying; that is, it should be in dark type, with no
cut-and-pasted material that might jam a copy machine and with all handwritten additions in black ink (not in pencil or blue ink). In all cases, the author
should retain additional copies of both the printout and the electronic file.
Numbering Pages. Pages in both electronic and paper copies should be numbered consecutively throughout the book rather than beginning each chapter with page 1. Numbering may begin with either the body of the book or
the front matter. If an author’s computer does not allow for the consecutive
numbering of all the pages throughout an entire manuscript, the pages should
be numbered by hand in the upper right-hand corners of the hard copy. Such
page numbers are conventionally circled to distinguish them from other numbers that might appear on the page.
Handling Notes. All notes, whether intended as footnotes, chapter endnotes,
or book endnotes, should be grouped together in a separate section, preferably at the end of the manuscript. In most cases, the annotation feature of
2:58 PM
Page 265
Manuscript Preparation: Author Guidelines | 265
the major word-processing systems can easily be converted between the
author and publisher.
General Matters of Style. The author is responsible for providing a clear and
readable manuscript, communicating to the editor all matters of preference
(especially when they conflict with the publisher’s style) and distinctive features that may require the editor’s special attention. General responsibilities
for obtaining permission to quote from published sources, the accuracy of
quoted material, complete and detailed references, and other such matters
are delineated in this manual (see “Bible Permissions, Guidlines for
Obtaining”). Before submitting a manuscript, however, the author should be
familiar with any additional requirements specified by the publisher.
Quoting from the Bible. The author is responsible for checking the accuracy of all
Bible references and the wording of quotations from the Bible before submitting
the manuscript to the publisher. The author should also state the predominant
Bible version used and indicate in the manuscript whenever a deviation occurs.
When no translation is preferred, this manual recommends the New International Version as an accurate and accessible modern translation.
Quoting from Other Sources. The author is responsible for checking the accuracy of all quotations taken from other sources. The quotations should be
reproduced exactly as they appear in the original source, with no style
changes to make it conform with either the author’s or the publisher’s style.
The primary exception to this rule is when antiquated spellings might confuse the reader. In those cases, the modern spelling may be substituted.
In the course of writing and researching, authors should be careful to note
the sources for the borrowed material to save having to retrace their steps
later. This is especially important if the quote will require a written permission (see “Permissions, Obtaining: Author Guidelines”).
Using Greek and Hebrew. Since religious books often contain words and quotations from Greek and Hebrew, whose characters are not found on all word
processors, the author is responsible for clearly hand-rendering such characters and any accompanying diacritical marks in their correct positions.
Furthermore, since some photocopy machines may blur small handwritten
characters, the author should send the hand-rendered original to the publisher
and keep the copy. In many cases, transliteration may be preferable. For a list,
see “Greek and Hebrew Transliterations.”
Avoiding Gender Bias. Authors should strive to eliminate gender bias in their
language. Such bias is often unintentional, and much of it rests on the use of
anachronistic forms, obsolete terms, stereotyped gender assumptions, and
unnecessary labeling. For guidelines and examples, see “Gender-Accurate
2:58 PM
Page 266
266 | Manuscript Preparation: Author Guidelines
Mass (Roman Catholic)
Mass is the liturgical ceremony in the Roman Catholic Church during
which the Eucharist is celebrated. There are some fine points to the usage of
the word that should be observed. High Mass contains singing and is, therefore, referred to as being sung not said. By contrast, Low Mass, which contains no singing, is said not sung. Both can be referred to as being celebrated
or offered, but it is considered substandard to say that any Mass “took
place” or “was held.”
The terms Mass, High Mass, and Low Mass are usually capitalized, but
they may be lowercased if the context warrants it.
Though often spelled with a hyphen, megachurch is most commonly
spelled as one word, closed. This neologism can be defined as a large, rapidly growing fellowship of Christian believers, though in some contexts it
has pejorative overtones.
Mid-Atlantic Style
Imposing an international standard of English for both the United States
and the United Kingdom is idealistic in the extreme. But there are times when
it is simply more economical to produce a single version of a book instead
of two. The editors of The Christian Writer’s Manual of Style suggest the following guidelines for what we somewhat jocularly call a mid-Atlantic style,
which blends aspects of British and American style, if not seamlessly, at least
coherently, to achieve a look that will minimize discomfort for readers of
both nationalities and for other English-speaking readers around the world.
Mid-Atlantic style, which is also referred to as “world English style,”
should not be confused with “International English,” which is a somewhat
stripped down form of basic English, intended for foreign speakers who wish
to be as widely understood in all parts of the English-speaking world as possible. International English teaches a broadly understood, basic vocabulary
and allows for little regionalism or stylistic flair in either speaking or writing.
It Begins with the Author. By nature, writers universalize their experiences,
and the best writers do so across cultures, even when translated into another
language. In some cases, more regionally focused authors actually have
better luck being understood in foreign translation than in another Englishspeaking country because a good translator works hard to find dynamic
equivalents for all words and phrases that are unfamiliar to the foreign culture, whereas the same word or phrase can mean different things in various
English-speaking countries.
2:58 PM
Page 267
Mid-Atlantic Style | 267
When a book is likely to be sold in more than one English-speaking country, an author should be aware of the extent to which his or her own vocabulary, regional dialect, local references, and topical allusions might not be
understood. Of course, this also applies to translations into other languages.
The more a book is expected to be read abroad, the more the author needs
to write for an international readership.
Allusions to television shows, for instance, should either be avoided or
carefully explained since such shows differ from country to country and are
often short-lived. Often celebrities, companies and corporations, stores,
restaurants, and magazines in one country are unknown in another; and
some anecdotes and written illustrations can be limited by their geography.
For instance, while most Americans would recognize Stonehenge and
Westminster Abbey, most of them would not understand the associations a
British reader would have for Iona or Blackpool. By the same token, British
readers who would readily understand references to the Grand Canyon and
the White House might not be familiar with the Twin Cities or the Bible Belt.
Writers of nonfiction may well find a mid-Atlantic style more congenial
than would novelists or poets, who often draw on dialect and regional vocabularies to give their writing color. Understandably, not all writers wish to
have mid-Atlantic style thrust upon them. Fortunately for novelists and poets,
most readers who pick up a novel or book of poems expect to be transported
to another place in their imaginations and adapt easily to regional specificity.
So in a sense they may actually be best left in the style of the country in which
their book was written and published.
Asking any writer to be sensitive to international issues, however, is really
no more burdensome than asking him or her to be sensitive to gender, ethnic, and racial issues in their writing. The obvious disadvantages of writing
for a broader English market are usually outweighed by the increased potential for international sales.
It should be the publisher’s responsibility to inform an author whenever
a book is likely to be distributed in more than one English-speaking country
or translated into another language. The following guidelines for a midAtlantic style may help.
Vocabulary. Even assuming an author writes for an international readership,
specific vocabulary will still pose problems. Many common objects have different names in the British Isles and the United States, and many individual
words have different meanings in those countries. Aside from making an
effort to avoid the more obscure terms whenever possible, these differences
should not be avoided altogether because they give the writing spontaneity
and flair.
2:58 PM
Page 268
268 | Mid-Atlantic Style
Therefore, this manual recommends that a book printed in mid-Atlantic
English should adhere to the author’s own vocabulary wherever possible.
Often, more damage is done to the sense of a passage by trying to rewrite
around a difficult word than by simply leaving it as it is. In rare cases, a particularly arcane word may be queried by the editor, but by and large, the
author’s word choice should be honored. While some readers stumble on an
odd word or two, most readers quickly learn to interpret the meanings of
unfamiliar words in their contexts.
In using this style, editors, copy editors, and proofreaders should not yield
to the temptation to supply dynamic equivalents (elevator for lift, or diaper
for nappy). They should respect the intelligence of readers who, in most
cases, will understand a passage in spite of an unfamiliar word or two.
Phrasing, Syntax, Cadence, and Voice. Editors and proofreaders need to be sensitive not only to the author’s word choice but to his or her national and personal style as well. Too often editors have an “ideal standard” of English
style in their heads, whether British or American, and editing becomes a matter of conforming writers to that style. This is misguided and results in bland
writing. Ultimately, if such editors were given enough leeway, their authors’
voices would be indistinguishable from each other.
Good editing should allow authors to sound more like themselves—that
is, different than anyone else. This allows writers freedom in the way they
phrase sentences, order their words, establish a rhythm to their speech, and
choose words. Unless an editor is certain that a specific usage is simply wrong
in both British and American style and that both kinds of readers are likely
to be confused, then that editor should not make the change. This is a good
principle for all editing, not just for mid-Atlantic English.
Spelling. Like vocabulary and phrasing, an author’s national spelling should be
retained. Very few spelling differences between British and American cause
problems for readers of mid-Atlantic English; the British centre is clearly
understood to be center by Americans, just as the American inflection is
understood to be inflexion by readers in the UK. Most readers quickly learn
to “read over” such alternate spellings without much distraction.
Quotation Marks. The British generally use single quotation marks where
Americans use double quotation marks, although some British publishers are
now adopting the double quotation mark as their standard. Ultimately,
English readers worldwide have no difficulty reading either system, and both
are workable.
While the American style actually takes up slightly more space than the
British style, this manual recommends US double quotation-mark style as
more useful for a mid-Atlantic style, for the following reasons:
2:58 PM
Page 269
Mid-Atlantic Style | 269
First, worldwide, more books are actually published in double-quotation
style than in the single. Second, double quotation marks in some form or other
are the norm for most other European nations as well as for countries around
the world that have adopted those European languages. The French, Italians,
and Spanish use the guillemets, which look like double angled quotation
marks ( « » ). The Germans use double quotation marks (which curve the
opposite direction than American marks), and the open quotation mark is set
on the baseline ( „ “ ). While these systems are somewhat different than the
American style, they are still closer to the American system than the singlequotation style. Finally, Scandinavians use a double-quotation system much
like the American system. Most English readers in non-English-speaking countries find the American system closer to their own.
Punctuation with Quotation Marks. The use of punctuation with quotation
marks differs in the US and the UK. This manual recommends that the British
style of punctuation be used, especially when the readership is likely to be
predominantly or at least half British. The British style has a certain inherent logic that makes it effective and easy to remember. If the readership is
certainly going to be predominantly American, then the American style could
be used. Ultimately, the two systems only differ in a couple instances, so this
should not be a major change. See “British Style.”
Dashes. We recommend using the British spaced en dash instead of the long em
dash. This is less obtrusive, breaks more easily over lines, and is more pleasing to the eye (in our opinion). Many typographers have argued that the em
dash draws too much attention to itself and creates a spotting effect on the
page. So use the en dash with a word space on either side of it.
Numbering. Because of the enormous difference in vocabulary between British
English and American English when it comes to large numbers, we recommend using numerals for all numbers above one hundred, including large
round numbers. That means, for instance, saying 3,000,000 rather than 3
million, since the latter term actually means quite a different number in the
UK. If the numbers are simply too large to reproduce in all numerals, then a
general note that clearly states which style is being used should be provided.
Dates. For books styled in mid-Atlantic English, this manual recommends the
British style of spelling out dates (day/month/year, without commas) as the
most universally understood worldwide: 28 August 2003.
Abbreviations. Mid-Atlantic style should use the British system of abbreviation,
that is, avoiding periods wherever possible, especially when the missing letters are from the interior of a word and not the end (Dr, Ltd, Mr, Mrs, and
so on).
2:58 PM
Page 270
270 | Mid-Atlantic Style
Footnoting. Either the UK or the US style of footnoting can be employed; that
is, beginning with 1 on every new page (UK) or beginning with 1 only at the
beginning of every new chapter (US). Neither is more accessible to most readers than the other, so the style of origin should be retained. Using the author’s
style will also minimize for editors the busywork of converting styles.
Summary. Despite the long explanation above, mid-Atlantic style is basically
simple for authors, editors, and proofreaders to grasp, especially those familiar with the main features of both British and American styles. In short, after
asking the author to write or revise with an international English readership
in mind, the publisher should:
1. Use the author’s own style in matters of vocabulary, spelling, phrasing,
syntax, footnoting, etc.; query the author when important references seem
wholly opaque.
2. Use American style quotation marks.
3. Use British style in matters of dashes (spaced en dashes), punctuation, dates,
and abbreviations.
4. Use numerals for all numbers over 100, even large rounded ones.
Misspelled Personal Names, Commonly
Some personal names, many of them common to religious books, especially those that use accents, can cause problems. Note the spellings, alphabetical order, accents, and particles of the following:
Ælfric—note the cap ligature (ash); Aelfric also acceptable
Andersen, Arthur—accounting firm; note -en
Andersen, Hans Christian—note -en
Andrewes, Lancelot—note -es
Bartók, Béla—note accents
Bashom, Matsuo—note accent; if accent not available, set simply o
Becket, Thomas à—note grave accent; alphabetized under “Becket” (unlike
Thomas à Kempis, who is alphabetized under “Thomas”; see below)
Beckett, Samuel—note tt
Berkouwer, Gerrit
Bonhoeffer, Dietrich
Brontë, Charlotte and Emily—note umlaut
Buechner, Frederick
Bustanoby, André—note acute accent
Chardin, Pierre Teilhard de—alphabetized under “Chardin”
Crouch, Andraé—note acute accent
Cummings, E. E.—caps; the poet himself signed it that way, and the E. E.
Cummings Society recommends adhering to that usage
de Gasztold, Carmen Bernos—alphabetize under “de Gasztold”
de Gaulle, Charles—alphabetize under “de Gaulle”
de Hueck, Catherine—alphabetize under “de Hueck”
2:58 PM
Page 271
Misspelled Personal Names, Commonly | 271
Dostoyevsky, Fyodor—among the variant spellings, this one is preferred by
Webster’s Eleventh and Webster’s Biographical
Eliot, John—Bible translator; note l and t
Eliot, T. S.—poet; note l and t
Elliot, Elisabeth—Christian author; note ll and t
Elliott, Ramblin’ Jack—folksinger; note ll and tt
Fénelon, François—note acute accent and cedilla
FitzGerald, Edward—English poet (Rubaiyat of Omar Khayyam); note cap G
Foxe, John—martyrologist; note -e, though some old editions spell it Fox
Gilliland, Glaphré—note acute accent
Gogh, Vincent van—note lowercase v; alphabetized under “Gogh”
Guyon, Madame (Mme.)
Hammarskjöld, Dag—note umlaut
Héloïse—(of Abelard and Héloïse) note acute accent and umlauted ï; the H, by
the way, is silent when pronounced
Jabba the Hutt—of Stars Wars’ fame; note tt
Kierkegaard, Søren—note Danish ø
Küng, Hans—note umlaut
LaHaye, Tim and Beverly—note internal cap H
Li’l Abner—cartoon character; note position of apostrophe
MacDonald, George—Scottish writer; curiously, Webster’s Eleventh and
Webster’s Biographical insist on lowercase d, but the author himself signed
his name with a cap D (per Wade Center, Wheaton College, Wheaton,
March, Fredric—no final k
Milosz, Czeslaw—pronounced MEE-wosh, CHESS-lauv
M’Intyre, David M.—M’ is a contraction of Mac. In England the form used to
be rendered with an apostrophe (M‘ ) but no longer. This Christian writer’s
name is traditionally given in the contracted form.
Mother Teresa—not Mother Theresa
Müller, George—note umlaut; the spelling Mueller is also common and
Niebuhr, Reinhold
Schaeffer, Francis
Selassie, Haile
Ten Boom—with first name, “ten” is lowercased (Corrie ten Boom). As a family
name it is capped (the Ten Boom family)
Teresa of Ávila—note acute accent over the capital
Thomas à Kempis—note grave accent; alphabetize under “Thomas” (unlike
Thomas à Becket, who is alphabetized under “Becket”; see above)
Tolkien, J. R. R.—this is often mistakenly rendered Tolkein; and note space
between initials
Truman, Harry S.—US president; although S was his full middle name, not an
abbreviation, Truman himself put a period after it
Vergil—Roman poet; preferred to Virgil
Wesley, Susannah—note spelling of first name
Wycliffe, John—several spellings are common; this is preferred
2:58 PM
Page 272
272 | Misspelled Words, A List of Commonly
Misspelled Words, A List of Commonly
In the following list, an asterisk (*) indicates those words that are common in religious works. The underscores show the common problem spots;
that is, those letters that are often mistakenly dropped or replaced with other
all right
Colosseum, but coliseum
exalt (lift up)
exult (rejoice)
hangar (for airplanes)
judgment (no e)*
Noxzema (skin cream)
2:58 PM
Page 273
Muslim | 273
prophecy (n.)*
prophesy (v.)*
publicly (not -ally)
restaurateur (no n)
Mount Zion
See Zion.
The preferred form of the name of the founder of Islam is Muhammad,
not Mohammed or Mahomet. See “Islamic Religious Terminology.”
The term Muslim, which is preferred to the outdated Moslem and the even
more outdated Mohammedan and Mussulman, is both a noun, when referring to an individual adherent to the faith, and an adjective. When referring
to the religion as a whole, use the noun and adjective forms Islam and
Islamic. See “Islamic Religious Terminology.”
2:58 PM
Page 274
New International Version: Bible Style
See “Bible Style: The New International.”
Types of Notes. Textual annotations are of two general types: narrative notes
and source notes.
Narrative notes, sometimes called substantive notes, are used for any comments that could not be appropriately incorporated into the text itself. They
can define words or points, comment or expand on the text, provide explanations, refer the reader to other parts of the text, or provide information
peripheral to the text.
1. Such was Jeremy Taylor’s reputation that he was later referred to as the
“Shakespeare of divines.”
2. Euphuistic is used here to refer specifically to the ornate style of Elizabethan
Source notes, also called bibliographic notes, inform the reader of the
sources of quotations and other borrowed information; they can also refer
the reader to works that might be of related interest. The term source note
is now preferred to bibliographic note since sources can be of many types
other than books.
A. C. Cawley, ed., Everyman and Medieval Miracle Plays (New York: Dutton,
1959), 79–108.
4See also Leland Ryken, Triumphs of the Imagination (Downers Grove, Ill.:
InterVarsity Press, 1979), and Walter Kaufmann, ed., Religion from Tolstoy to
Camus (New York: Harper & Row, 1961).
Of course, narrative notes and source notes, it should be noted, are not
mutually exclusive, for a single note can serve both purposes.
In many of his books Martin E. Marty attempts to get an overview of these
tensions in the modern church. Perhaps the most representative of his works
to date is Martin E. Marty, Modern American Religion (Chicago: Univ. of
Chicago Press, 1986).
In Popular and Academic Books. Authors of popular books are encouraged to
keep the number of narrative notes to a minimum, since annotations intrude
upon the reader’s attention and detract from its popular tone. In scholarly
2:58 PM
Page 275
Notes | 275
works narrative notes are often essential to clarify important and complex
information, although when possible, the author should still try to keep the
number of notes to a minimum. Source notes, of course, are commonly used
in both kinds of books whenever quotations or other information has been
borrowed from another source, although the presentation of such notes can
differ greatly in each kind of book.
Citing in Text. A note is usually cited by a superscript number in the text next
to the sentence or word to which the note refers. Where possible, the superscript number should be placed at the end of a sentence so as not to disrupt
the reader’s attention. While reference numbers in the text are always set in
superscript numerals, the corresponding numerals attached to the note may
be set in either superscript with no period or in regular type followed by a
period. (Examples of both kinds are found in this section.) Symbol reference
marks may be preferred to numerals in some cases (see Symbol Reference
Marks below).
Footnotes, Chapter Endnotes, and Book Endnotes. Notes commonly appear in
one of three places:
1. as footnotes at the bottom of the text pages
2. listed as chapter endnotes at the back of each chapter
3. as book endnotes at the back of the book
The Superscript Number. Whether the notes appear as footnotes, chapter endnotes, or book endnotes, superscript citations in the text should begin over
again at 1 in every new chapter (or every page in British style). Superscript
numbers should follow all punctuation marks except a dash and should be
placed at the end of a sentence or a clause whenever possible. They should
be placed at the end of a block quotation, not with the statement that introduces the block quotation. They should never be italicized. The use of symbols instead of numerals should be reserved for bottom-of-text-page
footnoting only.
Superscript citation numerals should not be used in a line of display type
or after a subheading. If a note applies to an entire chapter, it should be
unnumbered and appear on the first page of the chapter as a footnote,
whether or not the rest of the book is annotated in a footnote style.
Headings for Book Endnotes. In the endnotes section in the back matter of a
book, the number and title of each chapter should appear as a heading for
notes from that chapter so that those notes will be easier to locate.
2:58 PM
Page 276
276 | Notes
The Hidden Endnote Style for Nonacademic Books. A relatively recent form
of endnote, used almost exclusively for source notes, has become popular in
the past decade. It is commonly referred to as the hidden endnote style and
is used particularly in those books in which it is desirable to avoid the academic look of superscript footnote callouts. Hidden endnotes are arranged
at the back of the book like ordinary endnotes, but instead of being referenced to superscript numbers in the text, the note itself is headed by the page
number and the first word or words of the sentence or phrase to which it
refers. Thus, no superscript numbers are given in the text at all. Like an index
entry, the hidden endnote makes its own reference by using the page number and an associated word or words. Also like an index, this style of endnoting has to be done at the end of the production process when the pages
have all been correctly set and flowed. Any change in pagination, obviously,
would cause the page references of the hidden endnotes to shift.
Here are some examples of hidden endnote style:
[page] 33. “This child is destined . . .” Luke 2:34.
37. “O here and now”: W. H. Auden, The Collected Poetry. New York: Penguin
Books, 1971, 443–44.
136n. Muggeridge. Malcolm Muggeridge, “Books,” in Esquire (April 1972), 39.
[The n indicates that the name is referenced in a footnote on that page.]
Footnoting Often Discouraged. Although some academic writers view footnotes as more scholarly than endnotes, many publishers are now discouraging the use of footnotes altogether for two reasons: (1) footnotes often
unnecessarily distract the reader from the main argument of the book, and
(2) the small type and narrow leading are often unattractive. Endnotes, it
may be argued, are more of a distraction in that they force the reader to turn
to the back of the book each time a superscript citation appears. But ideally,
endnotes should be less distracting, for the reader can simply look up those
notes that are of special interest.
Footnotes and Endnotes Together. In some cases, footnotes and endnotes might
both be used in the same book. If the narrative notes are so closely related
to the text that it is not appropriate to set them as endnotes, they should be
set as footnotes. In such cases, the footnotes should be cited in the text by
symbol reference marks (*, †, ‡, and so on). The endnotes are cited by superscript citation numbers. In books with few narrative footnotes, symbol reference marks should be used instead of superscript numbers.
Symbol Reference Marks. Symbol reference marks are used in the following
sequence only if more than one note appears on a particular page. Otherwise
the sequence begins with the asterisk on each new page.
2:58 PM
Page 277
Notes | 277
* asterisk or star
† dagger
‡ double dagger
§ section mark
¶ paragraph mark
then the same marks doubled: **, ††, ‡‡, §§, ¶¶
Titles and Degrees of Authors. Titles and degrees are usually not given with
author’s names in source notes and should be included in narrative notes
only if that information is pertinent.
Referencing Books. The following information should normally be included,
as appropriate, in a source note that cites a book as the source:
Full name of author(s) or editor(s)
Title and subtitle of book
Full name of editor(s) or translator(s), if any
Name of series, and volume and number in the series
Edition, if other than the first
Number of volumes
Facts of publication: city (and state if city is not well known), publisher, and
year of publication (all in parentheses)
Volume number
Page number(s) of the citation
6. Winthrop S. Hudson, Religion in America, 2d ed. (New York: Charles
Scribner’s Sons, 1973), 154.
7. John Calvin, Institutes of the Christian Religion, ed. John T. McNeill, 2 vols.
(Philadelphia: Westminster, 1960), 2:1016.
8. Ruth A. Tucker and Walter Liefeld, Daughters of the Church (Grand Rapids,
Mich.: Zondervan, 1987), 100–102.
Including State Names in Sources. For well-known cities, state names need not
be used in notes or bibliographies. When in doubt, use the state name with
Using the Shortened Form of the Publisher’s Name. Delete such words as
Publisher, Inc., Co., Press, and Books. The words Press and Books should
be retained, however, when a publisher’s name might be confused with its
parent organization or another institution; for instance, the university presses
or such publishers as Moody Press or InterVarsity Press. Also, it is best to use
the longer form for university presses, although the article the should be
dropped and the word University may be shortened to Univ. Thus, the
University of Chicago Press could be rendered Univ. of Chicago Press.
References to Classical and Scholarly Works. References to classical and some
scholarly works appearing in many editions may be designated by division
numbers rather than page numbers. This enables citations to be located
regardless of the particular edition an author uses. Different levels of division
2:58 PM
Page 278
278 | Notes
(such as book, section, paragraph, line) are indicated by numerals separated
by periods. Commas, en dashes, and semicolons are used for multiple references just as they are in citing page numbers. The numerals are usually arabic. Using division numbers eliminates the need for volume and page
numbers, but notes may contain both forms of notation if desired.
Saint Augustine, Confessions 9.23–31. [book 9, sections 23 through 31]
Eusebius, The History of the Church 1.2.15, 18. [book 1, section 2, paragraphs
15 and 18]
11William Langland, Piers Plowman 5.136–89; 15.1–49. [canto 5, lines 136
through 189; and canto 15, lines 1 through 49]
12John Calvin, Institutes of the Christian Religion, ed. John T. McNeill, 2.1.5.
[book 2, chapter 1, paragraph 5]
13The Didache, 2.9.1 [part 2, section 9, line 1]
Referencing Periodicals. The following information should normally be
included in giving an article from a periodical as the source:
Full name of author(s)
Name of periodical
Volume and issue numbers
Date (in parentheses)
Page number(s)
Note that not all this information is available for every periodical. Popular
newspapers and magazines often do not carry volume and issue numbers,
and many articles do not carry a by-line. In such cases, as much of the above
information as possible should be provided. Some manuals, like The Chicago
Manual of Style, recommend that the date information of popular magazines
be separated with commas rather than parentheses. That style is perfectly
acceptable as long as it is consistently applied throughout a work. But since
the line between scholarly journals and popular ones is sometimes thin, and
since many works contain a mix of both kinds of references, we recommend
staying with parentheses in all cases. Note also that a colon precedes page
number(s) if volume and/or issue numbers are given; otherwise a comma is
14. James Johnson, “Charles G. Finney and a Theology of Revivalism,” Church
History 38 (September 1969): 357.
15. John H. Timmerman, “The Ugly in Art,” Christian Scholar’s Review 7, no. 2–3
(1977): 139.
16. Tom Carson, “Baring the Celtic Soul of U2,” Los Angeles Times Book Review
(March 27, 1988), 15.
17. “Bruce Cockburn: Singer in a Dangerous Time,” Sojourners 17, no. 1
(January 1988): 28–35.
2:58 PM
Page 279
Notes | 279
Referencing Websites. Many different styles of referencing websites have been
offered by various organizations and style manuals. This manual recommends a style modified from that proposed by the Modern Language
Association, which is also compatible with the general principles laid out in
The Chicago Manual of Style. We recommend the style outlined below for a
number of reasons, not the least of which is that the format generally resembles that already used for books and periodicals. Another reason is that
it recommends providing an “access date,” that is, the date on which the
website itself was referenced. For most websites, the turnover rate for information and content is high, to say nothing of websites that are constantly
disappearing while others are being created. Until authors grow more accustomed to referencing sources from the World Wide Web, however, this manual does not recommend an absolute insistence on providing access dates.
The following elements should be included where available or applicable.
Full name of author(s), first name, then last name
Title of page, entry, or article
Title of the larger work of which the entry or article may be a part (in italics)
Version or file number
Publication, posting, or last-revision date
The website’s name (in italics)
The website’s URL (in italics)
Access date (in parentheses)
18. Cal Thomas, “Have We Settled for Caesar?” Is the Religious Right Finished?
Christianity Online: (September 21, 1999).
19. John Bunyan, “The Author’s Apology for His Book,” The Pilgrim’s Progress.
Last updated May 27, 1999. Christian Classics Ethereal Library: (August 4, 1999).
Referencing Software. Annotating works that are included on such software
sources as CD-ROMs, floppy disks, and DVDs should generally be handled
like ordinary book and periodical references. This is sometimes complicated
because such materials often contain the equivalent of many different books.
This situation also occurs in the print world and should be handled the same
way, that is, by first referencing the work-within-the-larger-work and then
referencing the larger work itself. See example, note 20, below.
Also, due to a lack of formatting standards, works included on many software sources, such as floppy disks, CD-ROMs, and DVDs, do not include
page numbers. There have been calls in the academic community to impose
standards so that all software includes page numbers. This urge, however,
seems to be imposing the book paradigm on newer media, and it ignores the
fact that most software compensates for its lack of page numbers by having
some sort of search function so that individual words and phrases can be
2:58 PM
Page 280
280 | Notes
easily found. Even lacking this, most computers on which such software is
viewed have their own search functions.
Ultimately, referencing software is not all that much different than referencing books or periodicals and need not be complicated. Simply include the
following elements as appropriate.
Full name of author(s) or editor(s) (if known)
Title and subtitle of software package
Full name of editor(s) or translator(s)
Name of the software series, and volume and number in the series
Edition, if other than the first
Number of volumes
Facts of publication: city (and state if city is not well known), publisher, and
year of publication (all in parentheses)
Volume number
Page number(s) of the citation (if known)
20. Matthew Henry, Matthew Henry’s Commentary on the Whole Bible (1706–21), in
The Zondervan Bible Study Library: Scholar’s Edition CD-ROM, version 5.01.0025
(Grand Rapids, Mich.: Zondervan, 2002).
21. Artsource 3.0: CD-ROM Clip Art Library (Grand Rapids, Mich.: Zondervan, 2002).
The Use of Ibid.” For both book and periodical references, Ibid. takes the place
of the author’s name, the title, and page number when all of that information is identical to the information in the immediately preceding note. If the
author and title are the same but the page reference has changed, “Ibid.”
may be used with the new page reference. For books intended for a general
or popular readership, authors are encouraged to use repeated short-form
references instead of “Ibid.” (See next paragraph for the proper elements of
a short-form reference.) “Ibid.” is most appropriately used in academic and
scholarly books that contain a large number of citations.
Nicholas Wolterstorff, Art in Action (Grand Rapids, Mich.: Eerdmans, 1980),
23 Ibid., 47.
24 Ibid.
Note that “Ibid.” is not italicized in notes.
Using Short-Form References. When a second reference occurs later than immediately following the first reference (in which case “Ibid.” would not apply),
a short-form reference should be used in both scholarly and popular works.
This is preferred over the older system of using “op. cit.” or “loc. cit.” A
short-form reference should include the author’s last name, a shortened form
2:58 PM
Page 281
Numbers, Inclusive (Elision) | 281
of the title (if it is more than five words) that is sufficient to identify the book
cited previously in a full note, and a page reference.
25. James Samuel Preus, From Shadow to Promise: Old Testament Interpretation
from Augustine to Young Luther (Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap, 1969), 50.
26. Wolterstorff, Art in Action, 97.
27. Preus, From Shadow to Promise, 58.
Using Page Citations for Books and Periodicals. Whenever possible, exact page
references should be given in lieu of using a single page number followed by
ff. Such abbreviations as vol. and p. or pp. are unnecessary unless their omission will result in ambiguity.
State Abbreviations in Source Notes. Abbreviations of states in notes or bibliographies should be given in conventional form with a period. Two-letter
postal forms should be reserved for actual mailing addresses. (See
“Abbreviations; States, Territories, Provinces, and Countries.”)
Numbers, Inclusive (Elision)
To indicate that an entire range of numbers is being referred to, an unspaced
en dash is used between the numbers. These are called inclusive numbers. The
second number may be elided (shortened) in many combinations, especially in
year numerals and page references. Since the rules of elision are difficult to
describe, the following examples should make them easier to grasp.
For date references:
2000–2004 [do not elide when first number ends in 00]
2000–2011 [do not elide when first number ends in 00]
1897–1901 [do not elide when century changes]
AD 374–79
379–374 BC [do not elide when used with BC]
For page numbers and bibliographic references:
22–23 [not 22–3]
100–107 [do not elide when first number ends in 00]
100–119 [do not elide when first number ends in 00]
2:58 PM
Page 282
282 | Numbers: Spelling Out Versus Using Numerals
Note, however, that numbers given in book titles should generally not be
ellided. For instance: The Collected Poems of T. S. Eliot, 1909–1962.
Numbers: Spelling Out Versus Using Numerals
General Rule. Spell out numbers under one hundred and round numbers in
hundreds, thousands, millions, billions, etc. Extremely large round numbers
may be expressed in figures and units of millions or billions. Numerals should
be used for all other numbers.
fifteen hundred
two million
2.4 billion
thirty-two thousand
Ordinal Numbers. The general rules for spelling out numbers versus using
numerals also applies to ordinal numbers. In notes, tabular matter, and a few
traditional expressions, a combination of numeral and suffix is used, without periods. There are a few situations in which numerals have become customary for ordinal numbers, for instance, in degrees or latitude. The correct
numerical forms of the ordinal numbers are: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, 8th,
9th, 10th, and so on.
tenth grade
twenty-first century
38th parallel
Words into Type, third edition
He was the fifteenth person to receive the award.
He was the 115th person to receive the award.
Percentages. Numerals should be used with percentages regardless of the context. For most purposes, the word percent should be used with the numeral
rather than the percent symbol (%), but in technical, statistical, or frequent
usage, the % symbol should be used. Note that when the symbol is used, a
word space should not be placed between the numeral and the symbol.
He graduated in the top 10 percent of his class. [common use]
Recent polls show that only 10% of the people polled favor the new policy.
[technical, statistical, or frequent use]
Idioms and Common Expressions with Numbers. A handful of idiomatic
expressions using numbers have gained currency. It is not always possible to
formulate rules for such expressions, but the following list offers a few of
the most common.
Fourth of July holiday, the Fourth
hundred-and-fifty percent, to give a (to work exceptionally hard; spell it out)
million, to look like a
9/11 attacks (spoken as “nine-eleven”), or the events of September 11
2:58 PM
Page 283
Numbers: Spelling Out Versus Using Numerals | 283
nine-to-five job, to work nine-to-five
twenty-four/seven (meaning night and day, seven days a week; also 24/7 in
informal contexts)
Measurements. To indicate dimensions, numbers are spelled out or set as numerals according to the context. The symbol × or the letter x may replace the
word “by” in technical works but is discouraged in nontechnical writing.
three-by-five card or 3 x 5 card
8-1/2-by-11-inch paper
Parts of a Book. Use numerals for numbers referring to parts of a book. This
is one of the more common exceptions to the rule that recommends spelling
out words under one hundred.
The author makes three points in chapter 6, as indicated in table 3 on page 97.
The Beginning of a Sentence. A number should be spelled out at the beginning
of a sentence. If this is cumbersome, rewrite the sentence so that it does not
begin with the number.
Nineteen seventy-eight marked the five-hundredth anniversary of the birth of
Sir Thomas More.
The five-hundredth anniversary of the birth of Sir Thomas More was observed
in 1978.
Dialogue. Except for year dates, most numbers should be spelled out in dialogue. Numerals may also be used in specific cases in which numbers are so
large that it would be impractical to spell them out.
“On October thirty-first, 1517,” said the tour guide, “more than four hundred
and fifty years ago, Luther affixed his Ninety-five Theses to this very door.”
Money. Monetary references should be spelled out or set in numerals according to the general rules for numbers given above. If many dollar amounts are
given in close context, they should be set as numerals. When fractional and
whole dollar amounts appear in close proximity to each other, zeroes should
be placed after the decimals in the whole dollar amounts for consistency.
Hundreds paid twenty dollars each to hear Steven Curtis Chapman in person.
The deacons collected a total of $413.
The agent received $9.50, $22.00, and $28.00 for the three sales.
Age. Numbers indicating ages of persons should always be spelled out. Also
note the correct hyphenation of the following forms.
2:58 PM
Page 284
284 | Numbers: Spelling Out Versus Using Numerals
the five-year-olds
a twenty-five-year-old woman
he was sixty years old
she lived to be one hundred and eleven
Groups of Numbers. If several numbers are given for several items in one general group, all the numbers should be handled in the same way. If the largest
contains three or more digits, use figures for all.
With a choir of fifty people and a worship committee of more than thirty, why
can we get only two people to take care of infants on Sunday?
There are 14 graduate students in the religion department, 61 in the classics
department, and 93 in the romance languages, making a total of 168 in the
three departments.
Street Addresses. In formal writing, streets that bear a number as the name
should be spelled out. But house numbers or other numbers used in street
addresses should always be given in figures.
Fifth Avenue
Fifty-second Street
21 Forty-second Street
221b Baker Street
Route Numbers. In both formal and informal writing, road and highway route
numbers should always be shown in numerals.
Highway 61
Interstate 75, or I-75
Route 66
Numerals, Commas with
Always use the comma in numbers of four or more digits.
2:58 PM
Page 285
O and Oh
Most editors and writers know the difference between what’s called “the
vocative O” and the exclamation “oh.” O, we are told, should be used when
addressing people or invoking a deity (O citizens of Rome, O Lord) and oh
reserved for expressions of surprise or sudden emotion (Oh! you startled me!).
Caution should be used, however, because the vocative O, which suggests
oratory, is rapidly disappearing. First, it has acquired something of a melodramatic and antiquated feeling in modern writing and is therefore largely
used for humor or satire. Second, and perhaps more tellingly, it is used so
little that many writers and readers simply mistake it for oh, that is, as an
expression of heightened emotion, so that its vocative sense is lost. Some
Bible translations, such as the TNIV, have altogether eliminated the use of the
vocative O for these reasons.
Use O, of course, in any direct quotation, but otherwise use it cautiously.
Stick with oh, which still communicates its intended meaning unambiguously.
Okay Versus OK
An arcane controversy that has generated furious debate among editors
and grammarians is the question of which is correct: OK, O.K., or okay?
As a general rule, this manual advises writers to use okay in text and dialogue. This stems largely from the fact that the so-called inflected forms of
the spelled-out style are generally more accessible and less of an eyesore to
most readers: okayed, okaying, okays. Few readers like the looks of OKed,
OKing, or OKs. If the abbreviation is used, however, do not use periods.
The inimitable H. L. Mencken once referred to okay as “the most successful of all Americanisms.”
Old Style and New Style Systems of Dating
See “Time and Dates, Old Style and New Style.”
2:58 PM
Page 286
286 | -Ology
The suffix -ology, of course, means the “study of.” The following list
shows some of the common “-ologies” in the field of religion.
angelology—the study of angels and their theological implications
Christology—the study of the person and work of Christ
demonology—the study of demons and evil spirits
ecclesiology—the study of church architecture and ornament; also the study of
church history
eschatology—the study of theories of how the world will end, the end times
hagiology—the study of saints’ lives
hamartiology—the study of doctrines regarding sin
heortology—the study of the history and significance of holidays, festivals, and
seasons of the church calendar
hymnology—the study of church hymns
martyrology—the study of martyrs and their sufferings
numerology—the study of numbers; often applied to the study of numbers in
the Bible
pneumatology—the study of the doctrines regarding the person and work of
the Holy Spirit
soteriology—the study of the doctrines of salvation, especially in regards to
Christ’s role in salvation
teleology—the study of first causes, especially arguments for the existence of
God based on scientific observation
theology—the study of God and God’s interactions with humans
typology—the study of types and symbols, especially as they relate to the
See “Widows and Orphans.”
Orthodox Versus Eastern Orthodox
See “Eastern Orthodox Versus Orthodox.”
Outlines and Lists
An outline can help explain and organize information systematically and
hierarchically so that it is most clearly understood by the reader. A list is
nothing more than a simple, one-level outline.
Two major systems of multilevel outlining are recommended: the traditional system and the decimal system.
2:58 PM
Page 287
Outlines and Lists | 287
The Traditional System. This system is appropriate for short, informal outlines
that might appear in popular or trade books. It is the one most readers are
familiar with since primary-school days. Such outlines should follow this
I. C. S. Lewis [capital roman numeral with period]
A. Writings [capital letter with period]
1. Fiction [arabic numeral with period]
a. The Narnia books [lowercase letter with period]
(1) The Lion, the Witch and the Wardrobe [arabic numeral
in parentheses]
(a) Characters [lowercase italic letter in parentheses]
(i) Aslan [lowercase roman numeral in parentheses]
The Decimal System. The decimal system is so-called because it uses a period
between numbers, although the periods don’t really function as true decimal
points. They merely separate the levels of information. Decimal style is best
used in formal presentations in which a very strict hierarchy needs to be
understood, for instance, in scholarly, reference, and textbook settings. That
said, the decimal system is most accessible when it does not go beyond two
or three levels, since the multiplication of levels can be quite confusing (of
course, the traditional system can be confusing as well). A decimal outline
should follow this pattern:
1. C. S. Lewis
1.1 Writings
1.1.1. Fiction The Narnia books The Lion, the Witch and the Wardrobe Characters Aslan
Runover Lines. Runover lines in both numerical lists and outlines should begin
under the first letter of the first word in the previous line.
1. Gregory contributes his support and energies to the formation of the
papal states.
2. Gregory becomes a leading advocate of the missionary work in
3. Taken as a whole, Gregory’s writings earn him the status of “Doctor of
the Church.”
a. The Book of Morals is his most extensive commentary.
b. To this day, his Dialogues continues to be considered his most
influential work.
2:58 PM
Page 288
288 | Outlines and Lists
At Least Two Points. Each level of an outline must have at least two points.
Informal Outlines. In popular books where outlining is minimal, less formal, or
not carried beyond the third level, it is acceptable to begin the outline with
A. or 1., rather than the roman numeral. Of course, in single-level lists, only
the arabic numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) should be used.
Unnumbered Lists. Authors and editors sometimes feel that numbering the
items in a list gives them legitimacy, but usually typographic bullets ( • ) or
other graphic symbols can be used just as effectively to separate the items.
Use numbers only when there is a specific reason to do so. (See also
“Parentheses, Numbered Lists.”)
2:58 PM
Page 289
Papers for Printing
Common Types. Several different kinds of paper are commonly used for
Antique—A kind of rough-textured book paper that is usually used in highquality letterpress printing. Eggshell is a smooth variety, and vellum is
smoother. If the paper is laid, it was made on a fine wire screen, which left
almost imperceptible lines on the paper. Otherwise, it is referred to as wove.
Bond—The paper most often used for stationery. It absorbs ink well because it
is usually made with a high percentage of cotton-rag fibers, usually 25 to 50
Book paper—Standard book paper comes in many weights and in either
smooth or antique (rough) finishes. It is the paper predominately used for
the pages of books. It is made to rigid specifications so that thickness (pages
per inch) can be accurately measured.
Coated paper—Often used in high-quality printing (aside from books), it is
coated with chemical or clay surfactants so that the paper is more opaque
and brighter. It may be gloss coated, dull coated, or machine finished (very
smooth). Because the ink does not absorb, it is ideal for high-quality color
Cover—Any of a variety of stiff, durable papers, either coated or uncoated,
which are used for book covers.
Index paper—Index paper, which comes in either vellum or smooth finish, is
less expensive than cover stock and is used for cards and inserts.
Newsprint—Used largely for newspapers. Made from ground wood pulp, it is
sometimes called groundwood paper. Its advantage is its low cost, which is
counterbalanced by its specked, off-white color, high absorbency, and
Offset paper—This printing paper is specially “sized” (coated) to resist the
tackiness of inks and the moisture involved in the offset printing process.
Uncoated—Uncoated paper is commonly used in printing. Whether sized or
unsized, it is very smooth and can be made in a wide variety of textures and
Untrimmed Fore Edge. Sometimes the outside edge of a book, called the fore
edge, is left untrimmed, especially for some gift books and even, occasionally,
for large books of high literary or academic pretension. This is intended to
give the book an elegant, handmade feel, although it occasionally happens
that some readers believe such rough edges are an error in the manufacturing process. If an untrimmed-edge effect is desired, check with the printer to
see if they can achieve an irregular trim, avoiding the same pattern of peaks
and valleys in the edges of the paper.
2:58 PM
Page 290
290 | Papers for Printing
Deckle. A deckled edge is the feathery edge of a piece of handmade paper. A
deckled edge is sometimes included when the fore edge is left untrimmed.
This gives the book an even more handmade feel. Since most papers are
machine made and therefore do not have a true deckled edge, printers sometimes simulate the deckle by folding and tearing the paper, giving a similar
feathery edge to the page.
While the word parachurch, which should be lowercased, has yet to
appear in most of the major dictionaries, it is in common use among churchgoing people in the United States and England. Most commonly the word is
used as an adjective, as in a parachurch organization, but it is also used as a
noun, as in the ministries of the nation’s parachurches.
A parachurch is a religious-based organization, usually independent of
traditional denominations, that was created to involve Christians in ministry,
often a ministry that is beyond the scope of individual churches and denominations. Usually, parachurches are founded to achieve a very specific goal,
such as providing wheelchairs to Third World countries or funding local food
They have their roots in the early nineteenth century when groups of
Christians would band together interdenomenationally for a specific purpose, such as to promote moral reform (as in the various abolition and temperance leagues), to print tracts, or to fund missionary endeavors.
Paragraphing Dialogue
When writing dialogue in both fiction and nonfiction, it is customary to
set each speaker’s words as a new indented paragraph. A possibly apocryphal
story says that this custom was devised by the French novelist Balzac. Before
his time, apparently, dialogue was commonly run into a single paragraph
according to general subject and theme like any other paragraph. But Balzac,
who wrote serialized novels for periodicals and was paid by the line, realized he could make more money by beginning a new paragraph each time
the speaker changed.
Although it may violate our sense of editorial propriety, there are occasionally good reasons to run dialogue into a single paragraph. In some cases,
it may be unavoidable because of the structure of the sentence. There is no
reason, for instance, why a writer should not be able to write something like
When Polyphemus asked, “Who are you?” Odysseus replied, “Nobody,” and
when the other cyclopes later asked Polyphemus, “Who was it who blinded
you?” Polyphemus replied, “Nobody.”
2:58 PM
Page 291
Parentheses | 291
A writer may also run dialogue into a single paragraph to communicate
a sense of hurry, humor, or repetition.
“Are you sure?” “Yes.” “Absolutely?” “Yes.” “Beyond a doubt?” “Yes.” “Yes?”
Finally, it is common in children’s picture books and books for beginning
readers to make no distinction between paragraphs at all, so that all dialogue
is run together. By and large, children’s writers and editors feel that paragraphing, as a typographic device, is lost on young readers. To avoid confusion, the said references in such books need to be carefully managed to make
clear who is speaking.
The disadvantage of running dialogue together is that it may confuse readers accustomed to the traditional method. But if it can be done to effect with
no loss of clarity, then it is a legitimate, and often necessary, device. The paragraphing of dialogue is no different than any other rule of grammar and style:
if there’s a good reason to break it, do so. “Really?” “Yes!” (See also “Said
Parenthetical Thought. Parentheses may be used to expand, comment on, explain,
or define a point, or may be used to make an aside, whether or not it is closely
related to the first part of the sentence. While commas and dashes can also be
used to set apart parenthetical statements, commas are best used when an
extremely close affinity exists between the inserted element and the rest of the
sentence. Dashes that enclose a parenthetical idea, on the other hand, convey
a heightened sense of energy, urgency, interruption, or immediacy.
William of Ockham (remembered in the principle of “Ockham’s Razor”) left
Avignon in 1328.
Lancelot Andrewes, who was said to have kept Christmas all the year, was
noted for his hospitality.
For only love—which means humility—can cast out the fear which is the root
of all war.—Thomas Merton
Numbered Lists. When lists are run into the text, parentheses are used around
the numbers or letters. Do not use just one: 1), 2), 3), etc.
Historians are usually careful to distinguish between (1) Macarius Magnes, (2)
Macarius of Alexandria, and (3) Macarius of Egypt.
2:58 PM
Page 292
292 | Parentheses
With Other Punctuation. Periods, question marks, and exclamation points
should be placed outside a closing parenthesis when the parenthetical statement is inserted into a larger sentence, although a question mark or exclamation point should be placed inside the closing parenthesis when it is part
of the parenthetical statement itself.
Periods, question marks, and exclamation points should be placed inside
the closing parenthesis when the entire sentence is enclosed in parentheses.
Elizabeth Fry’s activities reflected the many social concerns of her time (such as
slavery, missions among the Indians, and the poor).
Dorothy Sayers published her first detective novel (could she have guessed how
popular they would become?) just after establishing her teaching career.
The Ephesus that Paul knew was the major trade center in the Roman province
of Asia. (By AD 950 it had become a ghost town.)
With Font Changes. Parentheses should be set in the same font as the main text
and not necessarily in the font of the material contained within the parentheses. Ordinarily this means that parentheses should be set in roman type
unless they are used in an italicized title, heading, or display line or in a text
sentence that is entirely italicized.
Her memoir (The Sculptor’s Daughter) recounts her life as the daughter of two
artistically gifted parents. [parentheses in roman]
The Latin form (sacire) ultimately comes from a Hittite word, meaning “to make
sacred.” [parentheses in roman]
The title of the book was How to Make (and Lose) a Million. [Parentheses in
italics as part of title]
Once again (for the twenty-fifth time!) the Curse of the Bambino had worked its ill
luck this season. [parentheses in italics as part of italicized sentence]
With Bible References. When a parenthetical Scripture reference immediately
follows a Scripture quotation, place any needed punctuation after the parenthetical reference. If the quotation itself requires a question mark or exclamation point, it should be placed with the text regardless of what
punctuation follows the parenthesis.
“Jesus wept” (John 11:35), the shortest verse in Scripture, is often quoted out
of context.
“In the beginning God created the heavens and the earth. Now the earth was
formless and empty” (Gen. 1:1–2).
“Lord, are you going to wash my feet?” (John 13:6).
Particles with Proper Names
See “Capitalization, Particles with Proper Names.”
2:58 PM
Page 293
Period | 293
Performance Symbol
The performance symbol is sometimes called the “p-in-the-circle” symbol. This symbol is used to copyright sound recordings—mostly audio
recordings, in the case of books.
The performance symbol does not serve as a copyright notice for any of
the printed matter that accompanies the recording. A copyright symbol with
a complete copyright notice should be provided to protect any printed matter that accompanies a sound recording, though, conversely, it should be
understood that the © symbol does not protect the recording itself. For a
more complete discussion of how the performance symbol is used, see
William S. Strong’s The Copyright Book (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 5th
edition, 1999).
As an End Stop. The period most commonly indicates the end of a declarative
or imperative sentence.
With Initials and Abbreviations. The period is often used for initials and
abbreviations, although some abbreviations do not use periods. (See
J. I. Packer
1 Thess.
With Numbers in Vertical Lists. When items are listed vertically, a period should
follow the numbers or letters.
1. Susannah Wesley
2. Hannah More
3. Phoebe Palmer
With Vertical Lists of Sentences. In a vertical list, a period is used after each
item only if at least one of the items is a complete sentence.
Among Whitefield’s favorite themes were the following:
1. The boundlessness of God’s love.
2. Man’s misery without God.
3. Repentance is necessary for salvation.
With Captions and Legends. With photo captions and other descriptive copy
attached to charts or graphic illustrations, a period is used only when such
copy forms a complete sentence.
Illustration: Thomas Cromwell
Table 1: This chart traces the evolution of the reprints of the King James Version.
2:58 PM
Page 294
294 | Period
When Not to Use a Period. No period should follow titles, running heads, display type, bylines, chapter heads, or subheads that are set off from the text.
When a sublevel head is run into the text, however, it should be followed by
a period.
Permissions, Author Guidelines for Obtaining
General Procedures for Obtaining Permissions.* Under most contracts, it is the
author’s responsibility to obtain all permissions to reprint materials taken
from other sources. (For Zondervan authors, this includes material taken from
books published by Zondervan and its parent company, HarperCollins). The
author should write for such permissions as soon as he or she decides to use
any copyrighted material in the book. If the author waits too long and permissions are denied, the author may have to scramble at the last minute to
find suitable substitutes, or the book’s release date may have to be delayed
until the permissions are granted. Also, if the permission fee required by the
copyright owner is too high, the author may wish to delete or substitute other
material. The author is also responsible for including full credit information
in the manuscript whenever credit is required as a condition of the permission license.
A request for permission is not a commitment to use or pay for the material. If, after permission has been granted, the author decides not to use a
given passage, it is a simple matter to inform the copyright holder, as a courtesy, that the material will not be used. The author need not pay for the permission until it is certain that the quote will actually be contained in the
book, that is, after the editing stage.
If, as occasionally happens, the publisher’s address is not given in the book
from which the author is quoting, such references as The Writer’s Market
and The Literary Market Place, available at most libraries, are excellent
resources for finding publishers’ addresses for permission purposes. In some
cases, the Internet may be a valuable tool in tracking down a specific publisher’s address.
*The guidelines given in this section on “Obtaining Permissions” outline the internal editorial
policies of Zondervan and are solely for the information of authors under contract with
Zondervan. This information does not purport to give definitive legal advice and should not
be relied upon by authors for that purpose. Zondervan’s right in its sole discretion to decide
which materials require permission in a given case is in no way limited by this “Obtaining
Permissions” outline. Other publishers may have different guidelines, and the information
given in this manual should not be referred to in connection with any book that a Zondervan
author may be writing for another publisher. Zondervan’s authors make certain representations
and warranties regarding the content of their books and agree to indemnify Zondervan against
certain claims relating to such content. Nothing in this section is intended to modify those
obligations of the author or to reduce or restrict the rights and remedies available to Zondervan
under its publishing agreements with authors.
2:58 PM
Page 295
Permissions, Obtaining: Author Guidelines | 295
Writers should be aware that the same need to obtain permissions also
applies to information quoted or copied from an Internet source. The fact
that a quotation has appeared on the Internet does not imply that it is in the
public domain and can be quoted without obtaining a permission or paying
a fee. Also note that frequent or extended use of passages from modern Bible
versions or translations generally requires permission.
When writing for permission to quote from a printed source, the author
should provide the publisher of the quoted material the following information:
1. The title and author(s) of the work from which the quote will be taken
2. A description or copy of the material to be quoted, along with an
explanation of how the quotation will be used (a copy of the relevant
page might be included)
3. An approximate total of the number of words to be quoted
4. The title and author(s) of the work in which the quote will be used
5. The projected publication date
6. The projected number of copies in the first print run
7. The projected retail price
8. A one-sentence synopsis of the work’s subject
If the author has any difficulty finding any of the above information, the
book’s editor can usually help.
The author is responsible for rendering the borrowed material exactly as
it appeared in the original, with no reworking of the spelling, punctuation,
grammar, or general style. Occasionally, in works from the public domain,
antiquated spelling, syntax, grammar, and punctuation may be modernized,
although a declaration of such modernization, either as a footnote or as a
general note on the copyright page, should be provided as a courtesy to the
Public Domain. In 1976 Congress passed a new Copyright Act, which took
effect on January 1, 1978. The new law recognized two different methods of
measuring the duration of a copyright, depending on when the work was
first published. In general, works first published in or before 1922 are now
in the public domain, and no permission is required to reproduce them in
the United States. Works first published in or after 1923 are protected for
ninety-five years from the date of their initial publication. Works created and
published after January 1, 1978, are copyrighted for the life of the author
plus seventy years.
In addition, scientific and historical facts, general ideas and concepts,
titles, names, short phrases and slogans, and most US government publications are also considered to be in the public domain. Written permission must
2:58 PM
Page 296
296 | Permissions, Obtaining: Author Guidelines
be obtained to copy or closely paraphrase all copyrighted material unless the
privilege of “fair use” can be invoked (see below).
Ownership of Copyrighted Material. Bear in mind that for a permission to be
valid, it must be granted by the copyright owner, who controls the rights to
the use the author wishes to make of the material. As a general rule, the
author or original creator of the material is considered the copyright owner
and usually holds the permission rights unless those rights have been assigned
to another individual or entity (usually the publisher). The addressee of a letter or the owner of a photo negative or print does not necessarily control the
copyright, even though he or she may possess the only available copy of that
work. Authors should be sure to secure permission from the proper party.
Fair Use. In certain circumstances, the copyright law permits authors to use
small amounts of copyrighted material without permission from the copyright owner. The fair use privilege is intended primarily for purposes of criticism, comment, news reporting, teaching, scholarship, and research.
There are no hard-and-fast rules that govern the application of fair use,
since each instance has its own peculiar set of facts that must all be weighed
in determining whether a use is a “fair use.” Such a determination is made
by taking into account the following factors:
1. The length of the quoted passage in relation to the length of the copyrighted work from which it is taken (not in relation to the work in
which it is used by the borrowing author).
2. The qualitative significance of the passage in relation to the copyrighted work as a whole; that is, is the passage the “heart” of the copyrighted work or merely an incidental or minor segment?
3. The manner in which the borrowed passage is used: Is the passage used
in an illustrative, critical, or instructive context? Or is the passage used
merely in a gratuitous manner to spare the author the burden of creating his or her own original expression for the thought and ideas conveyed by the borrowed passage? Is the passage quoted within the text
of the book for purposes of comment or criticism, or is it used as a
window dressing, primarily to enliven the new piece of writing?
4. The nature of the copyrighted work from which the passage is taken:
Is it a published or unpublished source? (The scope of the fair-use privilege is significantly reduced for unpublished works.) Is the passage
factual and mostly informative in content, or is it more expressive and
fanciful, more “literary”?
5. The effect of the use of the material on the potential market for the
copyrighted work, including the market for granting rights and permissions to use the copyrighted work.
2:58 PM
Page 297
Permissions, Obtaining: Author Guidelines | 297
Although there are no easy formulas for analyzing the above factors and
applying them to a given set of facts, in general, an author will usually have
to obtain permission for the following uses of copyrighted material:
1. Prose quotations or the close paraphrasing of 300 words or more from
any full-length book (either a single citation or the total of several
shorter quotations from a single work);
2. Prose quotations or the close paraphrasing of 100 words or more from
a short article or periodical piece;
3. More than 300 words from a full-length play or 100 words from a
one-act play;
4. One or more lines of a poem, unless it is of epic proportion, in which
case more lines may be used depending on their qualitative and quantitative relationship to the entire copyrighted work;
5. One or more lines from a song;
6. All photographs and illustrations (including cartoons);
7. Any table, diagram, or map that is copied or closely adapted;
8. More than a single line or two from any unpublished letter, memo,
diary, manuscript, or other personal document. (Always bear in mind
that the guidelines for unpublished material are much more restrictive
than that for published material.)
If the author has any doubts about whether material used in a manuscript
is properly considered fair use, he or she should be sure to advise the project’s
editor so the publisher’s legal counsel can be consulted.
Finally, it is important to remember that although one need not obtain
permission for fair-use material, credit should be attributed to the source of
any quoted or closely paraphrased passage.
Quotations within Cited Material. In reprinting articles or long portions of a
book (such as material in an anthology or a compilation), it is easy to overlook internal quotations from other sources. If reprinted material has been
taken from another original source and it requires permission according to
guidelines outlined here, the compiler or author must obtain separate permission for that material. This rule applies even to public domain material
that contains copyrighted material within it. Thus, an author may need several permissions to reprint one passage or article.
Territories. Whenever the publishing house that plans to publish the author’s
book controls world rights to the book and plans to exploit any rights outside of the United States and Canada, permissions should be cleared for use
throughout the world. If the author’s publisher will not be exploiting the
2:58 PM
Page 298
298 | Permissions, Obtaining: Author Guidelines
work beyond North America, permissions may be cleared for the United
States and Canada only.
No Reply. If the author receives no reply within a reasonable period of time
(usually about three weeks) from the publisher from whom he or she is seeking permission, a second request should be sent by registered mail, return
receipt requested. If after several weeks the request is still outstanding, the
author should try to call the publisher by phone. In some cases, the publisher will give a verbal permission over the phone and will tell the author
the proper credit line to use. This may be acceptable, provided the author
provides his or her publisher written confirmation of the permission granted
within a short period of time after the phone call. If, despite the author’s
best efforts, permission still is not granted, the material should not be used
without further advice from the legal department of the company publishing the author’s book. In summary, “no reply” does not translate into a
grant of permission.
Credit Lines and Source Notes. In the manuscript, the author must use the precise wording for the credit line as provided by the copyright holder as part
of the grant of permission. If no wording is specified, include in a source note
or on a permissions page the following information: author, book or article
title, publisher or publication source, a copyright notice for the publication,
and the notation “Reprinted by permission.” The author should remember
that he or she may also need to provide a proper source note for material
that constitutes fair use even though permission did not need to be obtained.
Keeping Permissions Records. When permissions are complete, the author
should send either copies or original records and correspondence to the editor with the final manuscript. The author should always keep a copy of the
complete file for his or her own records.
The Publisher. The publisher is responsible for applying and securing proper
copyright for new publications, and the publisher usually also retains the
privilege of granting permission for the reprinting of excerpts as requested for
use in other publications.
Permissions Notice
Any credit lines for permissions granted for materials quoted or used in
the book should appear on the copyright page. If such permission notices
are numerous or long, then they may be listed on a separate acknowledgments page either in the front or at the back of the book.
2:58 PM
Page 299
Personal Names, Adjectives Derived from | 299
Permission-to-Copy Notice
Some books might benefit from allowing the reader, without special written permission from the publisher, to photocopy pages for personal use or,
in educational situations, allowing teachers or group leaders to make copies
for students or transparencies for use on an overhead projector. Books of
copyright-free images, which contain material to be used in other publications, also fall into this category. Such books should provide a permissionto-copy notice on the copyright page, often in conjunction with the warning
notice. (See “Warning Notice.”) This might be beneficial in such books as:
workbooks intended for study groups
books of charts or tables that might be useful in educational situations
certain Bibles or Bible studies
books with content already in the public domain
reference books containing material expected to be copied by students
fill-in-the-blank books, so that the reader doesn’t need to mark the book itself
books of copyright-free images, quotations, templates, or forms
books containg financial worksheets
The permission-to-copy notice is the publisher’s way of informing the
reader that such copying is allowed as well as defining any needed restrictions
that apply. Such restrictions might include:
the number of copies the publisher will allow to be made of any given page
the maximum number of pages that can be copied from a single work
whether a credit line should be included on the copied text pages
how many graphic images may be used and how the credit line should read
A permission-to-copy notice, when given in conjunction with a warning
notice, might read as follows:
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means—electronic, mechanical, photocopy,
recording, or any other—without the prior permission of the publisher, except
as follows: individuals may make a single copy of a page (or a single
transparency of a page) from this book for purposes of private study,
scholarship, research, or classroom use only. Teachers may make multiple
copies of a page from this book for classroom use only, not to exceed one copy
per student in the class. Copies made for classroom use should provide the title
of the book, the author’s name, and the publisher’s name on each copy.
Personal Names, Adjectives Derived from
Adjectives can be formed from any personal name. The most common
method is to add an -ian to names ending in consonants (Lewisian—C. S.
Lewis; Barthian—Karl Barth) and an -an to most names ending in vowels
2:58 PM
Page 300
300 | Personal Names, Adjectives Derived from
(Blakean—William Blake; Joycean—James Joyce; Tolstoyan—Leo Tolstoy).
With ancient Greek and Roman names, the suffix is often added to a root
form of the name (Aeschylean—Aeschylus; Lucretian—Lucretius).
Some names are made into adjectives by adding an -esque ending
(Lincolnesque—Abraham Lincoln; Kafkaesque—Franz Kafka), though there
is no rule that spells out when this should be done. The -esque ending
is especially common with artists’ names (Cézannesque—Paul Cézanne;
Leonardesque—Leonardo da Vinci), but there are many artists whose names
take the traditional form (Duchampian—Marcel Duchamp; Warholian—
Andy Warhol). When in doubt, check Webster’s. If no reference to a proper
form can be found, an author or editor should formulate his or her own
according to the rules stated above.
Word List. There are numerous exceptions to these forms, however, and the
following list shows some of the most common ones—as well as a few others in which something unusual needs to be noted.
Aaronic—Aaron (descended from Aaron)
Abrahamic—Abraham (in Genesis; descended from Abraham)
Adamic, or Adamical—Adam (in Genesis)
Bernardine—Bernard of Clairvaux
Byronic—Lord Byron
Calvinist, or Calvinistic—John Calvin
Daliesque—Salvador Dalí (note: no acute accent in the adj. form)
Dantesque—Dante Alighieri
Eliotian, or Eliotic—T. S. Eliot
Goyaesque, or Goyesque—Francisco de Goya
Huxleian, or Huxleyan—Aldous Huxley
Johannine—John (the apostle)
Lucan—Luke (the gospel writer)
Markan, or Marcan—Mark (the gospel writer)
Marlovian—Christopher Marlowe
Matthean, or Matthaean—Matthew (the gospel writer)
Miltonic, or Miltonian—John Milton
Napoleonic—Napoleon Bonaparte
Ockhamistic, Occamistic—William of Ockham, or Occam
Pauline—Paul (the apostle)
Petrine—Peter (the apostle)
Quixotic, or quixotic—Don Quixote
Shavian—George Bernard Shaw (humorously contrived by the author himself)
Thoreauvian—Henry David Thoreau
2:58 PM
Page 301
Plagiarism | 301
Personal Names, Commonly Misspelled
See “Misspelled Personal Names, Commonly.”
Piety, Pious, and Piousness
Some insist that piousness is a back formation of the word pious and
should therefore not be used, the noun form properly being piety. This insistence is niggling, for most dictionaries list piousness as a legitimate word.
Furthermore, piousness and piety can have slightly different shades of
What the dictionaries sometimes miss is that all three words, which used
to suggest sincere devotion and assiduous faith, are now often used pejoratively. They hint at insincerity and self-conscious display in matters of faith.
If anything, piousness, arguably, has a slightly more pejorative tone than
piety in common usage.
Although these terms are not exclusively negative in contemporary usage,
the careful writer must be aware that those words could be misunderstood
by the reader to have a double sense, for instance, when referring to the
“piety” of a some well-known person. A religious audience may understand
something different by these words than a nonreligious audience might.
Pilgrims and Pilgrim Fathers
When capitalized, the word Pilgrims refers specifically to those who
founded and lived in the Plymouth colony in Massachusetts. The term
Pilgrim Fathers (capped), however, refers exclusively to those men who actually made the voyage from England aboard the Mayflower, and it implies
the first generation of Pilgrim leaders in the colony.
We used to think of the plagiarist as someone who knowingly steals
another’s writing and publishes it as his or her own original work. It was, and
continues to be, an ethical taboo akin to stealing and lying. So why would a
manual of style that calls itself “Christian” even need to exhort writers
against this particular fault? The answer is this: in the age of the Internet,
much, if not most, plagiarism is unconscious and can afflict the morally
scrupulous every bit as much as the unscrupulous. How can plagiarism be
Plagiarism in Research. Many writers do research on the World Wide Web,
where everything from simple statistics to entire books can be downloaded
at the push of a few keys. Often, at a project’s research stage, a writer highlights a relevant bit of information, perhaps an entire article, from a website
2:58 PM
Page 302
302 | Plagiarism
and copies it into a document on his or her own hard drive. Later, at the
project’s writing stage, the author opens the document and, if the extract has
not been carefully annotated with an author and source, the writer can too
easily assume it to be his or her own original writing. One can imagine the
writer saying, “I had no idea I was so articulate!” Before you know it, the
extracted passage has been cut-and-pasted into the final draft of the manuscript as the writer’s own—unconsciously plagiarizing. It happens time and
again, as many recent plagiarism cases can testify. Such inadvertent plagiarism has ruined careers.
Guidelines. Ignorance, though understandable, is nevertheless inexcusable. It
is now more important than ever to keep accurate references for all material
used in the research and writing of a book, whether from print or online
sources. These guidelines should help:
1. Annotate. When gathering notes, information, and extracts for a writing project, keep detailed annotations as to author and source. Note
the publication’s title, date, publisher, and page number for all print
sources and, additionally, the website address and date accessed for
all online sources. Keep the annotations with the extracted material,
not on a separate note card or computer file.
2. Keep a Separate Research File. Keep all downloaded or digitized
research and quotations in documents reserved exclusively for those
materials and completely separate them from any documents used for
original writing.
3. Put It in Quotes. When a page is photocopied from a book, one can
easily identify that material’s source; such pages commonly have running heads or other identifying marks. But this is not true of material
downloaded from the Internet. Therefore, make it a habit to put all
downloaded material in quotation marks as soon as it is inserted into
a research document. Remember to put an open quotation mark at
the beginning of each new paragraph just as you would in a printed
quotation. Coupled with careful author-date-publisher annotations,
this should help the writer avoid thinking the extract is his or her own
writing. Let the quotation mark be a visual signal that the material is
from another source.
4. Transfer with Care. When digitally transferring a relevant quote or
other passage to the body of the book, make sure that the quotation
marks and annotations are always attached to it. Writers who carefully
annotate their sources sometimes forget to transfer the annotations to
the book file itself, after which they assume the writing is their own.
2:58 PM
Page 303
Plagiarism | 303
How Much Is Too Much? When it comes to conscious plagiarism, some writers wonder how many words constitute plagiarism, as though it were a matter of a simple word count. Is it plagiarism to steal a sentence, a phrase, two
or three words? The answer is simple: if it is enough to cause the writer to
ask the question in the first place, then it is probably too much. Taking as
little as a unique two-word coinage from another author and crediting it as
one’s own can constitute, ethically and legally, plagiarism. The author’s conscience should be the yardstick, and erring on the side of caution is advised.
Common Knowledge. While not crediting even a short phrase from another
author may be considered plagiarism, using facts or ideas that are “common
knowledge” is not. In your research, for instance, you might have found the
exact diameter of the earth or a list of Shakespeare’s plays. In those cases, the
information is considered common knowledge, and you need not credit your
source. To determine what is common knowledge, academic writers often
use the “Rule of Five”: if you can find five independent sources for the information you wish to use, then it is most likely common knowledge and defensible in a court of law as such.
Paraphrasing. Some writers think that paraphrasing is a surefire way of avoiding plagiarism. Sometimes this is the case, sometimes it is not, depending on
the content and context of the original. For instance, if you paraphrase the
Greek myth of Perseus as found in Graves’ Greek and Roman Myths, then
your own paraphrase is an original retelling of a traditional myth that is considered common knowledge. But if you paraphrase another author’s retelling
of that myth in which that author transforms the characters into farm animals, then your paraphrased version is a plagiarism since the uniqueness of
the barnyard telling belongs to that original author. In such a case, credit
should be given to the original author, and if the telling does not fall under
the fair use guidelines (see “Permissions, Obtaining: Author Guidelines, Fair
Use”), then permission should be obtained as well. Take another example:
you write a detailed, five-page paraphrase of the plot of a particular episode
of a television comedy. Even though this is your paraphrase, permission
should be obtained and proper credit given to the original author.
Conclusion. Writers need to be especially careful when handling the intellectual property of others. Conscious or unconscious, plagiarism is a serious
problem. Whoever said, “Stealing from one author is called ‘plagiarism’;
stealing from many authors is called ‘research,’” certainly did not live in the
computer age—a time in which “stealing from many authors is called ‘the
(See also “Quotations,” “Quoting from the Internet,” and “Permissions,
Obtaining: Author Guidelines.”)
2:58 PM
Page 304
304 | Plurals
English, as a conglomeration of languages, has developed a variety of ways
of expressing plurals, which can be maddening for people trying to learn the
Regular Plurals with S. The most common method of forming the plural is by
adding an s to the noun, such as cats, trucks, seas, or an es to the noun if it
ends in with a sibilant s, z, ch, or sh sound, such as tresses, buzzes, churches,
and bushes. These are called regular plurals.
Other Regular Plurals. While still ending in s, certain nouns require more modification in forming the plural, as seen in the following list:
words ending in -y,
preceded by a consonant
change y to ie, and add s:
candies, countries, mercies
words ending in -uy
replace y with ie and add s:
colloquies, obliquies
some words ending in -f or -fe
replace with -ves: elves, lives
some words ending in -o
add -es to certain words ending in -o:
echoes, heroes, potatoes, tomatoes, zeroes
Irregular Plurals. Irregular plurals follow no rules. Some of the most common,
the majority of which have roots in Old English, are:
Plural Form Same as the Singular. For some words, the plural form is the same
as the singular. These are referred to as zero plurals. For example: bison,
cattle, deer, elk, fish, grouse, moose, salmon, sheep, shrimp, swine, tuna. The
word fish, by the way, uses fishes as a plural only when different kinds of
fish are being referred to. Often nationalities take the zero plural as well:
Chinese, Japanese, Norse, Taiwanese, Sioux.
Plurals Commonly Construed as Singular. In actual usage, both written and
spoken, certain plural forms have come to be constructed as singulars. This
is especially common with Latin plurals that have drifted into English, such
2:58 PM
Page 305
Poetry | 305
as data, agenda, and criteria. For example, the data is ready for review, the
agenda is enclosed, and the criteria is simple are acceptable in informal writing. Sometimes, using the correct Latin singular forms or using a plural noun
can often sound stilted or pedantic: the agendum is enclosed or the agenda
are enclosed. Stick with the colloquial, common forms. Still, in books of a
high literary or academic standard, the precise formal forms may be used:
The data in the study are of three types . . .
Of Single Letters. The plural forms of lowercase letters should end in ’s: as in
to watch one’s p’s and q’s. The plurals of capital letters should end only in s
unless that would lead to misreading: Ps and Qs, but A’s, U’s. In most ordinary text, the ’s or s should be set in roman, even when the single letter is set
in italic.
Titles. The titles of most poems are set in roman and in quotation marks,
although book-length poems should be italicized and not set in quotations.
Most poem titles are capped according to the general rules for titles, but
when a poem does not have a formal title and is identified by its first line,
then the title is set sentence style.
“Epistle to Be Left in the Earth”—Archibald MacLeish [ordinary poem]
Paradise Lost—John Milton [book-length poem]
“Because I could not stop for death”—Emily Dickinson [first line as title]
Quoted in Text. When poetry is quoted and set as an extract (block quotation)
within a prose text, it should be set in the same typeface as the text, either
the same size, or, more customarily, one or two points smaller in size. The
smaller size is recommended to minimize the number of long lines that might
need to be broken if the full text size were used.
Traditionally, and unless the designer has a different intention, the longest
line of the poem is centered on the page and the rest of the poem is allowed
to align accordingly. If a lot of poetry is quoted, however, or when more than
one poem appears on a single page, the verses can all be aligned on a preestablished indent (usually one or two picas) to avoid the appearance of a
ragged left margin. If the lines are especially long (as with Whitman’s verse),
the poetry can even begin at the left margin and runover lines set at a preestablished indent, although in such cases the poetry should be set in a different font or type size to distinguish it from the prose. Secondary leading
before and after the extract are also recommended.
2:58 PM
Page 306
306 | Poetry
In books meant to project a high literary value, extracted poetry can be
set in italics—another technique for squeezing long lines onto the page, since
italics are more condensed than roman in most typefaces. Since italic fonts
generally slow the reader down, some designers like to set poetry in italics,
feeling that poetry should be read more slowly than prose. Other designers
either avoid italic setting of poetry altogether or limit its use to those
instances when poetry is quoted only sparingly.
As appropriate, two lines of quoted poetry may either be set as a block
quotation or run into the text, using a spaced slash ( / ) to indicate the line
breaks. Three or more lines of quoted poetry may also be run into the text
with spaced slashes whenever the context calls for it.
The word pontiff, which is nearly always lowercased, refers exclusively
to the pope of the Roman Catholic Church. It is from the Latin pontifex
maximus (“supreme pontiff,” with the Latin pontifex implying “bridge
maker”). There have been other popes throughout history, in the Eastern
church, for instance, but they are not referred to as pontiffs.
Forming Common Possessives. Most proper names and common singular nouns
form the possessive by adding ’s. Exceptions are made for a few common
phrases that, perhaps for the sake of euphony, have come to require an apostrophe only. Plural possessives are formed by adding an apostrophe only,
except for words whose plurals do not end in s. In those cases, the plural
possessive is formed by adding ’s to the word.
Remember Henry Ward Beecher’s remark: All words are pegs to hang ideas on.
For conscience’ sake, Baxter allied himself with the Nonconformists.
Parishioners’ complaints did not hinder Susannah Wesley’s evangelism.
At first the disciples did not believe the women’s story.
When the Word Ends in S. When proper names and singular nouns end in s,
they still form their possessive in the same way as words that don’t end in s.
When in doubt, euphony and common pronunciation should be your guides.
For instance, when you would not ordinarily pronounce an extra possessive
s, only an apostrophe should be added in the written form.
Bliss’s hymns
the bus’s exit
Dickens’ Life of Our Lord
the Lewises’ letters
John Rogers’ Bible
the truss’s strength
2:58 PM
Page 307
Possessives | 307
Classical and Biblical Names. Determining the possessive forms for classical
and biblical names ending in s is often a problem. No system is perfect, but
euphony and common pronunciation should be adhered to. When the possessive s is ordinarily pronounced, add ’s; if it is awkward to pronounce the
possessive s, add an apostrophe only. The following rules should help. When
the s represents the sound z at the end of the word (as in Socrates or Thales)
or when the final s is immediately preceded by another s or z sound (as in
Augustus, Xerxes, Moses, or Jesus), only an apostrophe should be added.
When the s represents an s sound and is not immediately preceded by another
s or z sound (as in Cyrus), ’s should be added to form the possessive. Also,
any classical or biblical name that is also a common modern name (like
James), whether it ends in an s or a z sound, should form its possessive by
adding ’s.
Achilles’ heel
Ananias’s house
Jesus’ disciples
Ramses’ dynasty
Thales’ philosophy
Thomas’s doubt
Zacchaeus’s tree
For Feast Days. The names for feast days of saints are formed with the possessive.
All Saints’ Day
Saint Michael’s Eve
Saint Patrick’s Day
Saint Valentine’s Day
With Italicized Words. A possessive ending to an italicized noun should be set
in roman.
John Timmer explains how the riches of the kingdom can be found in the
anawim’s very poverty.
Sandy joined the Banner’s staff in 1980.
To Show Joint Possession. When a possessive needs to be formed for two or
more persons in the same context, the following rules apply: (1) If one object
is possessed mutually by all the people listed, only the final name needs to be
in a possessive form; (2) if separate objects are possessed, each name should
be in the possessive form. In some cases, rewriting may be called for if the
distinctions are not otherwise clear.
Keil and Delitzsch’s study [the book they wrote together]
Vaughan’s and Herbert’s poetry [their separate poetry]
my aunt’s and uncle’s books [their separate books]
my aunt’s books and my uncle’s books [rewritten]
2:58 PM
Page 308
308 | Possessives
With Phrases. Phrases or epithets of two or more words form possessives as
long as they are not more than three or four words in length and no ambiguity results. Otherwise the sentence should be rewritten.
the Evil One’s devices
the Good Shepherd’s promises
the Apostle to the Gentile’s writings [ambiguous]
the writings of the Apostle to the Gentiles [rewritten]
Collective Possessives. The plural possessive form is used when an object is
described by the group of people that commonly control, own, or possess it.
When the group commonly uses an object but no strict possession is implied,
then it becomes an attributive form, and the possessive apostrophe is not
used. A strict distinction cannot always be made between possessive and
attributive forms, so each case should be decided using common sense and
common usage as guides. Note first that the plural possessive is being used
less often today altogether, and also that it is common for many groups and
organizations to drop the possessive form in their official names or functions; in these cases, adhere to the group’s preference.
bishops’ letter
realtors’ association
nurses’ station
writers guidelines
Michigan Teachers Association
Christian Booksellers Convention
Use of the Gerund. The possessive form is commonly used with gerunds.
Peter’s confessing that Jesus is the Christ . . .
God’s having gathered his people to himself . . .
See “Foreword and Preface.”
Most prefixes are set closed, that is, without space or hyphen, when forming compound words. Exceptions are made when the prefix (1) precedes a
numeral, (2) precedes a capital letter, (3) precedes an already compounded
term, or (4) either duplicates letters that might cause misreading or forms a
new word that might cause misreading. In those cases, a hyphen is usually
placed between the prefix and the word, though an en-dash is generally
inserted when a prefix defines an entire unhyphenated compound term rather
than just the first word in that term.
2:58 PM
Page 309
Presentation Page | 309
Since many exceptions exist to both the exceptions and the general rule,
it is always best to check Webster’s when in doubt. If the word does not
appear there, then the above rules should apply. The following examples
should help make them clear. (See also “Hyphenation, Prefixes and
counterculture, counterespionage, counterintuitive
but Counter-Reformation [precedes a capital letter],
counter-counterintelligence [to avoid countercounter-]
codirector, coworker [though CMS prefers co-worker], cowriter
but co-colonize, co-edition, and co-op [all to avoid misreading]
midday, midcareer change, midlife, midterm election, midwinter
but mid-1900s [precedes a numeral], mid-nineteenth century [precedes a
compound term]
multifaceted, multitalented, multivolume set
but multi-international and multi-instrumentalist [to avoid duplicated vowel]
postdated, postelection polls, postmodern
but post-9/11 [precedes numeral], post-Christian society [precedes a
capital letter], post-traumatic stress disorder [precedes compound term],
post–Desert Storm [precedes compound term, note en-dash]
predate, predestination, preschool
but pre-presentation ceremonies [to avoid prepre-], pre-engineered [to avoid
duplicated vowel], pre-Socratic [precedes a capital letter], pre–World War II
[precedes compound term, note en-dash]
Preparing Electronic Manuscripts
See “Manuscript Preparation: Author Guidelines, Formatting Conventions.”
Prepositions in Titles
Lowercase a preposition of any length in a title or subtitle unless the
preposition is used adverbially or otherwise emphasized: The Crusades
through Arab Eyes, and “Roaming through the Gloaming,” but The Prayer
of Jabez: Breaking Through to the Blessed Life and “All Through the Night.”
See also “Capitalization, Titles.”
Presentation Page
A presentation page is a separate page included at the beginning of some
gift books and Bibles on which are provided blank lines to indicate who is
giving the book to whom. A presentation page can be as simple as the words
To and From followed by blank rule lines to be filled in or as complex as
elaborately decorated pages, printed on elegant paper, and tipped in at the
2:58 PM
Page 310
310 | Presentation Page
beginning of the book. In some cases, the flyleaf can be specially printed as
a presentation page. Occasionally, the presentation page can take the place
of the half title page.
Presentation pages can be prepared for special occasions, such as graduations, weddings, and baptisms, the text of which can include blank lines on
which can be written such things as the date, location, witnesses, and other
pertinent information. A wedding Bible or a graduation gift book should
almost certainly include a presentation page.
Print-on-demand (POD) refers to a method of book production that combines online downloadability with the aesthetic appeal of actual books. In
the world of print-on-demand, the publisher does not need to store large
print-runs in warehouses nor does the bookstore have to stock books on the
shelves; rather, the publisher stores the text on a downloadable computer
file, which can then be printed and bound on a special printing-and-binding
device at a bookstore, a POD packager, or other central location.
At the time of this writing, print-on-demand technology is capable of producing relatively inexpensive paperback books, though they are still slightly
more expensive than their traditional-print counterparts and trim sizes are
generally limited to the standard trade-paper formats. Cheaper books in a
larger variety of formats could well be possible in the near future. So far,
print-on-demand has not threatened to replace traditional publishing, but it
has become a serious alternative for many companies who wish to print but
not to pay the high costs of inventory.
Author Aspects. Print-on-demand technology has received mixed reviews from
authors. On one hand, it can prolong a book’s availability, allowing readers
to order copies long after the traditional print copies of the book have gone
out of print. On the other hand, this prolonged availability can at times prevent authors from getting their rights back from the publishers so they can
resell the book elsewhere. The book remains in a kind of “in-print limbo” in
which only the potential of the printed book exists, not actual copies.
In the long run, as print-on-demand becomes more efficient, it should
lower the cost of producing books and give the reader a greater variety from
which to choose. It is especially valuable for small presses and niche publishers, who can avoid the high costs of warehousing large print runs.
2:58 PM
Page 311
Problem Words, A List of Common | 311
Problem Words, A List of Common
The following is a list of recommended styles for words that are for one reason or another often problematic for writers, proofreaders, and editors. Also see
“Brand Names,” “Computer- and Internet-Related Words,” “Gender-Accurate
Language,” “Hyphenation,” “Misspelled Personal Names, Commonly,” and
“Misspelled Words, A List of Commonly.”
Adrenalin—pharmaceutical trade name
adrenaline—body chemical
adviser—not advisor
A-frame (house)
air force, the
Air Force, US
anticommunist (n. and adj.)
appendixes—not appendices
arabic numeral
army, the
Army, US
Asian—not Oriental in referring to people
babysit, babysitter (no hyphen)
bestseller, bestselling (n. and adj.)—this is
contrary to Webster’s, which lists best
seller and best-selling
Bible study (n. and adj., no hyphen)
black (racial designation, lowercase in most
BlackBerry (hand-held computer)
born-again (adj.)
café—note acute accent
cell phone (two words, short for cellular
communist (adj.)
Communist (n.)
Congo (not the Congo)
copyedit (v.), copyediting
counseled—one l
counseling—one l
C-section—but note: cesarean section
Daddy, Dad—direct address
daddy, dad—indirect reference
Dark Ages, the
Depression, the—but a depression
diagramed—one m; but diagrammable
disc (compact disc, DVD, SACD, or
phonograph record)
disk (computer hard drive or floppy disk)
DJ—capped with no periods; or spell out
Down syndrome—rather than the former
usage, Down’s syndrome
Dr Pepper—soft drink; no period after Dr
Earth Mother
East Coast
Encyclopaedia Britannica—note the older ae
form (but not ligature æ)
facade—the cedilla on the c is now
commonly dropped
far-out (adj.)
2:58 PM
Page 312
312 | Problem Words, A List of Common
fiancé (m.)
fiancée (f.)
flannelgraph—one word
free world—lc
full-time (adj. and adv.), otherwise, full time
good-bye—though goodbye is becoming
more common and acceptable
Gothic (style of art or type)
gothic novel
Greater Chicago
grown-up (n. and adj.)
hangout (n.)
hang-up (n.)
Harper & Row—publisher preferred
ampersand; now called HarperCollins
(with no space)
Harper’s—magazine; note possessive
health care (two words as both n. and adj.)
Hispanic (preferred to Latin American)
Holocaust—capped when it refers to Nazi
murder of Jews
indexes (not indices)
InterVarsity Christian Fellowship—name of
campus organization
InterVarsity Press—American publisher
Iron Curtain
italic type
Keystone Cops (capped)
kidnapped, kidnapper, kidnapping
latchkey child
Latin American (see Hispanic)
layman, laymen
layperson, laypeople
laywoman, laywomen
life’s work
Lloyds—banker; no apostrophe
Lloyd’s of London—insurer; note
mah-jongg—Chinese tile game; note
hyphen and gg
maître d’, short for maître d’hôtel
Marines, US
matins (US)
mattins (UK)
mid—set closed, as in midcentury or
midterm, unless followed by numeral or
compound, as in mid-1800s or midnineteenth century (see “Prefixes” for
more details)
middle age
middle-aged (adj.)
Middle Ages, the
Midwest, midwestern
M & M—candy brand name, note
ampersand, spaces, and no periods
Mother, Mommy, Mom (direct address)
mother, mommy, mom (indirect reference)
naive, or naïve—the umlaut is now
commonly dropped
Native American (American Indian)
2:58 PM
Page 313
Problem Words, A List of Common | 313
native American (person born in America)
Navy, US
never-never land—imaginary place, from
Peter Pan; note lowercase
New World
New Year’s Day
9/11 attacks (or September 11 attacks, but
not nine-eleven or nine-one-one)
Novocain—trade name for anesthetic
novocaine—generic chemical name for
Old World
Oriental (see Asian)
part-time (n., adj., and adv.)
Ping-Pong—trademark; capped and
hyphenated as both adj. and n.
proof text
renaissance, a
Renaissance, the
résumé, or resumé—note acute accents
Rolls-Royce—trade name; note hyphen.
roman numeral
roman type
shofar—Hebrew ram’s horn; note: the plural
is “shofroth”
South (Civil War)
Stryker frame—special bed for spinal-injured
patients; note cap S
Sunday school (n. and adj.)
teenage, teenager
Third World
toward (usually no final s in US style)
traveling, traveled
T-shirt—T is capped
T square—note no hyphen
twentieth century (n.), but twentiethcentury (adj.)
Ukraine (not the Ukraine)
V-8—brand name of vegetable juice
V-eight—eight-cylinder engine; V is capped;
eight spelled out
Vietnam, Vietnamese
V-neck—V is capped
Volkswagen—note -en
V-six—V is capped
Warner Bros.—second word is always
way-out (adj.)
Webster’s—italic with apostrophe when
referring to Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate
Dictionary, Eleventh Edition
West Coast
white (racial designation, lowercased in
most contexts)
word processor
world’s fair—note possessive
World War I, World War II (not World War
One and World War Two)
worshiped, worshiper, worshiping
X-ray—verb (sometimes lowercased) and
noun; note hyphen
2:58 PM
Page 314
314 | Prodigal
Because of its long association with the parable of the prodigal son, the
word prodigal is mistakenly thought to mean “wandering,” “straying,” or
“disobedient.” The word in fact means “wasteful,” “excessive,” and “lavish,” and it is not necessarily a term of condemnation. It can suggest “bounteousness,” as in its close cognate, prodigality. For example, Nature’s riches
at harvest time can be described as prodigal, though prodigious (which suggests not quite as much excessiveness) would be the more conventional word.
A careful writer, therefore, should pay attention to the shades of meaning
of these words. To refer to a runaway child as a prodigal is only true if that
child has spent lavishly or wastefully.
Does an author commit a sin when her fictional character uses vulgarity?
Does an editor commit a sin by allowing an author to use a four-letter word
in a book?
Christians must take seriously the biblical admonitions against coarse joking (Eph. 5:4), filthy language (Col. 3:8), and the misuse of God’s name
(Deut. 5:11), but when it comes to their use in writing, especially when those
very words are needed to convey character or authentic setting in fiction, for
instance, the issues are not entirely clear. Should offensive language of any
kind be universally forbidden in Christian writing? Should honest portrayals of sin be avoided in books?
No human language is devoid of fringe speech, that is, words used largely
to express extremes of pain, surprise, anger, and other emotions; create coarsely
humorous or grotesque effects; or shock the listener or reader. Authors and
editors alike should recognize not only the existence of “taboo words and
phrases” but also their occasional necessity in effective communication. As
many have noted, the writers of the Bible themselves freely used taboo language to make their points.
While such language offends some readers, individual words are, from a
linguistic standpoint, simply objective signifiers and therefore morally neutral. Thomas Aquinas said that objects (and one imagines he would have
included words) are neither good nor evil in themselves—only in the uses to
which they are put by fallen humans.
Preferring not to alienate prospective buyers, many religious publishers
request their authors to avoid all forms of taboo speech. When authors use
such expressions, editors routinely eliminate such language at the editorial
stage. This is wise if there is a likelihood of a deeply negative reaction among
the book’s ultimate audience. It is certainly counterproductive for any author
2:58 PM
Page 315
Profanity | 315
to alienate readers. If a moral consideration is at issue, it is usually not so
much in the words themselves as in the desire to avoid offending those who
have paid money for the book.
This tacit censorship runs up against the author’s First Amendment right
to free speech, although, in a larger sense, editors at all publishing houses,
secular and religious alike, make many decisions that are tantamount to censorship in an effort to accomplish the publisher’s goal of communicating
effectively to a given market. Ironically, many secular publishers censor an
author’s religious opinions (though they may euphemistically call it “toning
down”) if they are apt to offend a more general, nonsectarian readership.
The very nature of publishing is imbued with implicit censorship, beginning
with the fact that some manuscripts are accepted for publication and others
are not. Still these conflicting rights of authors and publishers are serious
matters, and it is best for the publisher and author to discuss them ahead
of time.
For practical purposes, taboo and fringe speech can be roughly divided
into six categories:
1. Profanity: using the names of persons of the Trinity in inappropriate
ways, commonly called “cursing” or “taking God’s name in vain.”
2. Scatology: narrowly defined as insensitive or coarse, slang terms for
bodily functions and waste products.
3. Venery: obscene words and expressions explicitly describing reproductive organs, body parts, or sexual acts.
4. Vulgar Interjections: taboo words used as expressions of sudden emotion. These are sometimes forms of profanity, scatology, or venery.
5. Vulgar Epithets: often colorful but socially unacceptable terms used
pejoratively to describe individual people.
6. Social Insensitivity: words and expressions that inherently communicate a derogatory attitude toward people because of their race, gender, ethnic background, physical or mental challenge, or sexual
orientation. This is elsewhere called “politically incorrect language”
or “hate speech.” (See “Ethnic and Racial Designations” and “Disability Designations.”)
The issues are complex. Authors and publishers must decide for themselves how restrictive or how liberal they wish to be on these issues, and publishers should state their policy and expectations clearly in their contracts so
that authors won’t be blindsided later.
The following guidelines outline a middle path, adopted by Zondervan,
which may be helpful to other producers of religious materials:
2:58 PM
Page 316
316 | Profanity
Zondervan does not allow its authors to use the most offensive examples
from any of those six categories listed above—that is, those words and phrases
recognized as strictly taboo by the largest proportion of Christian readers. The
word largest should be emphasized here, because there exists a sizable “second tier” of language—sometimes referred to as euphemisms or minced
oaths—that might offend some readers but not others. In such cases, our editors employ the criteria of appropriateness, of which there are two aspects.
First, is the language appropriate to the work itself? Is the taboo word necessary to convey a mood or an idea that cannot be conveyed otherwise? In fiction, particularly, strong language can be essential in characterizing people,
providing a sense of realism, and describing the true nature of sin and evil.
Second, is the language appropriate to the primary intended readership?
Not all books are for all readers. So we ask: Will the language be acceptable
in its context by the largest number of readers for whom this book is intended?
Obviously, judgment needs to be exercised, realizing, of course, that it may be
impossible—to say nothing of useless—to produce a book that is wholly inoffensive to every possible reader. Often an overdelicate social propriety, not biblical mandate, is at stake.
Beyond specific words and phrases, some readers are offended by mature situations and discussions of sensitive topics. Issues of immorality and sin are
central themes in many Christian books, especially fiction, and cannot be
addressed effectively without allowing for realistic portrayal. Again, the criteria of appropriateness to the work and to the intended audience are applied,
and judgment is used.
Ideally, such decisions cannot be made unilaterally by the editor or author
alone. They are best discussed with the publisher’s marketing experts and
salespeople, who have a professional investment in seeing that work succeeds
in reaching its audience. Such decisions might also be discussed with readers
themselves, by way of focus groups or marketing surveys.
No book can please every reader. Nor should an author or publisher’s goal
be to produce a perfectly inoffensive book. Since definitive guidelines for the
use of profanity, vulgar speech, and frank portrayals of evil are difficult to
formulate, the best procedure is for the author and publisher to confer about
the issues: Who will read the book? What are the costs of using offensive
language in terms of reader trust and sales? Can effective alternatives be
found for the offensive language?
These are difficult issues, but they must be confronted for the sake of the
health of religious communication.
2:58 PM
Page 317
Pronunciation Guide | 317
Despite its name, a book’s prologue is not part of the front matter but is
actually the first element of the body matter. It is a separate section, usually
falling immediately before the first chapter, in which the narrative background of the story is filled in. It is usually reserved for books of literary
quality, such as fiction, drama, biography, history, and other nonfiction narratives. Its purpose is to show “what went before” the main action of the
book, just as the epilogue informs the reader of what happened after the
main action of the book.
The prologue should not be about the book itself but should function as
a sort of pre–first chapter, filling in elements of the narrative before the story
proper begins. Otherwise, if written by the author, it should properly be
called a preface. A prologue is often written in the same voice as the rest of
the book, that is, in the narrator’s voice rather than the author’s, when those
voices are distinct. (See also “Foreword and Preface” and “Introduction.”)
Pronunciation Guide
Although this manual can’t hope to provide pronunciation helps for all
the possible difficulties, the following list gives a few of the more common
problem words found in Christian life and worship. They are a mix of proper
names and biblical, historical, and contemporary words.
Baal—BAY-ul (pref.); or BAH-ahl
Babel—BAY-bul (pref.); or, pronounced as babble
Barth (Karl)—BART
Bede (the Venerable)—BEED
Böhme, Jacob—BURM, YAH-cub
Bonhoeffer, Dietrich—bon-HAWF-er, DEE-trick
Brueghel—BREW-gul (sometimes spelled Breughel )
Buber (Martin)—BOO-ber (not BYOO-ber)
Buechner (Frederick)—BEEK-ner
Caedmon—CADD-mun (not CAYD-mun)
Celtic (church)—KEL-tik (not SELL-tick)
Chardin, Teilhard de—char-DA(N), tay-YAR duh
Chrysostom—KRIS-us-tum (accent on first syllable)
Columba (Saint)—kuh-LUM-buh (accent on second syllable)
Comenius (John Amos)—koh-MEEN-ee-us (accent on second syllable)
de Gasztold, Carmen Bernos—de GAHZ-toe, CAR-men BARE-no
Hammarskjöld, Dag—HAHM-ur-shuld, DAHG
Héloïse—AY-lu-weez (the H is silent)
2:58 PM
Page 318
318 | Pronunciation Guide
Kempe (Margery)—KEMP (one syllable)
Kuyper, Abraham—KY-per, AHB-ruh-hahm
Lucado (Max)—lu-KAY-do
Salome—suh-LOH-mee (pref.); or SAL-oh-may
slough—SLUE (rhymes with clue, in the US); SLAOU (rhymes with cow, in the
UK)—as in Bunyan’s “Slough of Despond” in The Pilgrim’s Progress, and
meaning a swamp or bog. The pronunciation SLUFF is a different word
altogether, meaning “to shed.”
Vondel, Joost van den—FOHN-dul, Yoost vahn den
Wangerin (Walter)—WAHNG-rin
Weil, Simone—VEY, see-MOAN
Wycliffe (John)—WICK-liff (not WHY-cliff)
The average 200-page book contains about 500,000 characters, that is, a
half-million letters, spaces, and punctuation marks. Each one must be in
exactly the right place if the book is to be error-free. A book that is 99 percent accurate will still contain five thousand typographical errors—about
twenty-five errors per page. A book that is 99.9 percent accurate will still
contain five hundred errors, or about two-and-a-half per page.
Because many casual readers spot a typo from time to time, they often
feel that they would make excellent proofreaders—not realizing, of course,
that proofreading is far more than just catching typos. Professional proofreaders can tell you in detail exactly how demanding and frustrating proofreading can be.
Even though proofreading is one of the most important jobs in publishing, proofreaders tend to get more recognition for their lapses than for their
successes, and even though perfection is the standard, even experienced professionals can be expected to miss about one error every fifty pages.
Computers and Proofreading. Not long ago proofreaders feared their jobs were
destined for extinction. Spell-checking software, they were told, would soon
do to them what PCs had done to the typewriter. With the flush of confidence that accompanied the explosion of desk-top publishing systems, many
techno-pundits predicted the demise of proofreading as a profession.
Now, more than twenty-five years into the computer-publishing revolution, proofreaders remain as invaluable as ever, though their function has
changed in some interesting and unexpected ways. Computers catch the obvious typos and some grammar errors, but they have serious limitations.
Imagine that a 200-page book has a thousand errors in a manuscript—about
five per page. Even the best spell-checkers and grammar programs will only
catch a certain percentage of those. Let’s say that the spell-checker can
identify 99 percent of them. In a 200-page book that means that there will
still be one error every twenty pages that the human proofreader is expected
2:58 PM
Page 319
Proofreading | 319
to catch. It takes a proofreader as much time to find an error every twenty
pages as it does to find five errors per page. The proofreader can’t “ease up”
simply because he or she knows there will be fewer errors in the book. Their
tendency, in fact, will be to read even more closely and take more time
because the errors, in a sense, will be harder to find.
But that just takes spelling errors into consideration. Computers can’t find
many contextual errors (singulars and plurals, for instance), mixed homonyms,
format problems, and problems of word division.
Few companies now employ in-house proofreading staff. At the beginning of computerization, many publishers optimistically hired on-screen
proofreaders, only to find, for whatever reasons, that such proofreading
tended to be less accurate than its paper counterpart. Not only can some format problems be best identified on hard copy, but the simple word-for-word
reading seems more accurate.
Like so many other jobs, proofreading has become largely an outsourced
occupation. Most proofreaders are self-employed, and they combine such
traditional functions as checking for correct spelling and punctuation with
newer computerized functions, such as checking typesetting codes and managing spell-checking software.
Single-Copy Proofreading. Although paper continues to be the most common
medium for proofreading, many changes have taken place due to computerization. The most noticeable has been the shift from double- to single-copy
proofreading. Traditionally, a proofreader compared the newly typeset galleys (live copy) against an edited manuscript (dead copy). Now that editors
and copy editors routinely perform their functions on the computer, often
with no revision tracking, an authoritative paper copy showing the changes
that have been made may not even exist. Computerization has rung the death
knell of dead copy.
The proofreader, therefore, must become proficient at single-copy proofreading (also called dry proofreading, straight proofreading, or railroading),
which is reading galley proofs with no manuscript against which to check.
Single-copy reading can actually be more accurate because it allows the
proofreader’s eyes to focus solely on the live copy and eliminates the fatigue
of constantly shifting the eyes between two copies. Still, many proofreaders
tend to speed up when reading a single copy, a tendency that can result in
greater inaccuracy. In any case, this new way of proofreading has made new
demands on the proofreader.
Traditional proofreaders, when asked to read single copy, are often frustrated by not having a manuscript against which to check. They are now
required to know more; they need to think more like editors by understanding just what an author intends to say, but they must also maintain their
2:58 PM
Page 320
320 | Proofreading
obsession with detail. The guides available to them to answer their questions
are the following:
1. Dictionary. Most proofreaders who read single copy find they use the
dictionary far more than when reading against dead copy. Proofreaders
should get into the habit of looking up every word, even the most common, the spellings of which they are not completely certain. The proofreader should obtain a copy of the publisher’s preferred dictionary and
use it often.
Proofreaders should also be aware that the computerized spellcheckers used by some publishers are often programmed to reference
a dictionary other than the one the publisher purports to use for its
house style. The differences—in such things as word breaks, first usage,
alternate spellings, and hyphenation—can be significant. Proofreaders
should always verify that they are, in fact, using the publisher’s preferred dictionary, regardless of whether the publisher’s spell-checker is
being used.
2. Style Manual. Most publishers conform to one of the popular manuals of style, such as The Chicago Manual of Style. They will also commonly provide proofreaders with their own in-house style guides that
summarize major rules and indicate variations from their chosen manual of style. The proofreader must be certain to have access to, and be
thoroughly familiar with, these references.
3. The Style Sheet. Since editors often do not have a paper manuscript on
which to indicate style decisions (for instance, whether to capitalize the
deity pronoun or to use the serial comma), a style sheet should be used
to inform a proofreader of these decisions, especially when they depart
from the publisher’s accepted dictionary or manual of style. Style sheets
have always been an important strategy for communicating style decisions to everyone involved in a manuscript’s development; style sheets
are even more important for the proofreader of straight copy.
If the proofreader has not been provided with an existing style sheet
for the project, he or she should compile one and pass it along to the
editor when the proofing is completed. That way, the proofreader can
annotate all questions of fact, style, spelling, and grammar that might
recur. When a style sheet is provided, the proofreader should feel free
to add to it, so that the style sheet is a fluid document, charting the stylistic oddities of a book.
4. Common Sense. Proofreaders proficient at single-copy reading will tell
you that they have had to develop a certain caginess. They learn to
“read with the flow” of the manuscript. Even when no style sheet is
provided, they can still figure out where variations from accepted style
2:58 PM
Page 321
Proofreading | 321
were deliberately made. In a sense, they learn to second-guess both the
author and the editor, though this, in turn, can lead to the added problem of incorrect second-guesses. The single-copy reader must learn
when to query. With no authoritative manuscript, the potential exists
for proofreaders to query too often, when in fact they might be able to
answer their own questions by reading further in the manuscript.
Compensating for Spell-Checkers. The best proofreaders have learned to complement the computer rather than confront it; that is, they learn to specialize in what computer spell-checkers don’t do well. For instance, since
spell-checkers consistently catch the classic spelling bugbears (anoint rather
than annoint, and millennium rather than millenium), proofreaders have
learned to watch for errors that computerized spell-checkers are generally
blind to:
1. Homonyms. So far, spell-checkers can’t read contexts particularly well,
though they have been getting more sophisticated in recent years.
Homonyms used in the wrong place, such as too, to, and two, are usually invisible to the spell-checker, and because English has an extraordinarily high number of such words, the proofreader needs to be
especially careful in making sure the correct option is used.
2. Right Words in Wrong Contexts. Spell-checkers know when a word is
spelled wrong, but by and large they can’t identify correctly spelled
words used in the wrong place. For instance: Wee fold thee truths too
bee self-evident . . .
3. Transpositions. Similar to right words in wrong contexts is the very
common problem of transposition—adjacent words, the order of
which has been reversed. Transpositions can be particularly hard to
find because the mind tends to make sense of them unconsciously. For
instance: I wish I had than more one life to give for my country.
4. Font Changes. Spell-checkers just don’t care. Italic, bold, and roman
are all the same to them (as it should be—who would want the spellchecker to flag you every time the font changed?). Proofreaders need to
read especially carefully when the font changes—or when it should
change but hasn’t.
5. Word Division. This is a particularly troublesome problem because
spell-checkers often are programmed to check for word division, but
the computer’s style is often at odds with the publisher’s. Many spellcheckers accept two-letter breaks (tru-ly), while most publishers do not.
By the same token, spell-checkers may be programmed according to
the word-division style of one dictionary while the publisher may not
accept that style.
2:58 PM
Page 322
322 | Proofreading
6. Formats. Most book readers don’t realize that checking page format is
one of the proofreader’s most time-consuming tasks—one that spellcheckers don’t even pretend to check. Here is a short list: wrong folios,
wrong or misplaced running heads or footers; wrong fonts; wrong hierarchy of headings and subheads; consistency of placement for all the
elements; inconsistent leading between elements of type.
Proofreading Tips. Here are a few tips for the proofreader in this age of singlecopy proofreading:
1. Avoid speeding up when reading a single copy. Some proofreaders even
read aloud to keep from going too fast. Read word-for-word, or even
syllable-for-syllable, look up all unfamiliar words, and check them
2. Avoid getting caught up in the story. Not only do dry proofreaders
tend to speed up, but because they are focusing more closely on a single
copy, a kind of hypnosis can occur. Proofreaders can easily become so
absorbed in a narrative that they will wake up four pages later to realize that they haven’t been looking for errors. If you find yourself enjoying the book, it may be a signal to reread.
3. Back up every time an error is found. Research shows that most errors
that proofreaders miss are in close proximity to other errors that the
proofreader caught. Every time an error is found, make it a habit to
back up one or two lines before continuing the reading.
4. Take a five-minute break every hour.
5. Keep a style sheet whenever the editor has not already provided you
with one. Or if the editor has given you a style sheet, feel free to add
more items to it. Note all unusual words and names and any special
grammar, punctuation, abbreviation, or symbol considerations. Also
keep track of fonts, leadings, and specification changes for different
elements of the book.
6. Be particularly careful about font changes. When italic material is
called for, use common sense to ascertain where the italics are to end.
Sometimes they will erroneously extend into copy that should be
7. Double-check all folios and running heads to make sure they are all in
the same font and consistent throughout the project.
8. Watch for flags. Flags are an editor’s, author’s, or compositor’s annotations not intended to be part of the final book. Often a proofreader
will assume that these obvious flags will be searched and caught by
the editor or typesetter when, in fact, these flags were already missed.
2:58 PM
Page 323
Proofreading | 323
The proofreader should mark anything, no matter how obvious, that
is not intended to appear in print.
9. Read syllable for syllable. Many people claim that letter-for-letter
proofreading (that is, letting the eye rest momentarily on each letter)
is the only accurate method. This is customary for the reading of small
amounts of copy, such as covers and flap copy, but it is too timeconsuming for text. Other people use a word-for-word approach (letting the eye rest momentarily on each word), but this is usually not
accurate enough. For general text proofreading, a syllable-for-syllable
style that allows the eye to rest on each syllabic element of a word is
10. Vocalization. Many proofreaders either say the words aloud as they
visually check them or, more often, “pronounce” them mentally. This
technique is called vocalization. The pronunciation, however, is not
standard; it should vocalize every letter of the word, including silent
letters. For instance, knight is vocalized “kuh-NIKT,” pronouncing
the silent k as well as the silent gh. This is done to verify that all silent
letters, or otherwise tricky elements, are present.
Miscellaneous. Certain typefaces have idiosyncrasies which the proofreader and
editor should be aware of. For instance, some Souvenir types, especially if
slightly kerned, run r and n so closely together they may appear as an m.
Baskerville and Bembo types usually seem smaller when compared with other
faces in the same point size. Some faces have ligatures that don’t quite run
together. In many typefaces an f followed by a quotation mark, question
mark, or close parenthesis will require a hair space (hr#) inserted between
them, as will some opening parentheses followed by a capital J.
Tools of the Trade. Finally, beyond a pencil, the proofreader needs a number of
other tools, most of which are the proofreader’s responsibility if he or she is
a professional freelancer. Below is a list of some essential tools and some
optional ones.
Essential Tools
The publisher’s preferred dictionary (Zondervan recommends MerriamWebster’s Collegiate Dictionary, Eleventh Edition)
The publisher’s preferred style manual (Zondervan recommends both The
Chicago Manual of Style, Fifteenth Edition and The Christian Writer’s Manual of
The publisher’s preferred Bible version (a freelancer’s library should contain, at
least, the King James Version, the NIV, and the NRSV)
2:58 PM
Page 324
324 | Proofreading
Optional Tools (handy but not essential)
a perpetual calendar (for checking dates and days of the week, past and future;
these circular calendars can be found in science stores, in some Asian gift
shops, and online)
ruled cards (these can be made from a piece of clear, thick plastic, along the
top of which a strip of black tape has been placed, about a quarter inch
wide; this allows the reader to isolate the current line but also to view the
lines that follow)
calculator, to do the math
an analytical concordance (to check spellings in Bible references)
Merriam-Webster’s Biographical Dictionary (a pocket edition is available; in this
and the following three items, Merriam-Webster publications are
recommended because they are generally compatible in spelling and style
with their Collegiate Dictionary)
Merriam-Webster’s Geographical Dictionary (a pocket edition is available)
Merriam-Webster’s Medical Dictionary (a pocket edition is available)
Merriam-Webster’s Dictionary of the Law
one-volume desk encyclopedia
dictionary of quotations
Proof Stages.
Since the advent of word processing, there can be as many as six proofreading stages in book production: printout, first proofs, second proofs or
repros, page corrections, printer-ready disc (or camera copy), and silverprints
(also called blues). These steps will vary from publisher to publisher. For
those publishers who do follow these six stages, the printout stage is often
skipped. When a printout is done, it is usually checked by the author. First
proofs are assigned to a proofreader and are often checked simultaneously
by the author. Second proofs are also assigned to a proofreader. The last three
stages are usually checked by the editor in charge of the project.
1. Printouts. In computerized editing, printouts are sent to the author at the
editor’s discretion. This is usually done before first proofs have been run,
and this step allows an author a chance to review the book for changes before
seeing it in proofs. Printouts are especially helpful when heavy editing has
been done or when many revisions are expected. Often scheduling does not
allow time for a printout stage, in which case the author will be sent a copy
of the first proofs on which to check for errors.
2. First Proofs. Ideally all mistakes should be discovered and corrected by the
end of the first-proof stage, if not in the preceding printout stage.
2:58 PM
Page 325
Proofreading | 325
In traditional proofreading, the proofreader checks the proofs (live copy)
against the manuscript (dead copy) to ensure that proof copy corresponds
word for word with the edited manuscript. With the advent of computer
typesetting, however, it is not always possible to provide the proofreader
with an accurate manuscript against which to check the typeset copy. In this
case the proofreader must read the proofs without reference to an authoritative manuscript. This entails checking the accuracy of spelling against the
dictionary, and checking for correct style against the publisher’s accepted
manual of style and any other references provided by the publisher. The
proofreader is responsible to see that all typographical specifications (specs)
called for by the editor are carried out correctly.
Correcting typographical errors is an important part of a proofreader’s
objective but by no means the only one. Just as important are errors in formatting. These kinds of errors should be marked in first proofs:
Poor spacing (between letters, words, illustrations, lines, and headings)
Wrong alignment or indentations
Incorrect placement, size, or typeface of headings
Wrong typeface or size of text area
Misspellings (refer to Webster’s Eleventh)
Footnotes out of order
Incorrect reduction of footnotes or extracts
Poor word divisions
Makeup problems, that is, less than a full line on the first line of text, fewer
than two lines below a heading at the bottom of a page, or fewer than four
lines on a page ending a chapter
Every correction on a proof requires two marks; one in the text and one
in the margin. A caret or slash is usually used to locate the error in the text;
the appropriate proofreader’s mark is then made in the margin. For standard
symbols, see “Proofreading Symbols, Standard.” Proofreaders should flag in
the margin any cross-references within the book so that they can be filled in
on final pages. They should also flag places where artwork (illustrations,
charts, figures, and so on) will be needed.
The proofreader should use a red or blue pen (not black) and initial each
proof page. This will certify that the proofreading is complete.
Ascertaining the style of each project and being consistent within that style
are important parts of the proofreader’s job because not all projects will conform to the most recognized or standard usage.
Proofreaders are limited in their right to make editorial changes but are
encouraged to query the editor if a passage seems unclear in content or grammatical form or if factual information seems false. Proofreaders query the
2:58 PM
Page 326
326 | Proofreading
editor by placing a question mark to the far right of the margin, concisely
noting the problem or suggested correction. Queries should be circled, and
the page on which they occur should be marked with a paper clip or a sticky
note. When the proofreader has a query, he or she should call the editor’s
attention to it by writing on the page in a different color ink. Marking queries
on the pages themselves in a different color ink is preferable to affixing PostIt notes with queries written on them, since such tags can easily become separated from the pages. One approach might be to write the query in the
margin in a different color ink and then attach a blank tag to the page to
help the editor or compositor find it. In any case, avoid writing a query on
an adhesive tag that could possibly fall off the page. If a query involves more
than this type of short note, to avoid cluttering the proofs proofreaders can
prepare a query sheet indicating the page and line on which their question
3. Second Proofs. At the second-proof stage the proofreader sees that each correction called for on first proofs has been made properly; if it has, it should
be checked off. Usually the proofreader will be provided with both the first
proofs and the author’s corrections.
After checking that all corrections have been made, the proofreader reads
through the entire project, marking any errors overlooked on first proofs
and checking for sense, proper arrangement of material, and incorrect
hyphenations that may have resulted from the previous corrections. The
proofreader does not read line for line against the first proofs or the author’s
copy but may refer to either. Any inserted material that has not been proofread before this point should be carefully scrutinized.
Second proofs normally consist of completed pages with folios and running heads; these are checked for proper sequence, position, and typeface.
The order and numbering of footnotes, both in the text and in the list of
notes, is double-checked at this stage. The proofreader also makes sure all
chapter titles and running heads are consistent with the titles given in the
table of contents and inserts correct page numbers into the table of contents.
Cross-references in the text are also filled in by locating the page reference
in the manuscript and noting the material referred to and then finding this
material and its final page number in the second proofs. The proofreader
spot-checks page lengths and scrutinizes overall appearance, especially noting consistency in spacing. Queries should be few at this stage.
4. Page Corrections. Often when a correction is called for on second proofs,
only the affected pages are reset and proofread. These corrected pages are
usually proofread by the editor, who verifies that the corrections have been
properly made. This involves looking up the page in the second proofs on
which each correction is called for and scanning the material around the cor-
2:58 PM
Page 327
Proofreading | 327
rection to ensure that no additional errors have been introduced. These corrected pages are then inserted into the final proofs by the typesetter.
5. Format Check. Once all the corrected pages have been assembled, the copy
is checked one last time for accuracy. The overall page appearance is the main
concern at this stage. The editor checks that all page corrections have been
accurately made. The running heads and folios are examined for order and
placement and are compared with the table of contents for consistency.
Copyright information is double-checked. Chapter titles and artwork that
have been pasted in are checked for proper placement and general appearance. The length of facing pages is closely examined. Many times the editor
reads the bottom line of a page and the top line of the following page to
ensure correct order of copy. This is the best opportunity to look at the big
picture: Is the title correct on the title page? Is the author’s name spelled correctly? Do the page numbers given on the table of contents really correspond
to the actual chapters?
Once everything is deemed accurate and complete, the data is saved to a
printer-ready disk and sent to the printer, or, in the case of noncomputerized
printing, the camera copy is sent to the printer.
6. Silverprints. Also called blueprints or “blues,” silverprints are contact prints
made from negatives by the printer. These prints are checked by the editor
for general appearance. After the editor makes sure that everything is in order
and that all corrections have been made, the book is ready for the press. No
changes can be made after the editor has approved silverprints because the
next step is platemaking for the printing press.
Black spots and spots in letters caused by faulty negatives are circled for
removal. Signature marks, located on the spine of each signature and used for
collating the book, are checked for proper placement. Also, the pages should
be checked at this stage to make sure that they are in the correct numerical
Problems that may not show clearly on camera-ready copy are often easily spotted in silverprints. For instance, inconsistency in space between a
pasted-up line and adjacent lines, space between a running head and text, or
straightness of pasted-in material are problems often not found until the silverprint stage. But changes on silverprints are costly and involve shooting
new negatives. In fact, corrections become more troublesome and expensive
to make with each successive stage of production, so it is important to examine proofs and materials carefully each time a project comes into the hands
of an editor or proofreader. When corrections do need to be made on silverprints, the editor should mark the problem clearly and attach a paperclip to
the page so that the long side of the paperclip extends onto the page of the
2:58 PM
Page 328
328 | Proofreading Abbreviations and Terms
Proofreading Abbreviations and Terms
Authors are sometimes mystified by the arcane terminology that proofreaders and editors have developed over the centuries. Here are a few of the
most common, along with their meanings.
aa—author’s alteration; any change made by the author after the type has
been set
agate—a type size of about 5-1/2 points; once used in newspaper classified ads
to save space
agate line—a vertical measurement of space in newspaper and advertising
layout. Fourteen agate lines equals one vertical inch of space.
all caps—all capital letters
alley—the vertical white space between two columns of type
alphabet length—the length of a typeface’s alphabet, usually in 6 point.
Alphabet lengths of different faces can then be compared for copy-fit
alternate characters—alternatives for certain characters in some fonts. Alternate
characters include swash characters, ligatures, kerned characters, and letters
with longer or shorter ascenders and/or descenders.
antiqua—the German term for roman type
ascender—the stroke that ascends higher than the letter’s x-height. Capital
letters are considered ascenders as are the following lowercase letters: b, d,
f, h, k, l, t.
author’s proof—copy sent to the author for correction, often after all
typographic errors have been corrected
back matter—same as rear matter; the portion of the book after the main text
bad break—a word that is incorrectly broken over a line; abbreviated bb
baseline—the imaginary line on which a line of type sits
b/b, or b to b—baseline to baseline (in measuring leading)
black letter—a now little-used style of type; also called Old English, gothic, or
German type
bleed—a graphic device in which an image or type is allowed to run off the
edge of the printed page
blurb—promotional copy endorsing the book, used on the cover or in a
body matter—the main text of the book, excluding the front and back matter
body type—type used for continuous reading, also called text type
border—any rule or decorative frame placed around the text on the page
box—a rule line placed around type or around an image
box head—a heading set within rules
break out—a quotation, sometimes extracted from the text itself, that is
printed in display size for emphasis; sometimes boxed or placed between
rules; also called a drop quote or pull quote
bullet—a typographic dot used to highlight elements in a list or to separate
items on a line
2:58 PM
Page 329
Proofreading Abbreviations and Terms | 329
b&w—black and white
callout—the symbol or superior number inserted in a text to mark a foot- or
endnote reference; also, a mark that a proofreader places in the margin as a
reminder to check something (such as a footnote reference) later
caret—the proofreading symbol that means “insert”; looks like an inverted v
cast off (noun)—a sample of either the book’s design or the rough calculation
of the number of pages in the final book
cast off (verb)—to estimate the number of pages in the final printed book
c/lc—capital and lowercase
comp—comprehensive layout
c.q.—a marginal indication to the typesetter that a seemingly misspelled or
odd word is actually correct; originally a Morse code abbreviation for call to
quarters; in text, sic is used in the same way
c/sc—capitals and small capitals
cx, cxs—correction, corrections
dead copy, also called foul proof—old copies of the manuscript that have been
superceded by newer, corrected copies, called live copy
descender—the stroke that descends below the baseline of a letter. The
following letters are the descenders: g, j, p, q, y.
ea—editor’s alteration; any change made by the editor after the type has been
endpaper—the piece of paper glued to the inside of a book’s cover
extract—a quotation set apart from the main text, usually in a smaller type size
and with a narrower measure
fl l—flush left
fl r—flush right
flush—not indented
front matter—the portion of the book before the main text
H&J—hyphenation and justification
galley—any copy of the manuscript, usually before it has been flowed into
typeset pages
gutter—the white space that runs along the interior of the book’s spine
between the text printed on the facing pages; the fold in a newspaper
hanging head—a running head that is set closer to the outer edge of the page
than the text itself
hanging indentation—when the first line of a paragraph is set left and the
remaining lines are indented.
head, heading—a line of type that stands as a title or description of a portion
of the book
ital—italic type; the kind of type that slants to the right
jacket—dust jacket; the paper cover of a hardcover book
justify—to align type vertically on both the left and right margins
kill—to delete, either from a copy or from a digital archive
lc—lowercase; small (non-capital) letters
leaders—a horizontal series of dots intended to lead the eye from one element
to another
2:58 PM
Page 330
330 | Proofreading Abbreviations and Terms
leading—the horizontal space between lines of type
letterpress—type of printing in which inked metal type prints directly on the
linecut—a black-and-white line illustration
makeup—the correct positioning of the elements on a page (a process now
margins—the blank areas that frame the text
masthead—a printed list of a periodical’s editors and production personnel,
along with other essential publication information
measure—the width of a single column of text
mechanicals—the final pasted up pages ready for printing (a process now
wholly computerized)
nut—an en space (term now antiquated)
OCR—optical character recognition
OE—Old English (black letter) type
OF—Old Face type
offset—a printing method in which a rubber blanket transfers an inked image
to the paper
orphan—a broken word of four or fewer characters on a line by itself
OS—old style type
pe—printer’s error
perfect binding—a binding process in which the folds are trimmed off the
signatures and the loose pages are held together with glue
pi, px—pica, picas; a unit of printer’s measurement. A pica is 12 points, and 6
picas is just a hair short of one inch.
point—1/12 of a pica, and about 1/72 of an inch
proof—a rough copy, often in low resolution, of printed material used to check
for errors
pt, pts—point, points
QWERTY—standard keyboard layout
rear matter—the portion of the book after the main text
recto—right-hand page, with an odd number
repro—reproduction copy
rg rt, ragged right—type copy not aligned on the right margin
roman type—type that stands straight up
rule, rule line—a printed line
running head, running footer—a line at the top or bottom of a page bearing
the book title, chapter title, author name, or folio
sig, or signature—a large printed sheet that, when folded, makes up several
book pages (usually in multiples of 16 or 32 pages)
sink, or sinkage—dropping the text area lower on the page
slug—line spacing (term is now antiquated)
2:58 PM
Page 331
Proofreading Symbols, Standard | 331
spread—two facing pages
ss, or s/s—same size
stet—Latin for “let it stand”
stripping—putting together the film to make book pages (now largely
subhead—the heading subordinate to a larger heading
subscript—letters or number that are set lower than the baseline of type
superscript—letters or numbers that are set higher than the baseline of type
text type—the typeface used for the text of a book
type page—the text and graphic area of the page, excluding the margins
typo—typographical error
uc—uppercase; capital letters
u/lc, or u&lc—upper- and lowercase
verso—left-hand page, with an even number
wf—wrong font
widow—four or fewer lines of type on a page at the end of a chapter
x-height—the height of the letter x in any given font. The following letters are
all the x-height letters in the alphabet: a, c, e, i, m, n, o, r, s, u, v, w, x, z.
Proofreading Symbols, Standard
2:58 PM
Page 332
332 | Proofreading Symbols, Standard
Proofs: Author’s Responsibilities
Most publishers provide an author with proofs at one or more stages of
the manuscript’s development. This section deals with the author’s responsibility in regard to proofreading and checking that all corrections have been
made and that the editorial changes are acceptable. For a more detailed
description of proof-handling procedures and the responsibilities of the
proofreader, see “Proofreading.”
2:58 PM
Page 333
Prophecy and Prophesy | 333
Production Stages. Although every publisher adheres to a slightly different routine, an edited manuscript generally passes through the following stages in
the production process: pre-typeset galleys (sometimes called printouts),
design and sample pages, composition, first proofs (also called first typeset
galleys), second proofs (also called second typeset galleys or final proofs),
printer’s disk or camera copy, platemaking, press, silverprints, and binding.
Some publishers provide authors with galleys from one or more of the
various proof stages. In these cases, it is still important that the author make
major changes in the earlier, preferably pre-typeset, stages rather than in the
later stages.
1. Pre-typeset Galleys. An editor may supply the author with a set of pretypeset galleys, which are usually nothing more than a hard-copy printout of
the editor’s revised version of the manuscript, and indicate a date by which the
author’s revisions to those galleys should be returned. This is the computerage equivalent of providing the author with a hand-marked-up copy of the
edited manuscript for response and correction.
Computerized pre-typeset galleys may include “revision tracking,” that
is, the editor’s annotations of all the changes that were made, but this is not
always done since revision tracking can actually be an obstacle to checking
the accuracy of copy.
The use of these pre-typeset galleys is an effective way to control costs as
an author and editor polish a manuscript, especially when the author’s or
editor’s revisions are expected to be extensive. In a sense, the author and editor are working to make the manuscript “letter perfect” before flowing the
text into the designed and typeset format.
2. First Proofs. Often the editor will furnish the author with a set of first
proofs (the first set of typeset pages) and indicate a deadline for returning
them. Extensive or frequent revisions at this stage tend to be more costly,
and as stipulated in the author’s contract, these costs may be charged to the
author if they exceed stated limits.
3. Final Proofs. An author will usually receive second or final proofs only
if the book calls for an index. In this case, the author will be given a deadline by which to complete the compilation of the index. Manuscript revisions
(other than the correction of typographical errors) are usually not permitted
at this stage.
Prophecy and Prophesy
Be careful to distinguish between prophecy (a noun) and prophesy (a
A false prophet may prophesy, but will his prophecy come to pass?
2:58 PM
Page 334
334 | Protestant
The term is capped when referring to one of the denominations established during the Reformation to oppose the primacy of the pope or when
referring to any other later, non-Catholic denomination that believes in justification by faith, the priesthood of all believers, and the Bible as the primary source of revelation. Protestant also refers to a member of such a
denomination. The term Protestantism refers to that form of belief as a
The term Protestant should not be used simply to mean non-Catholic, since
that ignores the fact that Eastern Orthodoxy is both a non-Catholic and nonProtestant form of Christian belief. (See also “Eastern Orthodox Versus
Orthodox” and “Catholic.”) A Protestant, in other words, is a Christian
believer who is neither Catholic nor Orthodox.
Psalms, Alternate Numbering of the
Writers, readers, proofreaders, and editors are often surprised to stumble
upon the fact that there are two numbering schemes for some of the Psalms,
one based on the Hebrew Bible and the other on the Septuagint. Care must
be taken when quoting some Jewish and classic Christian authors’ opinions
about certain psalms because they may actually be referring to a different
psalm altogether.
Some Roman Catholic Bibles formerly took their cue from the Vulgate,
which followed the Septuagint numbering, in which all but twelve of the
psalms are assigned a number one less than the number assigned to those
psalms in most Protestant Bibles, such as the KJV and NIV. Many contemporary Roman Catholic Bibles, such as the JB, list both numbers: the Hebrew
number first, followed by the Vulgate’s number in parentheses.
Psalms 10 through 147. The psalms in question are Psalms 10 through 147.
Psalms 9 and 10 in the Hebrew Bible (from which most Protestant Bibles
take their numbering) are regarded as a single psalm, which is number 9 in
the Septuagint and Vulgate. The scholarly arguments in favor of the
Septuagint in this case are strong. Psalm 10 is the sole psalm among the first
thirty-two that does not bear its own heading, suggesting it was meant to be
part of the preceding psalm. Also, Psalm 9 begins an acrostic pattern that is
continued in Psalm 10, as well as possessing a continuous theme and tone.
Psalm 9 was probably split in the Hebrew Bible to facilitate its use in liturgical settings.
2:58 PM
Page 335
Psalms, Alternate Numbering of the | 335
When Psalms 9 and 10 are considered a single unit, the psalms that follow it bear a different number, which is one less, according to Septuagint and
Vulgate numbering. The famous Psalm 23, for instance, is actually Psalm 22
in the Septuagint and the Vulgate and in many Bibles based on them.
Psalms 114 through 116. Another difference occurs in Psalms 114–16. The
Hebrew Bible considers Psalms 114 and 115 as two separate psalms, while
the Septuagint folds them into a single psalm, which is numbered 113.
Conversely, the next psalm, 116 in the Hebrew Bible, is separated into two
in the Septuagint, where they are numbered 114 and 115. After those three
psalms, the alternate numbering system continues until Psalm 147, which
the Septuagint again divides into two, thereby reverting to the numbering
system most familiar to Protestant readers for Psalms 148–50.
Other Differences. The Septuagint also adds the apocryphal Psalm 151, which
does not appear at all in the Protestant Bible or the Vulgate but does appear
in some Eastern Orthodox Bibles. Also the Septuagint has different verse
numberings in many cases because it numbers the titles and headings that
precede some of the psalms as verse 1, which none of the later Bibles, not
even the Vulgate, do. So in many cases, the Septuagint Psalms have one more
verse than later versions of the Bible.
What is true of most quotations from the Bible is especially true of Psalms:
take no quotation for granted. Careful writers check their sources. The following chart should help.
Hebrew Bible
(& Protestant Bibles)
(& Vulgate & Some Roman Catholic Bibles)
151 (omitted in Vulgate)
2:58 PM
Page 336
336 | Psalms, Traditional Groupings of
Psalms, Traditional Groupings of
Certain groupings of OT Psalms have become so familiar as to have
acquired names. Here are a few of the major groupings and the specific
psalms that are included. Note that many of the groupings overlap.
The Alphabetic Psalms—Psalms 9, 10, 25, 34, 37, 111–112, 119, and 145. So
called because they use an alphabetic device in their poetic structure.
The Asaphite Psalms—Psalm 73–83. Also called the Psalms, or Songs, of Asaph,
so called because Asaph and possibly his descendents are attributed as the
author(s). Psalm 50 may also have been included in this group.
The Great Hallel—in Jewish tradition, Psalm 136.
The Hallel—Psalms 113–118, which are customarily chanted at such Jewish
festivals as Passover; also called the Egyptian Hallel. Sometimes Jewish
tradition also refers to the Songs of Ascents, 120–134, as the Hallel.
The Hallelujah Psalms—Psalms 146–150. The last five psalms, all of which begin
with “Praise the Lord.”
The Penitential Psalms—Psalms 6, 32, 38, 51, 102, 130, 143. These are all
psalms expressive of contrition, often spoken in times of illness and
suffering. They are commonly used as texts for Ash Wednesday services.
Unlike the other groupings, this set of psalms was created for Christian
liturgical use and is not a grouping found in the Septuagint.
The Prayer of Moses—Psalm 90. This title does not mean that the patriarch
Moses wrote the psalm but that it is imitative of his style.
The Psalm of Ethan—Psalm 89.
The Psalms of David—Psalms 3–9, 11–32, 34–41, 51–65, 68–70, 86, 103,
108–110, 122, 124, 131, 133, 135–145. These psalms are ascribed to
The Psalms of Solomon—Psalms 72 and 127. Like the Psalm of Moses, this
ascription most likely means that these psalms imitate Solomon’s style rather
than asserting his direct authorship.
The Psalms of the Sons of Korah—Psalms 42–49, 84–85, 87–88.
The Songs of Ascents—Psalms 120–134. Also called the Gradual Psalms or the
Songs of Degrees (KJV). They are probably so called because they were sung
by Jewish pilgrims on their way to Jerusalem as they ascended Mount Zion.
Publishers’ Names in Short Form, Religious
The following list is provided as a quick reference for the correct spelling
and shortened form of some well-known religious publishers. Note that some
cities are well-known enough to warrant the omission of state names.
Publisher Name
Short Form
Abbey Press
Abingdon Press
ACTA Publications
Accent Books
Alba House
St. Meinrad, Ind.
Colorado Springs
Staten Island
Alba House
2:58 PM
Page 337
Publishers’ Names in Short Form, Religious | 337
Albury Publishing
American Bible Society
AMG Publishers
Antioch Publishing Co.
Ascension Press
Augsburg Fortress, Publishers
Augustinian Press
Ave Maria Press
Back to the Bible
Baker Book House
Banner of Truth
Baptist Publishing House
Barbour Publishing, Inc.
Bethany House Publishers
Bob Jones University Press
Broadman & Holman Publishers
Charisma House
Christianity Today International
Christian Publications
Cistercian Publications
College Press Publishing Co.
Concordia Publishing House
Cook Communications Ministries
Cowley Publications
Crossroad Publishing Company, The
Dake Publishing
Destiny Image Publishers
Discipleship Publications International
Discovery House Publishers
Eerdmans Publishing Co., Wm. B.
Evangel Press
Faith Library Publications
Focus on the Family Publishing
Fordham University Press
Foundation Publications
Friends of Israel, the
Good News Publishers/
Crossway Books
Gospel Advocate Company
Gospel Light/
Regal & Renew Books
Group Publishing, Inc.
New York
Yellow Springs, Ohio
West Chester, Pa.
Villanova, Pa.
Notre Dame, Ind.
Lincoln, Neb.
Grand Rapids, Mich.
New York
Carlisle, Pa.
Texarkana, Tex.
Uhrichsville, Ohio
Bloomington, Minn.
Greenville, S.C.
Lake Mary, Fla.
Carol Stream, Ill.
Camp Hill, Pa.
Kalamazoo, Mich.
Joplin, Mo.
St. Louis
Colorado Springs
Cambridge, Mass.
New York
Lawrenceville, Ga.
Shippensburg, Pa.
Billerica, Mass.
Grand Rapids, Mich.
New York
Grand Rapids, Mich.
Nappanee, Ind.
Colorado Springs
La Habra, Calif.
Bellmawr, N.J.
Wheaton, Ill.
Augsburg Fortress
Ave Maria
Back to the Bible
Banner of Truth
Bethany House
Bob Jones
Charisma House
Christianity Today
College Press
Destiny Image
Discovery House
Faith Library
Focus on the Family
Friends of Israel
Good News/Crossway
Ventura, Ca.
Gospel Advocate
Gospel Light/
Regal & Renew
Loveland, Colo.
2:58 PM
Page 338
338 | Publishers’ Names in Short Form, Religious
Publisher Name
Short Form
Harrison House Publishers
Harvest House Publishers
Hendrickson Publishers, Inc.
Herald Press
Honor Books
Howard Publishing
iExalt Inc.
Ignatius Press
Inspirational Press
InterVarsity Press
Jewish Lights Publishing
Kregel Publications
Liguori Publications
Liturgical Press, The
Loyola Press
Macmillan Co., The
Mennonite Publishing House
Moody Press
Multnomah Publishers, Inc.
Nazarene Publishing House
Nelson Publishers, Thomas
New City Press
New Hope Publishers
New Life Publications
Orbis Books
Our Sunday Visitor
Oxford University Press
P&R Publishing Company
Paraclete Press
Paternoster Publishing USA
Paulist Press
Penguin Putnam, Inc.
Plough Publishing House
Regina Press
Servant Publications
Shaw Books
Sheed & Ward Book Publishing
Carmel, N.Y.
San Francisco
Eugene, Ore.
Peabody, Mass.
Scottdale, Pa.
West Monroe, La.
San Francisco
New York
Westmont, Ill.
Woodstock, Vt.
Grand Rapids, Mich.
Liguori, Mo.
Collegeville, Minn.
New York
Scottdale, Pa.
Sisters, Ore.
Colorado Springs
Kansas City, Mo.
Hyde Park, N.Y.
Maryknoll, N.Y.
Huntington, Ind.
New York
Phillipsburg, N.J.
Orleans, Mass.
Waynesboro, Ga.
Mahwah, N.J.
New York
Farmington, Pa.
Melville, N.Y.
Ann Arbor, Mich.
Colorado Springs
Franklin, Wis.
Harrison House
Harvest House
Jewish Lights
Moody Press
New City
New Hope
New Life
Our Sunday Visitor
Penguin Putnam
Sheed & Ward
2:58 PM
Page 339
Punctuation | 339
Standard Publishing
Sweet Publishing
Tyndale House Publishers, Inc.
Upper Room, The
Victor Books
Walk Thru the Bible Ministries
Waterbrook Press
Westminster John Knox Press
World Bible Publishers, Inc.
W Publishing Group
YWAM Publishing
Fort Worth
Wheaton, Ill.
Colorado Springs
Atlanta, Ga.
Colorado Springs
Iowa Falls
Seattle, Wash.
Grand Rapids, Mich.
Tyndale House
Upper Room
Walk Thru the Bible
Punctuation with Font Changes. When more than one font is used in a sentence, all periods, commas, colons, and semicolons should be set in the predominant font of that sentence, not necessarily the font of the word adjacent
to the punctuation mark. In most ordinary text settings, this means that periods, commas, colons, and semicolons will be set roman even when they
immediately follow an italicized word. The rationale is that those particular
punctuation marks are always signposts within the sentence and belong to
the entire context not just a particular word.
Question marks and exclamation points, by contrast, can belong either
to an entire sentence or to an individual word. Accordingly, question marks
and exclamation points should be set in the same font as the element to which
they belong. For instance, when the entire sentence is a question, the question mark should be in the same font as the sentence, even if it follows a
word in another font.
Of course, all punctuation marks should be set in italics when they are
part of an italicized title.
With paired punctuation marks, such as parentheses, brackets, and quotation marks, set the opening and closing marks in the same font as the predominant font of the context. If an italic quotation is on a line by itself, then
the quotation marks should be set in italic. An exception should be made
whenever a letter in the italicized word oversets (touches) the punctuation
mark. In that case, either set the punctuation mark in italic or add a thin
space to resolve the oversetting.
2:58 PM
Page 340
340 | Punctuation
Newman followed the Apologia, written in 1864, with Grammar of Assent. [Both
comma and period are in roman type.]
Newman’s masterpiece (Apologia pro vita sua) was written in 1864. [Both the
opening and closing parentheses are in roman type.]
Has he seen The Greatest Story Ever Told? [The question mark is in roman.]
Have you read Where Is God When It Hurts? [The question mark is in italic as
part of the title.]
(see paragraph 6a) [The closing parenthesis is in roman type.]
“The prayer ended with a Deo gratias.” [The period is in roman, and the closing
quotation mark is in roman to match the opening mark.]
An Alternate Method of Handling Punctuation with Font Changes. The rule
outlined in the first paragraph of this section is a change from the former
rule that recommended that periods, commas, colons, and semicolons be set
in the same font as the word next to which they were set. This older rule is
still perfectly valid and may be applied at the discretion of the author or editor. Consistent application of one rule or the other is the ideal, but the fact
is that few, if any, readers can even distinguish between an italic comma and
a roman one or understand the difference. This is to say that editors and
proofreaders may have to live with a certain amount of inconsistency in this
regard, especially in late proof stages, where correcting such minor errors
that are unlikely to be noticed by readers would be both time-consuming and
Abbreviations with Other Punctuation. When an abbreviation ends a sentence,
the abbreviating period will also serve as the period to the sentence. All other
punctuation, however, is used in combination with an abbreviating period.
The service began promptly at 11:00 a.m.
Is it true that the winner was R. J.?
Multiple Punctuation. When two different punctuation marks are needed in the
same place in a sentence, only the more emphatic mark is used. In rare
instances multiple punctuation may be advisable for clarity and expression.
In which poem does Hopkins write, “O world wide of its good!” [No final
question mark is added.]
“What shall we do with Jesus?” Moody asked the congregation. [No comma is
used after the question mark.]
The question Jesus asked Peter, Do you love me? was a reflection of the Great
Commandment. [No comma is used after the question mark.]
Does he really believe you can serve both God and mammon! [No question
mark is used, since the sentence is clearly interrogative.]
He really believes that?!
2:58 PM
Page 341
Punctuation | 341
Multiple Punctuation with Titles. In references or in running text, when a title
of a work ends in a question mark or an exclamation point, any period or
comma that would ordinarily follow that title is dropped. Colons and semicolons, however, can be used after question marks or exclamation points in
titles and should be retained.
Morrison, Frank. Who Moved the Stone? London: Faber and Faber, 1930. [no
period after the title]
I spent the summer reading five of Philip Yancey’s books: Where Is God When It
Hurts? The Jesus I Never Knew, What’s So Amazing about Grace? The Bible
Jesus Read, and Reaching for the Invisible God. [no commas after titles with
question marks; if there is concern that confusion will result, semicolons
could be inserted to separate titles]
He had read Francis Schaeffer’s How Then Shall We Live?; it made a deep
impression on him.
Open Versus Close Style. In general, this manual recommends an “open style”
of punctuation (that is, minimizing punctuation as much as possible) in all
books intended for a popular audience. This has been the trend in publishing for many years and is often characterized by the phrase “when in doubt,
leave it out.” Generally, a “close style” of punctuation should be reserved
for books of a highly complex, polemical, or academic nature, such as textbooks, theological works, or reference works intended for scholars.
(See individual entries for each type of punctuation mark.)
2:58 PM
Page 342
Question Mark
The question mark was developed by early printers from the first and last
letters of the Latin word questio, which was originally rendered “qo” and later
simplified to the form we know now.
In usage, a question mark always follows a direct question and, like the
period and the exclamation point, is considered an end stop, that is, a punctuation mark primarily found at the end of a sentence, although there are
When Used within a Sentence. Even though the question mark usually falls at
the end of a sentence, sometimes it can be used within a sentence, for instance
in fiction to show a character’s thought-but-unspoken question or in quoted
Why would she have said that? he thought.
“Why would she say that?” he said.
Sometimes a series of questions occurs within a sentence, and a question
mark can appropriately be used with each.
A good reporter asks who? what? where? when? and how?
Care must be taken in all these preceding cases because most autoformatting and grammar-checking computer programs, if activated, will automatically capitalize the first letter after all question marks.
Indirect Questions. No question mark should be used with indirect questions.
The knights never asked the king why he wanted Thomas killed.
All of us wondered who the new archbishop would be.
With Other Punctuation. A question mark is considered a “strong” punctuation mark and usually has precedence over any other mark of punctuation
that might logically fall in the same place in the sentence. Only the exclamation mark is as strong, and to determine whether the question mark or
2:58 PM
Page 343
Questions, Internal | 343
exclamation mark takes precedence, the sense of the sentence should be considered. If the querying nature of the question is stronger than its surprise,
or if the question is asked in anticipation of an answer, then the question
mark should be used. If a strong declamatory question is meant to be largely
rhetorical, then an exclamation point should be used.
In his terror, he yelled, “Who’s there?” [an answer is expected]
With utter incomprehension, she shouted, “What do those people expect!”
[declamatory and rhetorical]
In Titles. When a book title ends in a question mark, that question mark still
takes precedence over any other punctuation, as in:
Philip Yancey’s books include Where Is God When It Hurts? The Jesus I Never
Knew, What’s So Amazing about Grace? and Reaching for the Invisible God.
[commas not used after question marks in the list]
Spanish Question Marks. In Spanish-language publishing worldwide, an
inverted question mark ( ¿ ) precedes a question, and a regular question mark
( ? ) follows it. There is no need to reproduce this device when translating a
Spanish quotation into English, but the device should be retained when a
quotation is given in the original language.
Questions, Internal
An internal question, sometimes referred to as an embedded question, is
any question that is placed within the context of a declarative sentence but
is not set apart with quotation marks. Formerly, the first word of an internal question was generally capitalized, just as it would be were it a direct
quotation, but it is now more common to lowercase the first word, especially
when the question is short or consists of a single word. A comma should still
precede the question. Longer or proverbial questions, or questions that have
a formal tone or internal punctuation may still be capitalized as appropriate.
She wondered, why haven’t they called yet?
They shivered to think, what would Mrs. Grundy say?
The committee wanted to know: What did the president know and when did
he know it? [capitalized because the question is longer and has a more
formal sense]
2:58 PM
Page 344
344 | Quotation Marks
Quotation Marks
For Direct Discourse. Quotation marks are most commonly used to set off
material quoted from another source or to indicate dialogue. These uses,
called direct discourse, should be distinguished from indirect discourse,
which should not be set off by quotation marks.
“Few individuals have done as much as St. Francis to show Christians the way
of peace,” wrote Morton Kelsey. [written source]
The pastor responded, “In witnessing, remember that we are only beggars
advising other beggars where to find food.” [dialogue]
G. K. Chesterton once referred to coincidences as spiritual puns. [indirect
Quotes within Quotes. In American style, double quotation marks are used for
most purposes (though see both “British Style” and “Mid-Atlantic Style”).
Single quotation marks are used almost exclusively to indicate quotes within
quotes. If a further level of interior quotation is needed, double quotation
marks are reverted to. Although single quotation marks are then placed
within those, if needed, and so on alternately, such multiple levels of quoteswithin-quotes should be avoided for obvious reasons.
“The angel said to them, ‘Do not be afraid’” (Luke 2:10).
John read Job 42:1–4 aloud, “Then Job replied to the LORD: ‘I know that you can
do all things; . . . You said, “Listen now, and I will speak”’” (Job 42:1–2, 4).
For Irony, Slang, and Emphasis. Quotation marks are occasionally used when
a word or phrase is meant to be ironic. Since a reader can easily misunderstand the writer’s intention, the careful writer should be able to convey irony
without this device. Slang words and jargon should only be placed in quotation marks when the author is trying to convey that they are not part of his
or her normal vocabulary. Quotation marks are best used with slang words
or colloquial expressions when a strong emphasis is desired; even then they
should be used with discernment.
He resented the church’s insistence on a “free-will” offering. [ironic]
She could not be sure to what extent he had been “born again.” [jargon]
With Other Punctuation. When other punctuation marks are used with quotation marks, correct placement depends on the context. In direct discourse, for
instance, periods and commas usually go inside a closing quote mark; ques-
2:58 PM
Page 345
Quotation Marks | 345
tion marks and exclamation points usually go inside closing quotes, although
they may go outside if the sentence structure calls for it. As a general rule,
colons and semicolons are placed outside.
To summarize: single marks go inside, double marks go outside, except
for exclamation points and question marks, which can vary according to the
As he read the creed he hesitated before saying, “. . . the quick and the dead”;
a more modern translation would read, “. . . the living and the dead.”
“‘Why were you searching for me?’ he asked. ‘Didn’t you know I had to be in
my Father’s house?’” (Luke 2:49).
Why was the 1560 Geneva Bible called the “Breeches Bible”?
Block Quotations. Block quotations do not normally begin or end with quotation marks. Note, however, that block quotations should retain any and all
quotation marks that appear in the original. Also, epigraphs (whether on a
separate page or at the beginning of a chapter) and other quotations used
for display should not be enclosed in quotation marks. Only those quotation marks that appear in the original should be retained in epigraphs.
Block quotations, whether prose, poetry, or song, should be placed in quotation marks when they are part of dialogue. Note that if the block quotation is also preceded by a spoken lead-in phrase or other words spoken by
the same speaker, the block quotation does begin with a new opening quotation mark, just as if it were a new paragraph.
Interior Quotations. In the case of run-in quotations, use single quotation marks
for quotes within the quote. But when only the interior quotation is
excerpted, the single quotation marks are dropped as long as the context is
Revelation 22:20 reads, “He who testifies to these things says, ‘Yes, I am
coming soon.’” [quote within the quote]
Remember what the Spirit of Christ said to John in Revelation 22:20: “Yes, I am
coming soon.” [no single quotes used]
With Yes and No. Except in direct discourse, the words yes and no do not need
to be enclosed in quotation marks.
Although saying yes to Jesus doesn’t solve all of life’s problems, saying no can
be a bigger problem in itself.
2:58 PM
Page 346
346 | Quotation Marks
In Titles. Certain titles of short works and pieces of larger works are set in quotation marks. Be sure to contrast this list with that found in “Italics, Titles.”
articles in periodicals
chapters in books
individual television and radio programs (series are set in italics)
short musical compositions
short poems (anything less than small book length)
short stories
He referred to the “Speaking Out” column in last month’s Christianity Today.
PBS broadcast Muggeridge’s television show “God’s Spies” from his series The
Third Testament.
Nicknames. Nicknames of people require quotation marks when used with the
full name, but the nicknames should not be in quotation marks if used alone
or with the last name only.
Christopher “Kit” Smart but Kit Smart
G. A. Studdert “Woodbine Willie” Kennedy but Woodbine Willie
William Ashley “Billy” Sunday but Billy Sunday
With Display Caps. At the beginning of a chapter, an opening quotation mark
should not be used before any initial display capital that is larger than text
size, though the closing quotation mark should be retained. This is customary in British and American typesetting because oversized quotation marks
look awkward.
Foreign Quotation Marks. European-style quotation marks are often seen on
the Internet and, rarely, in English-language publishing. Although such a
famed typographer as Jan Tschichold advocated the use of modified French
guillemets in English publishing, his recommendation has been universally
ignored. There is no reason to retain foreign-style quotation marks in
English, even in direct quotation from the original languages. There are two
major alternate systems, the French and German.
2:58 PM
Page 347
Quotations | 347
Example or Explanation
« »
French quotes;
the open and close quotation marks as
used in French, Italian, and Spanish
„ “
the open and close quotation marks as
used in German; note that they are the
reverse of English quotes, and the open
quote sits on the baseline
Even if quoting those original languages in an English language context,
convert all quotation marks, internal and external, to the American style.
To prove a point, support an opinion, muster an argument, reference an
authority, inject humor, or gloss the content of a chapter or book with an
appropriate thought—all these can be accomplished with an appropriate
quotation. As the writer of Proverbs somewhat unappetizingly says, “A word
aptly spoken is like apples of gold in settings of silver.”
Accuracy. Authors are responsible for reproducing all quotations in wording,
spelling, capitalization, and punctuation exactly as they appear in the original printed sources. As a general rule, the style of a quoted passage should
not be made to conform to the style of the book in which it will be used.
Idiosyncrasies of spelling and capitalization in older works should be preserved; the word sic, enclosed in brackets, may be used after an obvious misspelling but should be used sparingly. In the case of works in the public
domain, spelling or punctuation may be modernized for the sake of clarity,
although a general note should inform the reader that this has been done.
The Pitfalls. Care should be taken to avoid some of the common pitfalls of quoting from other sources. Most importantly, the author should not quote so
much from any single source so as to infringe upon that work’s legal copyright protection unless the author is prepared to write for permission and
possibly pay a fee. (See “Permissions, Obtaining: Author Guidelines, Fair
Use.”) The fair use defense can only be invoked when the total number of
words from all the quotations from a single source fall within the guidelines.
For instance, if an author quotes a source ten times, the total number of
words from those quotes may well exceed the commonly accepted limit even
if no single quote exceeds it.
Secondly, some authors feel that they cannot express an opinion without
offering supporting quotations from other sources. Using too many quotations can be a distraction, even an annoyance, to the reader. The author
2:58 PM
Page 348
348 | Quotations
should have faith in his or her own ability to convince the reader without
having to depend on the authority of others. Quoting, in other words, should
be used selectively, not as a stylistic end in itself.
Finally, some authors use quotations as a means of avoiding having to put
an idea into their own words. Even if the quotation is within the fair use
guidelines, its use may be questionable if the author has simply lifted another
author’s wording to avoid expressing the idea in a fresh and original way.
This last pitfall is more subtle. The author, however, should take heart in
knowing that most readers are interested in the author’s own words and
opinions, not those of others.
Allowable Changes. An initial letter may be changed to a capital or a lowercase letter to conform to the quotation’s context within the new work, and
a final punctuation mark may be changed to suit the syntax of the larger
Run-in Versus Block Quotations. A short quotation may be run into the text
(called a run-in quotation). A longer quotation is set off from the text (a
block quotation or extract) and is usually set in smaller type (usually one
point smaller than text type) and with a narrower width. Generally a prose
quotation of more than eight typed lines (five or six typeset lines) or more
than a hundred words should be set as a block quotation. Any quotation
shorter than that should also be set in block style if it runs to two or more
paragraphs. If a series of short quotations are separated by text, then those
quotations may best be set off as individual extracts.
Block quotations of a single paragraph need not be indented, but additional paragraphs should be indented.
Three or more lines of poetry are usually set as a block quotation. Two
lines of poetry may either be set as a block quotation or run into the text
with a spaced slash ( / ) indicating the line breaks. More lines of poetry may
be run-in with spaced slashes whenever an extract setting might look odd to
the reader or cause distraction.
Introductory Phrases for Block Quotations. When a block quotation is introduced by a word or phrase like thus or the following, that word or phrase
should be followed by a colon. When a verb-of-saying introduces the block
quotation, a comma is used. If it is introduced by a complete statement, a
period should be used. When the introductory phrase forms a grammatically
complete unit with the block quotation that follows it, no punctuation should
be used. Usually the syntax of the introductory phrase will suggest the correct punctuation.
The role of the pastor has been described thus: . . . [uses a colon]
In his letter to Queen Ethelberga, Pope Boniface said, . . . [uses a comma]
2:58 PM
Page 349
Quotations | 349
O’Connor tells the legend of Saint Francis and the wolf of Gubbio. . . . [uses a
William Jay said in his book on prayer that . . . [run in without punctuation]
Crediting Block Quotations. The source of a block quotation may be credited
in a footnote, an endnote, or a parenthetical reference after the quotation. In
some cases, as in epigraphs, a dash may be used to inform the reader of the
I went very unwillingly to a society in Aldersgate Street, where one was reading
Luther’s preface to the Epistle to the Romans. About a quarter before nine,
while he was describing the change which God works in the heart through
faith in Christ, I felt my heart strangely warmed.
—John Wesley, Journals
Accurate Indenting of Poetry. It is the author’s responsibility to make sure that
quoted poetry is indented line-for-line as in the original. Sometimes, when a
manuscript’s data is converted from one software to another, indents can be
eliminated. It is especially important in these cases for the author to provide
the publisher with a hard copy of the manuscript so that the indents may be
double checked.
Accurate Indenting of Hymns and Songs. Like poetry, hymns and other songs
should also be indented correctly. For the rule regarding the correct indentation of hymns, see “Hymn Meters.”
Centering Poetry and Songs on the Page. When poetry, verse, or song lyrics are
set as block quotations, they are traditionally centered on the page according to the width of the longest line. In some books, however, the book’s
designer may have reasons to vary the setting; for instance, if a lot of poetry
is quoted amidst blocks of prose, the designer may opt to set all the poetry
left to avoid a shifting appearance of the quoted material on the page.
All people that on earth do dwell,
Sing to the Lord with cheerful voice;
Him serve with fear, His praise forth tell,
Come ye before Him and rejoice.
—John Hopkins, “The Old Hundredth”
Tenses for Verbs of Saying. Sometimes the question of tense arises with verbs
of saying used with quotations. In most cases, logic and the context will dictate the tense. When in doubt, the best rule is this: An author spoke or wrote
the work in the past, but the work itself speaks to us in the present.
Solomon said, “Remember your creator in the days of your youth” (Eccl. 12:1).
As Ecclesiastes says, “Remember your Creator in the days of your youth” (12:1).
2:58 PM
Page 350
350 | Quotations from the Bible
Quotations from the Bible
In addition to the rules given for general quotations (see “Quotations”),
some special rules should be observed when quoting from the Bible.
Familiar Phrases. The tendency in past decades has been to over-reference quotations from the Bible, as though one needed the authority of a reference to
verify its existence, but this tendency should be avoided where appropriate.
Familiar phrases from the Bible, for instance, need not be set apart by quotation marks or referenced in every instance. In fiction and dialogue it is generally not necessary to annotate a Bible quotation with a parenthetical
reference; this would be distracting and unnecessary.
We too can share the shepherds’ wonder at hearing the good tidings of great
joy. [no quotation marks or reference needed]
When the Bible says, “God so loved the world . . . ,” it means all the world. [no
reference needed]
“Have you not heard that ‘God is love’?” [no reference needed in dialogue]
Using Brackets. When quoting the Bible, if the author needs to change an occasional word for clarity’s sake, brackets are used to indicate the change.
Obviously, this should be done with fidelity to the original meaning of the
“We love because [God] first loved us” (1 John 4:19).
Noting Repeated Changes in Style. The author may wish to change a particular word or words of a given translation throughout an entire manuscript.
This may be done without brackets as long as a general note informing the
reader of this change is given in the front matter or on the copyright page.
For instance, an author may want to replace the words thee, thou, thy, and
thine of the King James Version with you and your. A note informing the
reader of this change should be provided. Such a note is also useful when
the author wishes to change the capitalization style of the deity pronouns in
the predominant Bible version or translation used.
With Ellipses. In most cases, an ellipsis should not be placed before or after a
Bible verse or a portion of a verse, though one should be used whenever an
interior portion is not quoted. If the quoted portion is a sentence fragment,
however, or might be confusing to the reader otherwise, an ellipsis should be
used. Introductory words such as And, Or, For, Therefore, But, Verily, and
so on may be omitted from a Bible verse without inserting an ellipsis. In a
sense, the reader is probably already aware, without the aid of an ellipsis, that
other words precede and follow any given quotation. (See also “Ellipsis.”)
2:58 PM
Page 351
Quotations from the Bible | 351
“The God of all comfort . . . comforts us in all our troubles, so that we can
comfort those in any trouble” (2 Cor. 1:3–4). [ellipsis needed because
interior words are dropped]
“He that is not against us is on our part” (Mark 9:40 KJV). [The original reads:
“For he that is not against us is on our part.”]
LORD Versus Lord and GOD Versus God. In some versions of the Bible, the
words Lord and God appear in small caps, with an initial cap (LORD, GOD).
In books written in a familiar or popular vein, this cap-and-small-cap style
need not be followed. In scholarly works, however, quotations from Scripture
should reflect the typographical rendering of the version cited. (For a thorough discussion of this issue, see “LORD and GOD [Small-Cap Forms].”)
Italics in the King James Version. Words that are italicized in the King James
Version (KJV, or AV) should not be italicized when quoted in popular writing. The translators of the KJV used italics to indicate supplied words that
do not have exact parallels in the original Greek or Hebrew. These italicized
words only confuse the modern reader who might mistake them for words
intended to be emphasized.
Small Caps and Italics in the New American Standard Bible. When passages
from the Old Testament are quoted in the New Testament of the New
American Standard Bible, the quotation is set in caps-and-small-caps, and it
also follows the KJV device of setting supplied words in italics. When quoting from the NASB, all cap-and-small-cap quotations and italicized words
should be rendered in regular text type, since the reasons for those faces will
be unclear to the reader and, again, may be mistaken for emphasis.
Retaining Italics for Supplied Words. The italics in the KJV and NASB and other
versions that use that device should only be retained in instances when it is
important for the reader to know which are the “supplied” words in the
given translation, such as in an academic discussion of Bible translating or
in a scholarly work on interpreting the passages in the original languages.
Pronunciation Marks in the King James Version. Some editions of the KJV and
other versions provide pronunciation marks with proper names. These marks
should not be reproduced when quoting from that version.
Correct Paragraphing. Some versions, most notably the KJV, set each numbered
verse as though it were a separate paragraph. Since this is merely a typographic convention, these verses, when quoted, should not be set as separate
paragraphs but run together. Actual paragraph breaks in the KJV are indicated by the paragraph symbol ( ¶ ).
Verse Numbers. In most context, verse numbers should not be included within
the quotation from the Bible. The primary exception is Bible studies in which
it is important to distiguish where each verse begins and ends.
2:58 PM
Page 352
352 | Quotations from the Bible
Spelling of Proper Names. In a written text, biblical proper names should follow the spelling of the primary Bible version used. When no primary translation is used, this manual recommends that proper nouns should follow the
style given in the New International Version and Today’s New International
Hezekiah [NIV]
Jehoshaphat [NIV]
Ezekias [KJV]
Josaphat [KJV]
Ligatures. Because of the limitations of many typesetting systems, ligatures (such
as æ) should be set as separate letters (ae) when quoting from Bible versions
that use such ligatures. Ligatures tend to look antiquated and may cause
Quoting from the Internet
Writers commonly quote poems, songs, bits of humor, chatroom vignettes,
personal stories, anecdotes, articles, and other material from Internet sources
as if there are no ethical strings attached. “After all,” some writers argue, “a
dozen sites on the Internet quote it without permission, why can’t I?” But
remember this rule: Treat Internet sources just as you would treat print
sources when it comes to quotations. (See the details of fair use and permissions under the entry “Permissions, Author Guidelines for Obtaining.”)
Just because a funny story appears countless times on the Internet without crediting a source does not mean it is in the public domain. Such oftrepeated and uncredited Internet writings have often been reproduced
without their original authors’ permission, and to repeat them once more is
to compound the theft.
By and large, unless an Internet quotation clearly falls under the fair use
guidelines (again, see “Permissions, Author Guidelines for Obtaining.”), plan
on tracking down the author and obtaining written permission to use the
quote from the author’s publisher or (if no other copyright owner is available) from the author himself or herself. Be even more reserved with private
emails and comments from chatroom discussions. Treat them just as you
would treat unpublished letters, which means, don’t quote them unless you
have written permission from the original author. Remember that fair use
does not usually apply to unpublished correspondence.
It is painful for a writer to see his or her work exploited for another’s
financial profit. So keep the Golden Rule in mind: Get permission from others, just as you would expect them to get permission from you—whether it’s
online or in print. (Also see “Plagiarism.”)
2:58 PM
Page 353
Racial Sensitivities in Language
See “Ethnic and Racial Designations.”
Readability is different than legibility. Most books are legible, that is, the
basic letter forms are clear and distinguishable, but not all are readable.
Readability has more to do with the book’s impression on the reader’s eye,
the extent to which a book can be easily and comfortably read for extended
periods of time or for a particular purpose, and the extent to which the type
and design prevent fatigue from setting in.
While some of the following information is summarized in “Typography,
The Elements of Basic Book,” that section is intended for compositors and
designers. This section on readability is more for authors and editors who
are working with a publisher to produce the best possible book.
The Three Cardinal Rules of Readability.
1. Most serif faces are inherently more readable than most sans-serif faces. The
serifs, that is, the small strokes added to a letter, are not just ornamental;
they serve a purpose. Since they are mostly horizontal strokes, the lateral
emphasis increases reading efficiency. Sans-serif type, which eliminates this
horizontal emphasis, can force the eye to read more slowly than is comfortable. Hence, sans-serif faces are popular for display purposes (noncontinuous reading). In text, however, sans-serif faces can be the typographic
equivalent of someone speaking too slowly. Most of us, when forced to listen or read slowly, lose interest.
One study showed that the average reader can read serif type 7 to 10
words per minute faster than sans-serif. This may not seem like much, but
over a two-hour reading session, that could amount to a short chapter.
Coupled with the fact that research also found that serif faces are more aesthetically pleasing to most readers than sans-serif faces, this would indicate
that traditional serif faces are a better choice for continuous text reading.
2. Roman type is intrinsically more readable than italic, bold, expanded, or condensed. By its design, regular roman type contributes to the lateral flow.
Other fonts, such as italic and bold, are used intentionally for emphasis
because they disrupt lateral flow, causing the reader to pause. This is why
many designers prefer not to set large blocks of type in italic or bold. Though
2:58 PM
Page 354
354 | Readability
roman type is the norm, there has been a temptation among some designers
to “copy-fit” text by electronically condensing the font. This practice is inadvisable for any but the most experienced typographer for the simple reason
that types were designed with a certain visual proportion, and thus to alter
them electronically is to change their intrinsic character.
3. Tight-to-moderate word spacing is more readable than loose word spacing.
Although there are exceptions to this rule, lateral flow is again the ideal.
Wide spacing causes the eye to stop and start—the visual equivalent of stuttering. Also, when word spacings are too large, the likelihood of “rivers”
(blotches of white space spanning two or more lines) increases. Rivers add
an unattractive vertical element and distract the reader from lateral eye movement. When there is a choice between setting a line too tight or too loose, it
is usually preferable to set it too tight. There is often resistance among editors to allowing tight lines, but in continuous reading, a tightly spaced line
is less likely than a loose line to cause problems for the reader.
Three Additional Factors
1. Type Size. Many people assume that type size is the single most important factor in readability, but it is not. Type size, while important, is not as significant in readability as typeface, font, spacing, and line length. The average
reader with normal or corrected eyesight can comfortably read even 6-point
type as long as the line widths are within the 10-to-12-words-per-line range
(that is, about 60 to 72 characters per line, counting spaces) and the leading
is sufficient to keep the text from looking splotchy. It is usually an overlong
line length and a too-tight leading that causes problems.
For average trade books, body types in sizes of 9 to 11 points are almost
universally used. Those are the sizes that generally fill the ideal 10-to-12words-per-line average for the line widths. A few faces tend to be small on
the body (like Bembo), in which case 9-point type may be too small and 10to 12-point type preferred.
2. Line Length. For type sizes in the 9- to 12-point range, an average of 10 to
12 words per line is ideal (assuming the average word is 5 characters plus a
word space), or an average of 60 to 72 characters per line (counting spaces).
Studies have shown that 72 characters per line is the threshold beyond which
the reader begins to have trouble finding the next line of text (“tracking
back”). When line lengths must run longer than an average of 72 characters
per line, then an extra point or two of leading should be added to all text
lines to give the reader more space and a better chance to find successive
lines. Every character beyond 72 characters per line significantly decreases
the readability of a text.
Text that averages fewer than 7 words per line also poses problems. (1) If
the copy is justified, there is more chance of frequent word division and wide
2:58 PM
Page 355
Reading-Level Calculation | 355
word spacing, and (2) since the reader has to shift the eyes back to the beginnings of lines more often, fatigue can set in. Such narrow widths are more legible when set ragged right and with perhaps a little more than standard leading.
3. Leading. Visually, the average space between lines (leading) should always
appear larger than the average word space. If the word spaces are larger than
the leading, then “rivers” (jagged lines of white running down the page) are
most likely to form, and reading will become more difficult.
Overly wide leading can be as much of an eyestrain as too little, although
it is best to err on the side of slightly too much than too little. Reference
works and other works intended for short piecemeal reading do not need
this extra leading.
Reading-Level Calculation
A number of different formulas exist for determining the reading level (by
grade or by age) of written texts. Among the most common are the Gunning
“FOG” Readability Test and the Flesch-Kincaid Formula. Those two, and a
third one, the Powers-Sumner-Kearl Formula, which is primarily used for
primary-school-age readers, are outlined briefly here.
Keep in mind that these tests offer only general guidelines, and their results
can vary, depending on the samples that are chosen to begin with. Still, they
allow an editor or author to calculate whether a piece of writing might possibly be more complex than the intended readership can handle. In publishing, the conventional wisdom is that books written for the general reader
should be aimed no higher than at an eighth-grade reading level. Academic
books, of course, would be expected to rate much higher, since their specialized vocabularies should already be understood by the intended readership. But for trade books for the general reader, these tests may come in
The Gunning “FOG” Readability Test. This test is most accurate when measuring older elementary- and secondary-school-age groups. To find the reading level:
1. Select three samples of 100 words each.
2. Determine the average length of each sentence (that is, the total number of words divided by the number of sentences).
3. Then, in each sample, count the number of words containing 3 or
more syllables, and find the average over the three samples.
4. To calculate grade level, add the average sentence length to the average number of words of 3 or more syllables. Multiply that sum by 0.4.
5. To calculate reading age in years, add 5 to the total in step four.
2:58 PM
Page 356
356 | Reading-Level Calculation
The Flesch-Kincaid Formula. This formula was devised as a standard test for use
by the US Department of Defense and is appropriate for secondary school
and adult reading. To find the reading level:
1. Take a sample of text, anywhere from 100 to 300 words long.
2. Determine the average number of words per sentence (total number
of words divided by the number of sentences).
3. Determine the average number of syllables (total number of syllables
divided by the total number of words).
4. To calculate grade level, multiply the average number of words per
sentence by 0.39, and then multiply the average number of syllables by
11.8. Add those two numbers together and subtract 15.59.
5. To calculate reading age, subtract 10.59 years, instead of subtracting
15.59 as in step four.
The Powers-Sumner-Kearl Formula. This formula is most accurate for primaryschool-age students, up to about age ten. To find the reading level:
1. Select one or more samples of 100 words each.
2. Find the average number of words per sentence and divide that by the
number of total sentences (rounding to the nearest tenth).
3. Count the number of syllables in each 100-word sample, and average
4. To calculate grade level, multiply the average number of words per
sentence by 0.0778; then multiply the average number of syllables (per
100 word sample) by 0.0455. Add those two numbers together, then
subtract 2.2029.
5. To calculate age level in years, add 2.7971 instead of subtracting the
2.2029, as in step four.
Recto Versus Random Setting of Pages
Recto (right-hand) pages have odd folio numbers and verso (left-hand)
pages have even numbers. (The numbers as printed on a book’s pages are
called folios.) Recto pages are always considered the dominant page in any
spread. Except in unusual designs, most elements of a book’s front and back
matter are set recto, except for the copyright page, which is intentionally set
as the verso of the title page. When space is a consideration, most elements
of a book may be set verso, although it can sometimes diminish the aesthetic
appeal and even the accessibility of the book.
The first chapter of the book should begin on a recto page. Ideally, each
subsequent chapter should begin on a recto page (called recto setting), but the
design and available space may require that such chapters begin on the next
2:58 PM
Page 357
Red-Letter Editions of the Bible | 357
available blank instead, whether a recto or verso (called random setting).
Part title pages are invariably set recto.
By and large, there is no reason for a recto page ever to be blank in any
book, except for the unused pages at the end. Readers expect major parts of
any book to begin on the right-hand page.
Recycled-Paper Statement
For books printed on recycled paper, a notice should be given on the copyright page. Although it is by no means mandatory, the industry standard formula, preceded by the recycled symbol, is:
Printed on recycled paper
Red-Letter Editions of the Bible
Well over half of all modern editions of the Bible are printed so that the
words of Jesus appear in red type. These are called red-letter editions. The
device was formerly called rubrication and was used in a variety of print situations. A few red-letter concordances of the Bible also exist as well as some
rare editions in which all the words of God in the Old and New Testaments
are printed in red. A few style issues regarding red-letter editions of the Bible
should be noted.
Punctuation. In red-letter editions, not only the words of Jesus but all punctuation (including quotation marks) associated with them are printed in red.
Verse Numbers and Annotations. As with punctuation, all verse numbers and
superscript numbers or letters used as callouts for footnotes or cross-references
should be set in red when they are part of the red-letter text. Red-letter is used
only in the text of the Bible itself and not when the words of Jesus are quoted
in footnotes, introductions, or other peripheral matter.
Said References. Said references attached to the words of Jesus, such as he
answered or he said, should not be set in red.
The Epistles and Revelation. In several instances in the Epistles and in
Revelation, words of Jesus that do not appear in the four gospels are quoted.
Those words too are set in red type.
Printing Registration. In some printing processes, different colors of ink have
to be printed in different passes through the press, which can result in slight
misalignments called poor registration. It is common, in fact, to see red-letter
editions of the Bible in which the red words of Jesus seem to sit on a baseline fractionally higher or lower than the rest of the text. Any time a redletter edition is printed, the publisher and printer should make spot checks
to ensure that the registration is remaining accurate and consistent.
2:58 PM
Page 358
358 | References, Bible
References, Bible
An author should inform readers of which Bible translation, version, or
paraphrase is being used predominantly in the course of a work. This notice
may be given in the introduction, the preface, or any other place where it is
not likely to be overlooked. In many cases, since extensive use of modern
translations requires a permission notice and credit line, the copyright page
is the most convenient place for stating the Bible version. The following form
is acceptable, although the granting copyright holder may prefer a different
form, in which case that form should be strictly adhered to.
Unless otherwise noted, all Scripture references in this book are taken from the
[Version], copyright © [year and copyright holder]. Used by permission of
[permission grantor].
When an Alternate Bible Version Is Used. When a general note regarding a predominant Bible version has been provided, the author should not indicate
the version when references to that version are made in the text. The reader
should only be informed with an in-text reference when an alternate version
is used. This is done by placing the abbreviation of the alternate version next
to the Bible reference. These abbreviations are usually set in full caps without periods. (See “Bible Versions and Translations.”) When used in combination with the Bible reference itself, these abbreviations should not be
preceded by a comma. Abbreviations of Bible versions may also be used in
running text and notes.
“Love is patient, love is kind. It does not envy” (1 Cor. 13:4). [No version is
cited; the predominant version in this case is the NIV.]
“Loue is pacient & curteous, loue envyeth not” (1 Cor. 13:4 Coverdale).
“Charity suffereth long, and is kind; charity envieth not” (1 Cor. 13:4 KJV).
The musical qualities of the NIV, Coverdale, and KJV differ significantly. [in Text]
Personal Translations or Paraphrases. When an author uses a personal translation or paraphrase, this should be indicated in a general note at the beginning of the book (if it is the predominant version) or in a note attached to
each specific reference. In the latter case, the phrase author’s translation or
author’s paraphrase should suffice. Such a phrase, however, is best preceded
by a comma.
“Love is content to wait and is considerate. It’s not envious” (1 Cor. 13:4,
author’s paraphrase).
Arabic Numerals. Use arabic rather than roman numerals for books of the
Bible. It is preferable to write out the number if it begins a sentence.
1 Corinthians, not I Corinthians
First John 4:7 tells us . . .
2:58 PM
Page 359
References, Bible | 359
Chapter Only. When an entire chapter is referred to, it may be spelled out,
although a numeral may be used if no confusion will result.
In the first chapter of Genesis . . . or In Genesis 1 . . .
Dialogue. Numerals may be used for Bible references in dialogue, although frequently the syntax requires they be spelled out.
“I’m sure,” said the minister, “everyone here could recite John 3:16 by heart.”
“Amanda Smith overcame her fear by remembering the third chapter of
Galatians and the twenty-eighth verse.”
Spelling Out Versus Abbreviating. Names of the books of the Bible may be
abbreviated when a reference is enclosed in parentheses, especially when such
references are numerous. Otherwise they should be abbreviated in text only
in scholarly or reference works. See “Abbreviations: Bible Books and Related
Material” for a complete list of abbreviations of books of the Bible.
The Abbreviations V. and VV. The abbreviation for verse is v., and for verses,
vv. These abbreviations should be used in parenthetical references only or
when repeating the entire reference would seem cumbersome.
Later in the eleventh chapter (v. 45) John wrote, “In that place many believed
in Jesus.”
Abbreviations for Portions of Verses. In some scholarly works, when the author
wishes to indicate that only a portion of a Bible verse is being referenced, the
abbreviations a, b, c, etc. may be added to the reference; for example: “Praise
him in his mighty heavens” (Ps. 150:1c), indicating that only the third line
of the verse is being quoted. This practice is largely limited to academic works
in which precision is required and is generally not recommended for popular or trade books.
The Colon in Scripture References. A colon separates chapter from verse.
Mark 2:17
1 Peter 3:12
The Semicolon in Scripture References. A semicolon separates one chapter-andverse reference from another. If the second chapter-and-verse reference
applies to the same book of the Bible, the name of the book should not be
John 3:3; 10:10; Acts 16:31
When to Use Spaces. No space should precede or follow a colon in a Bible reference. There should be space following but not preceding a comma or a
2:58 PM
Page 360
360 | References, Bible
The En Dash in Bible References. An en dash is used between consecutive verse
numbers. A comma separates nonconsecutive numbers of the same chapter.
John 3:1–6
John 3:15–16
Acts 1:1–8, 13, 16
An en dash is also used to indicate several chapters of a Bible book inclusively in a reference or to indicate that a citation begins in one chapter and
ends in another.
Gen. 1–11
Gal. 5:26–6:5
Obadiah, Philemon, Jude, 2 John, 3 John. These little books of the Bible receive
their own entry because each contains but a single chapter, which makes referencing specific verses tricky. Some writers, for instance, attempt to reference the first verse of Jude as Jude 1:1, which has the disadvantage of
implying that there are other chapters, and in the Bible itself, no reader will
be able to find the first chapter of Jude. Other writers opt for Jude 1, which
ambiguously suggests either the first chapter of Jude or its first verse.
Fortunately for persnickety editors, these books are so short as to be seldom referenced. Still, the clearest way of referencing verses from them in text
is either the first verse of Jude or verse 1 of Jude. If the reference is parenthetical after a quotation, then use this form: (Jude v. 1), even though the
abbreviation v. may not appear elsewhere in the manuscript. If the reference
falls in a Scripture index or in some other place where columnar appearance
needs to be maintained, then it is all right to use the form Jude 1:1.
When to Spell Out and When to Abbreviate Books of the Bible. Books of the
Bible should be spelled out, not abbreviated, when the reference appears in
running text or when the book alone is referred to. An exception may be
made in scholarly or reference works that contain so many references to
books of the Bible that abbreviations are needed for the sake of brevity. Also,
if many references appear in parentheses, it is acceptable to abbreviate books
of the Bible. Two standard styles of abbreviating books of the Bible are commonly accepted: one for general books as well as some academic books and
another for scholarly books alone. For a complete list, see “Abbreviations:
Bible Books and Related Material.”
In references following block quotations from the Bible, the names of Bible
books may be spelled out or abbreviated at the author’s or editor’s discretion,
but the same form should be used consistently throughout a manuscript.
Either of the following forms may be used:
No, in all these things we are more than conquerors through him who loved
us. For I am convinced that neither death nor life, . . . nor anything else in all
2:58 PM
Page 361
Reprints and Revisions | 361
creation, will be able to separate us from the love of God that is in Christ Jesus
our Lord. (Romans 8:37–39 NIV)
[or] . . . will be able to separate us from the love of God that is in Christ
Jesus our Lord.
—Romans 8:37–39 NIV
Punctuation with Run-in Quotations. For run-in quotations that also require a
chapter-and-verse reference, place the period or other punctuation after the
closing parenthesis containing the reference. If the quotation contains a question mark or exclamation point, place it with the text and place any other
needed punctuation after the closing parenthesis.
“Here is your king” (John 19:14).
“Take him away! Take him away! Crucify him!” (John 19:15).
While the word religionist is now fairly rare, it has a long history in
English. It is sometimes used to refer to any kind of religious believer, but it
actually has an overtone of zealotry to it. A religionist is anything but lukewarm about his or her faith.
Although sometimes mistakenly used as a synonym for the adjective religious, the word religiose has a pejorative connotation. A religiose person would
tend to be overly religious, self-consciously pious, or embarrassingly sentimental about his or her faith. It’s a perfectly good word when used correctly.
Religious as a Noun
The word religious, which is both the singular and plural form, was formerly used as a noun, referring to a person in a monastic order: The religious wore the white habit of her order. That usage is now archaic and is
rarely understood by readers, causing confusion or misreading. It is best to
avoid it.
Reprints and Revisions
Reprint. A reprint is a new printing of an existing book in which no major or
substantive changes have been made. Customarily, reprints may contain corrections of errors. New copyright dates are not needed in the copyright notice
for reprints, even if the corrections are extensive. A reprint is sometimes
called a new impression or a new printing.
2:58 PM
Page 362
362 | Reprints and Revisions
For a reprint, if no bibliographic information (title, number of pages,
author, publisher, ISBN, etc.) other than the year of publication has changed,
then a new CIP need not be applied for. (See “Cataloging in Publication Data
Revision. A book is considered a revision any time major substantive corrections
are made or when any new material has been added. Any time anything new
has been added to the text that would need the protection of copyright, then
a new date should be added to the copyright notice on the copyright page.
A revision is sometimes called a new edition. A new CIP and ISBN are
required for all publications that are considered revisions.
Resurrection, the
See “Crucifixion, the and Resurrection, the.”
The final book of the New Testament is Revelation, or The Book of
Revelation, not Revelations, or The Book of Revelations. Even the book’s
author refers to it in the first verse as a single, unified vision. Curiously, an
Internet search of the plural shows that the vast majority of online writers
who make that common mistake tend toward conspiracy theories, New Age
practice, or religious separatism.
The title reverend is often misused in writing and conversation. In formal
writing, it is comparable to the title honorable; both words should be accompanied by the article the, and neither word should be used with a last name
alone (for instance: Graham, rather than Rev. Graham). In informal contexts, the article may be dropped, although this is considered colloquial.
The use of the word reverend as a noun is also colloquial and should be
avoided in formal writing, since the word is properly an adjective. These colloquial uses are best reserved for dialogue or humor or as spoken address in
those denominations that use the word alone as part of their tradition.
Many listeners have been touched by the Reverend Gary Davis’s songs.
He introduced Reverend Wilkins to us. [colloquial; not for formal writing]
“We spoke to the reverend about our marriage plans.” [dialogue, colloquial,
As the editors of Success with Words quip, “If in doubt, consult your clergyman.” For more details on the formal use of the word Reverend and its
abbreviation Rev., see “Forms of Address, Religious.”
2:58 PM
Page 363
Roman Numerals | 363
See “Subsidiary Rights.”
Roman Numerals
Not having a clear concept of zero as a number, the ancient Romans
devised a complex numbering system that has, surprisingly, survived into the
modern world. One minor advantage is that it employs fewer symbols (only
seven) than our familiar arabic system (sometimes referred to as the HinduArabic system, since it actually seems to have originated in India), which uses
ten. The Romans could render all the numbers between 1 and 100 with just
five different symbols, whereas it takes all ten in the arabic system. The disadvantage of roman numerals, of course, is the long strings of characters that
result, which are highly confusing to modern readers. The year 1999 is
MCMXCIX in roman numerals, almost twice as long as the version in arabic numerals. By contrast, the year 2000 is a simple MM, half the length of
the arabic!
The Characters. The basic characters of the Roman numbering system are:
I (or i) = 1
V (or v) = 5
X (or x) = 10
L (or l) = 50
C (or c) = 100
D (or d) = 500
M (or m) = 1,000
VM (or vm ) = 5,000
XM (or xm) = 10,000
CM (or cm ) = 100,000
MM (or mm ) = 1,000,000
Note: In the Middle Ages, the character Z was added to represent 2,000
How to Form Roman Numerals. When a small number appears to the right of
a larger one, the smaller number is added to the larger one. Thus, VI is 6 (a
5 plus a 1). When a smaller number appears to the left of a larger number,
the smaller number is subtracted from the larger. Thus, IV is 4 (a 5 minus a
1). This method of subtraction-according-to-position is called the subtrahend system and was actually introduced during the Renaissance. The
ancient Romans would have rendered the number 4 as IIII.
With those basic rules, all the numbers can be formed except, as stated
before, 0. A line over the characters V, X, C, and M multiplies the value of
that character by one thousand.
2:58 PM
Page 364
364 | Roman Numerals
With Names. Roman numerals are commonly used in text in the names of numbered kings and other royalty as well as popes: for example, Henry VIII,
James I, or Pope John XXIII. This practice is extended to common family
names, usually the child of someone who is already designated a Jr. Thus,
the son of John Doe Jr. is John Doe III, who plans to name his son John
Doe IV. As with Sr. and Jr., it is best not to allow the roman numeral to be
separated from the name over a line break.
With World Wars. Perhaps the most common place to find roman numerals in
ordinary text is in references to the two major wars of the twentieth century:
World War I and World War II. By extension, futurists also refer to World
War III.
In Book Front Matter. Another common place where one finds roman numerals in publications is in the front matter of some books, usually scholarly or
other books that want to achieve an air of authority and high quality. In these
books, the front matter is paginated in roman numerals, while the main text
of the book is paginated with arabic numerals (starting with 1). See “Folios”
for details. It should be noted that when front matter is paginated using
roman numerals, lowercase letters (i, ii, iii, iv, v, . . . x, etc.) are used.
For Publication Dates. On rare occasions one still sees the year of a book’s publication shown on the title page in roman numerals. In some older books, D
(the roman numeral for 500) was actually rendered I and M (1,000) was
CI . Those were printing conventions only, the sole function of which seems
to have been the further confusion of those already confused by roman
Using roman numerals for publication dates is largely an affectation in
the twenty-first century and is not advised. Still, it might be considered for
a book to which the designers or editors wish to grant a special aura of
authority or importance, such as a Bible or a historical or biblical novel.
The Roman Catholic imprimatur, often displayed across from the title page
or on a book’s copyright page, usually bears a date in Latin, including roman
numerals. Official pronouncements, especially religious ones, sometimes bear
roman numeral dates, and filmmakers, for some reason, seem to have made
it a tradition to set the release dates of their films in roman numerals—causing
viewers to squint and calculate frantically as the credits roll by—though this
practice is waning.
For Numbering Chapters and Parts. The use of roman numerals for numbering chapters of a book is almost universally discouraged by contemporary
designers unless a certain classical mood is required. Even in that case, they
2:58 PM
Page 365
Rubrication | 365
should only be used when the book contains fewer than ten chapters. A
reader should not have to puzzle out the numerals beyond X (ten). Parts of
a book are more commonly designated with roman numerals, although that
practice too has declined in popularity. Again, roman numerals should not
be used if there are more than ten parts.
For Act Numbers in Plays. One of the most common places where roman
numerals are still occasionally used is in referencing the number of an act in
a theater piece, although The Chicago Manual of Style recommends a newer
style of using arabic numerals only. If the older style is used, in which acts
are referenced with roman numerals, capitalize the word Act and set scene
numbers in arabic numerals, with the word scene lowercased: The wedding
masque in Act IV, scene 1 of Shakespeare’s The Tempest suggests the play
was written for a royal wedding. Either the old or new style may be used, as
long as they are used consistently within a publication.
For Books of the Bible. Do not use roman numerals for referencing books of the
Bible (such as I Samuel or II Corinthians), even when they are used in the predominant version of the Bible being quoted. While many older editions of
the KJV, for instance, use roman numerals, most recent editions of the KJV
have dropped that style altogether.
For Appendixes. Formerly, roman numerals were commonly used to number
the appendixes. Though this use is still acceptable, it is much rarer now than
it once was. We recommend avoiding it unless there is a specific reason for
doing so. Again, roman numerals should not be used if more than the numbers one through ten are needed.
Outlining. Roman numerals are often used for the primary levels in an outline,
although that traditional system has in many places been supplanted by the
so-called decimal system (1, 1.1, 1.1.1, etc.). See “Outlines and Lists.”
In Columns. If roman numerals are set in a vertical column, as in a chart or a
table of contents, they should be aligned on the right.
Recommendation. Though an interesting part of book history, roman numerals should probably be relegated to the same dust heap as gothic type. Except
for when not using them might cause more confusion than using them, as
with the names of regents and popes, roman numerals are usually best rendered as arabic.
See “Red-Letter Editions of the Bible.”
2:58 PM
Page 366
366 | Running Heads and Feet
Running Heads and Feet
A running head is a line of type set at the top of a text page (though omitted on a chapter opening page) that includes such information as the book
title, part title, chapter title, or section head, and sometimes the author’s
name. A running foot (or running footer) appears at the bottom of the page.
In some designs, in textbooks, for instance, the running head may appear in
the side margin and incorporate several lines of type as well as a folio.
Like folios, running heads and feet do not usually appear on pages without text type, that is, on title pages, copyright pages, tables of contents, dedication pages, and so on. Running heads and feet are often dropped
altogether in popular fiction and mass-market books to conserve space and
to contribute to the narrative flow. Folios may appear on the same line as
the running heads or separately.
Formatting. Traditionally, running heads display the book title on the verso
pages and the chapter title on the recto pages, though this format is less common than it once was. Any number of combinations of book title, chapter
title, part title, section heads, author names (for compilations), series title,
or other elements may be used in the running heads. Generally, the element
with the greater weight or importance is placed on the left-hand (verso) running head, which is a departure from the general style of beginning major
book elements on recto pages. Since different types of books have different
needs, the formatting and positioning of the running heads is flexible and
should be determined by the designer in consultation with the book’s editor.
Running heads are usually not set flush left unless they are sufficiently
leaded since they can easily be mistaken for the first line of type on the page.
With Fiction. Customarily, works of fiction should not have running heads
along the top of the page unless there is a specific reason for doing so. Often,
novels have only chapter numbers with no chapter titles, which would leave
only the book title to be included in the running head. It is too repetitive to
have the book’s title appear twice on every spread, and most authors would
be abashed to have their name included in every spread. Also, novels tend to
run long and running heads eat up valuable space. Finally, running heads
can prove a distraction to the experience of reading fiction, disrupting the
flow of the narrative with uselessly repeated material.
2:58 PM
Page 367
As many as thirty different rites and rituals have been deemed sacraments
in the course of Christian history. Only seven, however, are widely recognized, and they are traditionally listed in this order:
1. The sacrament of baptism, or baptism
2. The sacrament of confirmation, or confirmation, or christmation (Eastern
3. The sacrament of the Eucharist, or the Eucharist; also called Holy
Communion, Communion, the Lord’s Supper, the Lord’s Table, Mass, or
Blessed Sacrament, though this last term can refer to the service or the
elements themselves
4. The sacrament of penance, or penance, or confession
5. The sacrament of extreme unction, or extreme unction; also called anointing
of the sick, or unction of the sick; the term last rites is the popular term for this
sacrament, but it is not one used by the clergy or theologians. The term unction
is also commonly used, but there are other nonsacramental rites involving
anointing with oil to which that term also applies.
6. The sacrament of orders, or orders, or ordination
7. The sacrament of matrimony, or matrimony; also called the sacrament of
marriage, or marriage
Note that for the majority of Protestant publications, the names of the
sacraments should be lowercased except for those associated with
Communion, or the Lord’s Supper. Keep in mind that most Protestant
churches only recognize baptism and Communion as sacraments (and sometimes not even those). If a publication is targeted for a Roman Catholic,
Church of England, or Eastern Orthodox audience, then these terms should
be capitalized according to their customs. The Eastern Orthodox Church
recognizes these seven in addition to others, all of which are termed
Said References
A said reference is the verb used to connect the subject of a sentence and
a direct quotation: said, asked, answered, shouted, and so on.
Overusing Said. Diversity is good, and in dialogue, the word said can become
repetitive. However, some writers, in attempting to avoid the overuse of the
plain said, devise a wide array of alternate words that can actually prove
2:58 PM
Page 368
368 | Said References
counterproductive. First, it can lead to a humorous redundancy, as in “I beg
you!” she pleaded or “Why?” they queried. Second, it can lead to the use of
words that seem so unusual that they actually distract from the quotation:
“Never!” he countermanded, or “I believe so,” she cogitated aloud. The goal,
rather, should be to keep the said reference from becoming too noticeable.
Ideally, the quotation itself should convey the mood and emotion of the
words and should not have to depend on any attached verbs.
The solution to the overuse of said is simply to replace it only occasionally with common words that will serve the purpose and to remember that
a said reference is not always needed in closely written dialogue: “That’s how
it will be,” he said. “Why?” “Because I said so!” When the speaker is unambiguous, as in most two-person dialogues, no reference is needed at all.
Writer William Zinsser has said that said is so common as to be nearly
invisible to most readers, and it takes an extraordinary number of them used
in a small space to become distracting.
Questions. The question sometimes arises whether one can say a question, as
in: “Why?” she said. Only the writer’s judgment and ear can determine this,
but grammatically, there is no reason why questions cannot be “said.” To
say simply means to speak, and questions are spoken as much as are statements. For variety, however, ask, or any other verb suggesting a question,
can be used as long as it doesn’t seem noticeable or redundant in context.
Most manuals recommend spelling out the word Saint in text when used
in place names or before the names of Christian saints: Saint Paul,
Minnesota, as well as Saint Paul the apostle. It may, however, be abbreviated
(St., singular, and SS., plural) whenever custom recommends it (St. Louis),
wherever a lack of space requires it, or when the terms are repeated so often
as to be distracting. It is capitalized before names (Saint John) but lowercased in general usage (the prayers of the saints).
Mainstream Protestant tradition tends not to use Saint before the names
of Bible figures and figures from church history, preferring the apostle Paul,
for instance, to Saint Paul. This usage may have something to do with
Protestantism’s emphasis on the sainthood of all believers and not singling
out certain ones for special status. Roman Catholic, Eastern Orthodox, and
high-church Anglican traditions tend to use Saint more often to describe Bible
figures, early church figures, and the saints from their traditions, and the
word should be used appropriately when writing for those traditions.
The French feminine form of the abbreviation, Ste., is generally not used
in English before the names of female saints. The feminine form Sainte, how-
2:58 PM
Page 369
Scripture Versus Bible | 369
ever, is retained in personal names (Charles-Augustin Sainte-Beuve) and geographical references (Sainte-Foy).
When used as part of a personal name, Saint should be abbreviated or
spelled out according to the person’s own preference: Oliver St. John
Gogarty, but Antoine de Saint-Exupéry.
The word sanctimonious formerly meant sincerely devout, but it has now
come to mean hypocritically devout. It and the forms sanctimony and sanctimoniousness are generally pejorative.
Savior Versus Saviour
Taking their cue from the King James Version of the Bible, many American
writers cling to the British spelling Saviour when referring to Christ. This
seems an affectation, especially in publications that are not closely tied to
the KJV. For US audiences, use Savior.
Scripture Indexes
See “Indexes, Scripture Indexes.”
Scripture Versus Bible
Though most Christians view them as synonymous, the terms Scripture
and Bible have subtly different emphases. Bible is the more plain-spoken and
commonly used word of the two, both inside and outside the Christian subculture. For many secular readers, Scripture has an overtone of religious cant.
Additionally, the word scripture can refer to the sacred writings of other
religions (the Qur’an, for instance). Even within Christian circles, Scripture
can have a slightly artificial ring, since it has long been associated with the
language of Victorian devotional literature. Both words are perfectly acceptable in most contexts, but the careful writer should be aware of their different shades of tone and the audience to which they are addressed. In general,
this manual has opted to use the word Bible.
Notice that when referring to the Bible, the terms Scripture and the
Scriptures should be capitalized. When referring to the religious writings
in general or holy texts of other religions, the term scriptures is usually
Bible is always capped unless it is used metaphorically to refer to books
of importance in other fields: as in, The Chicago Manual of Style is the bible
of American publishing.
See also “Holy Bible.”
2:58 PM
Page 370
370 | Second Half-Title Page
Second Half-Title Page
The second half-title page, also called the inside half-title page, is, in form,
identical to the half-title that appears on page 1 of most books, but it is used
immediately before the main content (body matter) of the book, separating
it from any front matter. Though optional in most books, it can be especially
useful in works of fiction when it seems appropriate to create a sort of psychological threshold for the reader, passing from the preliminary pages into
the story itself. Second half-title pages are less common in other types of
works but may be appropriate as content and space allow. They can add a
note of elegance to works of scholarship and books of high artistic quality.
Not all fiction benefits from a second half-title page, and such a page may
certainly be dropped if space is a consideration or if the book is already
divided into parts, in which case the first part-title page serves as a convenient divider between the front matter and the text.
Although the word selah is used in thirty-nine of the Psalms as well as three
times in Habakkuk 3, its meaning is not entirely clear. It seems to have been
some sort of liturgical direction, such as a shift in tune or tempo, or an indication of a poetic division, an inserted interlude, or perhaps a stanza break.
It is sometimes quoted as having the meaning “so be it,” much like the
word amen. The word selah does not have that meaning, however, and is
probably not useful for any purpose other than its inscrutable function in
Psalms. (There is a funny scene in the John Huston movie The Man Who
Would Be King, in which the character Michael Dravot makes a kingly pronouncement and, as if to seal its inviolable authority, punctuates it with an
emphatic “Selah!”)
Despite the fact that no less a writer than William Zinsser advised against
the use of the semicolon ( ; ), which he felt had a certain “nineteenth-century
mustiness” about it, the semicolon is still commonly used by most writers
because it serves some specific functions that no other punctuation marks do.
With Compound Sentences. A semicolon is used in the place of a conjunction
between two independent clauses of a compound sentence. Such words as
then, however, thus, hence, indeed, therefore, moreover, consequently, and
also are thought of as transitional adverbs, not conjunctions, when they are
used between independent clauses; therefore, these words are customarily
preceded by a semicolon. The words yet and so, although also considered to
be transitional adverbs, are now commonly preceded by a comma when used
between independent clauses.
2:58 PM
Page 371
Semicolon | 371
Commas, rather than semicolons, are used in a series of short, closely
related clauses with no conjunction. Also, short antithetical clauses are separated by a comma instead of a semicolon.
Mary Slessor knew the hardships of the mission field; she would have been
appalled by the romantic image that eventually surrounded her work.
Wilberforce thought of himself as a Christian above all else; moreover, he saw
his abolitionist views as an outgrowth of his faith.
God warned Adam and Eve about the consequences of sin, yet they disobeyed
He got up, he took his mat, he walked away.
It wasn’t in John’s gospel, it was in Mark’s.
In Lists of Bible References. In lists of Bible references, a semicolon should be
placed between separate chapter references or chapter-and-verse references.
Verse references within chapters should be separated by commas.
He noted the following: Luke 1:46–55; 2:14; and Acts 1:7–8.
The readings for the morning were John 1:1–13, 15, and 29–34.
If only chapter numbers are referred to, however, then commas may be
used to separate the items in the list.
The morning service included Psalms 19, 20, and 23.
Healing miracles can be found in Matthew 8, 9, 12, 15, 17, and 20.
With Internal Punctuation. When items enumerated in running text are particularly long or contain internal punctuation, semicolons should be substituted
for commas in those cases when commas alone would not clarify the relationship of one item to another.
Hannah More knew many of the famous people of her day: Samuel Johnson;
Horace Walpole; David Garrick, who produced her plays; William
Wilberforce, the abolitionist politician; and John Newton, who eventually
became a major influence in her life.
With Namely, That Is, Etc. Before such expressions as that is, namely, i.e., and
e.g., a semicolon may be used, depending on the context and the degree to
which the continuity of thought is interrupted. Note, however, that use of
such scholarly abbreviations as i.e. (id est, Latin for “that is”) and e.g. (exempli gratia, Latin for “for example”) is discouraged in nonacademic writing.
Lewis wrote Greeves that he had crossed a major threshold in his life; that is, he
had passed from “believing in God to definitely believing in Christ.”
These shape-note hymnals, e.g., The Sacred Harp, Southern Harmony, and their
imitators, flourished throughout the South. [semicolon not needed]
2:58 PM
Page 372
372 | Serial Comma
Serial Comma
See “Comma, With a Series of Elements.”
Seven Deadly Sins, The
Thomas Aquinas (c. 1224–74), in his Summa Theologica, identified seven
chief, or capital, sins to which humans commonly fall prey. They have come
to be known as the seven deadly sins. To resolve debates concerning which
are the true “seven deadly” ones, and in which order they are ranked, the
following list is provided. Note that the term seven deadly sins is generally
lowercased, as are the particular terms below, unless they are personified or
used in an allegorical sense, as they often are in medieval literature. (See also
“Four Cardinal Virtues, The.”)
covetousness, or greed
sloth (also called accidie)
Seven Sacraments, The
See “Sacraments.”
Signature Breaks, A Chart of Printer’s
Book pages are not printed separately but are bundled together on large
sheets, then folded and trimmed into sections, called signatures. In former
times, a single sheet folded once, so as to create a total of four pages, was
called a folio (as in the First Folio of Shakespeare’s plays). Nowadays, our
large presses most commonly accommodate sheets of paper that can contain
either sixteen or thirty-two pages, though some mass-market books are
printed on signatures of sixty-four pages. As a result, the total number of
pages in nearly every book that is printed will be a multiple of sixteen, thirtytwo, or sixty-four. The science of arranging the pages on the large sheet so
that they appear in the correct order when folded and gathered is called
In the world of ebooks, of course, terms such as signature and imposition
are meaningless terms since ebooks can contain any number of pages without blanks left over at the end.
The following chart shows the common page-lengths for most printed
books. Printers and publishers refer to these as the “signature breaks.”
2:58 PM
Page 373
Small Caps | 373
Signatures = 16 pages
Add or subtract 8 for half-signatures
Underscores = 32-page signatures
Small Caps
Small caps are letters that have the form of the capital letters but are only
as tall as the letter x (the x height) in that particular face (A, B, C, D . . .). They
are common in display type of all kinds and have some specific uses in text
type, although they are becoming much less common than they once were.
They are no longer recommended for abbreviations of historical eras (use
full cap AD, BC, BCE . . . instead) or time designations (use a.m., p.m.),
though the small-cap abbreviation style may be appropriate in those
instances when a book needs to convey a mood of high artistic or literary
quality. A general small-cap abbreviation style is one of those handy tools
that designers or editors have at their disposal, and it is perfectly allowable
when called for, though it should be applied consistently within any given
For Display Purposes. Some book designs call for small caps to be used for the
opening word (after an initial capital), phrase, or sentence at the beginning
of a chapter. Unless otherwise noted by the designer, all punctuation marks
and capital letters should remain in regular type.
2:58 PM
Page 374
374 | Small Caps
In Phonetic Spellings. Small caps may be used to indicate an accented syllable
in informal renderings of phonetic pronunciation.
Eusebius (pronounced you-SEE-bee-us) is considered the father of church
For Special Emphasis. Small caps are sometimes used to indicate special emphasis in running text, similar to the way italics are used, though perhaps a bit
more emphatic. In most cases, italics are preferred. Fiction writers often use
small caps in dialogue to indicate that a character is shouting. When a writer
wishes to indicate that words on a sign or other display format are in capitals, small caps are often used, though full caps are now more common.
In traditional typography, all-cap words were seldom used in running text,
and small caps were usually used in their place for aesthetic reasons. All caps
tend to look overbold and too widely spaced when used together, drawing
too much attention to themselves on the page. In contemporary usage, however, this manual recommends the continued use of small caps for occasional
emphasis in works of an academic or artistic nature, or where accuracy or
an unusually high-quality page appearance is desired. In works of a popular
nature, especially books of humor or fiction, all caps may be used for emphasis instead.
From the bell tower of the cathedral, Quasimodo shouted, “SANCTUARY!
SANCTUARY!” [Cap-lowercase italics would probably be preferable here,
although all caps are now commonly used as well.]
In big, bold letters, the notice on the back gate of the Compassionate Heart
Church read, “NO TRESPASSING.” [Indicating capital letters on a sign.]
For LORD and GOD, see “LORD and GOD (Small-Cap Forms).”
Solidus (Forward Slash)
For Alternatives. An unspaced solidus, which is also called slash, forward slash,
diagonal, or virgule, may be used to indicate a pair of alternative words. In
the case of alternative prefixes, however, the first prefix is given a hyphen
and set apart.
over- or underexposed
In most formal writing the use of solidus combinations like and/or is discouraged. The solidus should be spaced, however, when one or both elements
on either side is a compound: for instance, a late Romantic / early Modernist
2:58 PM
Page 375
Sources | 375
With Dates and Times. An unspaced solidus or an en dash may be used to indicate that a season or other period of time spans two consecutive years,
although the en dash is preferred.
winter 1620/21
fiscal year 1987–88
In Poetry. If two or more lines of poetry are run into the text, a solidus (with a
word space on both sides) is used to indicate line breaks. Such a solidus may
fall either at the end or the beginning of a line of type that has been broken
by the typesetter’s justification. (See also “Poetry.”)
Many people who quote, “God moves in a mysterious way, / His wonders to
perform” (from the hymn by William Cowper), mistakenly believe they are
quoting the Bible.
In Internet Addresses. An unspaced solidus is commonly used as part of URLs
(uniform resource locators), commonly known as Internet addresses or webpage addresses, as in In such cases, the
slash, also called the forward slash, should be distinguished from the back
slash ( \ ), which is used in computer programming.
Song of Songs Versus Canticles
See “Canticles.”
Use of the Word Bibliography. Increasingly, the word bibliography is being
replaced by the word sources. This is because some people feel that bibliography, which has its etymological roots in the Latin word for “book,” is outdated in this era of digital references and websites. An insistence on using
the word sources, however, seems uselessly purist—first, because language
thrives by accommodating new ideas and concepts; and second, even the
word sources finds its origin in an etymological root meaning a “spring” of
water, which is no better as a metaphor for new media than “book.”
We recommend, therefore, that the editor and author maintain the traditional distinction between a bibliography and a source list. That is, a bibliography should list the significant works related to the topic of the book, to
points discussed in the book, or to works on related topics. Its purpose is to
inform the reader of other works that might be of interest. A source list, by
contrast, is more limited, listing all works actually referenced in the text,
quoted, or otherwise important to the author’s research.
2:58 PM
Page 376
376 | Sources
Proper Names in Bibliographies. In a bibliography, authors, editors, translators,
or compilers of works are listed last name first, and the list is compiled alphabetically. No titles or degrees are used with names. When two or more names
are given for a single entry, the first is listed last name first, a comma follows
that name, and the other names are then listed first name first. If the bibliography is broken down under subheads, each section is alphabetized separately.
Citing Books. The following information should normally be included, where
appropriate, in a bibliographical entry for a book:
Full name of author(s) or editor(s), last name first
Complete title of book (and complete subtitle, if any)
Full name of editor(s) or translator(s), if any
Name of series, and volume and number in the series
Edition, if other than the first
Number of volumes
City where book was published (and state if city is not well known)
Name of publisher
Year of publication
De Gasztold, Carmen Bernos. Prayers from the Ark. Trans. by Rumer Godden.
New York: Viking, 1947.
Johnson, James Weldon. God’s Trombones. New York: Viking, 1927.
Tennyson, G. B., and Edward E. Ericson Jr., eds. Religion and Modern Literature:
Essays in Theory and Criticism. Grand Rapids, Mich.: Eerdmans, 1975.
As with notes, a shortened form for listing the publisher’s name should
be used. See “Notes, Using the Shortened Form of the Publisher’s Name”
and “Publisher’s Names in Short Form, Religious.”
Citing Periodicals. The following information should normally be included in
a bibliographical entry for an article from a periodical:
Full name of author(s) or editor(s), last name first
Complete title of article (and complete subtitle if any)
Name of periodical
Volume number (and issue number if any)
Date (in parentheses)
Page number(s) of article
As in citing books, not all this information is available for every periodical. In such cases, as much of the information as possible should be provided.
Note also that a colon precedes page number(s) if volume and/or issue numbers are given; otherwise a comma is used. Also note that, as with source
notes, this manual of style recommends using parentheses rather than commas to set off the dates of popular references, which differs from CMS, which
recommends using parentheses for journals and commas for general maga-
2:58 PM
Page 377
Sources | 377
zines. The reason for using a single periodical reference style is that reference lists in religious and popular works often contain a mix of scholarly
and popular periodicals and also because it is often hard to distinguish
between the two.
Aeschliman, M. D. “Flickering Candles in the Winds of Woe.” Books & Religion
15, no. 6 (Winter 1988): 3, 29.
“Fighting Isms and Schisms.” Christian History 4, no. 3 (1987): 29.
Ubell, Earl. “Surgeon General C. Everett Koop Has an Idea: A Battle Plan to Save
Your Life.” Parade (April 10, 1988), 16–17.
Citing Webpages. The following information should normally be included in a
bibliographical entry for material from a webpage:
Full name of author(s), last name first
Title of page, entry, or article
Title of the larger work of which the entry or article may be a part (if
Version or file number (if available)
Date of publication, posting, or last revision (if available)
The website’s name (set in italics)
The website’s URL (set in italics)
Access date (in parentheses) (if known)
Loconte, Joseph. “How to Really Keep the Commandments in Alabama—and
Elsewhere.” Posted September 3, 2003. Christianity Today Online. Accessed September 30, 2003.
“Autumn Leaves.” Posted September 5, 2003. Daily Guideposts. (Accessed September 5, 2003.)
Citing Software. The following information should normally be included in a
bibliographical entry for material from a software package, such as a floppy
disk, CD-ROM, or DVD.
Full name of author(s), last name first (if known)
Complete title of work, page, or article within the software package
Title of the software package of which the entry or article may be a part (if
Full name of editor(s) or translator(s), if any
Name of series, and volume and number in the series
Edition, if other than the first
City where the software was published (and state if city is not well known)
Name of publisher
Year of publication
Carson, D. A., Douglas J. Moo, and Leon Morris. Introduction to the New
Testament. In Zondervan Bible Study Library 5.0: Scholar’s Edition CD-ROM.
Grand Rapids, Mich.: Zondervan, 2003.
2:58 PM
Page 378
378 | Sources
“For Further Reading” Lists. A less formal type of bibliography—a “For
Further Reading” list—may be more appropriate than a thorough bibliography in some books. Such lists should follow the format of the formal bibliography but could conceivably contain only author and title. Most any
book in print can be located in a library collection, ordered from a bookstore, or referenced on the Internet with only an author name and title as
references. Of course, more information would help the reader in a “For
Further Reading” list, but it is not necessary if an author wishes to avoid an
overly academic appearance.
Boyer, Robert H., and Kenneth J. Zahorski. Vision of Wonder: An Anthology of
Christian Fantasy.
Chesterton, G. K. The Man Who Was Thursday.
L’Engle, Madeleine. A Wrinkle in Time.
MacDonald, George. The Princess and the Goblin.
Design. Bibliographies and source lists may be set in a type size one or two
points smaller than text size, to conserve space, though if they are very short,
they are best set in the same size as the text.
Spacing between Sentences
As far as putting two word spaces between sentences—don’t! Inserting a
double word space was a common practice in Victorian typesetting and later
typewriting, and it is still sometimes taught as standard keyboard typing procedure. The extra space, however, has no place in printed material. A standard, single word space is sufficient.
Spelling Out Words in Text
Occasionally, a writer needs to indicate how a word, or words, should be
spelled out. This happens most frequently in dialogue. The common practice is to use capital letters separated by hyphens, for instance: “My name is
Smyth, spelled S-M-Y-T-H, if you please!”
State Resident Names
In writing and editing, the question of the correct label for persons from
different geographic regions often arises. Entire dictionaries have been written to deal with that question on a global scale (see Paul Dickson’s book
Labels for Locals: What to Call People from Abilene to Zimbabwe,
Merriam Webster, 1997). The following list will answer that question for the
fifty US states. In some cases, especially when the states themselves have not
designated an official name, the recommended name below is followed in
2:58 PM
Page 379
Style Sheet | 379
parentheses by a commonly used alternative. When in doubt, use the first
Alabamian (Alabaman)
Arizonan (Arizonian)
Arkansan (Arkansawyer)
Coloradan (Coloradoan)
Delewarean (Delewarian)
Floridian (Floridan)
Hawaiian (Islander)
(Illinoisian, Illini)
Indianan (Hoosier,
Lousianian (Lousianan)
(Bay Stater)
New Hampshire
New Jersey
New Hampshirite
New Jerseyan
(New Jerseyite)
New Mexican
New Yorker
North Carolinian
(Tar Heel)
North Dakotan
Rhode Islander
South Carolinian
South Dakotan
West Virginian
New Mexico
New York
North Carolina
North Dakota
Rhode Island
South Carolina
South Dakota
West Virginia
Style Sheet
Perhaps the most effective way for a copyeditor to communicate the many
style decisions that were made in a particular publication is in a style sheet.
This is a simple one- or two-page chart, listing all the grammar, capitalization, punctuation, and word choices made by the editor, especially those that
are exceptions to standard style or not covered in a manual such as this one.
Also, all proper names should be listed with their correct spelling and capitalization so that the editor and proofreader can check for consistency
throughout the publication. If many proper names are used, they are probably best listed separately on a second page.
2:58 PM
Page 380
380 | Style Sheet
The Basic Form. The following is a blank style sheet as it might be set up for a
typical Zondervan book.
Style Sheet for [Author and Title] __________________________________________
Text Style: US ______________ UK ______________ Mid-Atlantic ________________
Predominant Bible version: ____________ Other versions used _______________
Deity Pronoun: lc _______ cap _______ Spell out nos. over: 100 ______ 10 _____
Ellipsis Style: 3-dot (fiction) ________ 3–4-dot (others) ________ Rigorous _______
Special Style Notes: ______________________________________________________
Word List:
Subsidiary Rights
A publisher pays the author for the right to publish the first edition of the
author’s book, but a number of other rights are often included in an authorpublisher contract. These are called subsidiary rights and usually include the
following: audio edition rights (tape or CD), book-club rights, educational
rights (curriculum use), electronic rights (ebook, software, and Internet), film
rights, foreign publication rights, paperback edition rights, reprint rights,
serial rights, theater rights, and translation rights. In most cases, the publisher is in the best position to exploit those rights in the author’s best interest, but an author may wish to retain some of them when he or she has an
existing or special contact who is more likely than the publisher to exploit
those rights.
Symbols, Christian
Many symbols have important and unique significance to Christians, having become common in Christian art and literature over the centuries. Such
symbols are common in churches and cathedrals alike, spanning denominations and cultures. The list below details some of those symbols and their
2:58 PM
Page 381
Symbols, Christian | 381
alpha and omega
altar of burnt sacrifice
angel (man with wings)
Ark of Covenant
ax, vertical
balances, pair of
Bible, placed over sword
book, open
book, with ax
book, with knife
chi rho (XP form)
chi rho on mountain
circles, three interwoven
cross, inverted
cross, with crown
cross (X form)
crown of thorns
dove, descending
doves, seven
eagle, winged
eye, all-seeing (in triangle)
fire, seven-tongued
fire, tongues of
fish (ichthys)
fish, three
fish, two crossed
eternity of Christ
OT sacrifice
fall of man
OT worship
human souls
angelic host
Sermon on the Mount
Christ’s betrayal, Judas
death and heavenly reward
Christ’s kingship, believer’s reward
Christ’s suffering
Holy Spirit, peace
Jesus’ baptism
Holy Spirit
God the Father
Holy Spirit
Holy Spirit, Pentecost
Jonah, also Christ
2:58 PM
Page 382
382 | Symbols, Christian
hand, blessing with halo
hand, from cloud
hands, clasped
heart, pierced with sword
knives, three
lamps, seven
lion, winged
moneybag, open
moneybag, shut
moneybags, three
Noah’s ark
olive branch
ox, winged
palm branch
scallop shell
scallop shell, with water
scallop shells, three
serpent, on cross or pole
snake, in chalice
star, five-pointed
Christ’s dual nature
God the Father
God the Father
marriage, friendship
James the Less
love and service
knowledge and learning
Holy Spirit
Christ’s betrayal
Jewish worship
Christ’s betrayal, Judas
triumphal entry into Jerusalem
immortality and resurrection
Christ’s atonement
God’s covenant
Jesus’ baptism
James the Greater
the church, also Jude
fall of man, sin, Satan
2:58 PM
Page 383
Symbols, Circle | 383
star of David
tau cross
Tower of Babel
tunic, camel-hair
wheat, with tares
wheat sheaves
whips, or barbed scourge
David, Jesus
Matthew, also St. Anthony
sin, human pride
John the Baptist
parable of weeds
Christ’s suffering
Symbols, Circle
A variety of “small letters inside circles” are commonly used in publishing to denote various legalities and rights. The most common are these:
© = the copyright symbol
® = the registered trademark symbol
= the performance symbol
2:58 PM
Page 384
Table of Contents
A table of contents, also called a contents page, not only helps the reader
find specific parts of a book but can also provide a convenient outline of the
book’s content, a fact the author and editor should keep in mind when devising the titles for the chapters and parts of the book.
Placement. It is customarily placed on the next recto page after the title page
(and across from the copyright page), although the positioning can be shifted
to accommodate limitations or special designs. When a table of contents runs
across two pages, they can be conveniently set as a spread, beginning on a
verso and ending on the facing recto, which will keep the reader from having to turn a page to get an overview of the book.
Elements and Setting. It should contain all the major divisions of a book: usually parts and chapters, along with their numbers and titles. Any front or
back matter text (such as forewords, prefaces, introductions, appendixes,
and so on) should be listed on the contents page, though often they are shown
in a contrasting font (italics when the chapters are set in roman type).
The word chapter should not appear before the chapter numbers on the
contents page. They are superfluous in most cases, as well as repetitive. In the
same way, the word page should not appear at the top of the column of page
Style Considerations. Usually, the table of contents is set in the same type style
as the text of the book, and the word Contents at the top of the page should
echo the treatment of the chapter openers.
Leader dots were once commonly used to connect chapter titles with their
appropriate page numbers but are now almost universally rejected as eyesores.
Unnumbered Part- and Chapter-Title Pages. There is also this question to consider: Since part-title and full-page chapter-title pages do not bear folio numbers, how should you reference those pages in a table of contents? The table
of contents should not list the actual page number of the part- or chapter-title
page but the folio number on which the actual text of that part or chapter
begins. That may seem odd, but experience has shown that readers become
less confused when this is done. It is best not to tell a reader that Part One
begins on page 15 when a 15 is actually not printed on any page in the book.
It is best to say in the table of contents that Part One begins on page 17, even
though the actual title page appears on 15.
2:58 PM
Page 385
Ten Commandments | 385
See “Acronyms and Initialisms, Note.”
Telephone Numbers
In general, the following format is used in setting telephone numbers in
text: (123) 456-7890, that is, with parentheses around the area code and a
hyphen used internally. If an extension is used, the number should be set:
(123) 456-7890, ext. 123.
Advocates for the visually impaired argue that a parenthesis can be too
easily mistaken for a numeral 1. If a book, such as a large print book, is being
set specifically for readers with visual impairments, then the telephone number may be set: 123-456-7890. Consistency should be maintained in any
In Fiction. Often in the course of a fictional narrative a telephone or cellular
phone number must be given, for instance, when a character tells another
character how to reach him or her. Of course, the odds are high that any given
made-up number may be a real one, which could prove an inconvenience to
the actual person whose phone has that number. There was a recent case in
which a telephone number was given in a popular movie, which resulted in
several people, in different area codes, feeling harassed by unwanted calls.
The safest way to give a phone number in a novel is to give it the threedigit exchange 555 followed by any other combination of numbers (except
for 1212). Any area code can safely be used, if needed. The exchange 555 is
reserved exclusively for directory assistance in the US, followed by the number 1212, which should be avoided. But all other four-number combinations
should be safe, and if a reader does attempt to dial the number, he or she
will receive an “I’m sorry, your call cannot be completed as dialed” message.
Ten Commandments
The term Ten Commandments and its synonymous terms, Decalogue and
Commandments, are always capitalized, even when used metaphorically, as
in the Ten Commandments of confrontation management. When one commandment is singled out, it should be lowercased, as in the fourth commandment or the commandment regarding the keeping of the Sabbath.
The Ten Commandments are listed twice in the Old Testament: Exodus
20:1–17 and Deuteronomy 5:6–21, with some slight differences in wording
between them. For instance, in the Deuteronomic version of the Tenth
Commandment against covetousness, the “neighbor’s wife” is listed first and
separately, whereas in the version in Exodus, she is listed among the neighbor’s possessions.
2:58 PM
Page 386
386 | Ten Commandments
Care should be taken in referring to a specific commandment because
not all denominations and translations agree in wording, emphasis, or
even order. Also, a careful writer should not assume that the reader will
remember the Commandments by number alone. For instance, it is better
to refer to the commandment prohibiting murder rather than the sixth
Text Breaks
Commonly a fiction author needs to indicate the passage of time, a scene
change, an introduction of a new point-of-view, or other shift in the narrative. The most convenient way of achieving this is with a text break. The
shift is usually not so strong or sudden that the author wishes to begin a new
chapter but merely wants to signal a change in direction in the current chapter. Nonfiction writers also use text breaks between major unheaded sections.
In preparing a manuscript, the author should use three spaced asterisks
( * * * ), also called an asterism, on a line by themselves to indicate the text
break. Another form of the asterism is three pound signs ( # # # ). The author
should inform the editor of the method he or she used to indicate the breaks.
A double space, or two returns, should not be used. Using a double space
runs the risk of having the text break becoming lost or discarded when the
data is converted to another word-processing system since many common
editing programs delete double spaces as redundancies.
That Versus Which
Many writers, editors, and proofreaders insist that in relative clauses the
word that be used when the sense is restrictive and the word which be used
when the sense is nonrestrictive. A clause beginning with a restrictive that is
set without commas, while a clause beginning with a nonrestrictive which
should be set off with commas. This workaday rule, which makes life easier
for editors and proofreaders, is certainly worth observing.
But before insisting on adherence to the that/which rule, it should be
remembered that no English writer before the twentieth century made such
a distinction. In 1926 H. W. Fowler noted in his Dictionary of Modern
English Usage that the history of those terms was “a jumble,” so he proposed that they be distinguished according to restrictive and nonrestrictive
senses. Since then, due to the influence of Fowler’s seminal work, the rule
has been adopted as one of the absolutes of English grammar, with perhaps
even more rigidity than Fowler had intended. It should be remembered that
few average readers are able to distinguish between the two uses, and few
are likely to be confused by a misplaced that or which.
2:58 PM
Page 387
Thou and Thee | 387
Certain exceptions to the that/which rule, therefore, should be taken into
account. First, although Fowler was himself British, his rule has become
gospel primarily among American teachers of English and editors rather than
among the British, who commonly use which in a restrictive sense. This manual does not recommend forcing a British writer to conform to American
style, especially when a work is intended for a UK or combined UK and US
audience (as in the “Mid-Atlantic Style” outlined elsewhere in this book).
Second, the word that is one of the most frequently used words in English,
which means an editor must be sensitive to how often the word is repeated
in a passage before insisting on changing a which to a that. If many thats
already exist in close proximity, it is perfectly acceptable to allow a restrictive which to stand.
Finally, an editor or proofreader should be sensitive to the kind of writing in which that and which are being used. In poetry, for instance, one
should not presume to impose the strict that/which distinction on the poet.
The same would hold true for highly literary fiction and essays, where the
music and rhythm of the author’s words are as important to the sense as the
actual meanings. In those cases, query the author if the usage of that and
which might possibly confuse the reader. Otherwise, leave them as they are.
Thou and Thee
It is surprising how often pseudo–King James English is used in public
prayers when persons of the Trinity are addressed as Thou and Thee.
Originally these forms, being the ones used with one’s family and closest
friends (equivalent to the French informal tu and toi), were used for their
intimacy and informality. Most modern users of these pronouns intend them
to sound more respectful and reverent, as though addressing royalty.
Furthermore, many casual users of these terms use them incorrectly, sometimes indiscriminately interchanging “thou,” which is a subject (“Thou preparest a table before me” [Ps. 23:5]), and “thee,” which is an object (“Unto
thee, O Lord, do I lift up my soul” [Ps. 25:1]). Even a well-known pop singer,
in his rendition of “Be Thou My Vision,” mixes up his pronouns when he
sings, “Naught be all else to me save that Thy art.” Needless to say, one
should avoid these forms except in quotations or when the intent is clearly
Thou adds special inflections to its verbs, -est, -st, and -t, familiar to anyone who reads Shakespeare or the KJV (“Thou anointest my head with oil”
[Ps. 23:5]). To most ears, thou sounds particularly stilted when used with
modern verb forms: Thou knows my inmost thoughts. The possessive form
is thy (“thy rod and thy staff” [Ps. 23:4]), though it takes the form thine
2:58 PM
Page 388
388 | Thou and Thee
when followed by a vowel or an unpronounced h (“Thine eyes did see my
substance” [Ps. 139:16]).
These archaic terms were until recently used occasionally by some Friends
(Quaker) denominations, though with the awareness of their quaint character. They are also used in such popular expressions as holier than thou and
in some old hymns and songs, such as “Come, Thou Long Expected Jesus”
and “My Country, ’Tis of Thee.” Obviously, such uses should be retained as
the familiar ones to most ears.
Many modern hymnals, however, have taken the fairly easy step of rewriting many of the old hymns by replacing thee and thou with you, and thy and
thine with your. If the archaic forms are used to complete a rhyme, however,
as in Frances R. Havergal’s “Take my life, and let it be / Consecrated, Lord,
to Thee,” then such rewriting is not usually attempted.
Three-Em Dash
See “Dash.”
Time and Dates
Spelling Out Versus Numerals. Times of day are usually spelled out unless an
exact moment of time is emphasized, in which case numerals are used.
The evening service ended at about half past seven.
Sunday school begins at 9:30 sharp, and the worship service begins at 11:00.
A.M. and P.M. This manual recommends that the abbreviations a.m. and p.m.
be set in lowercase letters with periods. Small-cap abbreviation style (with or
without periods) is still acceptable, however, when a sense of high literary or
artistic quality needs to be conveyed to the reader.
The abbreviations a.m. and p.m. should be used only with numerical time
designations that use a colon, for instance, 11:00 p.m. rather than 11 p.m.
Furthermore, the words morning, afternoon, evening, and o’clock should
not be combined with the designations a.m. or p.m.
10:45 in the morning
10:45 a.m.
4:00 p.m.
four o’clock in the afternoon
Eras. References to millennia, centuries, and decades should be spelled out. If
numerals are used for decades, add an s with no apostrophe. In informal
contexts the full number of a specific year is sometimes abbreviated with an
apostrophe, for instance, with year designations for automobiles and for
graduating classes.
2:58 PM
Page 389
Time and Dates | 389
second millennium BC
sixteenth century
the seventies and eighties
the 1740s
a ’57 Chevy
the class of ’01
Months. Do not abbreviate the names of the months in text, although they may
be abbreviated in references or charts as follows:
Days of the Week. Do not abbreviate days of the week in text. If a special situation, such as a chart or list, calls for an abbreviation, use the following:
Seasons. The names for the seasons, solstices, and equinoxes are lowercased.
Seasons are capped, however, when they appear in periodical references.
fall (or autumn)
fall (or autumn) equinox
spring equinox
summer solstice
winter solstice
James Galvin, “River Edged with Ice,” Orion 21, Winter 2002.
AD and BC. The abbreviations AD and BC should be set in capital letters with
no periods (though the small-cap style may still be used when appropriate).
Place AD before a specific year reference, although it should follow a reference to an entire century. The abbreviation BC always comes after a century
or year reference. For more details, see “AD” and “BC.”
BCE and CE. In recent years the abbreviations BCE (“before the Common
Era”) and CE (“Common Era”) have gained currency as more secular alternatives to the traditional AD and BC, the specifically Christian emphasis of
which some people find offensive. See “CE and BCE” for a more complete
AH. In Islamic scholarship, AH (anno Hegirae, “in the year of the Hegira”)
designates the era after Muhammed’s flight from Mecca in AD 622. (Also
see “Islamic Religious Terminology.”)
Dates. This manual recommends the “month day, year” style of rendering dates
(the month and day are separated from the year by a comma). Other styles
are common, however. Style 2, shown below, is the “day month year.”
Common in many scholarly and reference works, it is also the preferred style
2:58 PM
Page 390
390 | Time and Dates
in the UK. Note that no commas are used in Style 2. Do not use the ordinal
abbreviations st, nd, rd, or th after numeral figures in dates.
When a month or season designation is immediately followed by a year,
a comma should not be used.
Style 1 (US Style): On May 30, 1934, the Barmen Declaration was signed.
Style 2 (UK Style): Wesley’s conversion took place on 24 May 1738.
Style 3: On the first day of September 1670, William Penn’s trial began.
December 25, not December 25th, but “December twenty-fifth” (in dialogue)
William Booth’s tent ministry in the East End began in July 1865.
It all goes back to fall 2000.
Old Style and New Style. Many historical references distinguish between dates
from the Julian calendar (which was established in 46 BC) and those from
the Gregorian calendar by using the abbreviations OS (Old Style) and NS
(New Style) respectively. Unless otherwise specified, all modern references
are in New Style. The new calendar was established in 1582, although many
Western countries did not adopt it until many years later. The Eastern
Orthodox Church still dates its holidays by the older Julian calendar.
Dates in and around the year in which a specific country adopted the
Gregorian calendar should be checked carefully. For instance, when Great
Britain and the American colonies adopted the New Style system in 1752,
two important changes took place. First, eleven days were dropped from the
calendar (the day after September 2, 1752, was considered September 14,
1752). Also, January 1 was officially made the first day of 1752, whereas
before that time March 25 (the Annunciation) had traditionally been considered New Year’s Day in England. This is further confused by the fact that
many people already considered January 1 to be New Year’s Day.
In referring to years before 1752 in English history, dates between January
1 and March 24 are sometimes listed with a double-year designation. A solidus
is used between the elided year numerals. Again, if no such designation is given,
it can usually be assumed that a New Style date is being referred to.
The storm at sea that lead to John Newton’s conversion took place on March
21, 1748 NS (March 10, OS).
The service took place on Epiphany, January 6, 1720/21.
When Does the Day Actually Begin? Although most modern Western cultures
consider midnight to be the start of the new day, both Jewish and Christian
traditions have considered sunset to be the start of the new day, which is why
the eve of feast days are celebrated—they are, in fact, the beginning of the
2:58 PM
Page 391
Title Changes | 391
feast day itself. Thus, Christmas Eve, Halloween (the eve of All Saints’ Day),
John Keats’ famous “Eve of Saint Agnes,” Twelfth Night (the eve of
Epiphany), and other eves are singled out for special celebration because they
mark the beginning of the holiday itself. Inherent in this Jewish and Christian
tradition, perhaps, is the idea that God brings light out of darkness, so that
daylight always follows nighttime, a symbol of hope and resurrection.
Curiously, the ancient Babylonians, Syrians, and Persians began the day at
sunrise, while the ancient Egyptians began the day at noon. (See also “Hours,
Biblical” and “Watches of the Night.”)
Quaker System of Dating. In the Quaker system of dating, days and months
are usually spelled out and lowercased. This system is not used much today
but is common in Quaker writings of the past. Also, note that before 1752
the Quakers considered March to be the first month of the year.
January ninth, or the ninth day of the first month.
Nineteen-year-old George Fox left home on the ninth day, the seventh month,
1643. [September 9, 1643]
Title Changes
If the title of a work changes in a subsequent reprint or edition of a book
(whether or not the book was originally published by that publisher), it is
recommended that a notice of the original title be provided on the copyright
page. This is also true for books that were previously published in another
language. A notice giving the original title in the original language should
appear on the copyright page.
The phrasing of such formulae is variable, but usually something like the
following is used:
Originally published in [YEAR] under the title . . .
Previously published as . . .
Originally published in [COUNTRY] under the title . . .
Although some publishers opt not to put the original title on the copyright page, all publishers are required by the Federal Trade Commission
(FTC) to give a notice of the original title on both the front cover (or jacket)
and the title page of the book. It should be displayed in a relatively prominent manner so that it might readily come to the attention of the reader.
The FTC also mandates that such a notice in the change of a title be mentioned in promotional copy (meaning primarily catalog copy) for the book.
Such change-of-title notice is not generally required in consumer or trade
advertising, unless, of course, it would benefit the marketing of the book to
mention the original title.
2:58 PM
Page 392
392 | Title Changes
If a foreign work is appearing in English for the first time, the FTC regulations do not require that the original foreign-language title appear on the
cover or title page, though, as stated before, it is usually a courtesy to the
reader to mention the original title on the copyright page.
If the specific English translation of a foreign work has previously
appeared under another title, then the earlier English title should be provided
on the front cover and title page as well as the copyright page.
If it is an entirely new translation of a work that has appeared in other
translations, then any previous English titles need not appear, though the foreign title should still appear on the copyright page as a courtesy to the reader.
Title Page
A book’s title page, which is page 3 in most books but can vary widely
according to the design, usually carries these elements:
1. the complete title and subtitle of the book
2. the name of the author(s), as well as name(s) of any series editors,
translators, compilers, etc.
3. whether the book is an unnumbered revised edition or a newly numbered
revised edition
4. whether the book was previously published with another title
5. the name of the publisher(s) and sometimes the publisher’s city or full
6. the publisher’s logo
Sometimes other elements are present, such as an epigraph, especially if it
is closely related to the title, or such short author information as “the author
of the bestselling . . .” Not present on the title page are running heads or
folios. Most often, designers strive for typographic simplicity, elegance, and
cleanness on a title page. It is, in a sense, a formal invitation to the reader to
read the book. Typographically, it should echo the design of either the cover
or the chapter opening pages.
Titles, Capitalization of
See “Capitalization, Titles.”
Titles, Prepositions in
See “Prepositions in Titles.”
Titles of Common Texts of the World’s Religions
Like the Bible, the names of the most common sacred and venerated texts
of the world’s religions are generally set in roman type. As with the Bible,
2:58 PM
Page 393
Titles of Common Texts of the World’s Religions | 393
however, any specific edition of such a work should be italicized as an ordinary book title: for instance, The Essential Chuang Tzu or The Tao Te Ching:
An Illustrated Journey.
Unless an author has an alternate preference, this manual recommends
the unaccented and unhyphenated forms of such titles (Tao Te Ching, rather
than Tao Tê Ching or Tao-te-ching, for instance) whenever there is an alternative. Although we recommend the pinyin system for most Chinese words,
an exception is made for most Chinese authors and religious works whose
names are already long-established in a romanized form. For instance, Tao
Te Ching rather than Daodejing (pinyin) and its legendary author Lao Tzu
rather than Laozi (pinyin). (See “Chinese Transliteration.”)
Here is a list of the most common titles in their preferred forms in English.
Alternate titles are also given where those are known.
Akaranga Sutra—Jain
Anelects, the—Confucian; also called the Lun Yü
Atharva-Veda, the—Hindu; part of the Samhita, or Vedas
Avesta, the—Zoroastrian (sometimes wrongly called the Zend-Avesta)
Bhagavad-Gita, the—Hindu; part of the Mahabharata
Blue Cliff Record, the—Zen Buddhist
Book of Changes, the—Confucian; also called the I Ching; one of the Five
Book of Filial Piety, the—Confucian; also called the Hsiao Ching
Book of History, the—Confucian; also called the Shuh Ching; one of the Five
Book of Mormon, the—Mormon; subtitled Another Testament of Jesus Christ
Book of Rites, the—Confucian; also called the Li Ki; one of the Five Classics
Book of Songs, the—Confucian; also called the Shih Ching; its two parts are
two of the Five Classics
Book of the Dead, the—Buddhist (The Tibetan Book of the Dead)
Brahmanas, the—Hindu
Chuang Tzu—Taoist; the writings of Chuang Tzu
Dhammapada, the—Buddhist
Doctrine of the Mean, the—Confucian; also called the Chung Yung
Doctrines and Covenants, the—Mormon
Egyptian Book of the Dead, the—Egyptian; also known as the Papyrus of Ani
Five Classics, the—Confucian
Gemara, the—Jewish; part of the Talmud; a commentary on the Mishnah
Granth Sahib—Sikh (Shree Guru Granth Sahib)
Great Learning, the—Confucian; also called the Ta Hsueh
Hadith, the—Muslim; usually capped, even though it is an oral body of work
rather than a written document
Haggadah, the—Jewish; also spelled Aggada; the legends and stories section of
the Talmud
2:58 PM
Page 394
394 | Titles of Common Texts of the World’s Religions
Halakah, the—Jewish; the legal section of the Talmud
I Ching, the—Confucian; also called the Book of Changes; one of the Five
Inner Chapters, the—Taoist; the oldest section of the writings of Chuang Tzu
Kalpa Sutra—Jain
Kojiki, the—Shinto
Koran, the—Muslim; see Qu’ran
Lao Tzu—Taoist; the Tao Te Ching and other writings attributed to Lao Tzu
Lotus Sutra, the—Mahayana Buddhist
Mahabharata, the—Hindu
Mishnah, the—Jewish; part of the Talmud
Nihongi, the—Shinto
Papyrus of Ani, the—Egyptian; also known as the Egyptian Book of the Dead
Pearl of Great Price—Mormon
Pentateuch, the—Jewish
Qur’an, the—Muslim; also spelled Koran and Quran, though Qur’an is the
preferred English form
Rig-Veda, the—Hindu; part of the Samhita, or Vedas
Sama-Veda, the—Hindu; part of the Samhita, or Vedas
Samhita, the—Hindu; the four Vedas together
Spring and Autumn Annals, the—Confucian; one of the Five Classics
Sunna, the—Muslim; usually capped, even though it is an oral body of work
rather than a written document
Sun Tzu—Taoist; also called the Art of War
sutra—Buddhist; capped only if a specific one is named
Talmud, the—Jewish
Tanak, the—Jewish
Tao Te Ching, the—Taoist; attributed to Lao Tzu
Torah, the—Jewish
Tripitaka, the—Buddhist
Upanishads, the—Hindu; the final portion of the Vedas
Veda, or Vedas, the—Hindu
Vimalakirti Sutra, the—Mahayana Buddhist
Wen Tzu, the—Taoist; later writings attributed to Lao Tzu
Yajur-Veda, the—Hindu; part of the Samhita, or Vedas
Today’s New International Version: Bible Style
See “Bible Style: The New International Version.”
Trademarks and Trade Names
See “Brand Names.”
2:58 PM
Page 395
Two-Em Dash | 395
Trim Sizes for Books, Common
Although books can be trimmed in almost any size, from the 1-3/8 x
2- /16 –inch We the People: Two Hundred Years of the Constitution by R. C.
Bellas (Xavier Press, 1987) to the 10-3/4 x 14-1/2 –inch Leonardo Da Vinci
(Istituto Geografico da Agostino, 1956), the smallest and largest books,
respectively, on my shelves, a few sizes have become standard throughout
the book industry. These sizes tend to be the least expensive to produce since
many printers have preset their presses and production equipment to conveniently handle them. These trim sizes generally apply as well to print-ondemand books, which have so far merely imitated the sizes and shapes of
books already familiar to readers.
The following chart shows the common US book trim sizes and their common descriptions and purposes.
Common US Trim Sizes
Width x height
in inches
Type of books sometimes
associated with this size
4-3/16 x 6-3/4
“mass market”
Traditional “pocketbook”; often printed
on lower-grade paper; often has
an ephemeral feel.
5-5/16 x 8
trade paper
small hardcovers
Standard trade paper books; small
hardcover and gift books; small novels
5-1/2 x 8-1/2
trade paper
Many trade paper books and
hardcovers; standard hardcover
fiction size.
some lengthy books
“Blockbuster” fiction and bestseller potential; important books that
make a statement.
7-3/8 x 9-1/8
large size
Slightly larger than average book;
workbooks, ”lifestyle” books
8 x 9-1/8
large “square” format
“coffee table books”
Two-Em Dash
See “Dash.”
2:58 PM
Page 396
396 | Typographic Symbols, Common
Typographic Symbols, Common
The following typographic symbols are more or less common in contemporary publishing and printing, and although some seem a bit antiquated,
their presence persists in most word-processing type fonts. The least used
ones (like @, the “at symbol”) have found a new life in the Internet age. An
asterisk in the list below indicates that a more complete discussion can be
found in this manual under a separate heading for that symbol. (Also see
individual punctuation marks: “Period,” “Comma,” etc.)
sign for “and”; a typographic form of the
Latin et (also called the tironian sign)
section mark
shows the beginning of a section of writing;
a stylized double s, for the Latin signum
sectionis (“sign of a section”)
fist (or index hand)
printer’s symbol, meaning “note this”
paragraph symbol
(or blind p)
indicates the beginning of a paragraph;
common in the KJV
(or round brackets)
to indicate parenthetical thought or
(or square brackets)
to show parenthetical statement within
*braces (or curly brackets)
used to group consecutive lines
for footnotes and itemizing elements in a list
asterism (or triple asterisk)
used to indicate minor breaks in text
dagger (or obelisk)
the first level of symbol footnoting
or * * *
or # # #
double dagger
the second level of symbol footnoting
number sign
(or pound sign)
still occasionally used for numbers, but
now mostly used as a select key on
telephone keypads
dollar sign
US currency
yen sign
Japanese currency
euro sign
European currency
percent sign
used for percentages; abbreviation of the
Latin per centum (per one hundred); used
mostly in scientific or technical contexts
2:58 PM
Page 397
Typography, The Elements of Basic Book | 397
for uses, see “Solidus (Forward Slash)”
less-than sign
used in mathematical settings
equal sign
used in mathematical settings
greater-than sign
used in mathematical settings
at symbol
formerly little used as an abbreviation to mean
at or approximately; now universally used to
designate email addresses
back slash
used primarily in computer programming
trademark symbol
to show that the trademark is legally protected
copyright symbol
to show that the material is legally copyrighted
registered trademark
to show that the trademark is legally registered
Typography, The Elements of Basic Book
A book’s cover and its interior design serve two quite different purposes.
The cover is essentially an advertisement, a billboard that quickly conveys in
word, color, and image a sense of the book’s content and the promise it holds
for the reader. It should therefore draw attention to itself. It is the one place
in book design, says biblio-scholar Douglas C. McMurtrie, in which “fancy
can run riot.”
The interior, or text, design of a book serves a different function. Ideally,
it should be attractive but not distracting. In her book The Crystal Goblet,
famed book designer Beatrice Ward compared interior typography to a wine
glass. It should have sufficient beauty in itself, but not so much that it distracts from the color and taste of the wine. In a sense the reader looks through
a book’s type directly to the author’s thoughts. To the extent that the design
is noticed or is distracting, a portion of the author’s content will be lost.
The design, interior and exterior alike, must also cohere as a whole, and
there must be a reason for all design decisions. As designer Philip Brady says
in his book Using Type Right, “Literally no element that goes into creating
a visual message . . . is neutral. Each element is a signal acting as either a
friend or a foe to getting the message across” (3).
Nor should the designer indulge in design for design’s sake. Design can
only be approached with the reader in mind. “In planning a book,” wrote
Eric Gill in his Essay on Typography, “the first questions are: who is going
to read this, and under what circumstances?” (106).
2:58 PM
Page 398
398 | Typography, The Elements of Basic Book
Most of the elements of basic book typography given below are for the text
of the book, not its cover, title pages, front or back matter, or chapter opening
pages. General rules for display typography cannot be so easily summarized
because, like advertising, book covers and even chapter openers are subject to
rapidly changing trends, experimentation, and creativity on the part of the
designer. Rules for text type are simpler. These principles have remained relatively unchanged over the centuries because they have proven to promote optimum reading speed with a minimum of fatigue, especially for long periods of
sustained reading. Still, rules can be broken when there is a good reason to do
so. Marshall Lee observed, in his Bookmaking, “There is only one rule in
design: If it works, it’s good” (90).
Type Size. The size of the text type for most books, whether for children who
read at a fifth-grade reading level and above or for adults, is 9-, 10-, 11-, or
12-point type. For faces that have a small x-height, 11- and 12-point types
predominate; while 9- and 10-point predominate for faces with a large
x-height. Books that are termed “large-print” should have a type size of
16- or preferably 18-point or larger. Their relative sizes are shown here:
9-point Garamond:
As I walked through the wilderness of this world, I lighted on a certain place where
was a Den, and I laid me down in that place to sleep: and, as I slept, I dreamed a
dream. I dreamed, and behold, I saw a man clothed with rags, standing in a certain
place, with his face from his own house, a book in his hand, and a great burden
upon his back. I looked, and saw him open the book, and read therein; and as he
read, he wept, and trembled; and, not being able longer to contain, he brake out
with a lamentable cry, saying, What shall I do? (John Bunyan, the opening words
of The Pilgrim’s Progress, 1678)
10-point Garamond:
As I walked through the wilderness of this world, I lighted on a certain
place where was a Den, and I laid me down in that place to sleep: and, as I
slept, I dreamed a dream. I dreamed, and behold, I saw a man clothed with
rags, standing in a certain place, with his face from his own house, a book
in his hand, and a great burden upon his back. I looked, and saw him open
the book, and read therein; and as he read, he wept, and trembled; and, not
being able longer to contain, he brake out with a lamentable cry, saying,
What shall I do? (John Bunyan, the opening words of The Pilgrim’s
Progress, 1678)
2:58 PM
Page 399
Typography, The Elements of Basic Book | 399
11-point Garamond:
As I walked through the wilderness of this world, I lighted on a certain place where was a Den, and I laid me down in that place to sleep:
and, as I slept, I dreamed a dream. I dreamed, and behold, I saw a
man clothed with rags, standing in a certain place, with his face from
his own house, a book in his hand, and a great burden upon his back.
I looked, and saw him open the book, and read therein; and as he
read, he wept, and trembled; and, not being able longer to contain,
he brake out with a lamentable cry, saying, What shall I do? (John
Bunyan, the opening words of The Pilgrim’s Progress, 1678)
12-point Garamond:
As I walked through the wilderness of this world, I lighted on
a certain place where was a Den, and I laid me down in that
place to sleep: and, as I slept, I dreamed a dream. I dreamed,
and behold, I saw a man clothed with rags, standing in a certain place, with his face from his own house, a book in his
hand, and a great burden upon his back. I looked, and saw him
open the book, and read therein; and as he read, he wept, and
trembled; and, not being able longer to contain, he brake out
with a lamentable cry, saying, What shall I do? (John Bunyan,
the opening words of The Pilgrim’s Progress, 1678)
16-point Garamond:
As I walked through the wilderness of this
world, I lighted on a certain place where was a
Den, and I laid me down in that place to sleep:
and, as I slept, I dreamed a dream. I dreamed,
and behold, I saw a man clothed with rags,
standing in a certain place, with his face from
his own house, a book in his hand, and a great
burden upon his back. I looked, and saw him
2:58 PM
Page 400
400 | Typography, The Elements of Basic Book
open the book, and read therein; and as he
read, he wept, and trembled; and, not being
able longer to contain, he brake out with a lamentable cry, saying, What shall I do? (John
Bunyan, the opening words of The Pilgrim’s
Progress, 1678)
Type Weight. A medium weight typeface, that is, with line strokes that are neither too light nor too heavy, is best for standard book setting. The most commonly used medium weight faces are Times New Roman, Bembo, and
Boldface. Avoid boldface type in text whenever possible, except for headings,
display type, and cross-referencing in reference works. (These words are in
boldface.) Bold type in text tends to distract the reader from the content and
make the page look splotchy, and large portions of boldface text can even
cause the type to appear blurred. Use italic for emphasis instead.
Italic. While italic is commonly used for emphasis, its use should be kept to a
minimum. (These words are in italic.) Large blocks of text in italics are difficult to read, and they decrease speed and comprehension levels.
Serif and Sans-serif Typefaces. Scientific research indicates that serif typefaces
may be marginally more readable than sans-serif, although familiarity may
be more of a factor than physiology. (This is a serif typeface, and this is a
sans-serif typeface.) Anecdotal evidence from readers shows that serif faces
are almost universally preferred for long periods of sustained reading. When
in doubt, stick with the traditional serif fonts.
Lowercase and Uppercase Type. Standard cap-lowercase type should be used
for text in books. (This line is set in cap-lowercase.) It is best to avoid even
occasional use of all-cap type whenever possible because all-cap type
decreases “word-shape recognition,” slows the reading, and takes up thirty
percent more space. It can also distract the reader and break the spell of the
reading experience itself. In most cases when emphasis is required, italics can
be used as effectively as all-caps. In those cases in which all-capital letters
are needed, most traditional typographers recommend the use of small caps
2:58 PM
Page 401
Typography, The Elements of Basic Book | 401
Calligraphy Fonts. These should be used only for display, never for continuous
reading. Occasionally, when the author or editors wish to convey the general
impression of handwritten text, a calligraphy font can be used in small doses.
They are often quite beautiful but are unreadable for more than the occasional word or sentence.
This is a calligraphy font.
Type on the Spine of the Book. It is customary in the US to set spine type so that
it reads from top to bottom, or, to put it another way, so that it reads from
left to right when the book is laid flat with the front cover facing up.
Ligatures. Whenever ligatures are available for a font, they should be used, especially in display type, titles, and headlines. Most computer typesetters will
automatically add the ligature characters in the typesetting process, although
many recent fonts seemed to have been designed without them. Here are the
most common ligatures in English: Æ, æ, Œ, œ, ff, ffi, ffl, fi, and fl.
Numbers and Numerals. Scientific research shows that arabic numerals are
more readable than the same numbers spelled as words, even for numbers
under one hundred. This manual recommends abiding by the customary rule
of spelling out numbers of under one hundred, but it does make an exception for books intended for young adults, in which we recommend spelling
out numbers under ten. Use numerals for all the rest.
Reverse Type. In striving for unique effects, some less-experienced designers will
set light type or small fonts on dark backgrounds (“white on black”). This
should be avoided. However, reverse-type technique can be quite effective
when used with heavy type or display fonts.
Mixing Typefaces. Contrast and compatibility are the key words for mixing two
or more different typefaces, and such a mix of fonts should usually be limited to front matter, chapter openers, running heads, back matter, and display
type. For readability of text matter, however, a single face should be relied on.
Line Width and Average Word-Per-Line Counts. For maximum readability, the
line width on the page of standard text type should be between 18 and 24
picas. Some designers use this rule: Maximum width should never be more
than twice the font size. Thus, 24 picas would be the maximum width for a
12-point type.
Ideally, the average words-per-line count should be between 8 and 12,
though readability begins to be sacrificed when the lines average much more
than 13 or 14 words per line. This is not only because the typeface is smaller
at that word count but also because the eye has a harder time “tracking
back” to the next line of text while reading, which promotes fatigue. Lines
2:58 PM
Page 402
402 | Typography, The Elements of Basic Book
that are too short (less than 8 words) can be just as fatiguing, however,
because the eye is having to shift right-to-left much more often than in standard setting. To ascertain the average words-per-line, select ten full lines of
text (exclude first and last lines of paragraphs), add up the total number of
words, and divide by ten. The average word-per-line count of this paragraph
you are now reading is 13.7.
Leading. The space between lines of standard serif text settings should be
between one and four points, depending on the typeface used, its weight, xheight, and other factors. Dark types, boldface type, and most sans-serif types
require more leading for maximum readability. Here is the same sample from
Bunyan’s Pilgrim’s Progress, this time in 12-point type with four different
With 1 extra point of leading:
As I walked through the wilderness of this world, I lighted on
a certain place where was a Den, and I laid me down in that
place to sleep: and, as I slept, I dreamed a dream. I dreamed,
and behold, I saw a man clothed with rags, standing in a certain place, with his face from his own house, a book in his
hand, and a great burden upon his back. I looked, and saw him
open the book, and read therein; and as he read, he wept, and
trembled; and, not being able longer to contain, he brake out
with a lamentable cry, saying, What shall I do? (John Bunyan,
the opening words of The Pilgrim’s Progress, 1678)
With 2 extra points of leading:
As I walked through the wilderness of this world, I lighted on
a certain place where was a Den, and I laid me down in that
place to sleep: and, as I slept, I dreamed a dream. I dreamed,
and behold, I saw a man clothed with rags, standing in a certain place, with his face from his own house, a book in his
hand, and a great burden upon his back. I looked, and saw him
open the book, and read therein; and as he read, he wept, and
trembled; and, not being able longer to contain, he brake out
with a lamentable cry, saying, What shall I do? (John Bunyan,
the opening words of The Pilgrim’s Progress, 1678)
2:58 PM
Page 403
Typography, The Elements of Basic Book | 403
With 3 extra points of leading:
As I walked through the wilderness of this world, I lighted on
a certain place where was a Den, and I laid me down in that
place to sleep: and, as I slept, I dreamed a dream. I dreamed,
and behold, I saw a man clothed with rags, standing in a certain place, with his face from his own house, a book in his
hand, and a great burden upon his back. I looked, and saw him
open the book, and read therein; and as he read, he wept, and
trembled; and, not being able longer to contain, he brake out
with a lamentable cry, saying, What shall I do? (John Bunyan,
the opening words of The Pilgrim’s Progress, 1678)
With 4 extra points of leading:
As I walked through the wilderness of this world, I lighted on
a certain place where was a Den, and I laid me down in that
place to sleep: and, as I slept, I dreamed a dream. I dreamed,
and behold, I saw a man clothed with rags, standing in a certain place, with his face from his own house, a book in his
hand, and a great burden upon his back. I looked, and saw him
open the book, and read therein; and as he read, he wept, and
trembled; and, not being able longer to contain, he brake out
with a lamentable cry, saying, What shall I do? (John Bunyan,
the opening words of The Pilgrim’s Progress, 1678)
Justified and Unjustified Text Setting. For ease or speed of reading, little
difference exists between justified (aligned on both margins) setting and
unjustified (aligned on the left, ragged on the right). The issues are mostly
aesthetic. Justified setting is the more common of the two, though
unjustified setting is increasingly being used. This present paragraph was
set in unjustified setting while the others on this page are justified.
2:58 PM
Page 404
404 | Typography, The Elements of Basic Book
One-Column and Two-Column Text. Where space is a problem, especially in
reference works and textbooks, setting the type in a two-column rather than
a one-column format can be not only more compact but also more readable.
Obviously, many genres, such as fiction, do not lend themselves well to twocolumn setting, but even in those cases, creative designers have achieved
attractive, readable design using two columns.
As I walked through the wilderness of
this world, I lighted on a certain place
where was a Den, and I laid me down in
that place to sleep: and, as I slept, I
dreamed a dream. I dreamed, and behold, I saw a man clothed with rags,
standing in a certain place, with his face
from his own house, a book in his hand,
and a great burden upon his back. I
looked, and saw him open the book,
and read therein; and as he read, he
wept, and trembled; and, not being able
longer to contain, he brake out with a
lamentable cry, saying, What shall I do?
(John Bunyan, the opening words of
The Pilgrim’s Progress, 1678)
Indention. Commonly, the indention that comes at the beginning of every paragraph is about two to three ems. Sometimes, for gift books, experimental
works, and very short works, an extra line of space can be inserted between
paragraphs, although indentions are usually not used in combination with
the extra line spaces between paragraphs.
Gutter. The margins that run along the center of the book when it is opened
should be wide enough so that type does not curve when the book is opened.
Curving type on too-wide line lengths decreases reading speed considerably.
One test is this: Can you photocopy facing pages of the book without having to crack the spine to get a legible image of the words?
Outside Margins. Adequate margins should be maintained on the outside left
and right margins of any book, even mass market editions. The simple reason is that they allow for the reader to hold the book open with the thumbs.
Most of us have had the frustrating experience of having a book snap shut
because we were holding the book delicately on the edges when the margins
were of insufficient size.
2:58 PM
Page 405
Unspoken Discourse
A person’s thoughts, imaginings, and unspoken prayers (called unspoken
discourse), when expressed in the first person, are best set in roman type,
either with or without quotation marks, according to the author’s preference
and the reader’s perception. An internal capital letter may be used when the
unspoken discourse begins in the middle of a sentence. This is a shift from
the former style of expressing unspoken discourse in italics. Occasional
unspoken discourse may still be set in italics, of course, especially when it is
difficult to distinguish between the narrative matter and the unspoken
thoughts. Still, a skillful writer will be able to communicate interior monologue without the use of italics.
“Surely, this is the East Indies,” thought Columbus as he gazed out at the
tropical islands. [with quotation marks]
Though hardly wealthy, the woman looked at her life and thought, What have
I done to deserve such blessings? [without quotation marks, with a capital
indicating the beginning of the thought]
See “Webpage Addresses (URLs).”
Vertical Lists, Numbering
See “Outlines and Lists” and “Period, With Numbers in Vertical Lists.”
2:58 PM
Page 406
Warning Notice
A warning notice is a statement, usually included on a book’s copyright
page, that unequivocally notifies the reader that reproducing material from
the book, no matter what the form of reproduction, is illegal. It is by no
means mandatory for the publisher or author to provide a warning notice
since the current copyright laws are sufficient to protect the book without it.
Still, its use is recommended. (See “Copyright Page.”)
The following formula is fairly standard throughout the publishing industry, though the phrasing may be made more or less threatening as appropriate:
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means—electronic,
mechanical, photocopy, recording, or any other—except for brief
quotations in printed reviews, without the prior permission of the publisher.
Note that the “all rights reserved” notice can be conveniently incorporated into the warning notice. (See “All Rights Reserved Notice.”) When a
warning notice is given, it is also important to give the publisher’s address on
the copyright page so that readers know where to write if they do wish to
obtain the permission of the publisher to quote portions of the text.
If space is a problem, a shorter formula may be used:
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means except for brief
quotations in printed reviews, without the prior permission of the publisher.
Or the even simpler:
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced without the
prior permission of the publisher.
In some cases, the publisher may want to qualify the warning notice so
that copying of some pages is allowed in certain clearly defined situations.
This is done by adding a permission-to-copy notice to the warning notice.
(See “Permission-to-Copy Notice.”)
Watches of the Night
In modern usage, the term watches of the night (or, less correctly, watches
in the night) is archaic, though when it is used, it is often used incorrectly. In
2:58 PM
Page 407
Webpage Addresses (URLs) | 407
Bible times, the night hours were divided into watches, though they take
slightly different forms in the Old and New Testaments. Watch refers to the
guards or soldiers whose duty was to keep watch during designated periods
of the night. In the OT, the Israelites observed three watches of about four
hours each (varying with the seasons), so that when Gideon blows his trumpet “at the beginning of the middle watch” (Judg. 7:19), it means about four
hours after sunset. In the NT, the Romans observed four watches of about
three hours each (varying with the seasons), so that when Jesus walks on the
water “about the fourth watch of the night” (Mark 6:48), it means just
before dawn.
Israelite Watch
Modern Equivalent (approximate)
first watch
second watch
third watch
6:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m.
10:00 p.m. to 2:00 a.m.
2:00 a.m. to 6:00 a.m.
Roman Watch
Modern Equivalent (approximate)
first watch
second watch
third watch
fourth watch
6:00 p.m. to 9:00 p.m.
9:00 p.m. to 12:00 p.m.
12:00 p.m. to 3:00 a.m.
3:00 a.m. to 6:00 a.m.
Webpage Addresses (URLs)
The location of a specific website on the Internet can be found using its
webpage address, or web address. The technical term for that address is the
initialism URL, which stands for “uniform resource locator,” though that
full name should not be used because most people familiar with the abbreviation have no idea what it stands for. The terms webpage address and web
address should be used in most ordinary communication rather than the
more technical term URL. Note, however, that the abbreviation is pronounced as an initialism (U-R-L), not as a word (“earl”), and its plural is
URLs (with a lowercase s).
Conventions for Setting in Text. It is common for authors to provide web
addresses in text, whether referring to their own personal websites, the websites used in their research, or websites that might be of interest to their readers. Because of the unique construction of URLs and, often, their excessive
length, problems in setting sometimes arise. The following guidelines should
1. Set web addresses, whether in lists or in text, in italics.
2:58 PM
Page 408
408 | Webpage Addresses (URLs)
2. Do not use the prefix http:// in the web address. It is the assumed
prefix to all URLs and is not needed in references to a webpage. Say rather than
in references to that page.
3. If a webpage address needs to be broken over a line of text, break it
only at a convenient slash and do not add a hyphen.
If it is necessary to break an address at some place other than a slash,
break it before any other punctuation. For instance, don’t allow a dot to
stand at the end of the first line, where it might appear to be a period, but
place at the beginning of the second line.
4. Some people suggest that a webpage address not be allowed to fall at
the end of a sentence or major clause because the sentence’s own punctuation might be mistaken as part of the address itself. Most readers, however,
will not have a problem distinguishing a “dot” from a period in context. It
is okay to follow a webpage address with a period, comma, or question
mark. If there is some reason to feel that placing a punctuation mark immediately after a webpage address will result in serious misreading or confusion, then a thin space between the address and the mark may be inserted.
He finally found the book at .
Have you accessed ?
For more information on how to render web addresses as bibliographic
references, see “Sources, Citing Webpages.”
Other Problems. One disadvantage of providing webpage addresses in printed
material is that those addresses go out of date very quickly. It is frustrating
to try to access a page on the Internet only to find that it no longer exists, and
defunct address references can make a book seem prematurely outdated.
There may be no solution to this other than referencing addresses selectively
and carefully, using primarily those that are from larger, well-established
Website Names
In both references and text, the names of websites should be styled according to the same rules that apply to print sources. The title of an online periodical, for instance, should be italicized (for example,, while
2:58 PM
Page 409
Widows and Orphans | 409
the name of an online company should be set in roman (for example, Though the distinction is sometimes hard to perceive, it is a
distinction that must also be made in the non-Internet world (for example,
Time magazine and Time Inc.).
Websites, Citing
See both “Sources, Citing Webpages” and “Webpage Addresses (URLs).”
Western Wall Versus Wailing Wall
Modern Israelis prefer the term Western Wall to the term Wailing Wall
for that portion of the old temple in Jerusalem to which it refers (once
believed to be part of Solomon’s original temple but actually of a much later
date), and there is no reason not to respect this preference. The change is
meant to symbolize the Jews’ new hope after emerging from the tragedies of
Widows and Orphans
The terms widow and orphan are often used interchangeably, but they
describe distinct typographic situations. A typographic widow is defined as
any last line of a paragraph that is allowed to stand apart from the rest of the
paragraph, for instance, on the top of the following page or after an inserted
graphic or sidebar. Most typesetting systems are programmed with preset
“widow conditions” that calculate the lines-per-page so that, ideally, one line
of a paragraph alone will never carry over to the next page.
The term widow also applies to the ends of chapters. In most circumstances, one- or two-line widows are never allowed to stand alone on an otherwise blank page. Three- to four-line widows should be strongly discouraged
but may only be allowed if absolutely no other typographic option is available. Ideally, the last page of any chapter should have at least five lines of
type on it.
A typographic orphan is a broken word or a short word of four or fewer
characters that is allowed to stand alone on a line at the end of a paragraph.
Usually there is a typographic solution to this situation, either by reducing
the word space in the previous lines to bring the short word up or by expanding the word spaces to force more characters down to the last line. In most
cases, reducing or expanding the letter space in the previous line or lines
should not be done, since the resulting appearance usually draws more attention to itself than the original orphan. As a last resort, the editor has the
option of editing out a word or rewriting a portion of the paragraph to eliminate the problem. Obviously, this should be done with caution and only
when the orphan is likely to be a distraction to the reader.
2:58 PM
Page 410
410 | Word Division
Word Division
Word division is often a puzzle. The major dictionaries themselves occasionally differ on how properly to hyphenate words that are forced to break
over lines of text. Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, for instance, breaks words
according to pronunciation, whereas The Random House College Dictionary
tends to divide them according to etymological derivation, or root word.
Also, the standard style manuals do not accept all dictionary word divisions
as legitimate for typesetting purposes—for instance, syllables of two letters
are shown in all dictionaries, but they are seldom allowed to be used for line
breaks in type. Add to these confusions the fact that computer typesetters
generate their own word divisions in two ways: from the computer’s own
programmed dictionary and by a logic program, neither of which may correspond to the publisher’s preferred style. To sort out this confusion, some
guidelines might be helpful.
Use a Standard Reference and Stick with It. This manual recommends the rules
for word division found in The Chicago Manual of Style, Fifteenth Edition
(sections 7.33–7.45). These rules define which dictionary breaks are and are
not legitimate for typesetting purposes. These include:
1. Do not allow two-letter breaks at the beginning of a line of type,
though they are acceptable at the end of a line: for example, do not
allow enchant-er, but en-chanter is acceptable.
2. Do not accept -le divisions (liquid l), as in peo-ple, bot-tle, hum-ble,
spar-kle, arti-cle. (CMS now accepts these as legitimate breaks.)
3. Do not allow a word to break over two pages. Recto-to-verso breaks
should never be allowed, though verso-to-recto breaks can occasionally be permitted when no other option works efficiently.
4. Do not allow a portion of a broken word to stand on a line by itself
at the end of a paragraph. (Also see “Widows and Orphans.”)
5. Do not break words of one syllable.
6. Words that already contain a hyphen should be broken only at the
existing hyphen whenever possible: twenty-three, not twen-ty-three.
7. Words that begin with prefixes are best broken after that prefix whenever possible: dis-equilibrium rather than disequi-librium.
8. Compound words should be broken between the root elements whenever possible: proof-reading rather than proofread-ing.
9. Do not allow breaks that will cause misreading, as in Anti-gone, for
But Allow for Occasional Flexibility. You’ll note that many of the rules in this
section say “whenever possible.” That should be taken to mean that an awkward break is preferable to a line of type that is either too loose or too tight.
2:58 PM
Page 411
World-English Style | 411
Common sense should be used, and the question should always be asked:
What option will cause the least disruption for the reader?
As long as the conditions set out in CMS are met, some publishers even
accept word divisions that conform to the style of any major dictionary. For
instance, righteous may be broken either righ-teous (Webster’s “pronunciation” style) or right-eous (Random House College Dictionary’s “root word”
style), and a publisher may accept both as legitimate. This liberality is often
a compromise of style and quality, and should be avoided in high-quality
editing. In many cases, however, such flexibility is necessary, since even a
slight adjustment in line length at late proof stages can cause a paragraph,
chapter, or even an entire book to rejustify. Little adjustments can snowball
into expensive changes. Also, many computer spell-checkers and human
proofreaders don’t know the differences between the styles of various dictionaries. Most readers won’t notice a slight and occasional inconsistency in
word division.
Dividing Personal Names. Avoid dividing personal names whenever possible. If
it is unavoidable, it is better to break a last name than a first name. Always
try to keep a middle initial with the first name, and never separate the initials of the first and middle names; never allow C. / S. Lewis, for instance.
By the same token, do not allow designations such as Jr., Sr., II, III, etc. to
be separated from the name: do not allow Henry / VIII, for instance.
Numbers. Occasionally very large numbers set in numerals need to be broken
over two lines of type. Break large numbers after a comma as long as that
comma does not follow a single digit. Never break a numeral after a decimal
point. Do not use a hyphen to indicate a numeral broken over a line. Simply
drop the rest of the number to the next line.
Webpage Addresses. As described in the entry “Webpage Addresses (URLs),”
webpage addresses should be broken after slashes whenever possible.
Otherwise, break the address before any other internal punctuation marks,
such as the “dot.” As with numerals, no hyphen should be added to indicate
the break since the hyphen could be mistaken as part of the address. The second element should simply be dropped down to the next line.
Keep Style Sheets. Freelance editors and proofreaders should be familiar with
the publisher’s preferred style of word division. Also, the proofreader, especially the one who reads the first set of typeset proofs, should keep a style
sheet listing any problematic word divisions encountered.
World-English Style
See “Mid-Atlantic Style.”
2:58 PM
Page 412
The abbreviation Xmas (sometimes spelled Exmas) for Christmas should
be avoided in formal writing. It is appropriate only for advertising copy and
is usually considered substandard even there. Oddly enough, the abbreviation has a long and established history in English, dating back to its Old
English form used in the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle of the twelfth century. The
X is actually the Greek letter chi and has been used as a symbol for the name
of Christ (Christos) since the first century.
The archaic ye was originally the second person plural pronoun, and thou
was the second person singular pronoun. Both were used as subjects of sentences, while you and thee were the respective objective cases. In modern
English, all these forms became simply you, which can be singular or plural,
subject or object. While the KJV uses ye almost exclusively as a plural pronoun, as in “Blessed be ye poor” (Luke 6:20), the word eventually came to
be used as a highly formal way of addressing one person, still occasionally
seen in ecclesiastical and devotional writing, though considered excessively
archaic. (See also “Thou and Thee.”)
The word ye as it appears in some pseudo-antiquated names, such as Ye
Olde Carde Shoppe, should not be confused with the ye, the outmoded second person plural. Early printers rendered the Middle English word e,
which means the, as Ye since the thorn character, , representing the th
sound, was not available in their typecases. Any use of ye as an article is now
considered almost wholly jocular.
2:58 PM
Page 413
Year of Publication | 413
Year of Publication
An accurate statement of the year of a book’s first publication is needed
at two points in the publishing process. First, it is needed in the copyright
notice on the copyright page, where it is placed with the copyright symbol
© (or word copyright) and the name of the copyright holder. Second, it is
needed after the book is published and the book is officially registered with
the Library of Congress and the US Copyright Office. (See “Copyright
Holder and Copyright Owner”; “Copyright Notice”; and “Copyright Page.”)
Ends of Years. In both cases, care should be taken, especially at the ends of
years. For instance, a book may be in the publisher’s warehouse in December
but not actually in the stores until January. So which year is used for the publication date? The best rule is to go by the actual in-stock date, that is, the
year the book actually arrived in the publisher’s warehouse.
It generally causes no problem if the date is off by a year one way or the
other in the copyright notice, although the US Copyright Office should be
notified of the correct date when registering the copyright itself. If a wrong
date was given to the Library of Congress when applying for CIP information (for instance, if the book is inadvertently delayed), they should be notified of the change as soon as possible.
2:58 PM
Page 414
When lowercased, the term zealot means a fanatical believer in any cause
(as in a zealot for campaign-contribution reform). When capitalized, it refers
specifically to the religo-political Jewish sect of the first century that opposed
Rome’s military occupation of Palestine.
From the Hebrew word meaning “hill,” Zion is a common biblical name
for Jerusalem, named specifically for the hill on which the City of David was
built. In the context of some Christian devotional literature, it has come to
mean, metaphorically, the people of God themselves. John Bunyan, in his
Pilgrim’s Progress, uses Mount Zion as a synonym for heaven, or the celestial city. Since that time, Zion, or Mount Zion, has been popularly used in
the language of hymns and sermons to mean heaven. A careful writer should
clarify which context is intended: the earthly city of biblical times, the worldwide family of believers, or the heavenly abode of God and the saints.
2:58 PM
Page 415
First, I would like to thank my wife, writer and dancer Shelley TownsendHudson, who helped shape the previous edition of this book.
The original advisory board for this revision of The Christian Writer’s
Manual of Style was Stan Gundry, Mary McNeil, and Jim Ruark, to whom
I am very grateful for all their help and guidance. I would also like to thank
Gina Dorn, Angela Scheff, and Todd Sprague for their careful copyediting;
Dawn Anderson, Becky Danley, Carol Ann Hiemstra and Elizabeth Yoder
for their excellent proofreading. And extra big bows of gratitude go to Jim
Ruark, who tirelessly edited version after version of this manuscript and
serves as a mentor for all the editors at Zondervan; to Beth Shagene for her
masterly interior design and composition; to Holli Leegwater for her elegant
cover design; to Sue Brower and her marketing team for assuring that this
book reaches its readers; and to Todd Sprague, Autumn Miller, Hannah
Notess, and Carol Ganzevoort, who patiently reviewed the final galleys.
Special thanks are also due to Tim Beals for his profound scholarship into
early English Bible translations; Jean Bloom, for checking the pages and keeping this and all Zondervan books on schedule; Amy Boucher-Pye, who not
only assisted with delineating British style but also coined the handy term
mid-Atlantic style; Jody DeNeef, who has labored to adapt this material for
online use; Kristy Manion, for ably organizing the Bible permissions information; Bob Leeman for his knowledge of and advice on postal style; Brian
Phipps for his expertise on Eastern Orthodoxy; Robin Schmitt, who organized the previous CMS (14) updates; Barbara Scott, who reviewed and edited
the information about children’s books; Shari Vanden Berg and Ben Irwin,
who reviewed, corrected, and expanded the Bible-related material; and
Verlyn Verbrugge, for his vast knowledge of Greek, Hebrew, and all matters
biblical and academic.
This revision also springs from the collective wisdom of the following
people: Karen Ball, Randy Bishop, Scott Bolinder, Jeff Bowden, Dirk Buursma,
Greg Clouse, Lyn Cryderman, Britt Denison, Gwen Ellis, Paul Engle, Sara
Fink, Heather Gemmen, Jane Haradine, Mark Hunt, Sue Johnson, Jack
Kuhatschek, Cindy Hays Lambert, Dave Lambert, John Sloan, Lori
VandenBosch, Sandy VanderZicht, Joe Vriend, and the many readers who
wrote to us about their stylistic preferences.
Furthermore, this book was built on the foundation laid by numerous former Zondervan editors, designers, and freelancers who helped to compile
2:58 PM
Page 416
416 | Acknowledgments
the previous editions. We wish to preserve their memory here because they
are this book’s earliest caretakers: Joe Allison, Rachel Boers, Mary Bombara,
Nelle Brinks, Al Bryant, Linda DeVries, Cheryl Forbes, Sue Hall, Paul
Hillman, John Iwema, Tammy Johnson, Doug Johnston, Nia Jones, Julie
Link, Martha Manikas-Foster, Judith Markham, Mary McCormick, Becky
Omdahl, Jan Ortiz, Dallas Richards, Louise Rock, Judy Schafer, Michael
Smith, Gerard Terpstra, Randy Tucker, Ed van der Maas, Ed Viening, and
Bob Wood.
2:58 PM
Page 417
A. Standard References
The Chicago Manual of Style, Fifteenth Edition. Chicago: Univ. of Chicago Press,
Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, Eleventh Edition. Springfield, Mass.:
Merriam-Webster, 2003.
The NIV Study Bible. Grand Rapids, Mich.: Zondervan, 1985.
The SBL Handbook of Style: For Ancient Near Eastern, Biblical, and Early Christian
Studies. Peabody, Mass.: Hendrickson Publishers, 1999.
B. English Usage, Style, and Grammar
Bernstein, Theodore M. Dos, Don’ts & Maybes of English Usage. New York:
Random House, 1999.
Follett, Wilson. Modern American Usage: A Guide. Revised by Erik Wensberg. New
York: Hill & Wang, 1998.
Gordon, Karen Elizabeth. The Deluxe Transitive Vampire: The Ultimate Handbook
of Grammar for the Innocent, the Eager, and the Doomed. New York: Pantheon,
——. The New Well-Tempered Sentence: A Punctuation Handbook for the Innocent,
the Eager, and the Doomed. New Haven: Ticknor & Fields, 1993.
Paxson, William C. The New American Guide to Punctuation. New York: Signet,
Shaw, Harry. Errors in English and Ways to Correct Them. New York: HarperCollins, 1993.
——. Punctuate It Right! New York: HarperCollins, 1994.
Shertzer, Margaret. The Elements of Grammar. New York: Macmillan, 1996.
Strunk, William, Jr., and E. B. White. The Elements of Style. 3d ed. New York:
Macmillan, 1979.
C. Writing, Revising, and Editing
1. General
Appelbaum, Judith. How to Get Happily Published: A Complete and Candid Guide.
5th ed. New York: HarperCollins, 1998.
Atchity, Kenneth. A Writer’s Time: A Guide to the Creative Process, from Vision
through Revision. New York: W. W. Norton, 1995.
Barzun, Jacques. On Writing, Editing and Publishing. 2d ed. Chicago: Univ. of
Chicago Press, 1986.
2:58 PM
Page 418
418 | Bibliography
——. Simple and Direct: A Rhetoric for Writers. Rev. ed. Chicago: Univ. of Chicago,
Boswell, John. The Awful Truth about Publishing: Why They Always Reject Your
Manuscript . . . and What You Can Do about It. New York: Mainstreet, 1997.
Cheney, Theodore A. Rees. Getting the Words Right: How to Revise, Edit and
Rewrite. Cincinnati: Writer’s Digest, 1990.
Flesch, Rudolf. The Art of Readable Writing. New York: Macmillan, 1977.
Plotnik, Arthur. The Elements of Editing: A Modern Guide for Editors and
Journalists. New York: Macmillan, 1997.
Zinsser, William. On Writing Well: The Classic Guide to Writing Nonfiction. 6th
rev. ed. New York: HarperCollins, 1998.
2. Religious
Aycock, Don M., and Leonard George Goss. The Christian Writer’s Book: A
Practical Guide to Writing. North Brunswick, N.J.: Bridge-Logos, 1996.
Gentz, William H. The Religious Writer’s Marketplace: The Definitive Sourcebook.
Rev. ed. Philadelphia: Running Press, 1985.
Stuart, Sally E. Christian Writer’s Market Guide. Wheaton, Ill.: Shaw, updated
D. Special Aspects of Writing and Editing
1. Copyediting
Einsohn, Amy. The Copyeditor’s Handbook: A Guide for Book Publishing and
Corporate Communications. Berkeley, Calif.: Univ. of California Press, 2000.
Judd, Karen. Copyediting: A Practical Guide. 2d ed. Menlo Park, Calif.: Crisp
Publications, 1992.
2. Proofreading
Anderson, Laura Killen. Handbook for Proofreading. Lincolnwood, Ill.: VGM
Career Horizons, 1990.
Graham, Leland. Building Proofreading Skills. Nashville, Tenn.: Incentive, 1999.
Hall, Max. An Embarrassment of Misprints: Comical and Disastrous Typos of the
Centuries. Golden, Colo.: Fulcrum, 1995.
May, Debra Hart. Proofreading Plain and Simple. Franklin Lakes, N.J.: Career Press,
Smith, Debra A., and Helen R Sutton. Powerful Proofreading Skills: Tips,
Techniques, and Tactics. Menlo Park, Calif.: Crisp, 1994.
Smith, Peggy. Letter Perfect: A Guide to Practical Proofreading. Alexandria, Va.:
Editorial Experts, 1995.
——. Mark My Words: Instruction and Practice in Proofreading. 3d ed. Alexandria,
Va.: Editorial Experts, 1997.
Sullivan, K. D. Go Ahead, Proof It! Hauppauge, N.Y.: Barron’s, 1996.
2:58 PM
Page 419
Bibliography | 419
3. Indexing
Bonura, Larry S. The Art of Indexing. New York: John Wiley and Sons, 1994.
Mulvany, Nancy C. Indexing Books. Chicago: Univ. of Chicago Press, 1994.
Wellisch, Hans H. Indexing from A to Z. Bronx, N.Y.: H. W. Wilson, 1996.
4. Copyright
Fishman, Stephen. Copyright Handbook: How to Protect and Use Written Work. 4th
ed. Berkeley: Nolo Press, 1997.
Wilson, Lee. The Copyright Guide: A Friendly Handbook for Protecting and
Profiting from Copyrights. New York: Allworth Press, 1996.
5. British Style
Butcher, Judith. Copy-Editing: The Cambridge Handbook for Editors, Authors and
Publishers. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992.
Ritter, R. M. The Oxford Style Manual. Oxford and New York: Oxford University
Press, 2003.
Schur, Norman W., rev. by Eugene Ehrlich. British English A to Zed. New York:
Checkmark Books, 2001.
2:58 PM
Page 420
abbreviations, 11–36, 359
academic degrees, 13–14
acronyms, 12, 39–41
and apostrophe, 51
Bible books and related material, 19–
24, 360
British style, 100
and capital letters, 11
civil and military titles, 13
computer- and Internet-related terms,
corporations and organizations, 14
country, 11
elements of books, 17
eras, 17
geographical names, 14–16
initialisms, 12
Latin, 18
mid-Atlantic style, 269
months and days, 17
numbers and measurements, 16
and periods, 11–12, 293
personal initials, 12–13
proofreading, 328–31
publishing terms, 26
references and periodicals, 27–29
religious organizations and parachurch
ministries, 29–32
religious terms, 32–36
saint, 368
theological references and periodicals,
times of day, 17
when to spell out, 17
academic degrees, 13–14
accents, 37–38. See also foreign letters and
acknowledgments, 38–39
acronyms, 12, 39–41. See also
AD (anno Domini), 41, 55, 135, 389. See
also BC; CE
ad card, 53
addresses, 41–42
of publishers, 42–43
street, 284
webpage, 407–8
adjectives, 112, 114, 152
compound, 229–30
derived from personal names, 299–300
Advent, 142
adverbial phrases, 152
adverbs, 106, 370
affection, terms of, 112
afterword, 43. See also conclusion; epilogue
age, 283
agnostic, 43
AH (anno Hegirae), 135, 389
allegorical characters, 110
alleluia, 219–20, 236
“all rights reserved” notice, 43–44, 161,
alms, 44
alphabet, 44
alphabetization, 44–45
a.m., 17, 45–46, 388
amen, 46, 236
Americanizing British publications, 46–48,
344. See also British style; Mid-Atlantic
ampersand, 48, 151
anachronism, 48–49, 52
Anglican Church, 49, 196, 220, 226, 368.
See also Church of England
annotations, 189, 302. See also notes
Antichrist, 49–50
Apocrypha, 19, 21, 78
apostate, 50, 221–22
apostles, twelve, 50
2:58 PM
Page 421
Index | 421
Apostle’s Creed, 134
apostolic fathers, 50
apostrophe, 51, 306
appendix, 51–52, 365
appositives, 151
appropriateness, 316
Aquinas, Thomas, 314, 372
arabic numbers, 358
archaism, 52–53
associations of churches, 171–75
asterism, 386
atheist, 43
aureole, 53
author card (ad card), 53
author signature, 53
authors, 134, 206
ebooks, 185–86
manuscript preparation, 260–65
obtaining permissions, 56–73, 294–98
responsibilities for proofs, 332–33
Authorized Version, Bible, 101. See also
back matter, 43, 54, 185
back slash, 375
banns of marriage, 54
baptismal name, 146
BC (before Christ), 55, 135, 389. See also
BCE (before common era), 135, 389. See
also AD; CE
believer, 55
Bible, 223. See also King James Version;
New American Standard Bible; New
International Version; Today’s New
International Version
abbreviations, 19–24
books of, 19–24, 100, 115, 358, 360,
and British style, 100, 101
canon, 79–81
and canticles, 104
and capitalization, 115, 116
concordance, 157
infamous versions, 87–88
and italics, 245–46
large-print, 256–57
online versions, 55–56
permissions, 56–73
presentation page, 309
quotations from, 57, 193, 265, 350–52
red-letter editions, 209, 357
references, 292, 358–61, 371
small cap forms of Lord and God, 258–
and time, 225–26. See also watches of
the night
versions and translations, 77–88
versus Scripture, 369
Bible Belt, 56
biblical eras, 117
biblical hours, 225–26
biblical terms, 113–32
bibliographic notes, 274
bibliography, 17, 149, 375. See also
black (as racial designation), 107, 198
block quotations, 345, 348, 349, 360. See
also quotations
blueprints, 327
body matter, 89, 185, 317
boldface, 89–90, 400. See also italics
Book of Revelation, 362
book production, 137–40, 149–50, 310.
See also manuscript preparation
terms, 90–93
children’s, 137–40, 291
Christian, 208–9
citing, 376
devotional, 163, 176–77, 209
electronic, 183–86
large print, 254–57
print-on-demand, 184, 310, 395
books, elements of
abbreviations, 17
acknowledgments, 38–39
afterword, 43
“all rights reserved” notice, 43–44, 406
author card, 53
back matter, 54, 185
2:58 PM
Page 422
422 | Index
books, elements of (cont.)
body matter, 89, 185, 317
capitalization, 112
cataloging in publication data, 105,
133–34, 161, 362, 413
chapter opening pages, 135–37
country of printing notice, 162
cover copy, 162–63
dedication, 140, 169
epilogue, 196, 317
foreword and preface, 39, 206, 240, 317
front matter, 210
introduction, 39, 240
typography, 397–404
books of the Bible, 19–24, 100, 115, 358,
360, 365
born again, 94
braces, 94. See also parentheses
brackets, 94–95, 339, 350. See also
brand names, 95–97, 112. See also
British style, 46–48, 49, 97–102, 344. See
also Americanizing British publications;
Mid-Atlantic style
bullets, 103
calendar, 390
calligraphy, 401
call versus calling, 104
canonical hours, 226
canticles, 104
capitalization, 104–12
and abbreviations, 11
Biblical and religious terms, 113–32
and church, 146
and colons, 148
and computer-related words, 155
crucifixion and resurrection, 163
deity pronoun, 169–70
in dictionaries, 178
and gospel, 216
small caps, 373–74
captions, 132, 293
card page, 53. See also author card
cardinal virtues, 210
carol, 133
cataloging in publication data (CIP), 105,
133–34, 161, 238, 362, 413
catholic, 134–35
Catholicism, 186. See also Roman Catholic
CE (common era), 135, 389. See also AD
(anno Domini); BC
celebrant, 135
censorship, 315
certificate of limited edition, 257–58
change of title, 391–92
endnotes, 275. See also notes
headings, 220
numbering, 136, 364–65
opening pages, 135–37
widows and orphans, 409
charismatic, 137
Chicago Manual of Style, Fifteenth Edition
(CMS), 9, 10, 11, 116, 194, 320, 323,
and citing sources, 279, 376
and hyphenation, 229
and roman numerals, 365
children’s books, 137–40, 291
Chinese transliteration, 140–41
Christendom, 141
Christian, 55
books, 208–9
name, 146
Christian life
and foreign phrases, 202–5
word pronunciation guide, 317–18
Christianity, 141, 211, 221, 224
holidays, feasts and liturgical year, 141–
symbols, 380–83
Christmas, 141, 412
chronology, error of, 48–49, 52
church, 118–19, 146
denominations and associations, 171–
church fathers, 200
2:58 PM
Page 423
Index | 423
Church of England, 49, 367. See also
Anglican Church
CIP (cataloging in publication data), 105,
133–34, 161, 238, 362, 413
citations. See sources; notes
civil and military titles, 13
clauses, 151, 152, 370, 386
clerical titles, 146–48
cliché, religious, 247–48
CMS. See Chicago Manual of Style,
Fifteenth Edition
collective possessives, 308
colloquial expressions, 158, 221, 344, 362
colon, 148–49. See also semicolon
and capitalization, 106
and em dash, 166
in Scripture references, 359
colophon, 149–50, 199
columns, 365, 404
comma, 150–54
in addresses, 42
and em dash, 167
with numerals, 284
and parentheses, 291
serial, 48, 99, 151
common knowledge, 303
Communion, 118, 367
company names, 14, 39, 48, 108
compound adjectives, 229–30
compound sentence, 150, 370
compound words, 106, 216, 229, 308
computer-related terms, 24–25, 40, 155–
56. See also acronyms
computers, 189–90, 318–19
conclusion, 157. See also afterword;
concordance, 157, 209
confession, 158
conjunctions, coordinating, 150
content editing, 188
contents page, 384
contractions, 51, 158
coordinating conjunctions, 150
copy editing, 188, 379
copying, 299, 406
copyright, 293, 383
date, 361, 362
holder, 159, 160, 161, 298, 358, 413
laws, 406
and legal deposit, 257
notice, 105, 159–61
owner, 159, 296
and permissions, 295–96
and quotations, 347
copyright page, 43, 133, 139, 161–62, 179,
and Bible references, 358
and colophon, 149–50
and imprimatur, 232
and limited edition, 257
numbers, 356
and permissions notice, 298
and permission-to-copy notice, 299
and quoting Bible, 350
and revisions, 362
and title changes, 391
and warning notice, 406
year of publication, 413
corporations and organizations, 14
country of printing notice, 162
cover copy, 162–63
credit lines, 298, 358
cross references, 90
crucifixion, the, 163
crusade, 164
cult, 221
cultural equivalents, 47–48
curly brackets, 94. See also parentheses
dash, 165–68, 99, 269, 291
dates, 101, 168, 269, 375, 388–91. See
also hours, Biblical; time
days of week, 17
dead copy, 319, 325
deadly sins, 372. See also cardinal virtues
deckled edge, 290
declarative sentence, 293
dedication, 140, 169
deities, 113
deity pronoun, 169–70
2:58 PM
Page 424
424 | Index
denominations, 118, 171–75. See also
specific denominations, i.e. Catholicism
dependent clauses, 152
devotional books, 163, 176–77, 209
devout, 369
diacritics, 37–38. See also foreign letters
and characters
dialogue, 166, 283, 290–91
dictionaries, 177–78, 320, 324, 410
direct discourse, 344
disability designations, 178–79
disclaimer, 179–81, 214
discourse, 243, 344, 405
ditto, 181
divine office, 226
division, word, 138, 229, 231, 410–11
doctor of the church, 181. See also fathers
of the church
dot, 181
double standards, 213
doxology, 182
dream sequences, 243
end stop, 342
endnotes, 275. See also notes
English, 266. See also Mid-Atlantic style
epigraph, 194–95, 392
epilogue, 43, 196, 317. See also conclusion
Epiphany, 142
Episcopal, 196. See also Anglican Church
epithets, 110, 113, 121, 308, 315
eras, 17, 109, 117, 120, 388
errata, 196–97
ethnic designations, 197–98
Eucharist, 118, 135, 266
euphemisms, 316
evangelical, 94, 198
eves, 391
exclamation point, 199, 292, 339, 342–43
explicit, 199. See also colophon
fair use, 57, 296–97, 347, 348, 352
family relationship, 111
fathers of the church, 200. See also doctor
of the church
Christian, 141–45
Easter, 141, 143–44
Jewish, 249
Eastern Orthodox, 183, 220, 226. See also
Federal Trade Commission (FTC), 391–92
First Estate, 200
and Julian calendar, 390
first name, 146
and sacraments, 367
flags, 322
and saints, 368
flashbacks, 243
e prefix, 155, 186
Flesch-Kincaid Formula, 356
ebook, 183–86, 372
flyleaf, 310
e-church, 186
folio, 137, 201, 217, 356, 366
ecumenical, 186–87
and proofreading, 322
edges, 289–90
and Roman numerals, 364
editing, 187–91. See also proofreading
and signature breaks, 372–73
eleventh hour, 225
font changes, 95, 322, 339, 340
elision, 280–81
footnotes, 101, 270, 275, 276. See also
ellipsis, 99, 153, 191–94, 350
embedded questions, 343
fore edge, 289
em dash, 165–67, 99
foreign letters and characters, 201–2. See
Emmanuel, 232
also diacritics
emotion, 236, 285
foreign phrases, 202–5
emphasis, 89, 199, 242, 344, 353, 374, 400 foreign words, 37, 107, 242–43
foreword, 39, 206, 240
en dash, 99, 167–68, 281, 308, 360
2:58 PM
Page 425
Index | 425
formatting, 260–65
forms of address, religious, 206–8
forward slash, 374–75
four cardinal virtues, 210. See also seven
deadly sins
Fourth Estate, 200
free speech, 315
fringe speech, 314, 315
frontispiece, 210
front matter, 210, 232, 317, 364, 370
ebook, 184–85
introduction, 240
and quoting Bible, 350
full stop. See periods
fundamentalist, 56, 211
galleys, 333
gender-accurate language, 212–15, 265
generic names, 96–97
geographical names, 11, 14–16, 37, 111,
gerunds, 51, 308
gift books, 309
given name, 13, 146
compounds, 216
in red-letter Bibles, 357
small cap form, 258–59, 351
gospel, 216–17
governmental bodies, 109
Grail, Holy, 223–24
graphics, 217, 264, 293. See also
Greek transliterations, 218, 265
Gregorian calendar, 390
groups, religious, 119
Gunning “FOG” Readability Test, 355
gutter, 404
hagiography, 219
half-title page, 219, 310, 370. See also
second half-title page
hallelujah, 219–20
halo, 53
handicap, 178
Harry Potter books, 47, 97–98, 138
hate speech, 315
headings, 220
heaven, 120, 223
Hebrew transliterations, 218, 265
hell, 120
helpmeet, 221
heresy, 221–22. See also apostate
historic documents, 118
historical events, 110
Christian, 141–45
Jewish, 249
Holy Bible, 223. See also Bible; Scripture
Holy City, 223
Holy Grail, 223–24
Holy Land, 224
Holy Writ, 224. See also Bible
honorable, 362
hosanna, 224, 236
hours, Biblical, 225–26
hymn meters, 227–29
hymns, 38, 349, 388
hyphen, 165, 229–31. See also dash
and British style, 99
and computer-related words, 155, 186
and prefixes, 308
and spelling out words in text, 378
ibid., 280
idioms, 282
illustrations, 132, 293. See also graphics
Immanuel, 232
imperative sentence, 293
imposition, 372
imprimatur, 232, 364
inclusive language, 212–15
inclusive numbers, 280–81
indefinite articles, 40–41
indentation, 227, 404
2:58 PM
Page 426
426 | Index
independent clause, 370
indexes, 177, 232–35
alphabetization, 44–45
indirect questions, 342
information, organizing, 286–88
initialisms, 12, 39–41. See also
initials, 11, 12–13, 293
Inklings, 235–36
inside half-title page, 370
interjections, 236–38
internal questions, 343
international English, 266
international standard book number
(ISBN), 238–39, 362
addresses, 375, 407–8
companies, 108
online Bible, 55–56
and permissions, 294, 295
and plagiarism, 301–2
quoting, 352
resources, 239–40
terms, 24–25, 155–56
InterVarsity, 240
introduction, 39, 240
irony, 344
ISBN (International Standard Book
Number), 238–39, 362
Islam, 224
religious terminology, 240–42
Israel, 224
italics, 89, 242–47, 306, 339, 374, 400
jargon, religious, 247–48
Jerusalem, 223, 409
Jesu, 248
Jesus, 248
in red-letter Bibles, 357
Jewish holidays and feasts, 249
Jewish religious terminology, 249–50
John, 49, 94, 360
joint possession, 307
Jr., 154
Judaism, 224
Jude, 360
Julian calendar, 390
justification, 138, 403
King James Version, 49, 57, 78, 99, 246,
323, 365, 368, 369. See also Bible
versus Authorized Version, 253
contributions to English, 251–53
quoting, 351
laity, 257
gender-accurate, 212–15
offensive, 314–16
large print books, 254–57
Latin, 18, 243, 248
law, 116
layperson, 257
leading, 355, 402–3
legal deposit, 257
legends, 293
legibility, 353
Lent, 142–43
letters (of alphabet), 44
Library of Congress, 257, 413
Cataloging in Publication Data, 105,
133–34, 161, 238, 362, 413
ligatures, 352, 401
limited edition, certificate of, 257–58
line length, 354–55
line width, 401
lists, 103, 286–88, 291, 293
Literary Marketplace, The, 294
liturgical interjections, 236
liturgical year, Christian, 141–45
live copy, 319, 325
Lord (small cap form), 258–59, 351
Lord’s Supper, 367
lowercase, 400
and deity pronoun, 169–70
letters and abbreviations, 11
and plurals, 305
2:58 PM
Page 427
Index | 427
magi, 260
Mahomet, 273
man (as generic term), 212–13
manuscript preparation, 260–65
margins, 138, 404
marriage, banns of, 54
Mass (Roman Catholic), 135, 266
measurements, 16, 283
megachurch, 266
Merriam-Webster’s Biographical
Dictionary, 12, 324
Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary,
Eleventh Edition, 9, 12, 37, 111, 177,
229, 242–43, 323, 410
Merriam-Webster’s Dictionary of the Law,
Merriam-Webster’s Geographical
Dictionary, 324
Merriam-Webster’s Medical Dictionary,
meters, hymn, 227–29
mid-Atlantic style, 46, 266–70, 344. See
also Americanizing British publications;
British style
midnight, 45–46, 390–91
minced oaths, 316
misspelled names, common, 270–71. See
also problem words
misspelled words, common, 272–73. See
also problem words
Mohammed, 273
money, 283
months and days, 17, 389
Mount Zion, 414
movements, religious, 119, 120
Muhammad, 273. See also Islam, religious
Muslims, 135, 164, 240, 273. See also
Islam, religious terminology
mysteries, 367
Biblical, 307
Christian, 146
given, 13, 146
proper, 107, 114, 306, 376
of state residents, 378–79
narrative notes, 274
National Association for Visually
Handicapped (NAVH), 254–57
neutral pronouns, 214–15
New American Standard Bible, 57, 61,
246, 351. See also Bible
new edition, 161, 362
new impression, 361
New International Version (NIV), 49, 63,
73–76, 274, 323. See also Bible
new printing, 361
New Testament, 20–24, 50, 362, 407
nicknames, 112, 346
nimbus, 53
NIV. See New International Version
no, 345
nobility, 108
noon, 45–46, 391
normal, 179
notes, 264, 274–81
nouns, singular, 306
numbered lists, 291
numbering, 101, 201, 264, 269
numbers, 401
arabic, 358
chapter, 136
dividing, 411
inclusive, 168, 280–81
and measurements, 16
ordinal, 282
spelling out, 282–84
superscript, 275
telephone, 385
numerals, 42, 51, 153, 284, 401
versus spelling out numbers, 282–84
baptismal, 146
Obadiah, 360
offensive language, 314–16
oh, 153, 285
2:58 PM
Page 428
428 | Index
OK, 285
Old Testament, 20–24, 219, 385, 407
-ology, 286
opening pages, 135–37
ordinal numbers, 282
organizations, 14, 39, 108
orphans (typography), 409
Orthodox, 183. See also Eastern Orthodox
outlines, 286–88, 365
pages, 356–57. See also copyright page
half-title, 219, 310
length, 372–73
numbers, 201, 264
second half-title page, 370
and signature breaks, 372–73
papacy, 223, 306
paper, 289–90
parables, 116
parachurch ministries, 29–32, 290
paragraphs, 138, 290–91, 409
paraphrasing, 303, 358
parentheses, 94, 291–92, 339
parenthetical thought, 95, 165–66, 291
particles, 107
Pentecost, 137, 141, 145
percentages, 282
performance symbol, 293, 383
periodicals, 27–29, 278, 376
periods, 293–94
in abbreviations, 11–12
and acronyms and initialisms, 40
and British style, 100
and dots, 181
and ellipsis, 191–94
and parentheses, 292
permissions, 294–98, 358
Bible, 56–73
permission-to-copy notice, 299, 406
personal initials, 11, 12–13
personal names
and accents, 37
adjectives derived from, 299–300
commonly misspelled, 270–71
dividing, 411
and Saint, 369
personal titles, 108
personification, 110
Philemon, 360
phone numbers, 385
phonetic spelling, 374
photocopying, 299
piety, 301
pilgrims, 301
p-in-the-circle symbol, 293
pinyin, 140–41
pious, 301
place names, 121
places of worship, 119
plagiarism, 301–3. See also permissions;
plays, 38, 365
plurals, 51, 304–5, 306
p.m., 17, 45–46, 388
poetry, 38, 305–6, 349, 375
politically incorrect language, 212–13, 315
political organizations, 109
pontiff, 306
pope, 306
possessives, 51, 306–8
Powers-Sumner-Kearl Formula, 356
preface, 38–39, 43, 206, 240, 317
prefixes, 99, 230–31, 308–9
prepositions, 309
presentation page, 309–10
printing paper, 289–90
printing terms, 396–97
print-on-demand books, 184, 310, 395
problem words, 311–13. See also brand
names; computer-related terms; genderaccurate language; Internet, terms;
misspelled names, common; misspelled
words, common
prodigal, 314
prodigious, 314
profanity, 314–16
prologue, 317. See also foreword;
pronunciation guide, 317–18
2:58 PM
Page 429
Index | 429
deity, 113, 169–70
neutral, 214–15
proofreading, 318–27. See also editing
abbreviations and terms, 328–31
symbols, 331–32
proofs, 332–33
proper names, 107, 114, 306, 376
prophecy, 333
Protestant, 135, 198, 220, 334, 367, 368.
See also Roman Catholic Church;
Eastern Orthodox
psalms, 334–35, 336, 370
pseudepigrapha, 19, 21–24
publication date, 364, 413
public domain, 295–96, 352
publishers, 42–43, 277, 336–39
publishing terms, 26, 232, 396–97
punctuation, 47, 269, 339–41
recto pages, 54, 356–57, 366
recycled-paper statement, 357
red-letter Bible, 209, 357
reference materials, 90
references, 27–29, 149
Bible, 358–61
registration, 357
relative clause, 386
religionist, 361
religions, world, 392–94
religiose, 361
religious (as noun), 361
religious groups, 119
religious observances, 118
religious organizations, 29–32, 290
religious publishers, 336–39
religious terms, 32–36, 113–32
forms of address, 206–8
Jewish, 249–50
religious titles, 114
“reprinted by permission,” 298
reprints, 134, 239, 361–62, 391
queries, 189, 191, 325–26
reproduction, 406
questions, 342, 343, 368
research, 301–2
quotation marks, 199, 292, 339, 342–43,
restrictive clauses, 151
resurrection, the, 163
and British style, 99–100
and italics, 244–45
Revelation, Book of, 362
mid-Atlantic style, 268
reverend, 13, 362. See also forms of
and punctuation, 339
address, religious
quotations, 191, 297, 347–49. See also fair reverse type, 401
use; permissions; plagiarism
revisions, 189, 239, 361–62
from Bible, 57, 193, 265, 350–52
rights, subsidiary, 380
and brackets, 94–95
rites, 118
and colons, 148, 149
Roman Catholic Church, 186
and comma, 153
and alleluia, 220
and em dash, 165
and canonical hours, 226
from Internet, 352
Mass, 135, 266
and plagiarism, 302
pontiff, 306
publishing, 232
sacraments, 118, 367
saints, 368
racial designations, 107, 197–98
numerals, 201, 363–65
Random House College Dictionary, 410
readability, 353–55, 401. See also
route numbers, 284
Rowling, J. K., 47, 97
reading-level, 355–56
2:58 PM
Page 430
430 | Index
rubrication, 357
Rule of Five, 303
run-in quotations, 348, 361
running feet, 366
running head, 137, 201, 322, 366
sacraments, 118, 367
sacred objects, 117
said references, 349, 367–68
saint, 219, 368–69
sanctimonious, 368, 369
sans-serif typeface, 353, 400
Satan, 114
Savior, 98–99, 369
sayings, 153
SBL Handbook of Style: For Ancient Near
Eastern, Biblical, and Early Christian
Studies, 19
scatology, 315
schism, 221–22. See also apostate
Scripture. See also Bible
indexes, 234–35, 369
versus Bible, 369
seasons, 389
second half-title page, 370. See also halftitle page
selah, 370
self-determination, 197
semicolon, 148, 150, 359, 370–71
beginning with number, 283
compound, 150, 370
declarative, 293
imperative, 293
spacing between, 378
serial comma, 48, 99, 151. See also comma
seven deadly sins, 372. See also four
cardinal virtues
sexism, 212, 214
sic, 18, 243, 347
signature, author, 53
signature breaks, 372–73
silverprints, 324, 327
sins, seven deadly, 372
slang, 344
slash, 374–75
small caps, 17, 45, 258–59, 373–74, 400
small letters inside circles, 383
social insensitivity, 315. See also disability
designations; ethnic designations
software, 279, 377
solidus, 374–75
Song of Songs, 104
songs, 133, 227, 349
sound recordings, 293
source notes, 274, 298
sources, 375–78. See also notes
spacing, 12, 220, 354, 378
Spanish language, 199, 343
spell-checker, 190, 320, 321
Americanizing British publications, 47
British, 98–99
in dictionaries, 178
interjections, 236–38
mid-Atlantic style, 268
words in text, 44, 378
spine type, 401
spread, 183
Sr., 154
states, U.S.
abbreviations, 15, 281
resident names, 378–79
street address, 284
style sheet, 320, 322, 379–80, 411
subheadings, 220
subsidiary rights, 380
substantive editing, 188
substantive notes, 274
subtitles, 149
suffixes, 230–31
sunrise, 391
superscript number, 275
surprise, 199, 285
syllables, accented, 38
Christian, 380–83
circle, 383
copyright, 43, 159, 383
2:58 PM
Page 431
Index | 431
performance, 293, 383
proofreading, 331–32
trademark, 96, 383
typographic, 396–97
table of contents, 384
taboo words, 314–16
Taiwan, 140
Tanak, 41
telephone numbers, 385
Ten Commandments, 385–86
terms, religious, 121–32
terms of affection, 112
text breaks, 386
texts, world religions, 392–94
that (versus which), 386–87
thee, 52, 387–88, 412
theological references and periodicals, 27–
thou, 52, 387–88, 412
thought, systems of, 110
thoughts, 95, 243, 291, 405
three-dot ellipsis, 99, 191, 192
three-em dash, 168
three kings/wise men, 260
time, 149, 375, 388–91
and Bible, 225–26
British style, 100
times of day, 17
tironian sign, 48, 151
title page, 210, 392
titles, book
and capitalization, 105
changes, 391–92
and colons, 149
and italics, 244–45
prepositions in, 309
quotation marks, 346
of world religions texts, 392–94
titles, clerical, 146–48
titles, personal, 108
titles, religious, 114
Today’s New International Version
(TNIV), 69–70, 73–76, 225. See also
too, 154
trademarks, 95–97, 239, 383. See also
brand names
transitional adverbs, 370
translations, 392
Bible, 77–88
Chinese, 140–41
Greek and Hebrew, 218, 265
trim size, 177, 395
Trinity, 113, 117, 169
Trinity Sunday, 141, 145
twelve apostles, 50
two-em dash, 168
type size, 39, 132, 137, 354, 398–400
type weight, 400
typeface, 137, 353–54. See also italics;
typography, 135, 162
appendix, 52
elements of, 397–404
small caps, 374
symbols, 396–97
widows and orphans, 409
typos, 190, 318
United States
Postal Service, 41
resident names, 378–79
unjustified text, 403
unspoken discourse, 243, 405
uppercase type, 400
URLs, 181, 407–8, 411
venery, 315
verbs, 154
versions, Bible, 77–88
verso pages, 54, 356–57, 366
versus, 18
virtues, cardinal, 210
2:58 PM
Page 432
432 | Index
vocabulary, 47, 98, 101–2, 267–68
vocalization, 323
vocational terms, 213
vocative O, 285
vulgar interjections, 315
Wade-Giles, 140–41
Wailing Wall, 409
warning notice, 299, 406. See also “all
rights reserved” notice
watches of the night, 406–7
addresses, 181, 407–8, 411
citing, 377
websites, 239
disclaimers, 180
names, 408–9
referencing, 279
Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary. See
Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate
Dictionary, Eleventh Edition
Webster’s Third New International
Dictionary (Webster’s Unabridged), 177
Western Wall, 409
which (versus that), 386–87
white (as racial designation), 107, 198
widows and orphans, 409. See also words,
commonly misspelled, 272–73
division of, 138, 229, 231, 410–11. See
also widows and orphans
problem. See problem words
pronunciation guide, 317–18
spacing, 12, 354, 409
words-per-line count, 401–2
world English, 266. See also British style;
mid-Atlantic style
world religions texts, 392–94
worship, 119
foreign phrases, 202–5
word pronunciation guide, 317–18
Writer’s Market, The, 294
Xmas, 412
ye, 412. See also thou
year of publication, 413
yes, 345
you, 412
zealot, 164, 361, 414
zero, 363
Zion, 414

Similar documents


Report this document